Drilling and Workover Aramco Training 2013_2.pdf

7/25/2019 Drilling and Workover Aramco Training 2013_2.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/drilling-and-workover-aramco-training-20132pdf 1/478

Drilling and Workover

Health, Safety

and

EnvironmentalRequirements Manual



Dril ling and WorkoverHSE Requirements Manual / Overview

ii

1. Purpose

The purpose of this Drilling and Workover (D&WO) Health, Safety and Environmental RequirementsManual (HSERM) is to establish a uniform and comprehensive set of Health, Safety and Environmental(HSE) requirements that are applicable to Contractor and Saudi Aramco owned rigs, assets, facilities, and

operating and support organizations of Saudi Aramco D&WO.

2. The D&WO HSERM

A. Defines the HSE requirements for Contractor and Saudi Aramco owned rigs, assets, facilities, andoperating and support organizations of Saudi Aramco D&WO.

B. Replaces the 2008 D&WO Saudi Aramco Safety Requirements (SASR), all D&WO HSE proceduresand combines all into one centralized HSE Requirements Manual (HSERM).

C. Incorporates audit recommendations from prior audits (LPCR/SAMIR) and recommendations from

D&WO Department Managers.

D. Formatted in accordance with D&WO’s Document Control Procedure (DCP 001 / Current version).

3. D&WO HSE Vision

To elevate D&WO’s HSE performance to the highest professional level through continuously enhancingthe awareness and quality of the workforce and by effectively integrating HSE into the Saudi AramcoCulture. In so doing, we strive to provide the most professional service and support to Saudi AramcoD&WO.

4. D&WO HSE Miss ion

To provide professional HSE support to Saudi Aramco D&WO to protect our employees, assets and theenvironment, in a highly professional and efficient manner using the most qualified workforce andtechnology, in compliance with Saudi Aramco policies, procedures and relevant government laws andregulations.

5. Scope

The D&WO HSERM applies to Contractor and Saudi Aramco owned rigs, assets, facilities, and operating

and support organizations of Saudi Aramco D&WO.

6. The D&WO HSERM is organized into five (5) Sections as follows:

A. Section A: Administrative Requirements.

B. Section B: General Requirements.

C. Section C: Special Operation(s) Requirements.

D. Section D: Offshore Requirements.




iii

E. Section E: Environment and Occupational Health Requirements.

7. How to use this Manual

Managers are responsible for ensuring the requirements of the D&WO HSERM are complied with.

Managers shall:

A. Review, understand and acknowledge the requirements within the D&WO HSERM.

B. Evaluate the current HSE status of your areas of responsibility, in reference to the requirements of theD&WO HSERM.

C. Ensure compliance with the D&WO HSERM.

D. Contact Drilling Operational Excellence & Compliance Division (DOE&CD) for guidance andassistance, as needed.




iv

D&WO Loss Prevention Policy Statement



Table of Contents

Section A

Administrative Requirements

Section BGeneral Requirements

Section C

Special Operation(s) Requirements

Section D

Offshore Requirements

Section E

Environment and Occupational

Health Requirements



Administrative

Requirements

A



Section A / Administrative RequirementsD&WO HSE Requirements Manual

SA-DWO-HSERM-AR-001-R0 / Created: 01/13 / Last Review: 01/13 / Next Review: 01/17Owner: VP-D&WORevision(s) identi fied by a Vertical Bar in the Right Margin Page 1 of 236

SA-DWO-HSERM-AR-001-R0_Section A / Administrative Requirements Date: January 201Document Title: Section A / Admin istrative Requirements

Document Owner: SA-VP-D&WOReview Interval: 48 Months

Section

A

Administrative

Requirements









Table of Contents

Contents Page

A-1 Defini tions, Abbreviations and Acronyms (DA&A) 4 A-2 Reference Material (RM) 12 A-3 General Safety Rules (GSR) 16 A-4 Rig Operators Respons ibil it ies for Loss prevention (ROR) 21 A-5 Competency and Train ing (CT) 25 A-6 Emergency Dril ls (ED) 39 A-7 Drops Program (DP) 65 A-8 Short Service Employee Program (SSEP) 69 A-9 Requirements for SIMOPS, Land Rigs (SIMOPS) 73

A-10 Journey Management (JM) 77 A-11 Working with Service Companies (WWSC) 95 A-12 Safe Work Author ization Procedure (SWAP) 97 A-13 Monthly HSE Performance Monitor ing (MHSEMR) 109 A-14 Job Safety Analysis (JSA) 116 A-15 Safety Inspection and Reporting Procedure (SI&RP) 122 A-16 Management of Change (MOC) 138 A-17 Risk Management Manual (RMM) 147 A-18 Waiver of High Risk HSE Requi rements (WHRHSER) 164 A-19 Lock-out/Tag-Out (LOTO) 170 A-20 Third Par ty Equipment Ins tal lat ion (TPEI) 174

A-21 Confined Space (CS) 177 A-22 Inc ident Reporting and Analys is (IR&A) 196 A-23 Spudding In and Rig/Location Release (SI&RLR) 225 A-24 Pre-Tour Checkl is t/Dril ler Handover (PTC/DH) 232

Revision Summary 236





A-1

Definitions, Abbreviationsand

Acronyms





A-1 / Definitions, Abbreviations and Acronyms (DA&A)

A-1a / DefinitionsCompany The term, "Company", as used throughout this document, shall be

understood to mean Saudi Aramco.

Competent Person "One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in thesurroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, ordangerous to employees, and who has written author ization to take promptcorrective measures to eliminate them" . By way of training and/orexperience, a competent person is knowledgeable of applicable standards, iscapable of identifying workplace hazards relating to the specific operation,and has the author ity to cor rect them. Some standards add additionalspecific requirements which must be met by the competent person.

Contractor A person or an organization provid ing services to SA at SA

facilities/worksites in accordance with agreed specifications, terms andcondi tions. This does not include Supplemental Manpower (SMP) work ingdirectly for SA.

Corrective Action Action to eliminate the cause of a detected nonconformity or otherundesirable situation.

Note: Corrective Action is taken to prevent recurrence whereas preventiveaction is taken to prevent occurrence.

D&WO HSEPerformance Report

A measurement tool that reports actual progress toward meet ing the goalsas defined in the HSE Plan. Along wi th other KPI’s the report identifiessafety performance compl iance and deficiencies.

D&WO Performance

Management System(PMS)

An on-line dashboard that provides management wi th a quick-look capabil it y

at benchmarking KPI’s including HSE.

Drilling InformationHighway (DIH)

An intranet based website where HSE related informat ion and other mater ialsare updated and made accessible to authorized SA and Contractoremployees.

Drilling Safety andEnvironmentalLeadership initiative(DSELI)

A monthly meeting wi th SA D&WO management , dr il ling cont ractormanagement, and service company management to review DSELI member’sHSE performance, sharing lessons learned from major incidents, recognitionof HSE milestones and development/implementation o f DSELI HSEinitiatives.

E&OH Management Part of the overall D&WO management that facilitates the management of the

environmental aspects and occupational health risks associated with thebusiness and activities/operations of the D&WO. These inclusive ofdeveloping, planning, implementing, reviewing, maintaining and continuallyimproving the practices, procedures/Standards/G.I. Manuals/Codes,processes, controls, plans, programs and resources before, while and aftercommencing activities/operations.

E&OH Performance Measurable results of the E&OH implementation, related to an organization’scontrol of its environmental aspects and occupational hazard and risk basedon policies, targets and other E&OH performance requirements.





A-1 / DA&A / A-1a / Defini tions / Cont inued

Environment Surroundings in which the organization operates, including air, water, land,natural resources, flora, fauna, humans and their interrelation.

Environmental Aspect Element of an organization’s activities, or products or services that caninteract with the environment (A significant environmental aspect is onewhich can have a significant environmental impact).

Environmental Impact Any change to the environment, whether adverse or beneficial, wholly orpartially resulting from an organization’s activities, products or services.

Environmental Release Any release of pollutant that could cause an adverse environmental impact.

Emergency ResponsePlan (ERP)

A site speci fic response and management p lan to be acti vated in the event ofa major incident at a rig location.

Fire Combustion of any material (Ref. G.I.1787.000 – Section 2.1).

Global Drilling SafetyLeadership Initiative for

GCC

A forum and conference where all GCC operat ing companies MEET WITHDrilling Contractors and share HSE performance, lessons learned and HSE

initiatives. Hazard Source, situation, or act with a potential for harm in terms of human injury or

ill health/poisoning and environment, or combination of these.

HSE Plan Written administ rative level plan that defines the HSE performancerequirements to be achieved and how they are measured.

HSE Scorecard A measurement tool that provides a means of identifying and QuantifyingKPI’s as identif ied in the SA D&WO HSERM and D&WO annual HSE Plan.

Incident An undesired event which could have (near miss) or did result in harm topeople to property or to the environment or loss to process.

Interested Party Person or group, inside or outside the workplace, concerned with or affectedby the E&OH performance of an organization.

Leak or a Spill Any known or unknown source release of oil, regardless of the size orpotential impact, into the waters of the SA operating area.

Occupational ILLHealth

Identifiable, adverse physical or mental condition arising f rom and/or madeworse by a work activity and/or work-related situation.

OccupationalPoisoning andOccupational Disease

Means a poisoning or a disease arising out of o r in connection with work.

Offshore Means, for the purpose of this poli cy, the waters of the Arabian Gulf and RedSea up to and including beaches to the spring h igh tide mark.

Oil Any liquid hydrocarbon substance.

Organization Company, corporation, firm, enterprise, authority or insti tution, or part or

combination thereof, whether incorporated or not, public or private, that hasits own functions and administration.

Pre-Tour Meeting A meeting at crew changeover to review the current operation, next 12 hoursoperation, identif y safety and operational hazards and other concerns.






Prevention of PollutionUse of processes, practices, techniques, materials, products, services orenergy to avoid, reduce or control (separately or in combination) thecreation, emission or discharge of any type of po llutant or waste, in order toreduce adverse environmental impacts.

It includes waste reduction or elimination process, product or servicechanges, efficient as of resources material and energy substitution , reuse,recovery, recycling , reclamation and treatment.

Preventive action Action to eliminate the cause of a potential nonconformity or otherundesirable potential situation.

Quarterly SafetyInspection (QSI)

A report on the find ings of a scheduled r ig si te inspection that reviewscompl iance with D&WO policies and requirements for safety procedures,equipment, documentation, and competency (SA Owned Rigs only).

Quarterly RigEvaluation (QRE)

A rig per formance evaluat ion conducted by SA Liaisonman/Foreman toreport the level of compl iance and performance of the Drill ing Contractor.

Rig Operator In this document, the term "Rig Operator" means the agency or companyresponsible for operating any drilling or workover rig, and/or providing anydril ling or workover rig services on behalf of the Saudi Arabian Oil Company(SA).

RiskCombination of the likelihood of an occurrence of a hazardous event orexposure(s) and the severity of injury or il l health that can be caused by theevent or exposure.

Safe Operations

Committee Meeting(SOC)

A quarterl y meet ing to review previous quarter safety stati st ics (incidents,

near misses, etc.), lessons learned, operational issues that impact safetyand employee awards and recognitions.

Safety Campaign An organized and comprehensive publ ic ity effor t to raise awareness andknowledge of D&WO employees, Contractors, and Service Companiesabout a specific HSE topic .

Safety MomentOpening remarks or information that is presented in a meeting to encouragean attitude and awareness toward safety on and of f the job.

SA E&OHRequirements Engineering Standards, Engineering Procedures, G.I. Manuals, Codes,

Minimum Medical Standard Requirements (MMSR), applicable Saudi Arabialegal & other requirements and applicable international standards.






Crane and HeavyEquipment Incident

Event where unintentional contact is made by equipment, or its load, withpersonnel, structures, or other equipment causing injury o r property damage

(Ref. G.I.0007.026 – Section 2). Event Without Injury An incident that has not required the attendance or attention of the Rig

Medic or any other medical professional.

Event With Injury An incident that requires the attendance and treatment of the Rig Medic orany other medical professional.

Management of Change A process to systematical ly evaluate, authorize, implement, and documentchanges to existing assets to ensure that safeguards are in place toeliminate the possibility of introducing hazards because of changes.





A-1 / DA&A / Cont inued

A-1b / Abbreviations and Acronyms

ALARP As low as reasonably practicable.

ANSI American National Standards Inst itute.

API American Petroleum Insti tute.

AVAILS Availabi li ty.

BOP Blowout Preventer.

BPV Back Pressure Valve.

CEPI Comprehensive Environmental Performance Inspection.

CFC Chlorofluorocarbons.

DCC Disaster Control Center.

D&WO Drilling and Workover.

D&WOSD Drilling & Workover Services Department.

DMHSER Dril ling Management Health, Safety and Environment Review.

DOE&CD Drilling Operational Excellence & Compliance Division.

DTD Drilling Technical Department.

EDD Exploration Drilling Department.

E&OH Environmental & Occupational Health.

E&OHU Environmental & Occupational Health Unit.

EP Emergency Preparedness.

EPD Environmental Protection Department.

ESD Emergency Shut Down.

FAI First Aid Injury Case - Minor injury (not illness) requiring one-time treatment and follow-up observation (Ref. G.I.0006.005 – Section 3).

FAT On-Job Fatality - An On-Job inju ry or occupational illness that results in Fatality (Ref.G.I.0006.005 – Section 3).

GDDD Gas Development Drill ing Department.

GDD&WOD Gas Development Dril ling & Workover Department.

GHG Greenhouse Gases.

G.I. General Instruct ion.

GM General Manager.

GOSRD Global Oil Spill Response Director.

GS General Supervisor.HACCP Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point.

HSE Health , Safety and Environment.

HSERM Health , Safety and Environmental Requirements Manual.

IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors.

IO Internal Order.

ITD Industrial Training Department.

KPI Key Performance Indicator.





A-1 / DA&A / A-1b / Abbreviations and Acronyms / Cont inued

LTI Lost Time Injury/Illness Case - An on-job injury or occupational illness thatinvolves one or more days away from work beyond the day the injury or

ill ness occurred (Ref. G.I.0006.005 – Section 3).MDD Manifa Drill ing Department.

MOC Management of Change.

MODU Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit.

MODWR Marine Operations Division-Western Region.

MOT Ministry of Transportation.

MMSR Minimum Medical Standard Requirements.

MSAOOD Marine SA Offshore Operations Division.

MTC Medical Treatment Injury/Illness Case - An on-job injury or occupationalillness that is more serious than on-job first aid injury (FAI) or occupationalillness requiring medical treatment (Ref. G.I.0006.005 – Section 3).

MVA Motor Vehicle Accident - An MVA is any occur rence involving motor vehiclethat results in death, injur y, or property damage.

NAODD Northern Area Oil Drilling Department.

NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers.

NAPE Northern Area Producing Engineering.

NEC (American) National Electri cal Code.

NFPA (American) National Fire Protection Association.

NM Near Miss - Event which did not result in injury or loss, but which had thepotential for injury or loss if the conditions had been slightly different (Ref.G.I.0006.004 – Sect ion 2.0).

ODD Offshore Drilling Department.ODI Off- Job Disabling Injury Case - An injury suffered by an employee that doesnot arise out of and in the course of employment and which results in deathor day(s) away from work (Ref. ANSI Z16.3-1997 – Recording and Measur ingemployee Off-The-Job Injury experience and G.I.6.005 – Section 3).

OPITO Offshore Petroleum Industry Training Organization.

OSC Oil Spill Committee.

OSR Oil Spill Report.

OSRT Oil Spill Response Team.

PME Presidency of Meteorology and Environment.

POD Power Operations Department.

PRD Publ ic Relations Department.QSI Quarterly Safety Inspection (SA Owned Rigs only).

RDI Restricted Duty Injury/Illness Case - An on-job inju ry or occupational illnessthat results in restricted work or job transfer (Ref. G.I.0006.005 – Section 3).

R&HED Roads and Heavy Equipment Department.

ROSRC Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator.

SAA Saudi Aramco Affairs.

SAES Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards.





A-1 / DA&A / A-1b / Abbreviations and Acronyms / Cont inued

SAG Saudi Arabian Government.

SAMSO Saudi Aramco Medical Services Organization.

SAODD Southern Area Oil Drilling Department.

SAR Saudi Aramco Rigs.

SATD Southern Area Transportation Division.

SAWCM Saudi Aramco Well Control Manual.

SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier.

SEAMS Saudi Aramco Material System Specification.

SEAPA Sea Ports Author ities.

SEC Saudi Electric Company.

S.M.A.R.T. Specif ic, Measurable, Achievable, Reasonable and Time-Bound.

SME Subject Matter Expert

SMP Supplemental ManpowerSOC Safe Operations Committee.

SSSV Sub Surface Safety Valve.

SWL Safe Working Load (Limit).

TPOD Terminal Pilotage Operations Division.

TRC Total Recordable Injury/Illness Cases - Includes; FATs, LTIs, RDIs and MTCs(Ref. G.I.0006.005 – Section 3).

UKDOT United Kingdom Department of Transportation.

USCG United States Coast Guard.

WAP Well Approval Package.

WOD Workover Department.VP Vice President.

SWIM Safe Work Instruct ion(s) Manual

3-MCI 3 (Three) Month Compliance Inspection





A-2

ReferenceMaterial





A-2 / Reference Material (RM)

In addition to the HSERM, the Rig operator shall have readily available for reference to drill ing orworkover personnel the most recent publ ications as follows:

ANSI NFPA-70 Grounding Separately Derived Alternat ing-CurrentSystems.

ANSI Z41.83 Pro tective Footwear.

ANSI Z88.2 American National Standard Practi ces for Respi ratory Protect ion.

ANSI Z89.1 Pro tective Head ware for Industr ial Workers –Requirements.

API 510 Pressure Vessel Inspection Code.

API BULL 5C2 Performance Propert ies of Casing, Tubing, and Dril l Pipe.

API BULL 5C4 Round Thread Casing Joint Strength With Combined Internal Pressureand Bending.

API BULL 13C Dri ll ing Fluid Processing Equipment. API RP 7G Dri ll Stem Design And Operat ing L imits.

API RP 7H Dri ll ing Machinery

API RP 8B Hoist ing Tool Inspection and Maintenance Procedures.

API RP 9B Appl ication, Care and Use of Wire Rope For Oil Fields.

API RP 49 Recommended Pract ice for Dril li ng and Well Servic ing Operat ionsinvolving Hydrogen Sulphide.

API RP 52 Recommended Land Dri ll ing Operat ing Practices for Protection of theEnvironment.

API RP 54 Recommended Pract ices for Occupational Safety and Health forOil and Gas Drilling and Servicing Operation.

API RP 500 Recommended Pract ice for Classif ication of Locat ion for Electr icalInstallation at Petroleum Facilities.

API SPEC 4A Steel Derr icks.

API SPEC 4E Dri ll ing and Well Servicing Structures.

API SPEC 6A Wellhead Equipment.

API SPEC 7 Rotary Dri ll ing Equipment .

API SPEC 7 B-11C Internal Combustion Reciprocating Engines For Oi l Field Service.

API SPEC 8 Dri ll ing and Production Hoist ing Equipment.

API SPEC 9A Wire Rope.

API SPEC 13A Oil Well Dri ll ing Fluid Materials.

D&WO-SMS D&WO SMS Manual, latest Version

D&WO-WM D&WO Workover Manual, latest VersionD&WO-WCM D&WO Well Control Manual, latest Version

G.I. 2.100 Work Permit System.

G.I. 2.104 Leak and Spill Reporting - Arabian Gulf.

G.I. 2.400 Offshore Oil (Spill ) Contingency Plan.

G.I. 2.401 Inland Oil Spill Contingency Plan.

G.I. 2.702 Moving Drilling Rigs, High Clearance Equipment/Loads or OperatingCranes Under or Near Power-Lines.

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0002_100%20Work%20Permit.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0002_104%20Off-Sh.%20Oil%20Spill%20Rpt.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0002_401%20Inland%20Oil%20Sp.%20Plan.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0002_401%20Inland%20Oil%20Sp.%20Plan.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0002_104%20Off-Sh.%20Oil%20Spill%20Rpt.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0002_100%20Work%20Permit.pdf





A-2 / RM / Cont inued

G.I. 2.714 Environmental Conservation Policy Implementation.

G.I. 2.716 Land Use Permit Procedures.

G.I. 2.718

Contractor Sites Allotment Procedure.G.I. 6.012 Isolation, Lockout and Use of Hold Tags.

G.I. 6.020 Personal Flotation Devices (PFDS) for Work On, Over or Near Water.

G.I. 6.025 Control of Remote Area Travel and Search/Rescue Procedures.

G.I. 7.024 Marine and Offshore Crane, Hoist, and Rigging Operations.

G.I. 7.025 Mobile Heavy Equipment Operator Testing and Certification.

G.I. 7.026 Cranes and Heavy Equipment Accident Reporting Procedures.

G.I. 7.027 Crane Suspended Personnel Platform Operations (Man basket).

G.I. 7.028 Crane Lif t: Types and Procedures.

G.I. 7.029 Inspection Use and Maintenance of Below-the-Hook Li fting Equipmentfor Cranes.

G.I. 7.030 Inspection and Testing Requirements of Elevating/Lifting Equipment.G.I. 7.082 The latest version

G.I. 8.001 Safety Requirements for Scaffold.

G.I. 8.002 Safety Spectacles.

G.I. 8.005 Protective (Safety) Footwear.

G.I. 150.000 Industrial Hygiene and Occupational Health Aspects of Loss PreventionPolicy.

G.I. 150.004 Safety Requirements for Scaffolds.

G.I. 150.100 Hazardous Materials Communication Program (HAZCOM).

G.I. 151.006 Implementing the SA Sanitary Code.

G.I. 355.001 The latest version




G.I. 355.014-01 Implementing the SA Sanitary Code.

G.I. 355.015-01 The latest vers ion

G.I. 430.000 Implementing the SA Hazardous Waste Code.


G.I. 475.001 Blast ing Near Existing facil iti es.

G.I. 1321.015 Requirements for a Medical Evacuation .

G.I. 1780.001 Atmosphere-Supplying Respirators.

G.I. 1781.001 Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Fire Protection Equipment.

G.I. 1850.001 Onshore Contingency Plan.

G.I. 1851.001 Offshore Contingency Plan.

G.I. 1852.001 Rig site Flare Gun and Communication Equipment.

G.I. 1853.001 Isolation Barriers for Wells During D&WO Operations (With and Without Rig)Rig and Equipment Operations and Maintenance Manuals for the Drilling RigManufacturers and Other Major Equipment Items.

IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors, Accident Prevention.

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0006_012%20Isolation%20Lockout%20Tagout.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0006_025%20Remote%20Travel.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_024%20Marine%20crane%20ops.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_025%20Equip%20op%20certs.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_026%20Crane%20Acc%20Rpt..pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_027%20Man%20basket.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_029%20Rigging%20Req..pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_030%20Insp%20for%20lifting%20equip.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1321_015%20Requirements%20for%20Medical%20Evacuation.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1780_001%20Breathing%20Resp.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1781_001%20Insp,%20test%20fire%20equip.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1850_001%20Onshore%20contingency.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1851_001%20Offshore%20contingency.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1852_001%20Flare%20gun%20&%20comm..pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1853_001%20Isolation%20barriers.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1853_001%20Isolation%20barriers.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1852_001%20Flare%20gun%20&%20comm..pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1851_001%20Offshore%20contingency.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1850_001%20Onshore%20contingency.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1781_001%20Insp,%20test%20fire%20equip.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1780_001%20Breathing%20Resp.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/1321_015%20Requirements%20for%20Medical%20Evacuation.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_030%20Insp%20for%20lifting%20equip.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_029%20Rigging%20Req..pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_027%20Man%20basket.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_026%20Crane%20Acc%20Rpt..pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_025%20Equip%20op%20certs.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0007_024%20Marine%20crane%20ops.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0006_025%20Remote%20Travel.pdf

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/G.I's/0006_012%20Isolation%20Lockout%20Tagout.pdf





A-2 / RM / Cont inued

IADC Drill ing Manual.

NACE MR0175 Metals for Sulfide Stress Cracking and Stress Corrosion Cracking

Resistance in Sour Oilfield Environments.MARPOL International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. The

latest version.

MODU Code Applicable to the MODU. The latest version.

PVIC Pressure Vessel Inspection Code. Safe Practices in Drilling Operations.

SAES-A-007 The latest version

SAES-A-103 Discharges to the Marine Environment

SAES-A-105 Noise Control

SAES-B-019 Portable, Mobile and Special Fixed Firefighting Equipment.

SAES-B-062 Onshore Well si te Safety

SAES-B-063 Aviat ion Obst ruct ion Marking and Ligh ting

SAES-B-067 Safety Identification and Safety Colors CodingSAES-B-068 Electrical Area Classification

SAES-B-069 Emergency Eyewashes and Showers

SAES-J-505 Combustible Gas and Hydrogen Sulphide in Air Detection Systems

SAES-P-111 Grounding

SAES-W-010 Welding Requirements for Pressure Vessels

12-SAMSS-023 Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Grating and FRP Components

SAES-A-104 Wastewater Treatment, Reuse and Disposal

SOLAS The latest version

SA-CSH Saudi Aramco Crane Safety Handbook, the latest version

SA-CM Saudi Aramco Construct ion Safety Manual, the latest version

SA-D&WO-DM Saudi Aramco D&WO Drilling Manual, the latest revision

SA-LBRTC Saudi Aramco Land Based Remote Travel Control (Supplement to G.I. 6.025),the latest version

SA MIM Saudi Aramco Marine Instruct ion Manual. The latest version

Contract Schedule “D” Contractor’s Safety and Loss Prevention Requirements, the latest version.

SASC The latest version

MARPOL Current Revision

RAUCF/MMSRM Remote Area Urgent Care Facilit ies / Minimum Medical StandardsRequirements Manual. The latest version

Note: Assistance in obtaining copies of SA documents is provided by the Dhahran area Loss Prevention

Division. SA cannot copy or distribute non-SA documents such as ANSI, API or IADC copyrighteddocuments.

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESA103%20Discharge%20to%20the%20Marine%20Environment.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESA105%20Noise%20Control.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB019%20Portable%20Fire%20Fighting%20Equipment.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB062%20Well%20Site%20Safety.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB063%20Aviation%20Obstruction%20Markings.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB067%20Safety%20Colours.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB068%20Electrical%20Area%20Classification.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB069%20Emergency%20Eye-Wash%20&%20Shower%20Stations.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESJ505%20Gas%20Detection%20Systems.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESP111%20Grounding.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESW010%20Welding%20Requirements.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AMS12023%20Plastic%20Grating.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AMS12023%20Plastic%20Grating.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESW010%20Welding%20Requirements.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESP111%20Grounding.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESJ505%20Gas%20Detection%20Systems.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB069%20Emergency%20Eye-Wash%20&%20Shower%20Stations.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB068%20Electrical%20Area%20Classification.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB067%20Safety%20Colours.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB063%20Aviation%20Obstruction%20Markings.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB062%20Well%20Site%20Safety.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESB019%20Portable%20Fire%20Fighting%20Equipment.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESA105%20Noise%20Control.RTF

http://c/Users/haddhk0b/Desktop/SASR/SASR/SAES/AESA103%20Discharge%20to%20the%20Marine%20Environment.RTF





A-3

GeneralSafety Rules





A-3 / General Safety Rules (GSR)

The following rules are to protect you and your fellow workers. Violation of the rules may lead todisc iplinary action. This procedure applies to; Saudi Aramco D&WO, Contractor and Service

Companies.

1. All work related injuries/illness or vehicle collisions, no matter how slight, shall be reported immediately toyour supervisor.

2. All fires, spills and releases, no matter how small, shall be reported immediately to your supervisor.

3. Immediately report any unsafe condition, practice, near miss or incident to your supervisor.

4. Horseplay, practical jokes or fighting, including initiations, are safety violations. Supervisors allowing theseacts as well as the violators are subject to disciplinary action.

5. All personnel (drivers and passengers) shall wear seat belts at all times.

6. Smoking is only allowed in designated smoking areas.

7. Identify risks and hazards associated with tasks before beginning work or if the location or conditionsshould change.

8. A SWAP (SAR Rigs) or PTW (Contractor Rigs) shall be raised before a safety device is removed fromservice and/or defeated, the appropriate supervisor and affected parties shall be notified, the device shallbe tagged and the action documented.

9. The SA Liaisonman shall be kept informed of all ongoing operations. No work may be carried out on SAproperty without the written consent of the SA Liaisonman.

10. The unauthorized removal of isolations or the operation of equipment having a “ Danger Do Not Operate”

tag is prohibited.

11. Before operating any machinery or switch gear, all safe guards, switches and alarms shall be in place andfunctional.

12. All block valves on pressure relief systems in service shall be locked or sealed open.





A-3 / GSR / Cont inued

13. Finger rings and other jewelry along with loose fitting clothing, long hair (head and facial) and other looseaccessories shall not be worn while working on rig locations.

14. Do not apply compressed air, other gases or high pressure wash-down guns to yourselves or others.

15. Climbing up and down ladders requires the use of both hands. Traveling up and down stairs requires theuse of handrails.

16. When descending ladders, the employee must always face the ladder.

17. Running in work areas is prohibited.

18. Use the correct tool for the task, all tools and equipment must be well maintained. Homemade tools areprohibited.

19. Erect barricades/flagging around areas of hazardous work, such as holes in decking and work areas,trenches, road crossings and overhead hazardous work.

20. Climbing or standing on equipment, piping or valves to do work is prohibited. Approved scaffolding, work

platforms, personnel lifts or ladders with full body safety harnesses shall be used.

21. All fire extinguishers and other emergency equipment shall be in good condition, inspected regularly andkept clear of any obstructions. Accidental discharge or use of firefighting equipment must be reported to thesupervisor immediately.

22. All chemical or hazardous material containers shall be properly labeled and stored. Drums shall be storedin secondary containment area.

23. Proper manual lifting techniques must be used at all times. If you think a load is too heavy, ask yoursupervisor for help or employ a mechanical lifting device.

24. Safety eyewear, hard hats, gloves and safety footwear are mandatory. Metallic hard hats are prohibited.

25. Safety goggles and a full-face shield must be worn when chipping, grinding or when performing any jobwhere flying particles pose a potential for eye injury.






26. When handling or mixing chemicals, chemical gloves, goggles, apron and appropriate respirator must beused (reference the MSDS) In addition, when mixing caustic, a full-face shield and goggles are required.

Note: Anytime a face shield is required, goggles shall also be worn.

27. Hearing protection must be worn when entering high noise areas 85dB or higher.

28. The use or possession of illegal drugs, intoxicating beverages or firearms is forbidden on SA locations.

29. All personnel have the authority to Stop Work if you observe; any defective equipment, machinery,hazardous condition or unsafe work practice and immediately report the hazardous condition or work

practice to your supervisor. No further activity shall be conducted until a safe working environment exists.

30. No one should ever work or walk under a suspended load.

31. Full body safety harnesses with properly secured lanyards must be worn when working at heights above 6feet (1.8 meters).

32. Riding the elevators and cathead lines is not permitted.

33. The use of one tong and the rotary to trip pipe is prohibited.

34. All personnel shall attend weekly safety meetings and participation in emergency drills, pre-tour and pre-jobsafety meetings.

35. Anyone taking prescription drugs must report this to the Rig Medic when arriving on the rig.

36. Hair should be neat and cleanly trimmed, no longer than over the collar. Facial hair that might inhibit theseal of a respirator is not permitted.

37. A “ tail rope” must be used when moving pipe, tubing, etc. in from the V-door.

38. All personnel arriving to the rig location must report to the person in charge (PIC) for orientation.






39. Non-approved electrical/electronic devices (e.g. cellular phones, pagers, and instruments) shall not beused in classified areas unless properly permitted.

40. Maintain good housekeeping in your work area at all times.

41. Defini tions, Abbreviations and Acronyms: Refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A.

42. References: Refer to HSERM / A / A-2 / RM.





A-4

Rig OperatorsResponsibilities

for

Loss Prevention





A-4 / Rig Operators Responsibilities for Loss Prevention (ROR)

This procedure applies to Contractor and Service Companies.

1. Throughout all phases of any drilling or workover operation the Rig Operator shall be held accountable forthe prevention of accidental losses, the protection of Company interests and resources, and the avoidanceof any contamination of the environment.

2. The following minimum guidelines are provided to aid the Rig Operator in meeting this responsibility. Assistance in complying with the requirements set forth in these guidelines is available from D&WOManagement, DOE&CD or from the Loss Prevention Department of the Company.

3. The Rig Operator shall establish a written loss prevention program that fulfills all the requirements stated inthis Manual including permit to work system for Rig Operator and all third party rig ups.

4. Any loss prevention program of the Rig Operator shall provide for frequent and regular inspections of therig equipment, materials, and accommodations by competent persons designated by the Rig Operator.This inspection shall be completed on a Quarterly basis and submitted to the Company DrillingSuperintendent with responsibility for the oversight of each rig.

5. The Rig Operator shall provide at each D&WO rig a copy of the reference materials (Refer to HSERM / A / A-2 / RM) necessary for the safe operation of the rig.

6. The Rig Operator is responsible to ensure that all personnel arriving on location register and receive athorough safety and H2S orientation.

7. The Rig Operator shall be thoroughly familiar with the drilling or workover program. He shall inform the rigcrew of any potential adverse conditions (i.e., lost circulation zones, high reservoir pressure, high H2Sconcentrations, etc.) that require special safety precautions, training, equipment, or additional personnel.

8. The Rig Operator shall clearly indicate the "Smoking Permitted" areas around each rig location. All otherareas on the location shall be considered as "No Smoking" areas and shall be marked accordingly.Smoking shall be closely controlled throughout the rig location.

9. The Rig Operator shall take all reasonable safety precautions to prevent oil spills or pollution both onshoreand offshore. If an accidental spill or discharge does occur, every effort shall be made to (a) protect humanlife, including both employees and the public, and (b) minimize the impact on the environment. Should anaccidental spill occur, it shall be reported immediately to the Company representative so that he can takethe necessary steps to contain the spill and implement the applicable reporting requirements of GeneralInstruction (G.I.); G.I. 2.104, G.I. 2.400, or G.I. 2.401.





A-4 / ROR / Cont inued

10. The Rig Operator shall adequately train each of his employees in the recognition and avoidance of unsafeconditions and in all Company loss prevention standards applicable to his work environment. He shall also

adequately train his employees in methods to control or eliminate any hazards or other exposures resultingin injury or illness (hazard recognition program).

11. The Rig Operator shall implement a HAZCOM Program, to ensure that employees, who are required tohandle or use poisons, caustics, acids and other harmful substances, shall be adequately trained regardingtheir safe handling and use. The Rig Operator's supervisors shall discuss the potential hazards, personalhygiene, and necessary personal protective equipment prior to their employees handling any harmfulmaterials. The Rig Operator shall maintain water stations for washing chemicals spills and Material SafetyData Sheets (MSDS) for all potentially hazardous chemicals the Rig Operator orders onto the rig.

Note: SA shall supply MSDS’s for materials SA orders.

12. The Rig Operator shall allow only those personnel qualified by training and/or experience to operateequipment and machinery. The Rig Operator shall also ensure that any personnel requiring operator'scertificates have them, or copies thereof, in their possession and have completed any training which maybe required by the laws of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia or by the Company. Each rig shall maintain a rigspecific training matrix which shall be up-dated and submitted to the DOE&CD monthly.

13. Rig Operator’s providing offshore rigs shall ensure that their rigs are kept in compliance with all applicablemaritime/MODU standards of the country in which the rig is registered as well as any applicable laws andregulations of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia or the Company.

14. A Rig Operator providing offshore rigs shall ensure that all required certifications are current and that re-certification inspections are completed by an approved certification authority prior to the expiration of theexisting certificate.

15. On all offshore rigs, a copy of the Barge Marine Operations Manual shall be kept readily available in thecontrol room for consultation and use. The manual shall include a complete set of operating instructions,control systems diagrams, and stability characteristics.

16. Any special or unusual towing characteristics of an offshore rig shall be included in the operatinginstructions and communicated to the towing vessel operators before towing operations begin.

17. A Rig Operator providing offshore rigs shall ensure that all navigation and transit lights are operable andused as required by International Rules and Regulations for Aids to Navigation.

18. Should a conflict arise between a Rig Operator’s safety requirement and a Company requirement, the mostrestrictive requirement shall apply.





A-4 / ROR / Cont inued


20. References:

A. HSERM / A / A-2 / RM

B. G.I. 2.104 - Leak and Spill Report ing - Arabian Gul f.

C. G.I. 2.400 - Offshore Oil (Spill) Contingency Plan.

D. G.I. 2.401- Inland Oil Spill Contingency Plan.





A-5

Competencyand

Training





A-5 / Competency and Training (C&T)

SA personnel and SA Supplemental Manpower (SMP) shall meet the minimum requirements as specified inthe D&WO Training Matrix (the D&WO Training Matrix can be accessed through the DIH and HRT&CDD

web sites), current version.

Note: Reference; D&WO SMS Element No.4 (Competency and Training).

The following are the minimum acceptable standards of training for Contractors , for each job position at therig site. Individual contractors may require more stringent training/qualifications (Refer to HSERM / A / A-5 /C&T / Appendix No.1 / D&WO “ Contractor” Training Matrix).

Note: Contractor definition - A person or an organization providing services to SA at SA facilities/worksites inaccordance with agreed specifications, terms and conditions. This does not include SMP’s working directly forSA.

1. Management of Major Emergencies (MOME)

MOME training program provides practical hands-on experience for managing unanticipated events.Personnel who are in charge shall undergo MOME training.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): OIM.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 5 years

2. Marine License

Training required by a regulatory body, training required to obtain and maintain a marine license or trainingrequired by the vessel’s flag state. See Flag requirements for guidance as to where the training is to becompleted.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): OIM and Barge Engineer.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 5 years

3. Lifeboat Coxswain

Training required by a regulatory body (SOLAS), training required to obtain and maintain a marine license

or training required by the vessel’s flag state. See Flag requirements for guidance as to where the trainingis to be completed.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): Two (2) Coxswains per Lifeboat.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 5 years





A-5 / C&T / Continued

4. GMDSS Training

Training required by a regulatory body, training required to obtain and maintain a marine license or trainingrequired by the vessel’s flag state. See Flag requirements for guidance as to where the training is to becompleted.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): Radio Operator.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 5 years

5. Stability

Training required by a regulatory body, training required to obtain and maintain a marine license or training

required by the vessel’s flag state. See Flag requirements for guidance as to where the training is to becompleted.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): Barge Engineer, OIM (if BE or Rig Mover OIM while Floating).Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 5 years

6. HLO, Helicopter Landing Officer

This training can be completed at any OPITO approved school or an Aramco Aviation approved school.Certificates of competency shall be maintained at the rig location.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): there shall be one (1) certified competent HLO aboard at all times.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: No expiration.

7. Helideck Crew

This training is to be completed at an OPITO approved school or an Aramco Aviation approved school.Competency must be verified through experience and qualification. Certificates of competency shall bemaintained at the rig location.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): there shall be four (4) certified competent helideck crew aboard at altimes.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: No expiration.






8. HUET, Helicopter Underwater Escape Training

This training can be completed through the SA School in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (KSA) or through anOPITO approved school or a SA approved school.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel on-board.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 3 years

9. Davit Launched Life-Raft Training

This training shall be completed at the rig site; this training shall be Rig specific covering the specificequipment at the rig location.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel on-board.Training Provider: In-House.Valid for: No expiration.

10. SA Fork Lift Operator Test

The “ SA/Contractor Request for Heavy Equipment Operator Certification Test” application form (SA9647) shall be submitted to ITD for each heavy equipment operator being tested.In addition to the form, the heavy equipment operator applicant shall provide copies of:

A. SA USER sponsoring letter (for contractors only).

B. SA ID (if required).

C. Saudi Arabian Government (SAG) Public Driver’s License or SAG Heavy Equipment Operator License

(if required) with specific equipment stamp.

D. SA 9663 - SA / Contractor’s Medical Examination for Heavy Equipment Operators “Physician’s

Examination Form” – Completed, signed, and stamped.

E. Two (2) recent photographs for each certification application.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All Forklift Operators.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 3 years.

Note: Expat Forklift Operators aboard a MODU holding a valid home country certificate shall be exemptfrom the above requirement.






11. SA Crane Operators Test

Note: Expat MODU crane operators are exempt, G.I.7.024.

The “ SA/Contractor Request for Heavy Equipment Operator Certifi cation Test” application form (SA9647) shall be submitted to ITD for each heavy equipment operator being tested. In addition to the form,the heavy equipment operator applicant shall provide copies of:

A. SA USER sponsoring letter (for contractors only).

B. SA ID (if required).

C. Saudi Arabian Government (SAG) Public Driver’s License or SAG heavy Equipment Operator License(if required) with specific equipment stamp.

D. Two (2) recent photographs for each certification application.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All Crane Operators.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 3 years.

Note: Expat Crane Operators aboard a MODU holding a valid home country certificate shall be exemptfrom the above requirement.

12. Crane Operators Medical Examination SA 9663

SA/Contractor’s Medical Examination for Heavy Equipment Operators “ Physician’s Examination Form” – completed, signed, and stamped.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel requiring a SA License.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 3 years.

13. Gas Tester

Gas testing is required in all locations where injury to personnel or damage to property could occur due tothe presence of combustible gases, toxic gases, or oxygen enriched/deficient atmospheres. An adequatenumber of competent personnel must be maintained at each rig location, it is recommended that the rigmaintain at least 2 competent persons per tour. Competency shall be demonstrated through; experience,theoretical and practical examination. Certificates of competency shall be maintained at the rig location.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): Two (2) persons per tour.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: 2 years.

Note: A current list of all competent Gas Testers shall be maintained at the PTW issuing center






14. Confined Space Entry Inspection

A physical inspection is required in all locations where injury to personnel could occur due to the nature ofconfined space work as well as considering the presence of combustible gases, toxic gases, or oxygenenriched/deficient atmospheres, the physical condition of the work area must be considered, particularattention must be paid to rescue procedures in given confined space work areas. An adequate number ofcompetent personnel trained in confined space entry inspection (this training shall include gas testing) mustbe maintained at each rig location, it is recommended that the rig maintain at least 2 competent personsper tour. Competency shall be demonstrated through; experience, theoretical and practical examination.Certificates of competency shall be maintained at the rig location.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): Two (2) persons per tour.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: 3 years.

Note: A current list of all competent Confined Space Entry Inspectors shall be maintained at the PTWissuing center.

15. Emergency Response

Onshore Senior personnel shall be trained to adequately respond in an emergency, this training shall followboth the contractor emergency response procedures and SA emergency response procedures. Thistraining shall be documented.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): Two (2) Drilling Contractor PIC on day and Drilling Contractor PIC

nights.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 5 years.

16. Fire Figh ting Team Leader

This training shall be completed at an external OPITO approved school or an Aramco approved school.Certificates of competency shall be maintained at the rig location.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): Fire Team leaders as identified on the Station Bill. Two (2) personsper tour.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 5 years

17. Well Control

Well control training shall be completed at an IADC approved school. Certificates of competency shall bemaintained at the rig location.






Persons to be trained (Minimum): As per SA D&WO Well Control Manual (SAWCM).Training Provider: Third Party.

Valid for: 2 years.

18. ABS Welder

Each MODU welder shall be tested by an ABS approved examiner. ABS log book shall be maintained atthe rig location.

Each land rig welder shall be deemed competent by a 3rd party accreditation Society; all certifications shallbe current and valid.

Valid for: 5 years.

19. First Aid CPR

This training shall be administered by an approved competent instructor at an external school or at the riglocation, each trainee shall demonstrate competency through practical and theoretical examination.Certificates of competency shall be maintained at the rig location.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All rig personnel.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: 2 years.

20. Fire Team

This training should be conducted at an OPITO approved external school. Each member of a fire teamshall be able to demonstrate competency in basic firefighting techniques and the use of first aid firefightingappliances. Competency shall be demonstrated through; experience, theoretical and practical examination.Certificates of competency shall be maintained at the rig location.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All Fire Team members as identified on the Station Bill.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: No expiration.

21. Hazcom Training

This program provides hazardous materials information and guidance on how to handle chemicals safely tominimize incidents and reduce risks to people, production, equipment and the environment. Certificates ofcompetency shall be maintained at the rig location.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All rig personnel.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: No expiration.






22. Spil l Prevention Training

This training shall include; prevention and containment of chemical spills. All personnel must have a basicunderstanding of prevention, containment and the environmental impact, health and safety and legislativeimpact of chemical spills. This training shall be documented.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All rig personnel, this training can be combined with HAZCOM trainingTraining Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: No expiration.

23. Respiratory Protection Training

The Rig Operator shall ensure that all respiratory protection equipment, needed by or reasonably

anticipated to be needed by his employees, is provided. Those employees required to use this equipmentmust be trained in its effective use. This training shall include the following:

A. The need for respirator protection.

B. An explanation of why a particular type of respirator has been selected.

C. An explanation of the operation, capabilities and limitations of the respirator selected.

D. Fitting of face pieces.

E. Donning (putting on) and doffing (taking off) of respirators.

F. Regulations concerning respirator use.

G. Instructions in emergency procedures.

H. Maintenance, inspection, and storage of respirators.

I. Sealing and functioning of the face piece

Note: Wearing and use of emergency SCBA shall be included in the H2S Training.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel at the rig location who will be required to use respiratoryequipment in the normal course of their duties. This training shall be documented.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: 2 Years.

24. Confined Space Training

All entrants into a confined space must be made aware of:

A. The strict requirement for a SWAP or PTW prior to any entry or hot work.






B. The hazards of a confined space:

1) Oxygen Deficiency

2) Flammable Gas

3) Toxic Vapors

C. The strict requirement for an emergency observer.

D. The necessity to wear a full body harness.

E. The importance of following the requirements as specified in HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP and the CSEprocedure.

F. The strict requirement for the preparation and review of a JSA.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel whom in the course of their normal duties will beexpected to enter a confined space.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: One time only.

25. Lock-Out /Tag-Out (Refer to HSERM / A / A-19 / LOTO)

The purpose of this training is to protect personnel from the potential releases of stored energy or the

startup of machinery or equipment that may cause injury. This specifically includes any maintenanceactivity where electrical, mechanical, steam, hydraulic, pneumatic or other energy source is present. Additional hazards may include heated, flammable, toxic, corrosive or chemical material. Employeesrequired to perform Lock-Out/Tag-Out procedures shall receive training in these procedures beforeperforming the procedures. This training shall be documented.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): Employees required to perform Lock-Out/Tag-Out as part of theirnormal duties. Example; Electricians and Mechanics.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: One time only.

26. Safe Work Authorization Procedure (SWAP) for SAR Rigs and Permit to Work for Contractor Rigs

As part of each Rig Operator’s Loss Prevention Program, a work permit system shall be established basedon G.I. 2.100. (Refer to HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP). The system is intended to be applied to those jobswhich represent a potential hazard to operations, personnel, or equipment. Contractors may use existinginternal forms developed as part of their loss prevention programs. Employees required to work under theSWAP or PTW system procedures, or whose jobs may be affected by the SWAP or PTW systemprocedures, shall receive training in these procedures. This training shall be documented.






Persons to be trained (Minimum): Employees required to work under the SWAP or PTW systemprocedures, or whose jobs may be affected by the SWAP or PTW system procedures, shall receive training

in these procedures to an appropriate level. This training shall be documented.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: One time only.

27. Hydrogen Sulph ide (H2S)

The Rig Operator shall adequately train all his personnel in the basic fundamentals of Hydrogen Sulphide(H2S) safety. This training must include and all personnel on the rig must be able to demonstrate anunderstanding of the following:

A. Characteristics of H2S and its toxicity.

B. Detection and warning systems peculiar to the location.

C. Emergency procedures consisting of:

1) Designation of safe briefing areas.

2) Wearing and use of emergency breathing equipment.

3) Evacuation procedures.

4) Rescue procedures.

5) First aid for victims.

D. Instructions in the inspection, maintenance, and use of assigned respiratory protection equipment.

E. This training MUST include drills in all these procedures so all personnel on the location can quicklyand effectively follow each of these instructions when there is an actual, life-threatening emergency.

F. All basic H2S training shall include the actual donning and breathing from each different type ofbreathing apparatus in use on that particular rig. Each person must be able to don and breathe from theSCBA within 45 seconds.

G. A training card shall be issued to each person completing the basic H2S training. This card shall remainvalid for two years, following which the person must retake the basic H2S training.

H. All personnel must be able to identify the H2S alarms.

I. All personnel must be able to identify the wind direction.

J. All personnel must be able to evacuate to the up-wind safe briefing area (land rigs).






K. All personnel must be able to muster to the safe briefing area or muster station (offshore) and enter into the lifeboat wearing both SCBA and personal floatation device (PFD).

L. In addition to the basic skills listed above, all personnel must be able to competently perform the tasksassigned to them in the rig specific H2S emergency plan.

M. All drilling rig crews must be able to perform Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR).

N. The SA Liaison-man is responsible to verify that H2S training requirements are met. This shall be doneby observing regular H2S drills and testing to verify competence in breathing apparatus use.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel on location.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: 2 Years.

28. Asbestos Awareness

On all rigs containing known, non-friable or friable ACM, it is the responsibility of the PIC to ensure atleast one person per hitch is trained in Asbestos Maintenance and is onboard at all times where asbestosis known to be present. It is the responsibility of the PIC to ensure everyone assigned to the rig receives

Asbestos Awareness training. A competent person at each rig site shall provide said training. Competencyshall be demonstrated through; experience, theoretical and practical examination. Certificates ofcompetency shall be maintained at the rig location. It is the responsibility of the PIC to ensure everyonewho visits the rig is made aware of the presence of ACM as a part of the rig orientation process. Visitors tothe rig whose job has the potential of disturbing ACM shall be required to take the Asbestos Awareness

training or show evidence of prior asbestos awareness training.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel on location where asbestos is known to be present plusone person per hitch trained in Asbestos Maintenance.Training Provider: In-House.Valid for: One time only.

29. Hazard Recognition Program

The Rig Operator shall adequately train each of his employees in the recognition and avoidance of unsafeconditions and in all Company loss prevention standards applicable to his work environment. He shall alsoadequately train his employees in methods to control or eliminate any hazards or other exposures resultingin injury or illness (hazard recognition program). Behavioral Based Safety programs such as “FOCUS” arean acceptable alternative to a hazard recognition program such as “STOP” . This training shall bedocumented.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel on location.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: One time only.






30. Air Hoist Operator Training

Air hoists are powerful pieces of equipment that if miss used can lead to serious incidents. Only qualifiedcompetent personnel shall operate air hoists. Competency shall be demonstrated through; experience,theoretical and practical examination. This training shall be documented.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel who in the course of their normal duties would beexpected to operate an Air Hoist.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: One time only.Example: all drill crew members

31. Fall Protection Training

Fall protection refers to the use of lifeline, harnesses, guardrails, anchors, lanyards and safety netting. Oneor more of these systems may be required when working at an elevation. Workers shall be trained andcompetent in the use of the “ Fall Protection Plan” and the inspection and use of Fall Arrest and/or FallRestraint equipment prior to using it. Training shall reflect “ Industry Best Practices” , with curriculumcontent that meets or exceeds current international training models. This training shall be documented.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel who would be expected to work at height as part of theirduties; deck crew, drill crew, maintenance crew and marine crew.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: 2 Years.

32. Rigging and Lifting

Rigging and lifting involves the use of equipment that if misused can lead to serious incidents. Onlyqualified competent personnel shall rig loads or signal cranes and forklifts. Competency shall bedemonstrated through; experience, theoretical and practical examination. This training shall bedocumented.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel who will be expected to prepare equipment or personneto be lifted by a powered or manual hoist.Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: One time only.

Note: Reference amendments to G.I.7.024, Rigger Aramco, MODU exemptions for AB’s.

33. Manual Handling

Many injuries are documented annually as a direct result of poor manual handling techniques. Trainingmust include the use of good kinetic lifting techniques. This training shall be documented.






Persons to be trained (Minimum): All rig crew who as part of their normal duties would be expected tomanually handle loads in excess of 11kg.

Training Provider: Third Party or In-House.Valid for: 2 Years.

34. Rig Orientation

The Rig Operator is responsible to ensure that all personnel arriving on location; register and receive athorough safety and H2S orientation. This training shall be documented.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel on location.Training Provider: In-House.Valid for: Annual.

35. Scaffolding Safety

Scaffolds shall only be erected and dismantled by qualified personnel, taking into account stresses on thescaffold, main supports, ties etc., and all personnel must be made aware of SA and contractor proceduresrelating to the erection and dismantling of scaffolding. This training shall be documented.

Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel who supervise, erect and/or dismantle scaffolding andwork platforms.Training Provider: Third Party.Valid for: 2 Years.








Appendix No.1

This matrix is intended as guidance only; the shaded cells indicate suggested crafts to train only. Drilling con tractors can

substit ute personnel they deem suitably qualified or competent





A-6

Emergency Drills





A-6 / Emergency Dr ills (ED)

In order to maintain a state of readiness, all D&WO rigs (Saudi Aramco and Contractor) must conduct

emergency drills on a regular defined basis. These drills provide training and familiarization to all personnel onlocation.

1. How to record and activate the dril ling alert message:

A. Dial 862-4181, enter PIN 4181 # to update message

B. Press 2 (two) to record firs t message:

C. Press 1 to play message

D. Press 2 to record message

E. Press 3 to exit

F. Act ivate the Drilli ng Alert System, dial 862-4112, and enter PIN 4154

Emergency Numbers

Securi ty: 110 Ambulance: 110 and 997Fire: 110 or 998

Outside Aramco:

Central Area (03) 872-0110

Southern Area (03) 572-0110

Northern Area (03) 673-0110

Central Region (01) 285-0110

Western Region (02) 427-0110

Rumors Control (03) 872-4488(03) 872-4499

Emergency Contacts :

Dhahran (03) 872-3113(03) 876-3333

Abqaiq (03) 572-3113(03) 572-3333

Shedgum (03) 577-1221South Ghawar (03) 576-2900

Udhal iyah (03) 577-8212

Ras Tanura (03) 673-3333

Riyadh (01) 285-3113(01) 285-3333

Jeddah (02) 427-3113(02) 427-3333





A-6 / ED / Cont inued

2. Offshore

A. All Personnel on location must participate in drills.

B. Drills shall, as far as practicable, be conducted as if there were an actual emergency.

C. Abandon Ship Drill

Each Abandon Ship drill shall include:

1) Summoning of crew to muster stations with the alarm followed by drill announcement on the publicaddress or other communication system and ensuring that they are made aware of the order toabandon ship.

2) Reporting to stations and preparing for the duties described in the station bill.

3) Checking that crew are suitably dressed.

4) Checking that lifejackets are correctly donned.

5) Lowering of at least one lifeboat after any necessary preparation for launching.

6) Different lifeboats shall, as far as practicable, be lowered in compliance with this requirement atsuccessive drills.

7) Each lifeboat shall be launched and maneuvered in the water at least once every three months

during an abandon ship drill.

8) Lowering into the water, rather than launching of a lifeboat arranged for free-fall launching, isacceptable where free-fall launching is impracticable provided the lifeboat is free-fall launched andmaneuvered in the water at least once every six months. However, in cases where it isimpracticable, the OIM may extend this period to 12 months provided that arrangements are madefor simulated launching which shall take place at intervals of not more than six months.

9) Starting and operating the lifeboat engine;

10) Operation of davits used for launching life rafts;

11) A mock search and rescue of passengers trapped in their staterooms;

12) Each offshore rig shall conduct an abandon ship drill within 24 hours of a crew change, and at leastonce per month. The SA Liaisonman or OIM will decide if more frequent abandon ship drills arerequired to ensure adequate response.






13) Abandon ship Drills must include everyone aboard the rig, with the possible exception of only thosecrew members absolutely essential to maintain a safe watch over the ongoing operation.

14) Abandon ship drills may be combined with fire and/or H2S drills.

15) The maximum acceptable response time for abandon ship drills must take into account thepossibility that evacuation may have to proceed in a hazardous H2S environment. Therefore,everyone aboard the rig must be able to muster to their boat stations and enter their boats withenough time left to lower the boats and sail to a safe upwind area before their SCBA’s run out of air.With a standard 30-minute SCBA, everyone must be aboard their assigned boat within 12 minutesof the alarm first sounding (this is not an instruction to board-the-boat).

16) Fully occupied lifeboats shall not be lowered into the water as part of the abandon ship drill. As of1st July 2006 SOLAS Chapter III Regulation 19 no longer requires that lifeboat be launched with

any crew aboard during abandon ship drill. Alternate methods of manning the lifeboats, once in thewater, should be developed for drill purposes.

17) Abandon Ship dri ll procedure must inc lude the fol lowing:

a. Develop use procedures that allow launching unmanned Lifeboat.

b. Command center manned by senior rig management.

b. Immediate and repeated PA announcement “ This is a Drill - This is a Drill” .

c. Two trained and competent lifeboat men assigned to each lifeboat.

d. Headcount procedure for verification/reporting (to the command center), that all persons areaccounted for.

e. Search and rescue procedure to locate all missing persons. Search and rescue proceduresmust include a detailed predetermined search pattern, search pattern diagrams must be postedin the control room, at each muster station, and at the rescue/search team station.

f. Maximum acceptable response time for all persons to report to their boat stations.

g. Verification that everyone aboard the rig is capable of entering the lifeboat and securelyfastened his seat belt whi le wearing both a PFD and SCBA.

h. Instruction in the use of radio life-saving appliances.

18) Each abandon ship Drill shall be documented on the International Association of DrillingContractors (IADC) Report, the SA Morning Report, and the approved Drill Report format.






19) Documentation shall include the response time for all aboard to muster to their assigned boatstations, areas for improvement and responsibility for implementation of improvements.

Frequency: Abandon Ship Drills shall be conducted once every week.

D. Rescue Boat Drill

Rescue boats (other than lifeboats which are also rescue boats), should be launched each month withtheir assigned crew aboard and maneuvered in the water. In all cases this requirement shall becomplied with at least once every three months.

Frequency: Rescue Boat Drill shall be conducted once every month.

E. Fire Drill

Fire drills should be planned in such a way that due consideration is given to regular practice in thevarious emergencies that may occur depending on the type of vessel and the cargo.

Each fire dril l shall include:

1) Reporting to stations and preparing for the duties described in the station bill. Drill report shouldinclude pump pressure procedure where known.

2) Starting of a fire pump, using at least the two required jets of water to show that the system is inproper working order.

3) Inspection of fireman's outfit and other personal rescue equipment.

4) Inspection of relevant communication equipment.

5) Checking the operation of watertight doors, fire doors, fire dampers and main inlets and outlets ofventilation systems in the drill area, where available.

6) Checking the necessary arrangements for subsequent abandoning of the Mobile Offshore DrillingUnit (MODU).

7) The SA Liaisonman shall observe and time crew response during fire drills and verify that the Fire Attack Plan and Fire Attack Teams are adequate to address the fire risk.

8) Each rig shall conduct a fire drill at least once per month. The SA Liaisonman will decide if morefrequent fire drills are required to ensure adequate response.

9) Fire drill locations shall be varied to provide practice in all Fire Attack Plans.

10) Each fire drill shall be documented on the IADC Report, the SA Morning Report and the approvedDrill Report format. Documentation shall include the location and type of drill and the response timeto assemble and begin to fight the fire.






Frequency: Fire Drill shall be conducted once every 4 weeks.

F. Man Down (Injury) Drills

1) Each rig shall develop a Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC) Plan that complies and coordinates withSA G.I. 1321.015 (Request for Air Medical Evacuation). Even if air Medevac’s is unlikely G.I.1321.015 contains other critically important procedures to ensure a rapid and effective response toa medical emergency.

2) Each rig shall have the telephone number of the following posted in the rig clinic, the rigoffice, and the radio room (if applicable, e.g. offshore rigs):

a. Nearest medical facility.

b. Contractor medical provider facility.

c. Nearest SA medical clinic.

d. SA Aviation (Offshore).

3) Each rig shall develop Man Down (Injury) Drill procedures to address and treat an immobilizinginjury occurring anywhere on the rig location.

4) As a minimum, Man-Down (Injury) Drill procedure shall address the following:

a. Prompt notification of the Medic.

b. First aid at the injury site.

c. Placing and securing the injured person in a basket stretcher.

d. Transferring the injured person to the rig clinic.

5) Each rig shall conduct a Man-Down (Injury) Drill in conjunction with the weekly H2S Rescue Drill.The SA Liaisonman will decide if more frequent Man Down (Injury) drills are required to ensureadequate response.

6) The SA Liaisonman shall observe and time crew response during Man Down (Injury) Drills andverify that the procedures are adequate to provide prompt and effective treatment.

7) Each Man Down (Injury) Drill shall be documented on the IADC Report, the SA Morning Report andthe approved Drill Report format. Documentation shall include the location and type of drill and theresponse time to bring the injured person to the clinic.

8) The Rig Medic shall be respons ible for the training of a Stretcher Team, as a minimum theStretcher Team shall be competent in:

a. Immobilizing a casualty.






b. Using the correct techniques when maneuvering a casualty in to a stretcher.

c. Identifying the appropriate type of stretcher to use.

d. Basic First Aid.

e. CPR.

Frequency: Man-Down (Injury) Drills shall be conducted once every 8 weeks.

G. Vertical Rescue Drill

1) Each rig shall conduct a Vertical Rescue Drill for example getting an immobilized injured man safelydown from the monkey board, once per year. Note: A suitably weighted dummy must be used to

simulate the injured person.

2) Each rig shall develop Vertical Rescue Drill procedures to address and treat an immobilizing injuryoccurring for each reasonable scenario anywhere at height at the rig location.

3) As a minimum, Vertical Rescue Drill procedure shall address the following:


b. First aid at the injury site if possible.

c. Placing and securing the injured person in a basket stretcher (appropriate rescue equipment).

d. Transferring the injured person from height to the rig clinic (during all drills, a suitably weighteddummy must be used).

4) Each rig shall conduct a Vertical Rescue Drill at least once per year. The SA Liaisonman will decideif more frequent Vertical Rescue Drills are required to ensure adequate response.

5) The SA Liaisonman shall observe and time crew response during Vertical Rescue Drills and verifythat the procedures are adequate to provide prompt and effective treatment.

6) Each vertical rescue drill shall be documented on the IADC Report, the SA Morning Report and theapproved Drill report format. Documentation shall include the location and type of drill and theresponse time to bring the injured person to the clinic.

Frequency: Vertical Rescue Drill shall be conducted once every year.

H. Man-Overboard Drills

1) Each offshore rig shall develop Man-Overboard rescue procedures and train a sufficient number ofcrewmen to effect a safe and prompt rescue.






2) Each offshore rig shall conduct a man-overboard drill at least once per quarter. The SA Liaisonmanor OIM will decide if more frequent man overboard drills are required to ensure adequate response.

3) A suitably weighted dummy shall be used to simulate a man overboard.

4) Man overboard drills shall involve either (or both) the standby boat, when on location, or the rig’sown rescue boat, depending upon equipment available on that specific rig.

5) If no standby boat is readily available, the rig must launch a rescue boat to retrieve the dummy.

6) Each man-overboard drill shall be documented on the IADC Report, the SA Morning Report and theapproved Drill report format. Documentation shall include the response time to rescue the manoverboard.

Frequency: Man-Overboard Drills shall be conducted once every 12 weeks.

I. Confined Space Rescue Dril l

1) Each offshore rig shall develop confined space rescue procedures and train a sufficient number ofcrewmen to effect a safe and prompt rescue.

2) Each rig shall conduct a confined space drill at least once every 3 months. The SA Liaisonman willdecide if more frequent confined space rescue drills are required to ensure adequate response

3) A suitably weighted dummy shall be used to simulate a casualty in a confined space.

4) A confined space rescue drill shall utilize all rescue equipment as defined in the Saudi Aramco Rig(SAR) Safe Work Authorization Procedure (SWAP) or contractor Permit to Work (PTW), ConfinedSpace Entry (Refer to HSERM / A / A-21 / CS).

5) For the purpose of drills, all the safety requirements shall be followed.

6) Drill shall be planned so as to familiarize the rescue teams with all reasonable confined spacesrescue scenarios on the rig.

Frequency: Confined Space Drill shall be conducted once every 12 weeks.

J. Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Release Emergency Drills

1) All personnel must be able to don breathing apparatus and breathe bottled air within 45 seconds.

2) All personnel must be able to recognize the H2S alarm and know to proceed to the safe briefingarea (SBA).






3) Each rig operating in a known or suspected H2S area shall conduct an H2S drill at least once perweek. The SA Liaisonman will decide if more frequent H2S drills are required to ensure adequate

response.

4) The H2S drill shall be announced by the standard siren and strobe light alarm. There must be noprior warning of the drill.

Note: The rig PA system shall immediately and repeatedly announce:

“ This is a Drill - This is a Drill”

5) H2S drill procedure shall include the following:

a. Masking up and breathing bottled air.

b. Requiring all non-essential personnel (i.e. no specific assigned tasks in the drill) muster atdesignated SBA.

c. Conducting a head count or other means to account for all personnel.

d. Rescue procedures for rescuing potentially injured persons from the H2S contaminated site orvicinity (Refer to HSERM / A / A-6 / ED / 2.K).

6) Each H2S drill shall be documented on the IADC Report, the SA Morning Report and the approvedDrill Report format. Documentation shall include the response time (to complete the drill).

K. H2S Rescue Drill s

1) Each rig operating in a known or suspected H2S area shall conduct an H2S rescue drill as part oftheir weekly H2S drill. The SA Liaisonman or PIC will decide if more frequent H2S rescue drills arerequired to ensure adequate response.

2) There must be no prior warning of the drill, nor any warning whatsoever that someone ismissing. It is critically important to verify that the standard H2S drill procedure is adequate toidentify who is missing and locate and rescue them.

3) H2S Rescue Drill s shall proceed as per normal H2S drills, with the following additions:

a. Contractor PIC shall assign one crew member to act as an “ H2S victim” and place thisindividual at an appropriate location.

b. No other crew member shall be given advance notice of either the drill or that someone may bemissing.

c. Following their normal H2S drill procedure, the rig crew must be able to identify that someone ismissing, locate the missing person, and rescue him by bringing him to the safe briefing area andadministering appropriate first aid with in 7 minutes after the alarm first sounded.






Frequency: H2S Release Emergency Drills shall be conducted once every week.

L. Pit Drills

Pit Drills simulate an actual kick while drilling ahead and is designed as both a teaching and testingtool. Pit Drills train the Driller to be constantly aware of the fluid level in the mud pits. Pit Drills should besupervised by the Toolpusher and coordinated through the SA Liaisonman.

1) All equipment required for Pit Drills is to be installed prior to drilling and kept in good operatingcondition.

2) A multi-float pit level indicator and flow show device must be available.

3) A pre-ar ranged horn or si ren signal is an essent ial par t of the pit dr il l. At the signal, each

crewmember must:

a. Go immediately to his assigned post and execute his assigned duties.

b. The SA Liaisonman shall note the times required (in minutes) for various aspects of the pit drillsand record them on the approved Drill Report format.

c. The number and times for these drills should be relayed to the office via morning reports, theMonthly HSE Monitoring Report/Scorecard and the approved Drill Report format.

4) One or more pit drills should be conducted each day until the crews become proficient, then at leasttwice weekly per crew, or more often if deemed advisably by the SA Liaisonman.

5) Pit Drills should be held at least one each day on wildcats wells and wells where above-normalbottom hole pressure could exist.

6) New drillers should be given special drills and thorough explanation of this practice. It is one of themost important safety measures that can be initiated and followed.

7) Drills are to be conducted during both routine and special operations. Typical times wouldbe while:

a. Drilling.

b. Shut down for equipment repairs.

c. Logging.

d. Waiting on orders.

e. Circulating.

f. Or any other time there is open hole and Blowout Preventers (BOP) installed.






8) Procedure

a. The Toolpusher simulates the kick by raising a float in the mud pits or by raising the arm on theflow show indicator and making a note of the time.

b. The SA Liaisonman shall assist in observing the crew and recording completion times.

c. The Driller must detect the kick and sound alarm.

d. The time of the alarm must be noted.

e. Upon hearing the alarm, all members of the drilling crew should immediately execute theirassigned duties.

f. The Driller should prepare to shut in the well using the approved SA Shut-in Procedure WhileDrilling.

g. The SA Liaisonman shall be on the rig floor to announce to the driller that the exercise is only adrill and to stop him before he actually closes the blowout.

h. The time must be noted when the driller is prepared to shut in the well.

i. Members of the drilli ng crew must report back to the rig floor having completed theirassigned duties. These duties may include:

1. Driller

Shut in the well (simulated). Record drill pipe, pressure and casing pressure, Record time,Measure pit gain, check choke manifold for valve positioning and leaks.

2. Derrick Man/ Barge Engineer

Weigh sample of mud from suction pit, check volumes of barite, gel and water on location.

3. Assis tant Driller (AD)

Check accumulator pressures and pumps. Check BOP stack for leaks and proper valvepositions, turn on water jets to diesel exhausts.

4. Floor Hand No.1 and 2

Assist Driller on rig floor.

5. Floor Hand No.3

Assist Derrick Man on mud pits.






Frequency: One or more pit drills should be conducted each day until the crews become proficient,then at least twice weekly per crew, or more often if deemed advisably by the SA

Liaisonman.

M. Trip Drills

1) The trip drill is designed to train the drilling crew to recognize and respond to kick indications whichoccur while tripping pipe. The trip drill is useful for both teaching and testing purposes.

2) The trip drill is supervised by the Toolpusher with the knowledge of the SA Liaisonman.

3) All parts of the well control system must be kept hooked up and in good condition, ready for drills.

4) When a new rig is picked-up, trip drills should be conducted during each trip (both while pulling out

and going into the hole) while the bit is up in the casing. When the crew becomes proficient, tripdrills should be conducted at least twice weekly per crew, conditions allowing.

5) Procedure

a. The Toolpusher simulates the kick by raising a float in the trip tank and making a note of thetime.


c. The Driller must detect the kick and sound the alarm.

d. The time of the alarm shall be noted.

e. Upon hearing the alarm, all members of the drilling crew shall immediately execute theirassigned duties.

f. The Driller must prepare to shut in the well using the approved SA Shut-in Procedure WhileTripping. This shall include spacing out and stabbing/closing the full open safety valve.

g. After the safety valve is installed and the Driller is ready to close the preventers, the SALiaisonman shall announce to the Driller that the exercise is only a drill and that it is notnecessary to close the preventers.

h. The time shall be noted when the driller is prepared to shut-in the well.

i. Members of the dril ling crew should proceed with their assigned duties and report backto the rig floor upon completion. These duties may include:






1. Driller

Shut in the well (simulated), Record drill pipe and casing pressure, record time, Measure pitgain, Check choke manifold for valve positioning and leaks.

2. Derrick Man/Barge Engineer

Weigh sample of mud from suction pit, Check volumes of barite, gel, and water.

3. Assis tant Driller

Check accumulator pressures and pumps, Check BOP stack for leaks, turn on water jets todiesel exhausts.


Stab safety valve. Close safety valve Stab inside BOP. Open safety valve, Assist Driller onrig floor.

5. Floor Hand No.3

Assist Derrick man on mud pits.

Frequency: Trip drills should be conducted during each trip (both while pulling out and going into thehole) while the bit is up in the casing. When the crew becomes proficient, trip drills shouldbe conducted at least twice weekly per crew, conditions allowing

N. Accumulator Drill/Test

Accumulator drill/test is designed to verify that the accumulator/closing system is in good working orderand that it is properly sized for the particular blowout preventer stack. Accumulator performance mustbe proven with an accumulator drill when the BOPs are first installed (which verifies proper sizing), andevery 14 days on a gas well and 21 days on an oil well. Thereafter in accordance with the Saudi

Aramco Well Control Manual (SAWCM).

1) Results of the accumulator drill, including closing times of the rams and annular preventer, andinitial final accumulator pressures are to be reported on the BOP Test and Equipment Checklist .

2) A notation should also be made on the tour report that an accumulator drill was conducted.

3) Accumulator drills must be conducted when the drill pipe is not in open hole, but up in the casing.

4) At least one joint of drill pipe must be in the hole for the pipe rams to close on.

5) The SA Liaisonman and Toolpusher should witness all accumulator drills, but the Toolpusher isresponsible for the actual supervision of the drill.

6) Use the remote station to close the preventers every other drill.






7) Procedure

a. Turn off all accumulator-pressurizing pumps.

b. Record the initial accumulator, manifold, and annular pressures.

c. Close all of the preventers (Except the Bl ind Rams). Substitute a reopening of a pipe ram tosimulate the blind ram closure when applicable.

d. Open the Hydraulic Control Relief (HCR) valve.

e. Measure and record the closing times for each preventer with a stopwatch.

f. Record the final accumulator, manifold, and annular pressures.

g. To pass the accumulator test, all BOPs must have closed in less than 30 seconds with at least:1500 psi accumulator pressure remaining (for a 3000 psi accumulator).

Note: Equipment that does not meet these requirements either has insufficient capacity, insufficientpre-charge or needs repair. Closing time for annular preventers 20" and larger should notexceed 45 seconds.

h. Observe the remaining pressure for at least 5 minutes to detect any possible ram piston sealleaks.

i. Re-open the BOP and turn the accumulator pump(s) back on.

j. Record the time required to charge system back up (re-charge time).

Frequency: Accumulator performance must be proven with an accumulator drill/test when the BOPsare first installed (which verifies proper sizing), and every 14 days on a gas well and 21days on an oil well. Thereafter in accordance with the SAWCM.

O. Annual Emergency Drills

1) D&WO shall conduct an annual “Primary” rig emergency drill as per G.I. 1851.001, to betterprepare for unexpected well disaster when they occur. One MODU from each drilling department(where applicable) and one MODU from workover shall be selected annually to participate.

2) This drill shall be coordinated with the disaster plan drill of Northern area Producing, Marine

Department and other operating organizations so that all parties shall become familiar with therespective responsibilities and response plans.

3) By conducting joint drills, the response time to activate the disaster plans for a blowout willdecrease, resulting in rapid control of the well. This Primary drill shall require full mobilization ofequipment and personnel.






4) D&WO shall also conduct annual “Secondary” rig emergency drills with each MODU. The“Secondary” drills shall evaluate readiness to respond to a major incident and shall require

minimal mobilization of equipment and personnel.

Frequency: Once per year.

P. Oil Spill Equipment Clean-up Drill

1) Oil spill drills shall include instructions for the use and proper deployment of oil containment andrecovery and/or oil dispersing equipment.

2) These drills shall be held at least once every six months unless the equipment has been usedduring the intervening period.

3) The format and scope of such a drill shall be formulated by the Regional Oil Spill ResponseCoordinator (ROSRC’s) and approved as necessary by the ROSRC Members.

4) At least once in every two years, the drill shall be integrated with an offshore Primary drill toevaluate the coordination and response.

Note: The equipment used during drills shall immediately be brought back to its fully operationalcondition and any faults and defects discovered during the drills shall be remedied as soon aspossible.

Frequency: Twice per year.

3. Onshore

A. All Personnel on location must participate in drills.

B. Drills shall, as far as practicable, be conducted as if there were an actual emergency.

C. All drills shall be documented on the IADC Report, the D&WO Morning Report and the approved DrillReport format.

D. Fire Drill

Fire drills should be planned in such a way that due consideration is given to regular practice in thevarious emergencies that may occur depending on the type of operations on-going.

Each fire dril l shall include:

1) Reporting to stations and preparing for the duties described in the station bill.

2) Starting of a fire pump, using at least the two required jets of water to show that the system is inproper working order. Record the EFWP pressure and nozzle pressure if known.






3) Inspection of fireman's outfit and other personal rescue equipment, for correct use and donning.

4) Inspection of relevant communication equipment, for operability.

5) Checking the operation of watertight doors, fire doors, fire dampers and main inlets and outlets ofventilation systems in the drill area, where applicable.

6) Checking the necessary arrangements for subsequent evacuation of the drilling rig.

7) The SA Liaisonman shall observe and time drill crew response.

8) Each rig shall conduct a fire drill at least once per month. The SA Liaisonman will decide if morefrequent fire drills are required to ensure adequate response.

9) Fire drill locations shall be varied to provide practice in all Fire Attack Plans. The Fire Attack Plansshall be referenced.

10) The SA Liaisonman shall observe and time crew response during fire drills and verify that the Fire Attack Plan and Fire Attack Teams are adequate to address the fire risk.

11) Each fire drill shall be documented on the IADC Report, the SA Morning Report and the approvedDrill Report format. Documentation shall include the location and type of drill and the response timeto assemble and begin to fight the fire, areas of improvement with concise instruction forimprovement with clear responsibility for the implementation of improvement.

Frequency: Fire Drill shall be conducted once every 4 weeks

E. Man Lost - Search/Rescue Drill

1) Confirm that a man is actually lost

a. Reference the D&WO ERP Manual section 6.11 Man Lost – Search and Rescue.

b. Each rig shall develop a viable search and rescue plan in accordance with D&WO ERP Manualsection 6.11 Man Lost – Search and Rescue.

c. The established Search Plan should be referenced for all search and rescue drills.

Frequency: Man-Lost - Search Rescue Drills shall be conducted annually as a minimum, the

D&WO Liaisonman may require that more frequent drills are require.

F. Man-Down (Injury) Drills

1) Each rig shall develop a Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC) Plan that complies and coordinates withSA G.I. 1321.015 (Request for Air Medical Evacuation). Even if an air Medevac is unlikely G.I.1321.015 contains other critically important procedures to ensure a rapid and effective response toa medical emergency.






2) Each rig shall have the telephone number of the following posted in the rig clinic, the rigoffice, and the rig clerk’s office:

a. Nearest medical facility.

b. Nearest SA medical clinic.

c. SA Aviation.

3) Each rig shall develop Man Down (Injury) Drill procedures to address and treat an immobilizinginjury occurring anywhere on the rig location, including an immobilized injured man at height.

4) As a minimum, Man-Down (Injury) Drill procedure shall address the following:


b. First aid at the injury site.

c. Placing and securing the injured person in a basket stretcher.

d. Transferring the injured person to the rig clinic.

5) Each rig shall conduct a Man-Down (Injury) Drill at least once per quarter. The SA Liaisonman willdecide if more frequent Man Down (Injury) drills are required to ensure adequate response.

6) The SA Liaisonman shall observe and time crew response during Man Down (Injury) Drills and

verify that the procedures are adequate to provide prompt and effective treatment.

7) Each Man Down (Injury) Drill shall be documented on the IADC Report, the SA Morning Report andthe approved Drill Report format. Documentation shall include the location and type of drill and theresponse time to bring the injured person to the clinic.

8) The Rig Medic shall be respons ible for the training of a Stretcher Team, as a minimum theStretcher Team shall be competent in:

a. Immobilizing a casualty.

b. Using the correct techniques when maneuvering a casualty in to a stretcher.

c. Identifying the appropriate type of stretcher to use.

d. Basic First Aid.

e. CPR.

Frequency: Man-Down (Injury) Drills shall be conducted once every 8 weeks.






G. Vertical Rescue Drill

1) Each rig shall conduct a Vertical Rescue Drill for example getting an immobilized injured man safelydown from the monkey board, once per year. Note: A suitably weighted dummy must be used tosimulate the injured person.

2) Each rig shall develop Vertical Rescue Drill procedures to address and treat an immobilizing injuryoccurring for each reasonable scenario anywhere at height at the rig location.

3) As a minimum, Vertical Rescue Drill procedure shal l address the following:


b. First aid at the injury site if possible.

c. Placing and securing the injured person in a basket stretcher (appropriate rescue equipment).

d. Transferring the injured person from height to the rig clinic (during all drills, a suitably weighteddummy must be used).

4) Each rig shall conduct a Vertical Rescue Drill at least once per year. The SA Liaisonman will decideif more frequent Vertical Rescue Drills are required to ensure adequate response.

5) The SA Liaisonman shall observe and time crew response during Vertical Rescue Drills and verifythat the procedures are adequate to provide prompt and effective treatment.

6) Each vertical rescue drill shall be documented on the IADC Report, the SA Morning Report and theapproved Drill report format. Documentation shall include the location and type of drill and theresponse time to bring the injured person to the clinic.

Frequency: Vertical Rescue Drill shall be conducted once every year

H. Confined Space Rescue Dril l

1) Each onshore rig shall develop confined space rescue procedures and train a sufficient number ofcrewmen to effect a safe and prompt rescue.

2) Each onshore rig shall conduct a confined space drill at least once every 3 months. The SA

Liaisonman will decide if more frequent confined space rescue drills are required to ensureadequate response

3) A suitably weighted dummy shall be used to simulate a casualty in a confined space.

4) A confined space rescue drill shall utilize all rescue equipment as defined in the SAR Safe Work Authorization Procedure (SWAP) or Contractor Permit to Work (PTW), Confined Space Entryprocess (Refer to HSERM / A / A-21 / CS).

5) For the purpose of drills, all the safety requirements shall be followed.






6) Drill shall be planned so as to familiarize the rescue teams with all confined spaces on the rig.

Frequency: Confined Space Rescue Drill shall be conducted once every 12 weeks.

I. Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Release Emergency Drills

1) Every person must be able to don breathing apparatus and breathe bottled air within 45 seconds.

2) Every person who may be required to work on a land rig must be able to don breathing apparatusand breathe bottled air within 45 seconds.

3) All known persons working near a land rig must be able to recognize the H2S alarm and know toproceed to the safe briefing area.

4) Each crew of each rig operating in a known or suspected H2S area shall conduct an H2S drill atleast once per week. The SA Liaisonman will decide if more frequent H2S drills are required toensure adequate response.

5) The H2S drill shall be announced by the standard siren and strobe light alarm. There must be noprior warning of the drill.

Note: The rig PA system shall immediately and repeatedly announce:

“ This is a Drill - This is a Drill ”

6) H2S drill procedure shall include the following:

a. Masking up and breathing bottled air for those crew members whose assigned tasks requirebreathing apparatus.

b. Requiring all non-essential personnel (i.e. no specific assigned tasks as per the Station Bill)muster at upwind safe briefing area (land rigs).

c. Conducting a head count or other means to account for all personnel.

d. Rescuing procedures for rescuing potentially injured persons from the H2S contaminated site orvicinity (Refer to HSERM / A / A-6 / ED).

e. Following the drill, the contractor PIC and the SA Liaisonman shall randomly select (non-essential) crew members mustered at the safe briefing area and verify that they know how todon and breathe from breathing apparatus.

7) Each H2S drill shall be documented on the IADC Report, the SA Morning Report and the approvedDrill Report format. Documentation shall include the response time (to complete the drill).

Frequency: Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Release Emergency Drills shall be conducted once every week.






J. H2S Rescue Drill s

1) Each crew of each rig operating in a known or suspected H2S area shall conduct an H2S rescue drilat least once per month (as part of their weekly H2S drill). The SA Liaisonman or Contractor PIC willdecide if more frequent H2S rescue drills are required to ensure adequate response.

2) There must be no prior warning of the drill, nor any warning whatsoever that someone ismissing. It is critically important to verify that the standard H2S drill procedure is adequate toidentify who is missing and locate and rescue him.

3) H2S Rescue Drill s shall proceed as per normal H2S drills, with the following additions:

a. Contractor PIC shall assign one crew member to act as an “ H2S victim” and place thisindividual at an appropriate location.

b. No other crew member shall be given advance notice of either the drill or that someone may bemissing.

c. Following their normal H2S drill procedure, the rig crew must be able to identify that someone ismissing, locate the missing person, and rescue him by bringing him to the safe briefing area andadministering appropriate first aid within 7 minutes of the initial alarm sounding.

Frequency: H2S Rescue Drill shall be conducted once every 4 weeks.

K. Well Control Drill s

Shutting-in the well quickly to minimize the size of the influx is a major element of successful wellcontrol. Drilling crews can only get proficient in this action through training and practice. The SALiaisonman should ensure that the Toolpusher administers training in the areas of kick detection andshut-in procedures until proficiency is demonstrated. The training must be repetitive and frequentenough so that shutting-in the well becomes automatic whenever a kick is detected.

L. Pit Drills

The pit drill is designed to simulate an actual kick while drilling ahead and is designed as both ateaching and testing tool. Pit drills train the Driller to be constantly aware of the fluid level in the mudpits. Pit drills should be supervised by the Toolpusher and coordinated through the SA Liaisonman.

1) All equipment required for pit drills is to be installed prior to drilling and kept in good operatingcondition.

2) A multi-float pit level indicator and flow show device must be available.

3) A pre-ar ranged horn or si ren signal is an essent ial par t of the pit dr il l. At the signal, eachcrewmember must:






a. Go immediately to his assigned post and execute his assigned duties.

b. The SA Liaisonman shall note the times required (in minutes) for various aspects of the pit drillsand record them on the tour report.

c. The number and times for these drills should be relayed to the office via morning reports andthe Monthly HSE Monitoring Report/Scorecard.

4) One or more pit drills should be conducted each day until the crews become proficient, then at leasttwice weekly per crew, or more often if deemed advisably by the SA Liaisonman.

5) Pit Drills should be held at least once each day on wells, wildcats, and wells where above-normalbottom-hole pressure could exist.

6) Drills are to be conducted during both routine and special operations. Typical times wouldbe while:

a. Drilling

b. Shut down for equipment repairs

c. Logging

d. Waiting on orders

e. Circulating

f. Or any other time there is open hole and Blowout Preventers (BOP) installed.

7) Procedure

a. The Toolpusher simulates the kick by raising a float in the mud pits or by raising the arm on theflow show indicator and making a note of the time.


c. The Driller must detect the kick and sound alarm.

d. The time of the alarm must be noted.

e. Upon hearing the alarm, all members of the drilling crew should immediately execute theirassigned duties.

f. The Driller should prepare to shut in the well using the approved SA Shut-in Procedure WhileDrilling.






g. The SA Liaisonman shall be on the rig floor to announce to the driller that the exercise is only adrill and to stop him before he actually closes the blowout.

h. The time must be noted when the driller is prepared to shut in the well.

i. Members of the drilli ng crew must report back to the rig floor having completed theirassigned duties. These duties may include:

1. Driller

Shut in the well (simulated). Record drill pipe, pressure and casing pressure, Record time,Measure pit gain, check chock manifold for valve positioning and leaks.

2. Derrick Man

Weigh sample of mud form suction pit, check volumes of barite, gel and water on location.


Check accumulator pressures and pumps, Check BOP stack for leaks and proper valvepositions, turn on water jets to diesel exhausts.


Assist Driller on rig floor.

5. Floor Hand No.3

Assist Derrick Man on mud pits

Frequency: One or more pit drills should be conducted each day until the crews become proficient,then at least twice weekly per crew, or more often if deemed advisably by the SALiaisonman.

M. Trip Drills

1) The trip drill is designed to train the drilling crew to recognize and respond to kick indications whichoccur while tripping pipe. The trip drill is useful for both teaching and testing purposes.

2) The trip drill is supervised by the Toolpusher with the knowledge of the SA Liaisonman.

3) All parts of the well control system must be kept hooked up and in good condition, ready for drills.

4) When a new rig is picked-up, trip drills should be conducted during each trip (both while pulling outand going into the hole) while the bit is up in the casing. When the crew becomes proficient, tripdrills should be conducted at least twice weekly per crew, conditions allowing.






5) Procedure

a. The Toolpusher simulates the kick by raising a float in the trip tank and making a note of thetime.


c. The Driller must detect the kick and sound the alarm.

d. The time of the alarm shall be noted.

e. Upon hearing the alarm, all members of the drilling crew shall immediately execute theirassigned duties.

f. The Driller must prepare to shut in the well using the approved SA Shut-in Procedure WhileTripping. This shall include spacing out and stabbing/closing the full open safety valve.

g. After the safety valve is installed and the Driller is ready to close the preventers, the SALiaisonman shall announce to the Driller that the exercise is only a drill and that it is notnecessary to close the preventers.

h. The time shall be noted when the driller is prepared to shut-in the well.

i. Members of the dril ling crew should proceed with their assigned duties and report backto the rig floor upon completion. These duties may include:

1. Driller

Shut in the well (simulated), Record drill pipe and casing pressure, record time, Measure pitgain, Check choke manifold for valve positioning and leaks.

2. Derrick Man

Weigh sample of mud from suction pit, Check volumes of barite, gel, and water.


Check accumulator pressures and pumps, Check BOP stack for leaks, turn on water jets todiesel exhausts.


Stab safety valve. Close safety valve Stab inside BOP. Open safety valve, Assist Driller onrig floor.






5. Floor Hand No.3

Assist Derrick man on mud pits.

Frequency: Trip drills should be conducted during each trip (both while pulling out and going into thehole) while the bit is up in the casing. When the crew becomes proficient, trip drills shouldbe conducted at least twice weekly per crew, conditions allowing.

N. Accumulator Drill/Test

Accumulator drills/tests are designed to verify that the accumulator/closing system is in good workingorder and that it is properly sized for the particular blowout preventer stack. Accumulator performancemust be proven with an accumulator drill when the BOPs are first installed (which verifies propersizing), and every 14 days thereafter in conjunction with the weekly BOP pressure tests (which checks

for hydraulic leaks).

1) Results of the accumulator drill, including closing times of the rams and annular preventer, andinitial final accumulator pressures are to be reported on the BOP Test and Equipment Checklist .

2) A notation should also be made on the tour report that an accumulator drill was conducted.

3) Accumulator drills must be conducted when the drill pipe is not in open hole, but up in the casing.

4) At least one joint of drill pipe must be in the hole for the pipe rams to close on.

5) The SA Liaisonman and Toolpusher should witness all accumulator drills, but the Toolpusher is

responsible for the actual supervision of the drill.

6) Use the remote station to close the preventers every other drill.

7) Procedure

a. Turn off all accumulator-pressurizing pumps.

b. Record the initial accumulator, manifold, and annular pressures.

c. Close all of the preventers (Except the Blind Rams). Substitute a reopening of a pipe ram tosimulate the blind ram closure when applicable.

d. Open the Hydraulic Control Relief (HCR) valve.

e. Measure and record the closing times for each preventer with a stopwatch.

f. Record the final accumulator, manifold, and annular pressures.

g. To pass the accumulator test, all BOPs must have closed in less than 30 seconds with at least:1500 psi accumulator pressure remaining (for a 3000 psi accumulator).






Note: Equipment that does not meet these requirements either has insufficient capacity,insufficient pre-charge or needs repair. Closing time for annular preventers 20" and larger

should not exceed 45 seconds.

h. Observe the remaining pressure for at least 5 minutes to detect any possible ram piston sealleaks.

i. Re-open the BOP and turn the accumulator pump(s) back on.

j. Record the time required to charge system back up (re-charge time).

Frequency: Accumulator performance must be proven with an accumulator drill/test when the BOPsare first installed (which verifies proper sizing), and every 14 days thereafter inaccordance with the SAWCM (SAWCM).

O. Annual Emergency Drills

1) D&WO shall conduct an annual “Primary” rig emergency drill as per G.I. 1850.001, to betterprepare for unexpected well emergencies when they occur. One Land rig from each drillingdepartment and one Land rig form workover shall be selected annually to participate.

2) This drill shall be coordinated with appropriate operating organizations so that all parties shallbecome familiar with the respective responsibilities and response plans.

3) By conducting joint drills, the response time to activate the disaster plans for a blowout willdecrease, resulting in rapid control of the well. This Primary drill shall require full mobilization of

equipment and personnel.

4) D&WO shall also conduct annual “Secondary” rig emergency drills with each Producing crewdepartment. The “Secondary” drills shall evaluate readiness to respond to a disaster and shallrequire minimal mobilization of equipment and personnel.

Frequency: Annual Emergency Drills shall be completed once per year.

P. Oil Spill Equipment Clean-up Drill

1) Oil spill drills shall include instructions for the use and proper deployment of oil containment andrecovery and/or oil dispersing equipment.

2) These drills shall be held at least once every six months unless the equipment has been usedduring the intervening period.

3) The format and scope of suck drill shall be formulated by the ROSC(s) and approved as necessaryby the ROSC Members.

4) At least once in every two years, the drill shall be integrated with an offshore disaster drill toevaluate the coordination and response.






Note: The equipment used during drills shall immediately be brought back to its fully operationalcondition and any faults and defects discovered during the drills shall be remedied as soon as

possible.

Frequency: Oil Spill Equipment Clean-up Drill shall be completed once per year.







A-7

Drops Program





A-7 / Drops Program (DP)

While primary focus of this program shall be on the derrick, this policy applies to all other equipment areas ofthe rig that are determined to pose a hazard of falling objects, such as tool rooms, cranes etc. This program

applies to; Saudi Aramco D&WO, Contractor and Service Companies.

1. Responsibility

A. The Rig Operator Person In Charge (PIC) is responsible for ensuring that the inspection required bythis requirement are entered into the rig’s applicable preventive maintenance system and that theinstructions contained therein are complied with.

B. The Rig Operator PIC shall ensure that all temporary equipment arriving at rig location for use insituations where it may create a dropped object hazard that is not covered by the inspections requiredunder this requirement is accounted for on a log sheet that is to be maintained by the Rig Operator PICuntil such time as the temporary equipment is removed from the rig.

C. The Rig Operator PIC is responsible for maintaining the temporary equipment log, and ensuring that aninspection checklist is added to “DROPS” for as long as the temporary equipment is in use on the rig.

2. Procedure

A. Identify the Derrick zones. Divide the derrick into small manageable sections to help you define areasfor identification. The number of zones shall depend on the size of derrick and the amount of equipmentin the derrick. Typically five zones are used:

1) Zone1: Travelling Equipment

2) Zone 2: Crown Section

3) Zone 3: Monkey board to Crown

4) Zone 4: Rig Floor to Monkey Board

5) Zone 5: Lower Substructure and BOP deck.

B. Compile an Inventory of Equipment. The inventory listing process will require considerable effort andcommitment from various personnel and could take some time depending on available resources. Thetime and effort spent compiling this list will greatly affect the success of the program. An accurate and

detailed list is crucial and will benefit all involved. Record the information using a separate form for eachzone identified. On the same form enter the fastening methods used on each item and any inspectiondetail that will aid the inspector in the inspection process.

C. Remove all non-essential equipment from the derrick.

D. Review derrick inventory and define each item as essential or non-essential. Each item deemed non-essential or redundant should be analyzed for any knock off effect if remove. This process shouldinvolve Rig management.





A-7 / DP / Cont inued

E. Once the items are removed from the derrick the inventory list should be modified to reflect thechanges.

F. Periodic inspections of the different zones shall be scheduled. Once inspections are carried out, thenecessary information should be entered into the Preventive Maintenance (PM) system to showcompliance. All items in the inventory need to be accounted for and inspected. Any item found in aparticular zone, not listed in the inventory needs to be noted, with reason for being in the derrick andexpected duration. The rig foreman may periodically request that the list be changed to reflect changesin operational requirements.

Note: Rigs should make the derrick inspections a part of their current PM program.

1) Inspection Schedule

a. All derrick zones shall be inspected by rig personnel a minimum of once per month withinspection results recorded in the PM system.

b. An annual derrick inspection shall be conducted by a third party contractor. A record of the thirdparty inspection shall be kept at the rig site until superseded by the next annual inspection.

2) Control of Temporary Equipment

a. A log sheet should be used to effectively control temporary equipment within the derrick, e.ghand tools used during maintenance or equipment taken up the derrick for operation such aswire line work. The old age adage of “what goes up must come down” is extremely relevant.

b. Any tool or equipment taken aloft should be logged in and signed off by the person carrying outhe task as well as the Driller on duty. Once the tool or equipment is removed, it should belogged out in the same manner. This log sheet should be used to periodically check to see thatall temporary items have been removed from aloft after use.

3) Covering other areas of the rig

Once “ DROPS” has been implemented for the derrick, the same process should then be applied toother areas of the rig, starting with the more critical areas first. Other areas should include butnot be limited to the following:

a. Cranes

b. Jack Houses

c. Storerooms, tool rooms and paint lockers

d. Shale Shaker areas

e. Welding Shack and surrounding areas

f. Machinery Spaces





A-7 / DP / Cont inued

g. Underneath drilling substructures between Cantilever Beams on jack-ups, and around the moonpool areas on floaters.

h. Quarters Areas, both internal and external, including accommodation spaces, galleys, messrooms, change rooms, laundry rooms, etc. To make the inspection process easier these otheareas should be divided up and assigned to specific departments.

i. Other Areas as determined by the OIM/PIC.







A-8

Short ServiceEmployee Program





A-8 / Short Service Employee Program (SSE)

The purpose of this program is to help protect persons who are at particular risk on SA work sites becausethey are new (Short Service Employees), or are unfamiliar with the site.

1. Scope

This program is applicable to all SA Drilling and Workover facilities, drilling contractor and servicecompanies.

2. Responsibility

It is responsibility of each Contractor PIC to ensure that a Short Service Employee program, meeting theminimum requirements of this program, is implemented at his site.

3. Procedure

A. All new employees regular and contract employees holding rig rotational positions or assigned to ashore base industrial site, and all Visitors (Office Personnel) to SA industrial sites shall be easilyidentified as Short Service Employees by the following system.

1) For the first 90 working days that they are filling a regularly rotating or field position they shall weara GREEN hardhat. If they are transferred to or working temporarily on another SA site during thistime period, they shall continue to wear a GREEN hardhat for the duration of their initial 90 workingday period.

B. After the 90 working day initial period they shall only wear a WHITE hardhat. A Short Service employeeshall be only or all of the following:

1) New to the industry.

2) New to the company.

3) New to the rig/location.

C. All service personnel shall conform to the above system of recognition but in any event shall NOT weara hardhat color that conflict with and / or reduces the effectiveness of the above system.

D. The Site Manager shall have the authority to assign Short Service Employee status (GREEN hardhat)to any person whom he assesses to be particularly at risk irrespective of their assignments, servicetime or location of employment

E. All Short Service Employee (SSE’s) are required to attend an initial orientation on the rig prior tobeginning work.





A-8 / SSE / Cont inued

F. All SSE’s shall be assigned, a safety partner (Mentor) from within their work group. The supervisor andappointed safety partner (Mentor) shall provide close supervision during the appropriate familiarization

period and ensure that the SSE does not attempt to perform any task in which he has not been properlytrained.

G. The supervisor and designated safety partner shall ensure that the SSE is familiarized with personalprotective equipment, procedure, the location and operation of emergency equipment.

H. The supervisor and appointed safety partner shall discuss and review with the SSE any and all knownand/or potential hazards associated with a proposed task prior to commencement and review allemergency equipment, personal protective equipment and procedures. An appropriate hazardrecognition process must be utilized.

I. Throughout the appropriate SSE period, a green hard hat shall distinguish SSE personnel.

J. The appropriate supervisor shall enroll the SSE into the program by utilizing the Short ServiceEmployee Enrollment Form. The completed form shall be submitted to the SA DOE&CD with a copyretained on the rig to record the enrollment.

K. Following the successful completion of the required SSE period, the supervisor and appointed safetypartner shall record the fact by signing and dating the enrollment form. The completed form shall bemaintained on the rig copies shall be forwarded to SA DOE&CD. An employee shall not be considereda graduate from the program until he/she has successfully completed the following training as aminimum:

1) Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) safety training as per HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S Safety / Paragraph No.4.

2) Basic Fire Fighting.

3) Casualty Handing.

4) Permit to Work.

5) Hazard Recognition Program.

6) Rigging and Lifting.

Note: All Training must be provided by a “ Competent Person” . The term "Competent Person" isdefined as "one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in thesurroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous toemployees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them".By way of training and/or experience, a competent person is knowledgeable of applicablestandards, is capable of identifying workplace hazards relating to the specific operation, and hasthe authority to correct them. Some standards add additional specific requirements which mustbe met by the competent person.





A-8 / SSE / Cont inued

Additional questions and tasks may be added as necessary by the supervisor and safety partner toensure that the employee has a working knowledge of Safety and Environmental procedures and has

demonstrated safe work ethic and behavior throughout the period of the SSE program.

L. Any Employee who is not deemed as qualified for release from SSE status after a period of 90 workingdays may continue to work only with the written approval of the Site Manager.







A-9

Requirements forSimultaneous Drilling

and

Producing Operations(Land Rigs)





A-9 / Requirements for Simultaneous Drilling and Producing

Operations (SIMOPS), Land Rigs

1. Pre-Move and Planning

This procedure is applicable to all SA Drilling and Workover facilities, drilling contractor andservice companies.

A. A pre-move meeting shall be held at least 2 weeks before the rig move between the DrillingForeman/Liaisonman, Area Producing (AP) and D&WO Well sites. The following and any otherpertinent issues shall be discussed. A summary of the meeting shall be sent to Area ProducingDepartment (APD).

1) Flagging all flow lines.

2) Layout of rig components and materials.

3) Installation of barricades and traffic control and responsibilities for same.

4) Wells to be shut-in in addition to the minimum requirements below and responsibility for installingmechanical down-hole barriers.

5) Main camp and mini-camp locations.

6) Welding shop location.

7) Emergency Shut-Down (ESD), Sub Surface Safety Valve (SSSV) and H2S sensor testing andreliability assurance.

8) Installation of ESD switch in Drilling Forman’s office and rig floor (if required) for all wells connectedto a production or injection manifold.

9) Review of AP and Drilling activates planned for the location.

10) Injector shut-in to avoid kicks while drilling thru reservoirs.

B. The location ESD system must be operational and tested by AP Producing in the presence of DrillingForman before rig mobilization to the site. If the ESD system is not functioning properly, no oil

production shall be allowed while the rig on location until the ESD system is functioning properly.

C. Substantial barricades (capable of stopping any rig vehicle moving at 10 km per hour ) to be installedaround all live/flowing equipment on the location – to stop any vehicle approaching closer than 20m tosuch equipment .

D. Traffic controls (barricades) shall be installed on the location to direct all traffic away from flowing wellsarea.

E. Rig move-in, rig-up, rig-down and move-off shall be a daylight only activity.





A-10 / SIMOPS / Cont inued

F. An adequate Emergency Response Plan (ERP) shall be developed and implemented prior to anyequipment being moved to well location. The ERP shall be in accordance with the requirements of

D&WO SMS No. 8 / Emergency Preparedness . All reasonable scenarios shall be addressed withparticular attention being paid to the ability to protect and evacuate additional none rig personnel onlocation.

2. Rig Move

While the rig is moving on/off a location, all wells in adjacent rows and any other wells identified in the pre-move meeting, shall be shut-in.

Prior to commencing operations, Drilling shall install additional H2S sensors between the rig and existingwells.

3. Rig Operating

A. While the rig is operating, all wells within a distance of 85 meters from the wellbore shall be shut-in withtwo (2) mandatory mechanical shut-offs. This is minimum requirement only. Additional wells may beshut-in, as agreed to at the pre-move meeting. In general, producers can use SSSV and BPV; injectorscan use a mono-lock plug and BPV.

B. Any planned activity (surface or sub-surface) on the location shall be reviewed with the DrillingForeman for his approval and coordination. This shall include, but is not limited to, sampling, bleeding,ESD maintenance, testing SSSV’s, wire line work, etc. anyone entering the location shall check-in and

review his plans with the Drilling Foreman.

C. Well Services activities are not allowed within 85 meters of the wellbore or in any other shut-in well onthe location.

D. When the rig is on the location, an AP representative shall be available on the location 24 hours as asingle point of contact for the Drilling Foreman.

E. In case of any alarm, well control situation, flaring, or other emergency, utilizing the ESD the DrillingForeman is authorized to shut-in all wells on the same location without notifying AP at any time he feelsit is not safe to operate with nearby wells active. The Drilling Foreman shall immediately notify the APrepresentative on location. The wells shall be returned to normal operation as soon as it is safe to doso.

F. No location safety systems shall be by-passed, for the duration of drilling activities, unless there iswritten concurrence from Drilling Operations Management. If any ESD system is by-passed, the well(s)shall be shut-in.

G. No major PMT or other construction work shall be allowed while the rig is on the locations. Minor workand all hot work shall be reviewed case by case with the Drilling foreman.

H. Both location access roads shall remain clear at all times.





A-9 / SIMOPS / Cont inued

I. AP shall be responsible for supervising any work done on the location by AP or its contractorcompanies.

J. Contact number of AP personnel shall be provided to the Drilling Foreman prior to working on any wellin the location.

K. All personnel on location at any time shall have H2S training and carry a current H2S certificate at alltimes. AP shall provide sufficient self-contained breathing apparatus for their contractor personnel.

L. The ESD H2S alarm settings shall be as follows:

1) 5 ppm to actuate the siren.

2) 10 ppm to activate the ESD and shut all the wells.

M. Drilling shall have two Drilling Foremen from spud to release.

N. Drilling shall provide a Separator and Vertical Flare Stack from spud to release while operating onproduction location and while drilling across pay zones on an injection location.

Note: The Auto Ignition system shall be operational from spud release. A location that contains bothinjectors and producers shall be considered a production location.

O. Drilling shall have a Rig Safety Advisor available on the location from spud to release.

P. AP shall adopt non-conventional sampling and bleeding methods that mitigate SIMOPS risk by

eliminating the potential for hydrocarbon release and un-necessary activation of the ESD system.







A-10

Journey Management





A-10 / Journey Management (JM)

1. Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to establish requirements and responsibilities for Drilling and Workover(D&WO) organizations for: controlling travel to and from remote locations; specifying proper equipment forremote area travel and operations; and defining responsibilities for implementing search and rescueoperations for missing personnel or medical evacuations of injured/ill persons from remote areas.

This procedure is a supplement to G.I.6.025 (Control of Remote Area Travel and Search/RescueProcedures) and D&WO Safety Management System (SMS) Element No.6 (Safe Operations).

2. Scope

This procedure applies to all SA employees, contractors, sub-contractors and service companies involved

in remote area D&WO operations and associated travel, and includes responsibilities for implementing“Primary” and/or “Secondary” search and rescue operations for missing or injured personnel.

3. Defini tions (Ref: G.I.6.025, Section 4.0)

A. Remote Area

Those areas of operation which by distance or topography are isolated from any existing facilitycapable of providing a timely response to an emergency situation, such as:

1) Seldom used tracks or dirt roads, such as pipeline corridors, skid roads to drilling rig locations, or

tracks to exploration camps.

2) Air travel over land far from inhabited areas, developed roads or landing strips, or over open water.

3) Sea travel.

4) Off road travel, even if it is near to paved roads, towns or industrial facilities.

B. Search and Rescue Response Commander (SRRC)

The Executive Director of Industrial Services Organization or his assigned alternate. The SRRC shallassume control of all search and rescue activities on the activation of ‘Secondary’ response

procedures.

C. Search and Rescue Response Vice Commander (SRRVC)

The Vice President of SA Medical Services Organization (SAMSO) or his designee. In any absence ofthe Search and Rescue Response Commander, the Vice President of SAMSO or his assignedalternate shall assume the responsibilities of the SRRC.





A-10 / JM / Continued

D. Dhahran Emergency Cont rol Center (ECC)

The location from which the SRRC and designated personnel shall coordinate a ‘Secondary’ response.The ECC is located on the second floor of building 3193.

E. Primary Response

Search and rescue (SAR) actions initiated by the individual department when notified of stranded ormissing personnel and/or medical emergencies in remote areas. Initial coordination with EmergencyMedical Services for medical evacuations is included in ‘Primary’ response.

F. Secondary Response

A coordinated corporate level response to any emergency situation which involves search, rescue

and/or medical evacuation operations in remote areas which exceed the available resources of“Primary” response organizations.

G. Field Trips – Remote Travel – Deep Desert Areas

Employees should be prepared for unexpected situations while travelling on field trips, remote areasand deep desert areas. Bad weather conditions, poor visibility, mechanical failures or even becominglost.

1) Field Trips :

The Daily Area Travel Log (Refer to HSERM / A / A-10 / JM / Appendix No.1) must be completed

before driving to D&WO operations, drilling rigs, water well, well site constructions when tripsinvolve driving distances more than 150km, one way from the origin point of travel, regardless ofroad conditions, (asphalt or dirt roads) or close proximity to company facilities on route. Drivers andcrews shall ensure the minimum safety equipment is taken on all trips:

a. Vehicle first aid kit and sufficient water.

b. Communication equipment and Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE).

c. Vehicle jacking and emergency equipment.

2) Remote and Deep Desert Areas:

The Remote Area Travel Log (Refer to HSERM / A / A-10 / JM / Appendix No.2) must becompleted before driving to any remote or deep desert areas.

a. Remote Areas:

Remote areas are classified as areas of operations which are geography isolated from anyexisting facility capable of providing a timely response to an emergency situation as:






1. Seldom used tracks, dirt roads such as pipelines corridors, skid roads to D&WO Riglocations.

2. Off-Road travel even if it is near to paved roads, towns or industrial facilities.

b. Deep Desert Areas:

Deep desert areas are classified as areas more than 100km away from paved roads or any SAfacilities. Deep desert driving has special requirements documented clearly in G.I.6.025.

The minimum requirements for desert driving are:

1. 4X4 Vehicles.

2. 2 spare wheels per vehicle.

3. Remote communication equipment, GPS, Satellite telephones.

4. 2 vehicles travelling together.

5. 15 liters of water per person.

6. Sleeping kits.

7. Equipment Kits.

4. Responsibilities

A. D&WO Management

1) Responsible for ensuring all employees follow departmental travel control procedures. Thisincludes all contractors and service companies under their departments' supervision.

2) Ensure clear departmental procedures and policies are established.

3) Clearly communicate to the Division Heads that, contractor management understand that they areresponsible to ensure all sub-contractors and service companies working directly for them followadequate travel control procedures consistently.

4) During SOC meetings reinforce the commitment of service companies and contractors, theirresponsibility to follow Journey Management policies and procedures.






B. Contractor Management

Responsible for ensuring all their employees follow their own travel control procedures. As well, theyare responsible for ensuring all sub-contractors and service companies working directly for themconsistently follow adequate travel control procedures.

C. Drivers

All drivers are required to follow remote travel procedures developed by their employer at all times.Drivers shall stay on the planned or designated route while traveling and remain with the vehicle, ifstranded for any reason, until help arrives.

D. D&WO Divis ion Head

1) Shall ensure all relevant Driver certification and vehicle asset documentation is recorded in thedivisions filing system.

a. Supervisors Road Test records (SRT).

b. Authorized employees and SMPs driver’s license list.

c. Assigned vehicle list.

d. Near miss, traffic violation, MVA records.

e. Driver performance / safe driving attitudes and behavior records.

f. Records of vehicle logs.

g. Any SA 1193 recordings.

h. Enforce Travel management logs.

2) Ensure contractor and service companies under the department’s supervision have adequate travelcontrol and Search and Rescue procedures (of their own) in place.

3) Communicate policy and regulation changes to all employees.

4) Provide adequate information on remote area work locations together with maps, communicationtools and safety equipment for vehicles.

5) Initiate appropriate departmental search and rescue efforts when an employee in a remote area isreported missing.

6) Provide driver training including remote desert driving for employees and approved SMPs.

7) Provide Driver Improvement Refresher courses.






8) Ensure he enrolls specific employees into the Deep Desert Driving program and other relatedcourses, radio communication, map and compass use.

E. D&WO Unit Heads

1) Shall ensure only employees with SA Driver licenses operate vehicles.

2) Ensure vehicles are assigned to specific employees. Any pool vehicle or vehicle used byemployees other than the assigned driver must utilize a vehicle log.

3) Ensure all employees DO NOT travel at night by planning all vehicle travel in daylight hours only.

4) Assign a Travel Controller (clerk) to coordinate, control and document daily travel logs, remote anddeep desert travel logs and plans.

5) Ensure vehicle Safety Check Inspections are performed and documented by the assigned driveronce a month. Records are kept for audit purposes.

6) Ensure existing employees, new hires or transferred personnel review driving policies andprocedures including any site specific regulations during the site safety orientation.

7) Ensure vehicle checklists, travel documents, policies, procedures and safety equipment is availablein his work area or facility and is communicated to all employees.

8) Ensure all SMPs under his supervision have the necessary driver training and certification whenthey operate any vehicle.

9) Promote safe driving practices to all employees whether during working or non-working hours.

10) Ensure drivers are proficient with the use of GPS.

F. Employees

1) Shall apply safe driving practices and follow the SA policies and regulations when operating ordriving company vehicles.

2) Shall be conversant with the SA G.I.6.025 and 6.030.

3) Ensure all driving is performed in daylight hours when travelling to and from work locations.

4) Perform vehicle safety checks utilizing the Department’s Vehicle Safety Checklist once a month.The assigned driver for each vehicle shall complete the checklist and give to his Supervisor forreview.

5) Carry the minimum safety equipment when travelling to locations or facilities, mobile phone,drinking water, first aid kit and vehicle kits.






6) Complete the Vehicle Travel Logs, following the instructions before travelling to Field Trips, DeepDesert, Remote Areas, or Over Night Destinations. If a driver is leaving from his home and going

directly to the location then he must:

a. Telephone the Travel Controller (assigned clerk) and complete the form over the telephone bygiving the full details of his trip.

b. Before leaving location the driver shall call the Travel Controller and inform him of his return tripplans.

c. When the driver returns home he must inform the Travel Controller.

7) Ensure accommodation is pre-determined and organized before travelling long distances.

8) Check weather conditions before travelling to locations and prepare accordingly.

9) Complete Vehicle Travel Log before driving to work areas away from the office.

10) Report any vehicle accidents, private or company immediately to the Unit Head.

11) Keep your licenses current and up to date.

G. Contractors

Shall apply safe driving practices follow the SA and contractor policies, regulations when operating ordriving vehicles.

5. Procedure

D&WO departments with remote area travel should take every effort to provide all equipment and suppliesnecessary and/or as required for survival and emergency situations which may be encountered. This effortshould include frequent periodic inspections of the vehicles, aircraft, or vessels to ensure compliance andmechanical soundness.

A. Travel Control System Requirements / Travel Controller

A Designated Person (Travel Controller) in each Unit or work facility shall be assigned by the Unit Headto ensure all travel plans are recorded and closed out. The Travel Controller is responsible forinitiating Primary Search and Rescue (SAR) Plan in the event a vehicle becomes overdue.Refer to:

1) HSERM / A / A-10 / JM / Appendix No.1 / Daily Travel Log.

2) HSERM / A / A-10 / JM / Appendix No.2 / Remote Travel Log / Deep Desert Travel Log.






B. The Travel Controller and driver shall report as a minimum the follow ing information to the siteforeman:

1) Contact rig or facility; inform foreman how many personnel are travelling.

2) Expected time of travel.

3) Expected time of arrival.

4) Drivers contact details.

5) Reason for travel.

The Travel Controller shall complete the travel Log with the assistance of any driver who is travelling

directly from his home to location. All items on travel log must be clarified with the driver.

C. Remote Travel Log System (Refer to HSERM / A / A-10 / JM / Appendi x No.2)

Minimum information required for single vehicle and convoy travel to be recorded as follows:

1) Name and company ID numbers of driver(s) and passengers.

2) Destination(s) including:

a. Overnight stops.

b. Communication check- in points.

3) Vehicle description(s) and unit number(s).

4) Planned routing - All routes taken to rig/camp sites shall follow the Aramco designated routingwhere signs are placed every 10 Km.

5) Actual departure time.

6) Expected arrival time at destination(s).

7) Expected return time to point of origin if applicable.

8) Communications contact information for destinations (if applicable) and mobile communications (ifapplicable). Current issue phone lists are an acceptable alternative for both Travel Manager andperson traveling.

9) Signature(s) for sign in/out (for land travel).

10) Any check-in required in Section Travel Check- in.






Note: Crew changes between remote operations worksites such as drilling rigs or seismic operationsand remote crew camp facilities specified for that worksite are not required to record a travel log.

D. Travel Check-In

The driver must contact the Travel Controller under any of the following circumstances:

1) If there is a change in expected arrival time at destination exceeding 2 hours of original estimate.

2) If there is a change in planned route.

3) If there is a change in passenger list.

4) If there is a change in composition of convoy.

5) If possible, Prior to leaving and after returning to high traffic paved highways that go to built-upindustrial areas or manned plant facilities.

Note: There are abandoned Aramco infield paved roads and government paved roads which are notconsidered high traffic roads.

6) Prior to traveling off-road into the open desert.

7) If traveling off-highway for a period of four hours.

8) Upon arrival at destination and also check-in with the destination Travel Controller.

Note: If the driver has not checked-in within 2 hours of expected check-in time, the Travel Controllershall initiate the Search and Rescue Primary Response Plan.

E. Air or Sea Travel

For air or sea travel, the aircraft or vessel shall comply with the applicable international and localregulations for procedures, supplies and equipment necessary for remote area travel.

F. Remote Night Travel

All night travel shall be discouraged.

Night travel to or from or in an area that is defined as remote should not commence after dark orbefore light, with the exception to the following:

1) Material supply trucks or vehicles controlled by SA transportation department where the operationcomplies with SA transportation Procedures.

2) Crew changes between remote operations worksites, such as drilling rigs, requiring continuousoperations and remote crew camp facilities specified for that worksite.






G. Remote Travel Vehicle Requirements

1) Vehicles must have current Saudi Government Motor Vehicles Periodic Inspection sticker and SAvehicles must have valid inspection and PM services sticker.

2) Light vehicles are to be equipped with two spare tires.

3) Four wheel drive vehicles are required when vehicles leave graded skid roads for travel in opendesert, trails and tracks.

H. Remote Travel Basic Emergency Supplies/Equipment:

1) Accurate compass of reasonable quality.

2) Accurate area maps with North marked clearly at top.

3) Water for 3 days (15 liters per person).

4) First Aid kit.

5) Shovel, road reflectors, flashlight.

6) Matches or lighter and charcoal lighter fluids.

7) Blanket.

8) Personal medications.

9) Communications Equipment.

10) PPE.

11) Spare Wheel.

12) Vehicle Jack.

I. Off-Road Basic Emergency Supplies/Equipment

In addition to the equipment listed in section HSERM / A / A-10 / JM / paragraph G, vehiclesdriving off road require the following:

1) Food rations for 3 days per person.

2) GPS Unit.

3) Additional fuel and vehicle fluids.






4) Tire pump and pressure gauge.

5) Spare fan belt(s).

6) Appropriately equipped tool kit.

7) Winch or tow cable.

8) Traction grates.

J. Communications

1) All Companies shall provide employees with the necessary means of communication to check-in as

required in the travel plan prepared for remote travel.

2) Vehicles traveling off road must have communications equipment that shall allow for continuouscontact capability for all locations traveled to.

K. Training

1) D&WO personnel shall receive adequate initial and refresher training (for personnel undertakingremote area travel) as referenced in G.I.6.025 section 5 (Cont rol of Remote Area Travel), D&WOSMS Element No.4 (Competency and Training) and HSERM / A / A-5 / C&T.

2) Regular Driving: All selected employees, depending on positions shall be registered to

Attend and pass the SA Driving Courses as per G.I.6.030.

3) All SA drivers shall participate in the Driver Improvement Program (DIP).

4) Off highway/Off Road travel personnel shall receive training to cover the following:

a. Training as highlighted in the D&WO SMS element No.4 Competency and Training andHSERM / A / A-5 / C&T.

5) Off-highway Travel

Personnel shall receive training to cover the following:

a. Emergency procedures to follow when lost or stranded.

b. Map orientation and navigation by compass (all) and GPS (if applicable).

c. Off highway driving skills.

d. Mobile communications equipment (if applicable).

e. Basic first aid training.






6) Off-Road Travel

Personnel driving off -road shall receive training covering the following:

a. Desert survival skills.

b. Off road driver skills.

c. Mobile communications equipment.

d. GPS tracking equipment.

L. Remote Travel Performance Indicators

The contractors shall maintain records of the following:

1) Section Travel Logs.

2) The number of travel plans where non-compliances were identified and description of correctiveactions taken.

3) The number of times needed to phone a location to discover the whereabouts of a driver.

6. Search and Rescue (SAR)

Each D&WO department and each contractor shall have in place a primary SAR Response plan that shalladdress initial search operations contained in this section.

A. Primary Response Plan

1) The Travel Manager shall initiate the follow ing wi thin the prescribed time limits if check-in isoverdue:

a. Telephone Search (Maximum 2 hours overdue).

2) The Travel Control ler shall call the follow ing:

a. Contact driver if equipped with communications equipment.

b. Destination(s) contacts.

c. Last check-in point (if applicable).

d. Relevant police, hospitals, facilities along planned route.

e. Any other possible contacts, including family/friends, who may know the overdue person.






3) Notification (maximum 4-6 hours overdue)

The Travel Manager shall notify designated Company and Aramco supervision that an overdueperson is missing. Supervisors shall then notify relevant Contractor and Aramco managementrepresentatives who shall initiate the Primary SAR ground search operations.

Note: SA management may request Search aircraft if the situation warrants such action, as per G.I.6.025Section 6.1.1.

B. Ground Search

The initial ground search plan shall take into consideration the resources available at the time ofimplementation using the information contained in this section and, be coordinated by a SearchManager.

1) Search Area

Initial search area shall be defined by establishing a Search Pattern Grid and assessing thefollowing:

a. Last known location (usually the start point for establishing a search area).

b. Planned route information from Travel Log.

c. Vehicle range of missing vehicle and search vehicles.

2) Prioriti ze Areas According to Degree of Risk to the Missing Person

Depending on resources available, the search area grids may be prioritized using thefollowing criteria particularly when planning an initial road search:

a. Likelihood of missing person being found by passer-by or finding help from local populatedareas.

b. Likelihood of person remaining lost or stranded if searchers are not sent to this area.

c. Type of terrain in search area.

d. For all initial searches, both off-highway and off-road, it may be logical to first explore all roadsand tracks in the designated search area.

e. Off road searches would most often be conducted using a search pattern in conjunction with aninitial road search and the planned off-road route given search priority.






3) Search Pattern

A basic ground search pattern grid system can be applied to identify a search area whenconducting both road and off road searches. The search radius and distance between check-instops may vary according to search circumstances. Search vehicles should return to their base ofoperations after each search segment has been completed, unless the Search Manager has setother plans.

a. Vehicle Requirements

1. All search vehicles should meet the requirements for the type of search being conductedand have communications equipment.

2. Vehicles without communications equipment must travel in convoy.

b. Training

1. Search Manager

Search and rescue planning and techniques for ground search.

2. Drivers

Trained as per Section Training and Off Road travel requirements.

C. Secondary Response Plan

The SA Corporate plan is in place and shall be activated if necessary as per G.I. 6.025 Section 7.0.








Appendix No.1






Appendix No.2






Appendix No.3

D&WO Driving Policy

1. D&WO Drivers (Employees and Contractors)

SA D&WO and Contractor employees are reminded that the Driving Policy applies to everyone who drivesmotor vehicles on or off-the job.

The requirements for land based travel, including remote area travel are documented in thefollowing:

A. HSERM / A / A-10 / Journey Management

B. D&WO SMS Element No.6 - Safe Operations

C. G.I. 0006.025 - Control of Remote Area Travel and Search/Rescue Procedures

D. G.I. 6.030 - Traffic and Vehicle Safety

Employees and Contractors driving personal or company vehicles must follow both Saudi ArabianGovernment and SA driving regulations at all times.

2. When you plan driving to remote areas, in adverse weather or on poor road condi tions, these basicrules apply:

A. Harsh Weather Condi tions: Heavy rain, sand storms and fog. Pull off the road and stop unticonditions clear. If conditions are marginal then slow down. If visibility is poor switch on your lights tolow beam, switch on fog lights if fitted and take extra care. Do not use your hazard warning lightsunless you have broken down or are trying to warn other traffic of a serious hazard ahead. If it is wet donot accelerate or brake quickly as your vehicle may spin out of control.

B. Rig Roads, Skid Roads, Unsealed or Poorly Maintained Roads: Take extra care, slow down andonly drive on designated roads. The maximum speed on unpaved SA roads is 70 Km/h. However, keepin mind that many of these roads are not maintained on a regular basis, conditions can changedramatically, from good to bad, in a very short distance.

C. Desert and Remote Area Driving: Use the Driving and Journey Management Procedure. Do not traveinto the desert unless your vehicle is a four wheel drive, (4X4) and equipped with the necessary safetyequipment. Make sure you are fully prepared for desert travel and you have been trained to do sosafely. Ensure the Journey Management Log is completed in full with the travel controller in yourdivision.

D. Wildlife, Camels, Sheep and Cattle: Switch on your hazard warning lights, slow down to walkingspeed, stop if necessary and exercise extreme care. Animals can make sudden erratic movementswithout any apparent reason which could cause you or others to have a serious accident.





A-10 / JM / Appendix No.3 / Cont inued

E. Night Travel: D&WO does NOT permit driving at night except in extreme emergencies. These includebut are not limited to: well control situations or potential loss of human life. The Manager’s approval is

required prior to undertaking any night driving. When driving your personal car, drive within the limits oyour lights, drive at a slower speed and leave adequate room to take evasive action if needed. Camelshave been known to stray onto unfenced roads at night, they are very difficult to see and collisionsinvolving fatalities have been frequent in the past. Take extra care on unlit roads.

3. It is our vision to have zero accidents, injuries or fatalities and to minimize driving violations both at workand home. We can only achieve this with your help by following these simple safety rules.

Note: Your safety, the safety of your family and others around you is within your control. Your driving behavioand proactive precautions will allow you to arrive at your next destination safe and sound.





A-11

Working with ServiceCompanies





A-11 / Working with Service Companies

This procedure is applicable to all SA Drilling and Workover facilities, drilling contractor and

service companies.

1. Upon arriving to location, the service company’s representative should report directly to the Companyoffice. They will be re-directed to the appropriate place for safety orientation and assignment ofaccommodations. The safety orientation shall include Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) requirements,cell phone policy, muster station identification, smoking policy, etc. The requirements as defined in HSERM/ A / A-20 / TPEI and HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP shall be followed.

2. A combined pre-job safety meeting shall be conducted with all service and rig personnel in the primarywork environment. This meeting shall include discussions of responsibilities, hand signals or other meansof communication, potential pinch points, and hazardous chemicals/materials to be used.

3. A “ safe distance” area should be cordoned off to indicate potentially high danger zones such aspressurized lines, danger from overhead falling objects, opened cellar grating, etc.

4. A joint operational procedural meeting shall be conducted with all service companies concerned to reviewthe task at hand and to coordinate their combined efforts. This should be conducted immediately prior tothe job.

5. Special operations requiring the use of BOP equipment must conform to design and testing procedures in“ Section J: Equipment Requirements, SAWCM” . This includes coil tubing, snubbing and electric lineoperations.

6. All 3rd Party equipment shall be installed under the drilling contractors Permit to Work (PTW) System.







A-12

Safe Work AuthorizationProcedure





A-12 / Safe Work Authorization Procedure (SWAP)

1. Purpose

The purpose of the Safe Work Authorization Procedure (SWAP) is to define a formal safe system of controfor SAR rig activities which are potentially hazardous. This procedure establishes minimum requirementand responsibilities for issuing/receiving Safe Work Authorizations, and for outlining the competencierequired for those responsible for implementing the system. When issued, the SWAP serves as a writterecord of conditions and requirements agreed upon by the issuer and receiver. They list minimum safetprecautions to be taken and hazards which must be controlled.

2. Scope

A. The SWAP is applicable to Saudi Aramco drilling rigs (SAR) and all contractor rigs not using an

approved Permit to Work (PTW) procedure as defined in HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP / paragraphNo.2.B below.

B. Drilling Contractors shall be permitted to use their own PTW procedure provided:

1) The contractor PTW procedure has been reviewed by the Drilling Operational Excellence &Compliance Division (DOE&CD), Division Head or his designate, and found to comply with therequirements of G.I.2.100 and verified in writing prior to work commencement.

2) The contractor PTW system shall cover the rig activities identified in their PTW process.

3) The contractor personnel and the D&WO Liaisonman follow their responsibilities (as defined iHSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP / paragraph No.5A / Respons ibi lit ies).

3. Definitions

A. Person In Charge (PIC)

1) SAR Rigs

The PIC is the Toolpusher or, in his temporary absence, his designate. On Mobile Offshore DrillingUnits (MODU), depending on the type of operations, the PIC is the Offshore Installation Manager(OIM) / Barge Master (or designate).

B. SWAP Issuers

The SAR rig supervisors who have received training (as defined in HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP /paragraph No.10 / Training), and are certified by their employer to issue the SWAP form aredesignated issuers.





A-12 / SWAP / Cont inued

C. SWAP Receivers

The craft supervisors, craftsmen, or others who have received training (as defined in HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP / paragraph No.10 / Training), and are certified by their employer to sign the SWAP formare the designated receivers.

D. Hot Work

Any Work outside the designated “welding shop” that develops sparks, flames or heat sufficient tocause ignition. This shall apply to the use of spark or flame producing tools and equipment.

E. Cold Work

Work that will not produce sufficient energy to ignite flammable a atmosphere or material.

F. Confined Space

The entry of personnel into any space or structure (tank, vessel, vault, excavation when 4 feet ordeeper, etc.) not normally intended for human occupancy, in which entry, movement within or exit isrestricted.

4. Function of the SWAP

A. The SWAP is intended to be applied to those jobs which represent a potential hazard to companyoperations, personnel or equipment. Extremely low risk jobs, as determined by Drilling Operations, may

be exempt from the SWAP. Included could be carpentry (without power tools), inspections in non-hazardous areas, cleaning or lubricating non-hydrocarbon equipment, and certain classes of non-flashphotography where Drilling Operations determine these jobs can be conducted safely without a SWAP.

1) Examples of Work that may be performed without a SWAP are:

a. Routine drilling operations.

b. Routine materials handling.

c. Routine Helideck operations.

d. Routine crane operations.

e. Routine Cold Work inside workshops and within accommodation units.

2) In such cases, Drill ing Operations must maintain adequate control in the workplace. On apractical level, the SWAP shall:

a. Limit the scope of the task.






b. Ensure supervisors and crew members follow procedures, are informed of and heed necessarysafety precautions and recognize the need for and use required safety equipment.

c. Encourage pre-task planning, minimizing risk to personnel and equipment, and reduce theinconvenience and interference to other operations.

d. Increase the awareness of personnel responsible for the overall safety of the unit by providingdocumented details of potentially hazardous activities in progress.

e. Provide a continuous control and record of ongoing work activities, detailing the nature of thework, required precautions/safeguards, and the responsible competent person in charge.

f. Ensure that upon completion of work, equipment and site are left in a safe condition.

g. Provide formal notification of completion of all work to the PIC.

B. The SWAP shall include, but is not limited to the following operations:

1) Any Hot work involving welding, burning, heating, and any other spark producing activity or potentiaignition source outside the designated “welding shop”.

2) Work requiring entry in any tank or confined space.

3) Work where there is a danger of falling into the sea or any working over water activity.

4) Work involving the use of unapproved electrical equipment (i.e.; camera, flashguns, radios, cel

telephones etc.).

5) Work on any pressurized system where there is a possibility of pressure being released.

6) Work on electrical or mechanical equipment requiring energy isolation to ensure the safety opersonnel. Any Lock-Out/Tag-Out Energy Isolation (LOTO) conducted on SAR Rigs shall follow therequirements of HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP / Appendix No.1 / SWAP Form - Example.

7) Work on electrical equipment in hazardous areas to eliminate sources of ignition.

8) Work carried out below sea level (i.e.; columns, pontoons, tanks, etc.) that might affect the stationkeeping, structural integrity, stability of the Rig or certification.

9) Work that might affect or disable the Rig’s safety systems (i.e.; firefighting, gas detection, watertighdoors etc.).

10) Man riding operations, this shall include the use of a man-ridding air hoist, work baskets whethersuspended by a crane or air hoist.

11) Personnel transfer to or from MODU to supply vessel.






12) Work involving perforating or acidizing operations, radioactive materials, explosives or otherdangerous substances.

13) Work on/or near moving equipment where safety barriers and guards have to be bypassed.

14) Work involving heavy lifts with material handling equipment (i.e.; cranes, BOP hoists etc.) that arenear maximum safe working loads (85%).

15) Any crane lift that is determined to be a “Critical Lift” (as defined in G.I. 7.028, Section 5.0).

16) Opening the Master Dump Valve.

17) Flaring and/or flow testing of wells.

18) Maintenance of the draw-works, pumps, rotary table, top drive systems, engines, generators, watertreatment plant, life boat, all Derrick sections, deep water wells or tanks.

19) Pressure testing BOP’s.

20) Cementing operations.

21) Removing well heads.

22) Installation and testing of all Contractor equipment.

23) Any maintenance on the accumulator unit.

24) Any raising or lowering of the mast.

25) Slipping and cutting drill line.

26) Any Rig up or Rig down by a Workover Rig over an existing wellhead (as defined in SA OIM19.016).

27) Any repair to the jacking or ballasting system of an offshore rig (MODU).

28) Any work to be performed or equipment to be moved near or around overhead power lines.

Note: This list is not definitive, if in doubt, use the SWAP.

C. SWAP Form

The SWAP form (refer to HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP / Appendix No.1 / SWAP Form - Example) musbe issued, as appropriate for specific work on a specific site. The SWAP form is for work defined inparagraph 4.B of this procedure.






5. Responsibilities

A. Contractor Rigs

1) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor Rig Line Management Staff to fully implement theiapproved PTW procedure.

2) It is the responsibility of the Aramco Liaisonman on a contractor rig, to ensure that contractopersonnel comply with their PTW procedure. He shall do this by reviewing the filed PTW forms aleast once a month and periodically monitor work being conducted under the PTW.

3) The Aramco Liaisonman must be notified by the contractor of all permits before they are issued. Heshall “initial” all permits beside the signature of the contractor “permit issuer” to acknowledge

notification of the work.

4)

The SA Liaisonman shall be responsible for ensuring safe operations for any “Hot Work” within 10feet of the wellhead.

He shall:

a. Review the contractor PTW before work starts.

b. Determine if the mitigations and safety precautions specified for this work are adequate for safeoperations.

c. Recommend additional mitigations if he determines that the safety precautions in HSERM / A A-12 / SWAP / paragraph No.4.b are not adequate.

d. When HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP / paragraph No.4.a, b and c are completed to hissatisfaction, he shall initial the contractor PTW form beside the signature of the issuer.

5) He has the responsibility to stop work and advise the issuer of his action any time he determinesthe safety of the job or any unsafe conditions in the area do not meet the conditions on thecontractor work permit. He shall advise the issuer to take action to correct deficiencies beforeallowing the job to resume.

B. Saudi Aramco (SAR) Rigs

1) The PIC (Offshore Installation Manager (OIM) / Barge Master (or designate))

Responsible for the overall control of the SWAP and shall ensure:

a. All work requiring a SWAP is identified.

b. SWAP contains a clear description of the work to be done, the location, start time and duration.






c. SWAP activities that may interact or affect one another are clearly and effectively cross-referenced and managed.

d. All other work, which would create a hazard if undertaken at the same time, is made safe andsuspended.

e. All persons involved in the preparation of SWAP’s and responsible for the supervision andperformance of the job are identified.

f. SWAP’s do not extend beyond 12 hours or end of tour, whichever occurs first, and any workcontinuing after a tour change is not resumed until a new SWAP is issued.

Exception: If “ long term isolation” is required that extends past the time limits (12 hours orend of tour), the long term isolation shall be performed as per HSERM / A / A-19 /

LOTO.

g. The following activities shall only be issued by the PIC:

1. Work on safety systems (i.e.; Fire / Gas detection, lifesaving etc.).

2. Hot work in hazardous location areas.

3. Entry into all confined space.

4. Work over water.

2) SWAP Issuer

Responsible for the work area in which the task is to be performed. He shall ensure that:

a. All hazards associated with the proposed job have been identified.

b. All Safety measures required for the job have been identified in a JSA.

c. Pre-Job Safety meeting to be held prior to each SWAP task and JSA to be reviewed.

d. The work site is examined; the safety measures are in place and remain in effect for the durationof the job. I.e. barricades, PPE and gas testing.

e. The persons conducting the work are aware of the precautions to be taken, the safety equipmento be used and the procedures to be applied during the period of the SWAP.

f. The work site is inspected prior to work commencing, at any time work is suspended or restarted and on completion of the job to verify that it is left in a safe condition.






g. Before SWAP cancellation or closeout, ensure that all precautions or isolations required to bewithdrawn are completed, and any associated systems are returned to normal operating

condition.

3) SWAP Receiver

The senior person assigned to the task. He shall ensure:

a. The operation of the SWAP system and requirements of the SWAP are understood by allpersonnel associated with the identified task and the applicable procedures are followed.

b. Any additional instruction or training is given to the work group to ensure understanding of theSWAP and the specific precautions required for the work.

c. The conditions and precautions specified in the SWAP issued for the job are fully understood andadhered to.

d. When a job has been completed or suspended, the SWAP Issuer is informed and the SWAPdocument returned and/or signed off and the worksite is made safe.

6. Issuance and Approval of SWAP form

A. The receiver requests SWAP from the Issuer.

B. The issuer shall issue the SWAP form after he (or his designated representative) has visited the site

performed the appropriate gas tests, listed applicable precautions and restrictions and reviewedaspects of the job with the receiver. The issuer's and receiver's signatures must be on the completedform.

C. Before issuing the SWAP, all necessary actions to approve the proposed work and/or possibleconfiguration changes must be completed. The issuer must confirm that the receiver's certificate is validand approved for the type of work to be done.

D. The issuer must obtain the approval and signature of other operations supervisors (Issuers) whoseoperations will be affected, before issuing a permit.

E. During an Emergency the issuer may permit work without a SWAP. However, he should issue a SWAPas soon as he can. This section is only applicable to the actions of workers during the implementationof the rig Emergency Response Plan (ERP).

F. The issuer and receiver are jointly responsible for the safety of people and equipment in the area. Theissuer is responsible for specifying precautions so the work can be done without incident. The receiveris responsible for performing the work in accordance with the conditions and requirements agreed uponwith the issuer and written on the SWAP.

G. The SWAP is for specific work on a specific site. Transfer from one craft to a different craft is nopermitted.






H. The receiver of a SWAP must keep a copy in his possession or within view of the job site for theduration of the job so that it may be available for inspection and cancellation if necessary. If he must

leave the job site, he shall, if the issuer concurs, relinquish supervisory control to another certifiedreceiver, until he returns. The alternate receiver’s name and badge number must be written on theSWAP by the issuer.

7. Right to Stop Work and Cancel SWAP

A. The Issuer

May stop a job and withdraw a SWAP if he feels that safety of the job does not meet with conditionsspecified on the work authorization.

1) When work is stopped the Issuer must pick up the SWAP, write the reason for stopping the workthe time and other relevant information.

2) When conditions are safe again the issuer may issue a new SWAP.

B. The Receiver

Has the responsibility to stop work and advise the issuer of his action any time he feels the safety of the job or any unsafe conditions in the area do not meet the conditions on the SWAP. He and the issueshall take action to correct deficiencies and resume the job.

C. All Unnecessary Personnel

Whose presence adversely affects the safety of the job must be removed and kept from the job site orwork shall be stopped.

8. Closing SWAP Documents

SWAP’s shall be closed by the signatures of both the issuer and the receiver.

9. Filing SWAP’s

Upon completion of the work and after the SWAP is closed (as per paragraph 8), the 3 copies shall befiled together and retained on the rig for no less than 12 months.

10. Training and Certifi cation

A. Training

SWAP courses are conducted by Planning and Technical Services/Training and ProfessionaDevelopment Unit.






The purpose of the courses is to acquaint potential issuers/receivers/gas testers with the SWAPProcess.

B. Certification

Upon successful completion of the SWAP course and any required pre-requisite course (HazardRecognition, Gas Tester), the candidate shall be issued a certificate of achievement.

C. Any person Issuing or Receiving a SWAP

Persons issuing or receiving a SWAP must have in his possession a valid issuer or receiver certificate,as appropriate.

D. The Department must maintain Records

All departments within the scope of this document must maintain records of their SWAP issuer receiver certified personnel. Certificates expire two years after the date of issue, accordingly issuersand receivers must be recertified every two years.

11. Periodic Reviews

All departments within the scope of this document are required to review their own operations to ensurecompliance with this procedure.

12. SWAP Form

The SWAP form (HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP / Appendix No.1 / SWAP Form - Example) is a numbered,triplicate “ carbon copy” type document.

A. Whi te - Original to be kept at the site of the work being performed or in the custody of the receiver.

B. Pink - Second copy to be displayed on the SAP control board while the SWAP is active.

C. Yellow - Third copy to be retained by the issuer while the SWAP is active.



In addition to this procedure, the Rig Operator shall have readily available the following:

A. G.I.2.100 - Work Permit System.

B. OIM 19.016 - Oil/Water Well Workover Activities Instruction.






C. HSERM / A / A-19 / LOTO.






Appendix No.1





A-13

Monthly HSEPerformance Monitoring

(Score Card)





A-13 / Monthly HSE Performance Monitoring (MHPM) Score Card

1. Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to provide a means of identifying and quantifying KPI’s (Key PerformanceIndicators) as identified in the Drilling and Workover (D&WO) Annual HSE Plan.

2. Scope

The scope of this procedure is applicable to Saudi Aramco Rigs (SAR) and all contractor rigs.

3. Responsibility

A. Saudi Aramco (SA) Liaisonman/Foreman

It is the responsibi lity of the SA Liaisonman/Foreman to:

1) Ensure that the report is completed as required.

2) Verify correctness of entered data and make corrections, if needed.

3) Forward to his Superintendent for validation.

B. Superintendent

It is the responsibili ty of the Superintendent to:

1) Review the form for correctness and make corrections, if needed.

2) Validate and sign the form.

3) Forward completed form to the Drilling Operational Excellence & Compliance Division (DOE&CD)on schedule, the third day of each month.

C. DOE&CD

Data entered in the Monthly Rig HSE Performance Scorecard shall be verified by DOE&CD duringregular rig visits.

1) Documentation shall be examined and sampled against the input data.

2) Discrepancies, in data sampled, shall be recorded and corrected.

3) The SAR Liaisonman shall be made aware of all data discrepancies.

4) The SAR Superintendent shall be made aware of all data discrepancies.





A-13 / MHPM / Cont inued

5) Contractor management shall be made aware of all data discrepancies.

6) Upload the HSE scorecard results into Rig Best system.

4. Defini tions (Refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A)

A. Days Without Lost Time Accident/Incident (LTA)

This is the total number of days the rig has worked without an LTA. This figure should include the LTAfree days brought forward from previous contracts.

B. Man Hours

This is the total number of hours worked (on tour) by the rig crew (50 personnel, each person works a12 hour tour, 50 x 12 = 600) Work hours must include all leased labor who are under the directsupervision of the drilling/service contractor this includes catering crew. Agency labor performing theduties of regular crew must be included. Third party labor such as service companies (casing crews,Wire line crews etc.) are not considered agency labor and should not be included in the man hours(refer to IADC for guidance).

C. Personnel on Board (POB)

This is the total number of rig crew assigned to the rig, this includes lease labor under the directsupervision of the drilling contractor such as catering crew and all day visitors to the rig in that 24 hourperiod.

D. A Lost Time Accident/Incident (LTI)

A work-related personal injury or illness which prevents a person from conducting his/her assignedduties, in a restricted or unrestricted capacity, beyond the “tour” or watch during the incident occurred.

A factor to be considered when classifying an injury or illness is the ability of the employee to evacuatethe facility during an emergency.

An LTI includes death or occupational injury or illness incurred by a work-related activity during regularon-tour or on-watch duty. Personal injuries incurred during crew boat/helicopter transport, crewchange (to or from the rig), and during hours at the rig but off tour are not classified as LTIs.

If an employee’s work-related injury or i llness affects his abili ty to make their next scheduled“ tour” of duty, it shall be classified as an LTI if:

1) In the judgment of the rig Medic, the employee, after examination cannot be issued a Full Dutyrelease or a Restricted Duty Injury release and return to his next scheduled “tour”.

Or






2) In the judgment of the doctor, the employee, after examination, cannot be issued a Full Duty releaseor a Restricted Duty Injury release and return to their next scheduled “tour”, except as outlined in

the IADC ASP Guidelines. Provided the doctor issues a Full Duty release or Restricted Duty Injuryrelease following examination, time delays due to transportation, or while awaiting examinationresults, shall not be used in classifying LTI’s.

Full Duty release or Restricted Duty Injury release from a doctor before returning to work on his nextregularly scheduled hitch, the personal injury shall not be classified a LTI.

E. A Fatality (FAT)

FAT is a work-related injury or illness that results in death. A FAT is a Recordable incident.

5. Procedure

A. General Information

1) The report form is a Microsoft Excel spread sheet;(Refer to HSERM / A / A-13 / MHPM / Appendix No.1).

a. Do not delete formulas.

b. The layout of the form must not be altered.

c. All data entered must be numerical.

d. The completed report must be submitted to DOE&CD by the 2nd day of each month.

2) Completing the form

a. D&WO SMS Element No.3 – Communications

1. Weekly Safety Meetings

Enter the total number of weekly safety meetings conducted at the rig site that day.Comments required (topics discussed, who lead the meeting).

2. Pre-tour Meetings

Enter the total number of pre-tour meetings conducted at the rig site that day.Comments required (topics discussed).

b. D&WO SMS Element No.4 – Competency and Train ing

1. Employee Training

Enter percentage (%) of rig employee training completed as per Training matrix.






c. D&WO SMS Element No.6 – Safe Operations

1. General Safety and H2S Orientation Meetings

Enter the total number of personnel registered and received General Safety and H2Sorientation that day.

d. D&WO SMS Element No.8 – Emergency Preparedness

1. Pit DrillsEnter the total number of pit drills conducted by the rig on that day.

2. Trip Drills

Enter the total number of trip drills conducted by the rig on that day.

3. H2S Release Emergency Drill

Enter the total number of H2S release emergency drills conducted, comments required(Monthly requirement).

4. H2S Rescue Drill

Enter the total number of H2S rescue drills conducted, comments required (Weekly for eachcrew).

5. Fire FightingEnter the total number of firefighting drills conducted by the rig on that day, commentsrequired where applicable, start fire pumps as part of the drill.

6. Rescue Boat Drill

Enter the total number of Rescue Boat drills conducted, comments required.

7. Abandon Ship Drill

Enter the total number of Abandon Ship drills conducted, comments.

e. D&WO SMS Element No.9 – Incident Reporting and Analysis

1. Aramco Safety/Operational Alerts

Enter the total number of Aramco Safety/Operational Alerts received and reviewed.

2. Lost Time Injury/Illness Case (LTI)

The total number of LTI that occur that day must be inserted, comments required.






3. On-Job Fatality (FAT)

All Fatalities that have occurred that day must be entered, comments required.

f. D&WO SMS Element No.11 – Continuous Improvement

1. Days Without LTI

This is the total number of days the rig has worked without an LTI insert the total number ofdays under the month date, this shall be a running total.

g. Environmental Protection

1. Oil Spills

All oil spills that have occurred that day must be entered, comments required.

h. General

1. Man Hours

This is the total number of hours worked (on tour) by the rig crew, insert the total number ofrig crew hours for that day.

2. POB

This is the total number of persons aboard the rig. Insert the rig crew POB for that day.






SA-DWO-HSERM-AR-001-R0 / Created: 01/13 / Las t Review: 01/13 / Next Review: 01/17Owner: VP-D&WORevision(s) identified by a Vertical Bar in the Right Margin Page 115 of 236


Appendix No.1





A-14

Job Safety Analysis





A-14 / Job Safety Analysis (JSA)

1. Purpose

The purpose of th is Drilling and Workover (D&WO) Job Safety Analys is (JSA) procedure is to:

A. Provide a means of identifying workplace hazards prior to performing work.

B. Identify the control measures necessary to reduce the risks associated with those hazards to a levelwhich is As Low As Reasonably Practicable (ALARP).

C. Communicate the hazards and the control strategies to the workers involved in or affected by the work

2. Scope

The scope of this procedure is applicable to Saudi Aramco Rigs (SAR).

3. Responsibilities

It is the responsibility of the Person In Charge (PIC) to ensure that the Job Safety Analysis process (JSA) isutilized in the safe planning of work activities.

4. Definitions

A. Risk - probability that during a period of activity a hazard will result in an incident/accident with

definable consequences.

B. Hazard - An object, condition or behavior with the potential to interrupt or interfere with the orderlyprogress of an activity. The source may be from substances, machinery, stored energy, physicalmethods of work or organization of the work itself.

C. Risk Reduct ion Measure - any provision (behavioral, hardware or procedural) that eliminates orreduces the hazard.

D. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) - A JSA is a process for identifying hazards or potential hazards that canbe anticipated during the performance of a specific job, and the control strategies required to make thework safe. The threshold of the control measures is ALARP. The JSA process is focused at the

specific supervisor and/or crew level. The JSA must be completed prior to the start of the job. Re-assessment must also be completed when a significant change of scope occurs or if conflicting workis being done.

The JSA involves both the site supervision and employees involved in the work. Aramco Liaisonmanwho direct the work being carried out by service company workers have to ensure the service companyhave and use a comparable process (JSA) or manage the work with this procedure.





A-14 / JSA / Continued

E. Hazard Control Strategies

1) Engineering Controls - Engineering control of hazards deals with the elimination or isolation of thehazard from the worker, and physically limits the workers exposure to the hazard. Engineeringcontrols are the preferred method of controlling hazards.

2) Admin istrative Controls - Administrative controls deal with the directing of people and includepolicy, procedure and training. Administrative controls reduce or limit the amount of exposure anemployee has to a specific hazard.

3) Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) - PPE is the final line of defense against hazards in theworkplace. It is implemented only after other reasonably practicable means of eliminating a hazardhave been attempted.

5. Procedure

A. General Information

JSA’s shall be used to ensure that all hazards relative to the site’s work activities have been identifiedand controlled. It shall be noted that extreme hazards encountered while performing emergencyresponse duties during events such as well blowout, explosion, vessel collision, structural failure, facilityfire etc., do not require independent JSA’s since those subjects are accounted for within the SafetyManagement System (Emergency Response Manual, Well Control Manual etc.). Extreme hazardssuch as those listed need only to be incorporated into JSA’s if they pose a real threat simultaneous toother work activities. Some examples of this situation would be the potential for well control problems

while running tubulars or the possibility of structural failure while performing rig modifications. The JSAmust be reviewed with all workers involved in or affected by this job.

B. Jobs That Requi re a JSA

1) First time jobs or where people have little experience on the job.

2) Jobs that are not done very often.

3) Jobs that have high incident rates or safety concerns.

4) If conditions change while performing the job that create new hazards.

5) If there are a number of jobs happening close to each other.

6) Whenever a permit to work is required.

7) When there is no written procedure in place.

C. For the assessment process to be effective, it must be systematic and consider all aspects of aparticular activity.






The assessment process shall:

1) Consider human work time risk factors relating to sleep deprivation and fatigue. Address correctiveactions that result from sleep deprivation/fatigue caused by work periods beyond the normal 12hour per day tour; long crew change travel without a reasonable sleep period prior to starting work;extended work periods beyond normal 12 hour per day multiple days in a row; and environmentalfactors (extreme heat/cold).

2) Address what actually happens in the workplace or during the work activity.

3) Consider non-routine activities such as repair work, well testing, diving operations etc.

4) Address the possibility of changed circumstances during the activity, for example tour change ortemporary stoppage of the job.

5) Give careful consideration to what circumstances or hazards have changed since the last time theactivity was carried out.

6) Consider human factors. Poor communication, inadequate leadership, lack of application etc. areexamples of how behavioral issues can influence the successful outcome of an activity. Suitablecontrol measures should be developed and applied to mitigate these circumstances also.

D. How to Conduct a JSA

1) Determine whether a formal JSA is needed (Refer to HSERM / A / A-14 / JSA / paragraphNo.5.B).

2) Review any existing documents or JSA’s already developed for this job. The use of a generic JSAas a sole source process is prohibited as per Section 5.F of this procedure.

3) Decide who the JSA team members shall be. The JSA must be led by the supervisor or someonecompetent in the JSA process.

4) Break the job down into basic steps. A balance needs to be struck between making the steps toogeneral, resulting in missing specific steps and their associated hazards, and too detailed, leadingto excessive steps. It is recommended that each job should be limited to a maximum of ten steps. Ifmore than ten steps are required, it is usually better to break the job into multiple jobs, fordeveloping JSA’s. Each step should begin with an action word (e.g. open, remove, check) and endwith a subject (e.g. pump, hoist, valve). This part of the preparation can be done by watching theworker do the job) Do not include statements like “conduct safety meeting” in the basic stepssection of the JSA. That should be in the Preventive Measures section of the JSA.

5) Identify who shall do that step then record that worker on the JSA.

6) Identify the potential hazards for each step. To assist in identifying hazards, questions such as thefollowing can be asked:

a. Can any body part get caught in or between objects?






b. Do tools, machines, or equipment present any hazards?

c. Is equipment fit for purpose?

d. Could equipment operating limits be exceeded?

e. Can the worker make harmful contact with objects?

f. Can the worker slip, trip or fall?

g. Can the worker suffer strain from lifting, pushing, or pulling?

h. Is the worker exposed to extreme temperatures?

i. Is excessive noise or vibration a problem?

7) Recommend ways to control the hazards (safety measures).

8) Identify who is responsible for the individual control measures and record on the JSA. This personmust be competent to do what he is assigned to do. e.g.; if you require control measures such as“gas testing” or inspect “rigging hardware” , the assigned person must be competent in this skillset.

9) Complete the JSA form.

10) Review the JSA with the workers as per Section 5.4 of this procedure.

11) Perform the job.

12) Review and update the formal JSA.

E. Communication

Before commencing the work activity, all personnel involved (directly or indirectly) must be informed ofthe results of the assessment and fully understand their roles and responsibilities.

This communication may be accomplished via a Pre-job Safety Meeting (PJSM) or Pre-Tour Meeting(PTM). If the review takes place more than twelve hours prior to the work activity actually commencing,the JSA must again be reviewed immediately prior to starting the task to ensure that the conditionshave not changed or a re-assignment is called for. Similarly if the JSA for a task was completed by theOff-going crew then the crew, assuming responsibility for completion of that task must review andupdate the JSA for their continued use.






F. Generic JSA

To simplify the JSA process and reduce the requirement to re-write the same information every time arepetitive task is undertaken, a catalogue of Generic JSA’s may be constructed. The informationdetailed on these Generic JSA’s may then be used to form the foundation of Task-Specific JSA’s whichare completed for particular work activities.

Note: If Generic JSA’s are used to manage the risk of work activities they shall always be reviewed andupdated by the crew performing the task and shall never be considered to be adequate asstandalone documents without review and revision as necessary.

G. Filing JSA Documents for Review

1) Generic JSA’s shall be maintained on the rig in an electronic format. Adequate space shall be

allowed between successive steps, hazards and mitigation to allow the user to add to the documentwhen preparing the job specific JSA.

2) Job specific JSA’s shall be filed on the rig for a 6 month period to facilitate the audit process. It isrecommended that the JSA and PJSM document that is linked to the work gets filed together.







A-15

Safety Inspectionand

Reporting Procedure





A-15 / Safety Inspection and Reporting Procedure (SI&RP)

1. Purpose

D&WO Safety Inspection Process is a monitoring function. It is conducted on all rigs to find and report existingand potential hazards in the on-the-job area. Its objective is to help fulf il l Corporate and Departmentalpolicy of providing and maintaining a safe and healthy work environment for SA and Contractor employeesalike.

D&WO uses both the Continuous and Planned Specific Interval types of inspections. Comprehensive check listsare used so that important items/areas are not overlooked. The inspection program shall incorporate auditing ofelements of the D&WO Safety Management System (SMS). These audits check the implementation andcompliance of various elements in the SMS programs of both D&WO and the contractor.

2. Scope

The scope of this procedure is applicable to Saudi Aramco Drilling Rigs (SAR) and all Contractor Rigs.

This procedure does not supersede corporate requirements. Where this process conflicts with corporaterequirements, corporate requirements shall apply.

3. Planned Specific Interval Inspection(s)

A. Annual General Inspections for Saudi Aramco owned rigs.

B. Safety Inspections for all rigs.

C. Environmental Health Inspections for all rigs.

D. ATTEST SMS audits of all rigs.

E. SMS Compliance audits of all drilling contractors (Contractor compliance to their Corporate SMS, not D&WO SMS)

F. SAR Quarterly Safety Inspections (QSI), SAR Rigs Only.

G. MODU 3-Month Compliance Inspection (3-MCI) (Refer to DOE&CD website / on-line forms).

H. Onshore 3-MCI (Refer to DOE&CD website / on-line forms).

I. MODU Bi-Annual Safety Inspection (Refer to DOE&CD website / on-l ine forms).

J. Onshore Bi-Annual Safety Inspection (Refer to DOE&CD website / on-line forms).

K. Intermittent Inspections on an as-needed basis for all rigs which includes but is not limited to:

1) Hand Tools, Power Tools and Equipment Pre-Use Inspections





A-15 / SI&RP / Continued

Hand tools are those tools for which the hand provides the motive force, e.g. shovels, hammers,wrenches etc. Power tools are those tools which have an integral motive force. For the purpose of

this section, equipment refers to all other items used by a worker to assist him in the performance ofhis job, including PPE, e.g., fall protection harness, webbing slings, ladders etc. A worker mustperform a pre-use visual inspection of any hand tool, power tool or equipment, when using it for thefirst time during his tour to ensure it is free from defect or deficiency and is properly equipped withany guard or safety accessory required by Aramco standards. This is an undocumented inspection

2) Pre-Spud Inspection

After moving a rig onto a new location but prior to spud, the PIC (person in charge) shall ensure that theworksite and rig equipment is inspected as per the Pre-Spud Checklist.

3) Rig / Location Release Inspection

When vacating a well site, the PIC shall ensure that the site is inspected as per the Rig/Location ReleaseChecklist.

4) PIC Safety Inspection

This inspection is performed once a week by the foreman on a SAR rig and by the Aramco Liaisonman orContractor PIC on a contractor rig. He shall take this opportunity to verify the rig’s compliance with theInspection Policy by examining the documentation for the previous weeks required inspections andcomparing it to the actual condition of the worksite. The PIC shall sign and date the original inspectiondocument after he has completed his inspection, adding any comments from his observations. This shallbe the only documentation required to verify his weekly inspection responsibilities. This is not intended to

be a detailed site inspection by the PIC. It is an opportunity to verify and enhance the efforts of the workersresponsible for all other inspections.

5) Daily Mobile Equipment Pre-Use Inspection

This shall be performed by the operator of any mobile equipment, e.g., forklift, elevating work platform,motor vehicle etc. This documented inspection shall conform to the OEM (Original EquipmentManufacturer) recommended pre-use inspection process. The inspection report or log shall be availablefor review.

6) Daily Crane Pre-Use Inspection

Pre-operational inspections shall be performed by the crane operator daily, prior to use, during tourchanges, or whenever operators are changed, using the appropriate daily inspection checklist (SA9466 Crane Operators Checklist). This inspection report shall be available for review.

7) Derrick Mast Inspection

The driller shall ensure that the derrick is inspected once a week as per D&WO / SWIM-001 / SectionNo.4 / D&M. He may delegate the inspection to the derrick man but retains responsibility for itscompletion.






8) Monthly DROPS (Zones) Inspection

The Rig Operator PIC shall ensure that monthly DROPS inspections are completed in the 5 derrick zonesas outlined in HSERM / A / A-7 / DP. These inspections shall be documented

9) Drillers Pre-Tour Inspection

This inspection shall be conducted by the oncoming driller at the start of his tour. It shall be done inconjunction with the turnover at tour change. The inspection shall be performed as per HSERM / A / A-24/ Pre-Tour Checklist/Driller Handover and be documented on the attached checklist.

10) Continuous Inspections

The Continuous Inspection portion of the Inspection Program is covered by Liaisonman/Foreman

inspecting the work area; by contractor supervisory personnel (as applicable) and by employees at alltime.

11) Travelling blocks

Testing and setting procedures are to be put in place by the Rig Contractor and posted clearly onthe drill floor. The limiting devices testing and setting procedures are to be performed by the Drillerat the beginning of each tour and immediately after drill line slip and cut operations. These checksare to be reported in the IADC tour book for each 12 hours (Refer to HSERM / C / C-7 / TB ).

12) Other Inspections

Additional inspections by Environmental Health shall be scheduled by the Manager for each of the SAowned facilities on an annual basis.

13) Pre-Commencement Inspection

A comprehensive pre-commencement inspection shall be conducted on a ll rigs by a combinedD&WO operations and safety team prior to acceptance of any rig under a new contract, rigsmoving from one department to another and following any offshore rig shipyard visit. All criticaldeficiencies are to be rectified before drilling into the first potential hydrocarbon zone (Refer to D&WO /DOE&CD / PCP-003).

4. Safety Inspect ion and Report ing (SIR)

The SIR process provides a formal inspection system to identify deficiencies in; D&WO Contractorfacilities, equipment, work areas and documentation. Its objective is to meet corporate and departmentalpolicies for providing and maintaining a safe and healthy work environment for SA and Contractoremployees alike.






A. Responsibi li ti es

1) Drilling Operational Excellence & Compliance Division (DOE&CD) - Safety Compl iance Unit (S

Responsible for the verification of all submitted contractor safety inspection reports.

2) DOE&CD - SCU - Lead Field Compliance Coordinator

a. Shall develop an annual Bi-Annual Safety Inspection schedule to visit and audit each rig/asset underhis area of responsibility twice per year with 6 monthly intervals (Bi-Annual Safety Inspection).

b. Ensure that a detailed Bi-Annual Safety Inspection (MODU / Onshore) for each rig under his area ofresponsibility is completed twice per year (as far as is reasonably practicable) as per the developedschedule (Refer to DOE&CD website / on-line forms ).

c. Ensure that when completing the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection the DOE&CD - SCU - Safety InspectionCheck List is completed in its entirety and submitted to the DOE&CD - SCU Administrator.

d. Ensure that a copy of the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection closeout meeting attendance sheet is submittedto the DOE&CD - SCU Administrator on the completion of each inspection.

e. Ensure that a copy of the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection deficiency action list is submitted to theDOE&CD - SCU Administrator on the completion of each inspection.

f. Ensure that a copy of the emergency drill report, conducted as part of the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection,is submitted to the DOE&CD - SCU Administrator on the completion of each inspection.

g. Ensure that a copy of the “ Comprehensive Environmental Health Assessment” (CEHA) checklistis submitted to the DOE&CD - SCU Administrator on the completion of each inspection.

h. Ensure that a copy of the “ Environmental Performance Assessment” (EPA) checklist is submittedto the DOE&CD - SCU Administrator on the completion of each inspection.

i. Ensure that all “MODU / Onshore Quarterly Safety Inspection (3-MCI) checklists” submitted bythe D&WO contractor are reviewed, and any identified issue, that shall immediately effect the safeoperation of the rig, are addressed with the relevant D&WO Superintendent immediately (Refer to:D&WO / DOE&CD website / on-line forms for current forms).

j. Apply sound risk management techniques when mitigating risk to SA operations.

k. Ensure that all potentially significant Safety issues are identified on the D&WO Morning Report.

l. Perform a RCA of all repeat / reoccurring inspection / audit deficiencies.






3) DOE&CD - SCU - Field Compliance Coordinator

As part of the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection, the DOE&CD - SCU Field Compliance Coordinatorshall:

a. Complete a detailed Bi-Annual Safety Inspection, for each rig under his area of responsibility, twiceper year as far as is reasonably practicable, as per the developed schedule.

b. As part of the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection, he shall ensure that the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection CheckList is completed in its entirety and submitted to the DOE&CD - SCU Lead Field ComplianceCoordinator with a copy to the DOE&CD - SCU Administrator on the completion of each inspection.

c. He shall ensure that an opening meeting is conducted with the D&WO Contractor PIC and SALiaisonman as a minimum, before the start of the inspection.

d. He shall conduct a closeout meeting with the D&WO Contractor PIC and SA Liaisonman as aminimum, before leaving the rig.

e. He shall submit a DRAFT copy of the final deficiency action list to the drilling contractor PIC and theSA Liaisonman before leaving the rig.

f. As part of the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection, he shall ensure that a copy of the completed Bi-AnnualSafety Inspection closeout meeting attendance sheet is submitted to the DOE&CD - SCU Lead FieldCompliance Coordinator with a copy to the DOE&CD - SCU Administrator on the completion of eachBi-Annual Safety Inspection.

g. As part of the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection, he shall ensure that a copy of the completed Bi-AnnualSafety Inspection deficiency action list is submitted to the DOE&CD - SCU Lead Field ComplianceCoordinator with a copy to the DOE&CD - SCU Administrator on the completion of each Bi-AnnualSafety Inspection.

h. As part of the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection, he shall ensure that a copy of the completed emergencydrill report, conducted as part of the Bi-Annual Safety Inspection, is submitted to the DOE&CD - SCULead Field Compliance Coordinator with a copy to the DOE&CD - SCU Administrator on thecompletion of each Bi-Annual Safety Inspection.

i. Ensure that all “Inspection checklists” submitted by the D&WO Contractor are reviewed and anyidentified issue that shall immediately effect the safe operation of the rig are addressed with therelevant D&WO Superintendent immediately.

j. Apply sound risk management techniques when mitigating risk to SA operations.

k. Ensure each document includes; Name of the DOE&CD - SCU – Field Compliance Coordinator, hissignature, ID number and date.

4) DOE&CD - Safety Compl iance Unit (SCU) Administrator

a. Ensure that all relevant submitted reports are uploaded into the SCU Data Base.






b. Ensure that all Bi-annual report documents are submitted for each inspection.

c. Ensure that all Bi-annual report documents are collated ready for submittal to the relevantDepartment Manager.

d. Prepare a cover letter for each complete Bi-annual report, addressed from the DOE&CD -Division Head to the relevant Department Manager.

e. Perform Trend Analysis of all findings from all inspection / audit reports.

5) Drilling Contractor Person In Charge (PIC)

a. Act as Inspection Team Chairman for all inspections under his responsibility.

b. Ensure that the current Inspection Check List (Rig Safety Inspection Check list) is completedmonthly.

c. Ensure that the completed check list is submitted to the relevant SA Superintendent andDOE&CD – SCU - Lead Field Compliance Coordinator by the last day of each month.

d. Submit a copy of the Inspection checklist to the SA Liaisonman.

e. Implement the closeout of identified deficiencies.

f. Make the SA D&WO Liaisonman and Superintendent aware of items of critical importance.

g. Make the SA D&WO Liaisonman and Superintendent aware of items outstanding for prolongedperiods.

H. The Drilling Contractor PIC (Person in Charge) is responsible for the timely completion of theQuarterly Safety inspection.

I. Ensure that a post-inspection meeting with the Rig Liaisonman and the contractor PIC isconducted at the end of the inspection, all deficiencies shall be discussed.

J. Ensure that the final report is completed in a timely manner and submitted to the SA D&WOSuperintendent, Liaisonman and the DOE&CD Lead HSE Advisor by the 5th day of each month.

K Monitor the closeout of identified deficiencies and make the Rig SA Superintendent andLiaisonman aware of items outstanding for prolonged periods.

6) Drilling Contractor Management

a. Responsible for the implementation of this Safety Inspection and Reporting (SIR) procedure.

b. Provide training and mentoring support to inspection committee members as required.






c. Responsible for providing Drilling or Workover rig(s), including all auxiliary equipment, that arestructurally and mechanically capable of performing according to the agreement between the

Rig Operator and the Company (SA).

d. Conduct and document a physical inspection of its rig and all auxiliary equipment on a regularbasis - no less than once per month.

e. Implement a comprehensive Preventive Maintenance (PM) program to keep equipment in goodworking condition.

7) SA Liaisonman

Responsible for communicating this procedure to all D&WO Contractor Rig senior personnel.

a. Acts as a team member for Manager's general inspection (as required) and Superintendent'squarterly inspection.

b. Conducts continuous inspections and BOPE/H2S drills. Monitor that corrective actions prescribed aredocumented and carried through and provides feedback to Superintendent.

c. Ensure that the current inspection Check List (Rig Inspection Check list) is completed for everyinspection.

d. Monitor the closeout of identified deficiencies and makes the Rig Superintendent aware of itemsoutstanding for prolonged periods.

8) D&WO Superintendent

Responsible for monitoring submitted reports for issues of significance to safety and operations. Heshall ensure all safety related issues are promptly addressed.

a. Acts as team member for Manager’s general inspection (as required).

b. Ensures inspections under his responsibility are conducted to schedule.

c. Ensures that appropr ia te corrective action is taken to remedy deficiencies as quickly as possible.

d. Monitor the closeout of identified deficiencies.

e. Provides a wr i t t en summary/quarterly inspection find ings to Manager, with copy toDOE&CD and LPD.

f. Conducts a new rig acceptance inspection and ensures all critical deficiencies are rectifiedbefore drilling the first hydrocarbon zone.

g. Ensure that all potentially significant issues are adequately mitigated using sound riskmanagement techniques and are identified on the D&WO Morning Report.






9) D&WO Manager

a. Enforce compliance with this procedure.

b. Ensure inspections under his responsibility are conducted to schedule.

1. Conduct an Annual General Inspection of SA owned rigs with a team composed of thefollowing:

A. Superintendent

B. Liaisonman / Foreman

C. Department Safety Advisor

D. Loss Prevention representative.

2. Ensure that SAR QSI’s are conducted on all SA owned rigs in his department.

3. Ensure that effective corrective actions are implemented for the identified deficiencies.

10) Environmental Department

Provides periodic health inspection services as required. Additional inspections by Environmental Healthshall be scheduled by the Manager for each of the SA owned facilities on an annual basis.

5. SAR Rig Quarterly Safety Inspection (QSI)

The SAR QSI process provides a formal inspection system to identify deficiencies in; facilities, equipment,work areas and documentation. Its objective is to help fulfill the corporate and departmental policy ofproviding and maintaining a safe and healthy work environment for SA and Contractor employees alike.

A. Responsibi li ties

1) Department Safety Advisor

a. Provide training and mentoring support to QSI committee members as required.

b. Perform Trend Analysis of all f indings from all inspection reports.

c. Perform a RCA of all repeat / reoccurring inspection deficiencies.

2) SA Liaisonman

a. Ensure that the current SAR QSI Check List (Rig Inspection Check list) is completed before theday of the scheduled inspection.






b. Ensure that a pre-inspection meeting with the Inspection Team and the contractor PIC isconducted on the day of the inspection.

c. Ensure that a post-inspection meeting with the Inspection Team and the contractor PIC isconducted at the end of the inspection.

d. Monitor the closeout of identified deficiencies and make the Rig Superintendent aware of itemsoutstanding for prolonged periods.

e. Ensure closed out items from the SAR QSI are identified in the monthly rig HSE monitoringreport.

f. Act as Inspection Team Chairman for all inspections under his responsibility.

3) Superintendent

a. Ensure that inspections under his responsibility are conducted to schedule.

b. Ensure that SAR QSI inspections are conducted by a team composed of the following, as aminimum; Liaisonman/Foreman, drilling contractor personnel as required and Loss Preventionrepresentative as per G.I. 6.011.

c. Act as Inspection Team Chairman for one SAR QSI inspection per rig per year under hisresponsibility.

d. Monitor the closeout of identified deficiencies.

4) Manager

a. Ensure that inspections under his responsibility are conducted to schedule.

b. Perform Annual General Inspection by leading SAR QSI’s in accordance with D&WO HSE Plan.

c. Monitor the closeout of identified deficiencies.

5) Loss Prevention Department

a. Shall ensure that inspections under his responsibility are conducted to schedule as per G.I.6.011.

b. Monitor the closeout of identified deficiencies as per G.I. 6.011.

c. Coordinate with the operations department to schedule quarterly safety inspections as per G.I.6.011.

Note: The point of contact for each department shall be the Department Safety Advisor .






6) Inspection Team Chairman

a. The Inspection Team Chairman shall be the person leading or init iating the SAR QSI.

b. Ensure that a pre-inspection meeting with the Rig Liaisonman and the contractor PIC (Personin Charge) is conducted on the day of the inspection.

c. Ensure that a post-inspection meeting with the Rig Liaisonman and the contractor PIC isconducted at the end of the inspection, all deficiencies shall be discussed.

d. Ensure that the final report is completed in a timely manner (within 14 days of the initialinspection) and made available to; the Rig, the Drilling or Workover Department, LPD andDOE&CD.

e. Monitor the closeout of identified deficiencies and make the Rig Superintendent aware of itemsoutstanding for prolonged periods.

B. Critical Equipment Safety Inspection List

1) Priority 1 – Past Accident History

a. Cranes, Forklift and Lifting Gear.

b. Accumulator and BOP’s.

c. Mud Pumps.

d. Draw-works and Hoisting System.

e. H2S and Fire Protection System (Detection and Response).

f. SCR Module and Cabling.

g. Generators.

2) Priority 2 - High Potential Outcome

High potential outcome if a future accident occurs in terms of harm to people (individual or group).

a. Derrick and Crown Assembly.

b. Choke Manifold and HP Co-flex Hoses.

c. Fall Protection Equipment.

d. Pipe handling Equipment.

e. Shakers, Centrifuges and Gas Separation Equipment.






f. Substructure.

g. Flare-line and Ignition System.

h. MCC Room.

3) Priority 3 - Operations Disturbance and High Cost

Operations disturbance and high cost effect of the outcome if equipment failure occurs.

a. Hand and Power Tools.

b. Mud Tanks and Circulating System/Piping.

c. Mud Watch System.

d. Drillers Panel.

e. Fuel Storage.

f. Compressed Gas Cylinders.

g. Rig Site Office and Communications.

h. Rig Site Accommodation.

6. Inspection Procedure

A. An inspection team Chairman shall lead the inspection.

B. Each inspection team shall review the previous inspection report to confirm that the identified itemshave been rectified.

C. The inspection team shall review the rig inspection checklist and clarify with rig management anyidentified items.

D. The inspection team members shall report all unsafe conditions, unsafe acts, housekeepingdeficiencies, deviations from procedure and any other item which may directly or indirectly impactsafety.

E. Drilling Contractor Safety Management Systems (SMS) shall be examined and sampled; this shouldinclude Permit to Work, Hazard Recognition Program and the contractors Training Matrix. Personnelshall be interviewed to establish their understanding of the contractor SMS.

F. After noting the deficiencies, hazards or other deviations and suggestions for corrective actions, theteam chairman shall ensure a report is submitted to the SA D&WO Superintendent and the DOE&CDLead HSE Advisor by the 5th day of each month.






G. Inspection of non-compliance items shall be tracked through D&WO safety inspection tracking systemfindings.

7. Corrective Actions and Follow-up

A. The rig Liaisonman/Contractor PIC shall initiate corrective actions as soon as possible. He shallconsult with the Department HSE Advisor and the area LPD when necessary.

B. The Rig Liaisonman shall ensure that a proper follow-up system is maintained. The Rig Superintendentshall monitor the follow-up and close out of all identified items.

C. Where an IDLH (immediately dangerous to life or health) exists, it shall be controlled immediately.

D. Any deficiency not closed shall be identified and highlighted in the following inspection.

E. Superintendents must be informed in writing, of any identified deficiency that remains open for morethan 90 days.

F. Best Practices identified during the inspection should be circulated throughout D&WO via the D&WO Alerts System “ Safety Flash” use pictures if possible to clarify points.

Note: No Priority 1 items shall remain open.

8. Standard Non-Compliance Repor t Format (Refer to HSERM / A / A-15 / SI&RP / Appendix No.1 /

Example):

A. Item

Insert the item number.

B. Finding

Insert a description of the non-compliance, e.g. MACP not posted, no space out available, drills notconducted.

C. Standard

Insert the applicable standard, e.g. ASME B30.9.

D. Action Required

What does the standard say e.g. API RP 54 9.3.14 says “ When personnel cannot performnecessary duties from ground level, well servicing rigs shall use a working platform around thewellhead. The platform should be of sufficient size and strength to support two workers” .






E. Action By

Who is responsible for the implementation of the standard and rectifying the deficiency, e.g. Pool Arabia, Ensco, and Aramco? It may be necessary to identify individual personnel by name or job title,e.g. Toolpusher, Electrician, Aramco Liaisonman.

F. Priority

Each identified deficiency must be given a priority of closeout ranging from 1 thru 4:

1) Priority 1 - Close immediately.

2) Priority 2 - Close within 2 weeks.

3) Priority 3 - Close before the next scheduled inspection.

4) Priority 4 - Negotiated closeout date.

G. Priorities Classification

1) Priority 1

Close immediately: These items shall be deemed immediately hazardous to life and or the safeoperation of the rig. These items should be closed immediately, if they cannot be closed before theinspection team leaves the rig, suspension of operations should be considered.

2) Priority 2

Close within 2 weeks: These items shall not be immediately dangerous to life or the safe operatingcondition of the rig; they may pose significant hazards which can be controlled for restricted periodnot greater than 2 weeks, with adequate mitigations. If adequate mitigations cannot beimplemented, this item should be categorized as a Priority 1.

3) Priority 3

Close before the next scheduled inspection: these items shall not be immediately dangerous tolife or the safe operating condition of the rig, they shall not pose a significant risk to personnel or thesafe operation of the rig, and they shall require minimal mitigation to control the hazard until apermanent remedy is implemented. If adequate mitigations cannot be implemented, this itemshould be categorized as a Priority 2.






4) Priority 4

Negotiated closeout date: These items shall not be immediately dangerous to life or the safeoperating condition of the rig; they shall not pose a significant risk to personnel or the safe operationof the rig. They shall require a significant amount of time to implement for example; equipment mayhave to be ordered, imported or installed. Repairs that can only be completed when the rig is notworking may be required. Specialized training may be required that may have limited trainingproviders with restricted training schedules.

H. Date Opened

Enter date item was first recognized.

I. Remarks

This will be a short statement to give guidance as to how this item can be closed, e.g. retrain allpersonnel in the Permit to Work System. Ensure that the requirement for the completion of closeout isrealistic. Requiring all the rig crew to be trained in the next 7 days would not be realistic as at least 30%of the crew will be absent at any given time. In the case of items outstanding from previous inspections,identify when the identified deficiency was first opened.

9. Trend Analysis / Root Cause Analysis

All findings, as a result of any of the stated inspections identified in this procedure, shall have trendanalysis performed, generic / reoccurring deficiencies will be the subject of a root cause analysis.






SA-DWO-HSERM-AR-001-R0 / Created: 01/13 / Las t Review: 01/13 / Next Review: 01/17Owner: VP-D&WORevision(s) identified by a Vertical Bar in the Right Margin Page 137 of 236


Appendix No.1

NON-COMPLIANCE REPORT (Example)

DATE:PRIORITY1=Immediately

2=Within 2weeks3=Before thenext 3-MCI4=IndicatenegotiatedClose-OutDate

Number of items closed from last

inspection

LOCATION:Number of items outstanding

from previous inspections

0

TYPE: Number of new items frompresent inspection

0

ITEM FINDINGSSTANDARDReferenced

StandardQuote

RESPONSIBILITY PRIORITYDATE

OPENEDREMARKS / Guidance to Close

OUTSTANDING FROM PREVIOUS INSPECTION

ITEMS IDENTIFIED IN CURRENT INSPECTION





A-16

Managementof

Change





A-16 / Management of Change (MOC)

1. Purpose

Establish and implement procedures to formally manage changes or additions (both temporary andpermanent) so that process, facility, and equipment safety is not compromised.

Note: Deviations from SA High Risk HSE Requirements (HRHSER) shall be in accordance with HSERM / A / A-18 / WHRHSER.

2. Scope

A. Changes to process technology, chemicals (New and/or before Field Test Trials), equipment,procedures, facilities, buildings or organizations, at D&WO facilities and SAR Rigs, shall be subjectedto a MOC process.

B. This scope covers Contractor Rigs which shall follow their approved MOC process.

C. Departments and/or Divisions shall be subject to the MOC process when opening and/or closing a newdepartment and/or division.

D. This process does not apply to changes in kind; exact replacement, restoration, or repair.

E. Temporary and emergency changes (including removal, disabling, bypassing or modifying anemergency shutdown device or system) are included in the scope of the MOC process. However,bypassing of such devices for servicing only is not part of the MOC process. Rather, the Safe Work

Authorization Procedure (SWAP) for SAR Rigs and Permit to Work (PTW) for contractors shall be used

to manage this type of work.

F. This process does not apply to movement of personnel within D&WO. However, movement ofpersonnel into D&WO from outside organizations shall be subjected to the MOC process.

3. Definitions

A. CMC

Change Management Control.

B. Change Package

The Change Package is made up of all the documentation necessary for the submittal, review andimplementation of the change. A sample Change Request Form is provided in HSERM / A / A-16 /MOC / Appendix No.1.





A-16 / MOC / Cont inued

C. Change in Operational Arrangements

Where changes to an operational arrangement occurs, for example, from 24-hour operating to daylightmanning only or when facilities are mothballed, should be subject to the change review process.

D. Emergency Change

An Emergency Change s ituat ion exis ts when changes are requi red and implemented to:

1) Prevent injury to personnel or damage to equipment.

2) Correct immediate safety and fire hazards or extreme service failure.

3) Prevent significant loss of productivity or assets.

E. Hazard Identification

The process of recognizing that a hazard exists and defining its characteristics.

F. Management of Change (MOC)

A process to systematically evaluate, authorize, implement, and document changes to existing assetsto ensure that safeguards are in place to eliminate the possibility of introducing hazards because ofchanges.

G. MOC Coordinator

A person assigned by the department head to record, track and report the status of the MOC requests.

H. Operating Window

The established parameters for the specific process within which the operator has the discretion tomanipulate the various operating parameters.

I. Originator

The person, usually a proponent employee, who identifies the necessity for a change.

J. Permanent Change

A Permanent Change is one, which, once implemented, shall be a permanent feature of the design,operation or procedural control of the facility.

K. Pre-Start-up Safety Review (PSSR)

A field verification that all criteria identified in the change review process with regard to physicalinstallation, procedural amendments and training are in place. The Originators Supervisor shall ensurePSSR is conducted.






L. Risk Analysis Checklist (RAC)

A checklist found in the MOC form used to identify potential hazards and operability problems.

M. Replacement-in-Kind (RIK)

A replacement-in-kind is one in which the old equipment is replaced with an identical part or anequivalent part approved and specified by the applicable engineering standard or in the case of achange to process parameters these remain within the established operating window. Replacement-in-kind is not subject to MOC procedures. However, any replacement of equipment or minor update towritten procedures requires documentation in accordance with maintenance work requirements (e.g.,work orders in the case of equipment) or appropriate approvals in the case of procedures. Anyreplacement needs to include all necessary quality assurance, quality control, inspection and fieldverification.

Some examples of replacements-in-kind are:

1) Repairing equipment or piping.

2) Replacing equipment or piping with material meeting the same specification as the original.

3) Painting or coating to the original specification using the same or equivalent materials.

4) Revision of procedures to include updated associated references.

N. Risk

Combination of the frequency of occurrence and consequence of a specified hazardous event.

O. Significant Change

1) Any changes to parts, equipment, or facilities including changes resulting from purchasing areplacement with a non-identical make and model.

2) Any organizational changes.

3) Any significant Process Improvement Changes.

4) Any changes to standards, material specifications, operating conditions, methods, or procedures.

P. Temporary Change

A change implemented with the intent that the change is applied for a fixed duration. Temporarychanges that remain in place for longer than six months should be subject to the full permanent changeprocedures.






Q. Training Needs Analysis Change

A Training Needs Analysis is utilized to identify the necessary training required to ensure that personneare fully conversant with the equipment and operations within their facilities by identifying any requiredtraining needed because of a specific change.

4. Roles and Responsibil ities

A. Depar tment Manager

1) Ensure full implementation of this MOC process, including the MOC Process Flowchart.

2) Ensure the implementation of this MOC process is audited annually as per the SA – Safety

Management Guide - MOC, Guide Number 05-001-2006, Attachment A2, Section 9.0.

3) Assign MOC coordinator.

B. Division Head

Perform any necessary actions as a result of an MOC request if i t escalates to his level as perthe MOC flow chart (Refer to HSERM / A / A-16 / MOC / Appendix No.2).

These actions shall include but not be limited to:

1) Review the MOC request feasibility.

2) Ensure that the entire required approval route (flow chart) is followed.

3) Review previous MOC records for similar procedures and control methods.

4) Ensure the hazard identification section has been completed prior to the submittal of the MOCRequest.

C. Unit Head

1) Ensure MOC Process is in place for any change in his facility or area of responsibility.

2) Upon receiving MOC Request from originator, evaluate potential impacts and benefits.

3) Coordinate a Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA).

4) Review previous MOC requests for similar proposals and lessons learned.

5) Determine if MOC requires escalation to next management level based on Risk Assessmentchecklist in the MOC Form.






6) Complete the approved MOC Request Form and submit it to the MOC Coordinator with supportingdocumentation.

D. MOC Coordinator

1) Assign tracking number and keep records of all MOC requests.

2) Shall keep MOC request forms updated.

3) Submit quarterly report to the designated division head with pending MOC request.

5. Exclusions

A. Normal maintenance work, where parts or equipment are replaced by an identical part or equipment ofan identical make and model, is not covered by this procedure.

B. Minor Process or work procedure changes (modifications) are also excluded. Urgently neededchanges for an emergency are excluded from this process.

Note: Minor - Lesser or secondary in amount, extent, importance, or degree.








Appendix No.1





A-16 / MOC / Appendix No.1 / Cont inued






Appendix No.2 / MOC Flow Chart





A-17

Risk Management Manual





A-17 / Risk Management Manual (RMM)

1. Purpose

The overall purpose of this Drilling and Workover (D&WO) Risk Management Manual (RMM) is to outlinethe risk assessment and management activities to protect people and preserve company assets. Themanual shall be used in conjunction with the Risk Management Training Package.

2. D&WO Risk Management Policy

To assess and manage risks, D&WO Operation’s departments shall use a risk-based approach to identifyhazards, assess their likelihood of occurrence, and evaluate the potential consequences.

Hazards associated with the work within the scope of this manual shall be identified and associated risksdetermined, prioritized, and controlled.

Tools and procedures which shall be used to identify and control risks associated with D&WO Operations,ensuring the protection of people, property and environment, are described in this manual.

3. Scope

This manual applies to all onshore and offshore drilling and workover rigs, assets and facilities controlleddirectly by D&WO Operations. D&WO Operation’s contractor and service companies will execute aspectsof the programs and activities resulting from SA use of this manual. Contractors and service companiesshall also have a Risk Management System that meets the D&WO Risk Management Policy.

The Risk Management Process shall be applied in the following circumstances:

A. General

1) Operations in new areas or under new circumstances

2) Execution of new operational requirements.

3) Implementation of new technology.

B. Engineering (with Operations input) – Office based;(Refer to HSERM / A / A-17 / RMM / Appendix No.1)

1) Well Planning stage including Well Approval Process (WAP) and/or Workover Candidate Proposa(WOCP).

2) Well program development stage during well design and approval process.

C. Operations (with Engineering input) – Rig based (Refer to HSERM / A / A17 / RMM / AppendixNo.2)





A-17 / RMM / Cont inued

1) Well construction activities (D&WO).

2) Managing D&WO well related activi ties, e.g.:

a. Drilling program implementation.

b. Changes in well program.

c. Unplanned arising conditions.

D. Any other situation as may be required by management

4. Responsibilities

The following are the responsibilities in the implementation of this manual:

A. Managers

Managers shall provide adequate resources required for the implementation of Risk Management and Assessment in order to ensure that the Risk Management Policy is complied with. They shall takeoverall responsibility for the implementation of this manual for their respective departments and ensurethat Risk Management decisions are made at the appropriate management level.

B. Engineering – General Supervisors / Supervisors

Ensure that all hazards within technical/engineering designs are identified, risk assessed and adequatecontrols are in place.

C. Engineering - Drilling Engineers

Ensure that all hazards are identified in drilling programs, risk assessed and adequate controlsstipulated in the drilling program are in place.

D. Operations - Superintendents

Ensure that all hazards within operations activities in their respective divisions are identified, riskassessed and adequate controls in place at the planning stage prior to the approval of work to be

performed and during the execution of well programs. Ensure that the controls identified areimplemented.

E. Operations - Rig Foremen / Liaisonman / SAR Tool Pushers and other SAR Key personnel

Implement the Risk Management policy on site and have the required controls in place prior to andduring the execution of well programs including Rig moves.






F. Safety Advisors

Verify that the controls identified are implemented. They shall also provide advisory role and support forthe Risk Assessment and Management including the role of risk assessor.

G. Drilling Contractors and Service Companies

Contractors and service companies shall implement the controls identified by D&WO Operations. Inaddition, they shall also have a Risk Management System that meets the D&WO Risk ManagementPolicy.

H. Drilling Operational Excellence & Compliance Division (DOE&CD)

The DOE&CD shall be the Custodian of the Risk Management Manual which is a controlled document

Distribution, updates and revisions shall be in accordance with the D&WO Document ControProcedure.

5. Definitions

A. Risk

The chance that something or someone will be adversely affected by a hazard.

Risk can be defined as the combination of the likelihood or probability of an event and itsconsequences.

B. Hazard

An object, substance, condition, situation, practice or behavior with the potential to interrupt or interferewith the orderly progress of an activity being carried out and which has the potential to cause harm topeople, equipment, property or environment.

C. Consequence

An event or chain of events that results from the release of a hazard with a defined severity.

D. Probability/Likelihood

Is the chance of a hazard being released or of an incident/accident occurring or of the loss of control.

E. Risk Assessment

A formal process to assess the likelihood and consequences associated with identified hazards todetermine the risk and evaluate the acceptability of the risk.

Risk Assessment is an integral part of Risk Management.






F. Risk Management

The ongoing implementation of existing control measures, and identification and implementation wherepracticable of additional control measures to manage risk to levels that are tolerable and As Low asReasonably Practicable (ALARP).

Risk Management is an integral part of the D&WO Safety Management System (SMS).

G. Risk Matrix

A Technique used to determine qualitatively the ranking of a hazard based on the severity of its harm topeople, equipment, property or environment and its frequency of occurrence.

It is a methodology that matches the potential consequences of an event outcome with the probability

that the outcome will occur in order to establish an appropriate response.

6. Risk Management Process

The core process of Risk Management involves identifying hazards, systematically assessing andevaluating risks and applying risk reduction and control measures throughout an asset’s life cycle. Risksshall be documented, communicated and controls implemented (including necessary training and registerupdates). Reviews shall be made regularly to measure effectiveness and continual improvement.

The following are the sequential steps in Risk Assessment and Management core process which shall beindividually addressed in this manual:

A. Hazard Identification and Recording.

B. Risk Assessment and Evaluation.

C. Risk Reduction and Control.

D. Risk Communication and Documentation.

E. Risk Management Measurement and Review.

7. Hazard Identification and Recording Process

A. Hazard Identi fi cat ion

Hazards shall be identified through a series of simple questioning of the activity to be carried out. Itshall seek to answer the following questions:

1) What can happen, where and when?

2) Why and how can it happen?






3) What can go wrong?

4) What tools and techniques can be used to assist detection?

B. Hazard Recording

New Hazards identified in drilling and workover operations shall be recorded in a Hazard Registerwhich shall be updated continuously.

8. HAZOP (Hazard and Operabil ity)

In a HAZOP study, a multidisciplinary team of individuals systematically “brainstorms” the process undereview in a series of meetings using a set of guide words to structure the review.

HAZOP technique applies more to plants and machinery rather than Rig operations activities.

It can be used in D&WO for underbalanced drilling operations, SIMOPS, etc.

For more detail s, refer to SAER-5437 (SA HAZOP Guidelines)

9. HAZCOM

Hazardous Material Communication program (HAZCOM) is a comprehensive and structured system for thecommunication of chemical hazards to management and employees throughout SA.

HAZCOM consists mainly of two types of documents which have been prepared using informationfrom the chemicals Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS):

A. Chemical Hazard Bulletins (CHB); and

B. HAZCOM labeling for chemical containers.

Information from CHBs helps protect employees from unnecessary exposure to harmful chemicals in theworkplace; CHBs are developed within the Environmental Protection Department (EPD) to provideessential information on the safe handling of chemicals and are prepared in both Arabic and English.CHBs are an effective tool for providing the required minimum information for employees working withchemicals, and should be available for all chemicals in use on a rig location.

HAZCOM labeling is established within EPD to alert employees to hazards associated with chemicals andto provide precautionary information. All chemicals on a rig location shall have appropriate HAZCOMlabeling.

Further details are available on HAZCOM.






10. Risk Assessment and Evaluation

Once hazards have been identified, the associated risks are assessed and evaluated to estimate theprobability or likelihood of an incident occurring and evaluate the potential severity of the resulting loss inorder to determine the appropriate mitigating actions (controls).

The following are techniques/tools used for Risk Assessment in D&WO:

• Risk Matrix.

• Bow Tie.

• JSA.

A. Risk Assessment Matrix (see HSERM / A / A-17 / RMM / Appendix No.3)

1) The “Risk Assessment Matrix” technique shall be used as the main technique to assess risks forDrilling and Workover operations.

The Risk Assessment Matrix is a tool used to determine qualitatively the ranking of a hazard, basedon the consequence or severity of its harm to people, equipment, property, environment orcompany business, public image or reputation and its probability or likelihood of occurrence as wellas how frequently it could occur.

2) Qualitative Risk Analysis uses scales or ranking (e.g.: high/medium/low) to describe theseriousness of potential consequences and the likelihood or probability that those consequences

will occur.

The D&WO Risk Assessment Matrix provides guidance on assessing the likelihood and severity ofidentified hazards.

The proper use of the Risk Assessment Matrix is covered in the Risk Management Training Package.

The result of the assessment shall be summarized in a Risk Assessment Form (RAF), Refer toHSERM / A / A-17 / RMM / Appendix No.4.

The RAF is used to document the hazards associated with a particular project or activity, the threats(causes) that could result in a release of the hazard, the potential consequences, the potential risk

associated with the hazard, the control measures that are or will be put in place and the residual risktaking into account the effectiveness of these measures.

The RAF shall prioritize (rank) all hazards associated with a project or activity, and shall be usedprimarily during the project or process planning stage.






B. Bow Tie Analysis

The “Bow Tie” method is used to demonstrate how a particular hazard is controlled, and evaluate theeffectiveness of the controls. The results of this analysis are presented in a simple diagram (the BowTie diagram).

The Bow Tie combines the threat (cause) on the left hand side, the consequences on the right handside with the Hazard and Top Event in the middle. A schematic of the Bow Tie diagram is shown inFigure No.1.

Figure No.1: Bow Tie Schematic

In the Bow Tie, on the left hand side barriers are the controls which prevent or reduce the likelihood of a

threat resulting in a top event. On the right hand side recovery measures are the controls that limit theconsequences of the top event.

Bow-Ties should be developed for all major hazards (i.e. severity level 4 and 5) and high-risk hazardsidentified on the Risk Assessment Matrix.

An example of a simplified Bow Tie diagram is shown in Figure No.2 below.

Figure No.2: Bow Tie Analysis Example






C. JSA

The purpose of the JSA is to provide a means of identifying workplace hazards, implementing contromeasures necessary to reduce the possible effects of the hazard and communicating the strategies toworkers prior to performing the work.

For field implementation of a job process, the Job Safety Analysis tool (JSA) shall be used in place ofRisk Analysis. Further details of JSA and methodology are covered in HSERM / A / A-14 / JSA.

The SA JSA Form is shown in HSERM / A / A-17 / RMM / Appendix No.5.

11. Risk Reduction and Contro l Process

This is the step where measures are taken to eliminate, reduce, accept or avoid the risk analyzed in orderto control the undesirable effects of the risk or hazard.

For D&WO Operations, the main tool that shall be used is the Risk Assessment Matrix (Refer to HSERM / A / A-17 / RMM / Appendix No.3).

A. Risk Cont ro l Techniques

Risk Control techniques include the following:

1) Terminate: Measures are established to eliminate the risk completely.

2) Treated: Controls are implemented to reduce the risk to acceptable levels.

3) Tolerated: The risk is determined to be acceptable.

4) Transferred: The risk is toured to others or avoided.

Controls to be implemented must be reasonably practicable. That is, the control measures musbalance the level of risk with the amount of effort, time and money required to reduce the risk.

B. Risk Control Measures

The following measures are used for controlling specific risks and shown in preferred order:

1) Engineering Controls :

Risks are avoided, eliminated or minimized through appropriate engineering design. Variousengineering standards are in place in SA to address designs and implementation with minimumstandards for controlling hazards.

SA Engineering Standards (SAES), Drilling Manuals, and G.I.’s.






2) Admin istrative Controls:

These controls include administrative procedures, location and proximity, education, workassignments, substitutions, breaks and personnel rotations.

SA D&WO HSE Requirements Manual (HSERM).

3) Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Controls:

These are additional or supplemental interim measures to complement engineering andadministrative controls.

D&WO Loss Prevent ion Manual and D&WO HSERM.

12. Risk Communication and Documentation Process

A. Risk Communication

Following a risk assessment, controls to mitigate hazard consequences must be communicated by theapproving party to all parties concerned for implementation.

A key factor to the success of any Risk Management activity is risk communication.

Risk Management is an ongoing process which involves three significant topics which must becommunicated in various ways:

1) Analyzing the risk.

2) Treating the risk.

3) Monitoring the risk.

A structured communication process is required so that an informed decision about risk treatment canbe made. A proper risk communication will support Risk Management implementation and enhancestaff general awareness and Risk Management, recognition and understanding of the RiskManagement approach and a positive risk-awareness culture at all levels.

Risk communication can be done in the following ways:

1) Structured meetings.

2) Teleconferencing.

3) Detailed written program/instructions.






B. Risk Documentation

The various analyses done to assess risk prior the execution of an activity must be well documented ina formal report within which the members of the risk assessment team shall be identified. These reportsshall be included in the well file for D&WO operations and in the central projects database for otheroperations. The custodian of the documents shall be D&WO DOE&CD.

There shall also be a hazard register which shall be maintained and updated regularly with feedbackfrom projects, incident investigations, accident / incident reports, etc.

In the course of implementing a risk assessed project, there could be some planned activities which ifcarried out as designed, could result in a hazard which was not initially identified. These shall belessons learned. A database of lessons learned shall be maintained and made available to supervisorsso as to avoid mistakes that had been made in the past. This database is yet to be developed in

D&WO.

13. Risk Management Measurement and Review Process

The observations during implementation combined with the communication and documentationprocess will help in achieving the following:

A. Facilitate continuous monitoring and review of Risk Management.

B. To provide an audit trail for the follow-up of key actions related to the exposures being addressed.

C. To share and communicate Risk Management activities among all stakeholders, most particularly withthe field personnel who will be executing risk managed projects.

14. Training and Implementation Process

As part of the implementation phase of the Risk Management Process, D&WO shall conduct training ofpersonnel in Risk Assessment and Management including the implementation of the tools outlined in thisRisk Management Manual.

The relevant training requirements shall be included in personnel competencies and tracked through theTraining Matrix.

A Risk Management Train ing Package developed by D&WO shal l be used to t rain personnel in RiskManagement.

The following have been considered in a Risk Management Training Package:

A. Who is to be trained: Risk Assessor, Division Heads, Supervisors, Drilling Engineers, and RigForemen.






B. Training level: To be consistent with level of responsibilities.

C. Who will do the training: The Risk Management Training Package developed shall be delivered bythe Aramco Training department.

The Risk Management Training Package shall contain stated objectives, learning outcome, assessmentand materials.



Risk Management International Standards

A. Aust ral ian / New Zealand Standard AS/NZS 4360:1999. Risk Management.

B. Bri tish Standard BS 6079-3:2000. Project Management - Part 3: Guide to the management ofbusiness related project risk.

C. Canadian Standards Association CAN/CSA-Q850-97. Risk Management: Guideline for Decision-Makers.

D. Environmental Protection Agency 40 CFR Part 68 Accidental Release Prevention RequirementsRisk Management Programs Under Clean Air Act Section 112(r)(7).

E. IEC International Standard 300-3-9:1995, 1st Ed. Dependability management - Part 3: Applicationguide - Section 9: Risk analysis of technological systems.

F. IEC International Standard 62198:2001. Project Risk Management – Application guidel ines.

G. ISO 17776:2000(E). Petroleum and natural gas industries - Offshore production installations -Guidelines on tools and techniques for hazard identification and risk assessment.

H. ISO/IEC Guide 73:2002 (E/F). Risk Management - Vocabulary - Guidelines for Use in Standards1st Ed.

I. Japanese Industrial Standard JIS Q 2001:2001 (E). Guidelines for development andimplementation of Risk Management system.

J. National Fire Protection Association Fire Department Occupational Health and Safety StandardsHandbook (Supplement 7) Risk Management Planning.

K. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 1250. Recommended Practice in Emergency ServiceOrganization Risk Management.

L. NORSOK Standard Z-013. Risk and Emergency Preparedness.






Appendix No.1






Appendix No.2






Appendix No.3






Appendix No.4






Appendix No.5





A-18

Waiverof

High Risk

HSE Requirement(s)





A-18 / Waiver of High Risk HSE Requirement(s) (WHRHSER)

1. Purpose

The purpose of this Drilling and Workover (D&WO) procedure is to ensure all deviations from SA High RiskHSE Requirements (HRHSER) are subject to a suitable and sufficient risk assessment and to establish aprocedure (including the need for a formal risk assessment) to initiate, process, review, and approvedeviations from HRHSER.

Note:

A. HSERM / A / A-17 / Risk Management Manual / Appendix No.3 shall be utilized to determine the potential severity and/or consequence of the incident or potential incident. This procedure isapplicable to “High Risk” category deviations only.

When determining the risk associated with any planned deviation, it is the potential

likelihood and severity of the incident that may result as a consequence of that deviationthat must be assessed for risk.

Example; Removing the handrails from an elevated work platform and requiring personneto continue to use the platform. Personnel falling from height is the potential incident;

Severity (catastrophic, fatality) = 5Likelihood (probable) = 4

Severity X Likelihood = Risk Rating

5 X 4 = 20 High Risk; waiver required.

B. “Changes” to process technology, chemicals, equipment, procedures, facilities, buildings,personnel, contracts and/or organizations shall be in accordance with HSERM / A / A-16 /Management of Change.

2. Scope

This procedure establishes a standard for obtaining a Waiver to a HRHSER.

A. Deviations from HRHSER are not allowed unless justification is presented to D&WO Drilling

Operational Excellence & Compliance Division (DOE&CD) Division Head that establishes mitigationequal to or greater than the existing HRHSER.

B. The scope of an approved Waiver request is limited to the facility, rig, project, and HRHSER.Extending the scope of an approved waiver request to cover additional facilities, rigs, projects, orrequirements in the HSERM shall be accomplished by submittal of a new Waiver request, and itssubsequent approval.





A-18 / WHRHSER / Cont inued

C. This procedure is applicable to all departments within D&WO; including Saudi Aramco Rigs (SAR), SAfacilities, Contractors and Service Companies.

D. Approval shall be obtained prior to implementing any deviation from a HRHSER.

E. Waivers are for a specific time frame and shall not exceed 12 months in duration.

3. Defini tions (Refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A

A. Ini tiator: A Division Head or an Engineer in an operating unit who initiated and created a waiverrequest.

B. Originator: The Manager of the organization proposing to waive a HRHSER. The Originating

organization may be a Project Management Team, Operations, Maintenance or any other organizationwith a vested interest in the waiver of a HRHSER.

C. DOE&CD: The Division assigned responsibility to establish, update, maintain and monitor specificHRHSER documents and their requirements. Also tasked to conduct the Waiver Request Analysis andConditions of Approval.

D. VP-D&WO: HRHSER Waiver final approval authority.

4. Procedure

Approval to deviate from any HRHSER must be obtained from the manager of the proponent departmentaffected by deviation from the requirement, Drilling Operational Excellence & Compliance Division(DOE&CD) Division Head and the VP-D&WO. Approval to waive must be approved prior to deviating froma HRHSER. To minimize cost and schedule impacts, new projects are encouraged to obtain a Waiverrequest approval during Project Proposal development (Refer to DOE&CD website / on-line forms /HRHSER Waiver Request Form).

A. Ini tiation of a Waiver Request

1) To request approval to deviate from established HRHSER(s), the initiator shall initiate a waiverrequest.

To assist in expediting the Waiver review, attach all supporting documentation (Example; FormalRisk Assessment).

2) The Waiver request justification shall include a discussion of the impact of approving the Waiver.Document and support cost benefits or penalties by addressing the following items:

a. Decrease in safety or reliability.






b. Adverse environmental impact.

3) The Waiver request shall always identify and analyze other alternatives to waiving the HRHSER.

B. Waiver Request Submittal and Logging

Submit a Waiver request and all supporting documentation to DOE&CD Division Head. The Waiverrequest shall be assigned a tracking number and routed to the appropriate subject matter expert (SME)within DOE&CD to analyze the request and recommend disposition.

C. Waiver Request Analysis and Conditions of Approval

The Responsible DOE&CD SME shall be assigned the task of review and analysis of the Waiverrequest.

1) If the review determines that the Waiver request is not required, due to misinterpretation ormisapplication of a HRHSER, it shall be returned to the Originator with an explanation note by theDOE&CD SME.

2) If the review and analysis determines that the Waiver request is not supported and should berejected, it shall be returned to the Originator with an explanation of the rejection by the DOE&CDSME.

3) If the review and analysis determines that the waiver request should be supported and approved,then the analysis shall be documented. If the DOE&CD SME has identified specific factors orconcerns, these shall also be included in the analysis documentation. If there are conditions

associated with the approval of the waiver request, the initiator shall insert them. The DOE&CDSME shall provide the review analysis recommendation to the DOE&CD Division Head.

D. Waiver/Deviation Request Approval

The Waiver request is approved by obtaining signatures from the Department Manager(s), DOE&CDDivision Head and VP-D&WO.

E. Waiver Request Rejection and Appeal

1) The Originator shall accept the rejection recommendation or resolve the issue with DOE&CD.

2) If the Originator disagrees with the rejection decision, he must submit an appeal for reconsiderationto DOE&CD. DOE&CD shall attempt to resolve the issue. The final authority to approve or rejectshall rest with them.






5. Responsibilities

A. Ini tiator

1) A Waiver request is initiated and created typically by a Division Head or an Engineer. Provides allsupporting documentation to explain why waiving HRHSER is the best course of action available tothe Company.

2) The Initiator shall conduct a formal risk assessment in accordance with HSERM / A / A-17 / RiskManagement Manual.

3) Prepares responses to questions or requests for additional information from DOE&CD (Reviewing Authority).

B. Originator

Review the initiators Waiver request with the department manager for completeness then forward toDOE&CD for formal analysis.

C. DOE&CD Subject Matter Expert (SME)

Conduct a detailed analysis of the request for Waiver and provide recommendation (Approval orRejection) to the DOE&CD Division Head.

D. DOE&CD Divis ion Head

1) Receives request for Waiver from Originator and assigns SME to conduct formal analysis of thewaiver request.

2) Provides the Originator with the results of the analysis then forwards recommendation for approvalto VP-D&WO.

3) Conduct a detailed review of all aspects of “ After-the-Fact” Waiver requests, including whatallowed their occurrence.

E. VP-D&WO

Approves request for Waiver/Deviation based on DOE&CD recommendation.



A. HSERM / A / A-16 / Management of Change.

B. HSERM / A / A-17 / Risk Management Manual.






C. SAEP-302 - Instructions for obtaining a Waiver of a Mandatory SA Engineering Requirement.





A-19

Lock-Out / Tag-Out





A-19 / Lock-Out/Tag-Out (LOTO)

1. Purpose

The purpose of this Drilling and Workover (D&WO) Lock-Out/Tag-Out (LOTO) procedure is to protectpersonnel from the potential releases of stored energy or the startup of machinery or equipment that maycause injury. This specifically includes any maintenance activity where electrical, mechanical, steam,hydraulic, pneumatic or other energy source is present. Additional hazards may include heated,flammable, toxic, corrosive or chemical material.

2. Scope


3. Responsibilities

It is the responsibility of the Person in Charge (PIC) to ensure compliance with this procedure.

4. Procedure

A. Supervisors shall identify all energy sources that are subject to this procedure. Prior to performing anymaintenance or repair work on any machine or equipment, a Saudi Aramco Rig (SAR) Safe Work

Authorization Procedure (SWAP) or contractor Permit to Work (PTW) shall be completed before thework is commenced.

Step Action1 Notify all affected personnel that an energy isolation procedure is being utilized.

2 Shut down all the equipment by following the normal shutdown procedures.

3 Isolate the equipment from all potential energy sources.

4 Complete the appropriate tags for energy isolation devices.

5 Verify that all potential energy sources have been isolated.

6 Complete the LOTO (Energy Isolation) and store keys in PIC controlled lock box duringisolation (if an equally restrictive procedure is in place that will be an acceptable alternative).

7 Advise person requesting isolation that zero energy source established.

8 Person requesting isolation to verify zero energy source established. Initiate the work.

B. Function Testing

Should a function test be required following inspection and/or repairs to equipment which is in isolationand prior to reintroducing it into service, approval must first be granted by the SWAP or PTW issuer.

During the function test all safety practices and procedures in place are to be adhered to.





A-19 / LOTO / Continued

C. Restor ing Service to Equipment

1) After completing the work the locks shall be removed and only the person who placed their lock andsigned the tag may remove the lock.

The last person removing their lock and releasing the “ DO NOT START” tag shall close out thepermit and notify all affected parties that the repairs are complete and the equipment is ready forservice.

The individual restoring energy shall:

a. Inspect the work to ensure that nonessential items have been removed.

b. Ensure that the equipment components are intact.

c. Check the work area to ensure all employees are safely positioned or removed from theequipment.

d. Notify all affected employees.

2) In the event a person is unavailable to remove the lock, the following procedure shall befollowed:

a. Verify that the employee in not on-tour.

b. Advise PIC and gain approval to remove absent employee’s lock.

c. Ensure that the employee knows that their lock/tag has been removed before they return towork.

D. Locks and Tags

Each rig shall provide standardized tags and individually keyed locks as required to implement theprocedures. The keyed locks shall be of a specific design used only for LOTO. Tag attachment devicesshall be on a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking and non-releasing. During isolations,keys to all locks used in the LOTO process shall be kept in a lock box under the control of the PIC andshall not be kept on individual’s person.

E. Long Term Isolation Procedure

In the event it is necessary to isolate a piece of equipment for an extended period of time ormore than one tour, the following procedure shall be followed:

1) A permit shall be raised; a record of the isolation shall be made in the Isolation Log added on the Active Isolation List displayed in the control room/permit issuing office. The equipment shall beisolated, locked and tagged out. When isolation of the equipment has been completed (i.e. removalof equipment) the electrical SWAP or PTW and all safeguards shall remain in place.





A-19 / LOTO / Continued

2) When work/repairs have been completed on the isolated equipment, the following steps shall befollowed. All LOTO equipment shall be removed following all safety procedures. Once the

equipment is back in service and all systems have been returned to a safe condition the SWAP orPTW shall then be cancelled.

F. Training

The purpose of this training is to protect personnel from the potential releases of stored energy or thestartup of machinery or equipment that may cause injury. This specifically includes any maintenanceactivity where electrical, mechanical, steam, hydraulic, pneumatic or other energy source is present.

Additional hazards may include heated, flammable, toxic, corrosive or chemical material. Employeesrequired to perform LOTO procedures shall receive training in these procedures before performing theprocedures. This training shall be documented.







A-20

Third PartyEquipment Installation





A-20 / Third Party Equipment Installation (TPEI)

It is the responsibility of the SA Liaisonman, OIM/PIC to ensure that all personnel follow the rules outlinedwithin HSERM / A / A-20 / TPEI.

1. Equipment Installation

3rd Parties or Subcontractors must advise the SA Liaisonman of plans to ship equipment to the rig.

To facilitate a survey on arrival, the drilling contractor will initiate its third party permit to install equipmentprogram.

Note: Tools or equipment used down hole, or equipment that presents no risk to facility or personnel doesnot require a third party permit to install equipment program.

2. Documentation

The equipment shall be shipped to the rig with all required compliant certification such as Lifting GearCertification.

3. Confirm

The OIM/PIC or his designee shall review the provided documentation and verify it conforms to theequipment received.

4. Inspect

The OIM/PIC or his designee shall appoint a Mechanic/ Electrician/Other Supervisor to survey theequipment for obvious external and internal damage and overall condition.

5. Assess Risk

The OIM/PIC, Toolpusher or Barge Master/Engineer shall agree to placement of the equipment and identify obvioushazards of such placement and assess any risks created, reducing such risks as far as reasonably practicable.

A current file of Installation of Equipment shall be maintained.

6. Audit

On a six-month basis, each third party unit shall be subject to the full inspection and audit verifyingconformance with the Installation Permit and Checklist.





A-20 / TPEI / Cont inued

7. Disconnection

When the equipment is to be removed from the rig, the process will reverse with the OIM/PIC or hisdesignee appointing maintenance personnel to safely disconnect the unit from rig.







A-21

Confined Space





A-21 / Confined Space (CS)1. Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to introduce within Saudi Aramco Rigs (SAR) the planning, procedures

and practices necessary to enable people to work safely in confined spaces.

2. Scope


3. Responsibility

A. Supervisor or Competent Designate

1) Conduct a Hazard Assessment.

2) Determine the type of personnel protective equipment (PPE) required.

3) Prepare a Confined Space Rescue Plan.

4) Must ensure the workers are trained in confined space entry and the safe use of all the personnelprotection equipment prior to entering any confined space.

5) Ensure all atmospheric tests are completed by a competent person and logged before personnelenter a confined space.

B. Worker

1) Be trained in confined space entry.

2) Know the procedures for confined space entry.

3) Ensure all atmospheric tests are completed by a competent person and logged before personnelenter a confined space.

4) Ensure all atmospheric tests are completed by a competent person and logged before personnelenter a confined space after the area has been unoccupied for extended periods of time, such as;tea breaks, meal breaks.

5) Ensure all safety precautions are in place before entering a confined space.

6) Ensure you understand the procedure for rescue.





A-21 / CS / Cont inued

4. Introduction

This policy gives guidance on the precautions necessary to avoid the hazards associated with the entryinto and working in CONFINED SPACES. Entry into a confined space for any purpose shall only beconsidered when all reasonably practicable steps have been taken to deal with the problem in some otherway. Once the decision has been made that entry to a confined space is necessary, positive steps shall betaken to eliminate or minimize the risk from the hazards of dangerous fumes, gasses, liquids or solids or oflack of oxygen, harmful residues radiation or moving machinery within the confined space, or from anyother source such as fume or dust emission from an adjacent plant or area which might cause hazard tothe operation. Positive measures in making the working conditions safe shall always be ensured by meansof strict supervision.

5. Defini tions (Refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A)

In order to understand these requirements, it is necessary to know the meaning of certain terms andphrases that are used within Aramco standards, which is the basis that the international standards and bestpractices regulations call up as a minimum requirement.

A. Competent Person

"One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings orworking conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who haswrit ten authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them". By way of trainingand/or experience, a competent person is knowledgeable of applicable standards, is capable ofidentifying workplace hazards relating to the specific operation, and has the authority to correct them.

Some standards add additional specific requirements which must be met by the competent person.

B. Confined Space

1) A space or volume which:

a. Is not intended as a regular workplace.

b. Has restricted means of entry and exit.

c. May have inadequate ventilation and/or an atmosphere, which is either contaminated oroxygen-deficient.

d. Is at atmospheric pressure during occupancy.

2) Confined spaces include, but are not limited to:

a. Storage tanks, spud cans, pre-load tanks, mud pits (land rigs or MODU), trip tanks, voids,process vessels, boilers, pressure vessels, batch mix tanks and other tank-like compartments.

b. Open-topped spaces of more than 1.5 meters in depth such as rotary opening when the bellnipple is installed, pits which are not subject to good natural ventilation.






c. Pipes, sewers, shafts, ducts and similar structures.

d. Any shipboard spaces entered through a small hatchway or access point, cargo tanks, cellulardouble bottom tanks, duct keels, cofferdams, ballast and oil tanks, and void spaces, but notincluding dry cargo holds.

3) Contaminant

Any dust, fume, mist, vapor, gas (H2S) or other substance, the presence of which can be harmful tohealth.

4) Exposure Standard

An airborne concentration of a particular substance in the workers breathing zone, exposure to

which, according to current knowledge, should not cause adverse health effects nor cause unduediscomfort to nearly all workers.

The exposure standard can be of three (3) forms:

a. Time Weighted Average (TWA) - The average airborne concentration of a particular substancewhen calculated over a normal eight-hour (8) workday, for a five-day (5) working week.

b. Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL) - A fifteen (15) minute TWA exposure which should notbe exceeded at any time during a working day even if the eight (8) hour TWA average is withinthe TWA exposure standard. Exposure at the STEL should not be longer than fif teen (15)minutes and should not be repeated more than four (4) times per day. There should be at least

sixty (60) minutes between successive exposures at the STEL.

c. Peak - A maximum or peak airborne concentration of a particular substance determined overthe shortest analytically practicable period of time, which does not exceed fifteen (15) minutes.

5) Explosive (Flammable) Range

The range of flammable contaminant/air mixture between the Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) and theUpper Explosive Limit (UEL).

6) Hot Work

Welding, thermal or oxygen cutting, heating, and other ignition producing or spark producingoperations.

7) Lower Explosive Limi t (LEL)

In relation to a flammable contaminate, this is the concentration of the contaminant in air belowwhich the spread of a flame does not occur on contact with an ignition source.






8) Stand-by Person

A competent person assigned to remain on the outside of, and in close proximity to, the confinedspace and capable of being in continuous communication with and, if practicable, to observe thoseinside, initiate rescue procedures and operate equipment used for entry to the confined space,where necessary.

9) Sufficient Oxygen

The minimum oxygen content in air should be 19.5 % by volume under normal atmosphericpressure.

6. Risk Assessment

A. Risk Ident if ication

For any work proposed, all confined spaces shall be identified, signposted and physically secured and itshould be determined whether the work proposed can be undertaken from outside, that is, whetherentry of persons to the confined space is necessary. If it is decided that such work can be undertakenfrom outside, then precautions should be taken to physically prevent unauthorized entry to the confinedspace.

B. Major Hazards

Fatalities or severe injuries could occur as a result of the following:

1) Oxygen deficiency in the confined space caused by:

a. Slow oxidation reactions of either organic or inorganic substances. An employer shallensure that before carrying out work involving entry to a confined space, a written riskassessment is carried out by a competent person and takes into account the following:

1. The work to be done, including whether it is necessary to enter the confined space.

2. The methods by which the work can be done.

3. The hazards involved and associated risks.

4. The actual method and plant proposed.

5. Rapid oxidation (combustion).

6. Dilution of air with an inert gas.

7. Absorption by grain, chemicals or soils.

8. Physical activity.






b. The presence of contaminants on surfaces or in the atmosphere. Contaminants may be in theform of solids, liquids, sludge’s, gases, vapors, fumes or particles.

The source of atmospheric contaminants encountered may include:

1. The product stored. (For example, disturbing decomposed organic material in a tank canliberate toxic substances such as Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S).

2. The operation performed in the confined space. (For example, welding or brazing withmetals capable of producing toxic fumes).

3. Operation of plant and services (For example, being trapped by augers, crushed by rotatingor moving parts such as agitators).

4. Drowning by accidental flooding.

5. Suffocation by solids (For example; bulk tanks).

6. Work being conducted in adjacent spaces such as welding and gas cutting.

c. Other Hazards

Undertaking work in confined spaces may greatly increase the risk of injury fromhazards, such as:

1. Noise - This may be caused by hammering or the use of equipment within the confined

space.

2. Temperature - either too hot or too cold, which can result from the work process or theweather conditions, or where appropriate ventilation or appropriate clothing is not suppliedor worn.

3. Radiation - within a confined space caused by the use of X-rays, radiation gauges,isotopes, lasers and welders.

4. Manual handling

d. Factors to be Considered

Tasks undertaken in confined spaces can present serious and unique hazards. Therefore, anumber of factors need to be considered.

These include the following:

1. Arrangements for rescue, first aid and resuscitation.

2. The number of persons occupying the space.






3. The number of persons required outside the space to maintain equipment, essential for theconfined space task, to ensure adequate communication with and, observation of the

persons within the confined space, and to properly initiate rescue procedures.

4. The soundness and security of the overall structure and the need for illumination.

5. The identity and nature of the substances last contained in the confined space.

6. The steps needed to bring the confined space to atmospheric pressure.

7. The atmospheric testing to be undertaken and the parameters to be assessed before theentry permit(s) are issued.

8. All hazards which may be encountered.

9. The status of medical fitness and training of those persons intending to enter the confinedspace.

10. Adequate instruction of those persons in any work procedure required, particularly thosewhich are unusual or non-typical, including the use and limitations of any personal protectiveequipment and mechanical or other equipment to be used.

11. The availability and adequacy of appropriate personal protective equipment, protectiveclothing and rescue equipment for all persons likely to enter the confined space.

12. Whether Signs:

A. Comply with SA and International Standards, Policies and Procedures.

B. Indicate that entry is permitted only after signing the entry permit in a mannerappropriate to the workplace.

C. The need for addi tional protective measures, for example:

1) Prohibition of hot work in adjacent areas.

2) Prohibition of smoking and naked flames within the confined space and whereappropriate, the adjacent areas.

3) Avoidance of contamination of breathing atmosphere from operations or sourcesoutside the confined space, such as from the exhaust of an internal combustionengine.

4) Prohibition of movement of equipment such as forklifts in adjacent areas.

13. Whether cleaning is required in the confined space.

14. Whether hot work is necessary.








8) Response of the instrument to high and low concentrations of flammable gas or vapors (forexample, false zeros).

9) Oxygen deficiency causing an erroneously low reading.

10) Oxygen enrichment where the instrument may act as an ignition source causing explosion.

11) Difference in atmospheric pressure, which may cause false readings in some sensors. Equipmentfor continuous monitoring of gases and vapors should be intrinsically safe and equipped with anaudible alarm if danger develops. Instruments should be calibrated in accordance with themanufacturer’s guidelines. If an acceptable result cannot be obtained without continuous forceddraft ventilation, then the ventilation device should be suitably tagged to ensure it is notdisconnected while the inspection or other work is in progress. The standby person is responsiblefor monitoring the proper operation of the forced draft ventilation device.

C. During Entry

Because of the potential for latter release of hazardous material, arrangements should be made tomonitor or re-test the atmosphere within the confined space. The use of continuous monitors, whichhave alarms, is the most conservative approach.

8. Control

A. Hierarchy of Control Measures, The control measures should consist of :

1) Elimination.

2) Substitution.

3) Isolation.

4) Engineering controls.

5) Adoption of safe work practices.

6) Use of personal protective equipment, where the concentration of flammable contaminant in theatmosphere of a confined space has been found to be greater than 0% of its LEL, the confinedspace shall not be entered. The hierarchy lists the control measures that should be implemented inthe workplace in priority order. Consequently, complete elimination of the need to enter the confinedspaced should be the first consideration in controlling risk to workers. It is only if this is notpracticable that consideration should be given to the second measure in the hierarchy, which issubstitution.

Examples of substitution include using:

a. A non-flammable solvent in place of a flammable one.






b. A detergent in place of a chlorinated solvent for cleaning.

c. Water based paint in place of an organic solvent-base.

d. Brush application of paint rather than aerosol or spray application.

e. Pastes instead of powders.

This process of progressively applying the elements of the hierarchy of controls should continue untilthe risks have been reduced to acceptable levels. It may be necessary to use a combination of controlmeasures to eliminate or minimize the risk to workers. Personal protective equipment should only beused as a last resort when all of the other control measures have failed to adequately control the risk.

B. Isolation Requirements

Prior to any employee entering a confined space, the employer shall ensure that all potentiallyhazardous services, including all process services, normally connected to that space arepositively isolated in order to prevent:

1) The introduction of any materials, contaminants, agents or conditions harmful to people occupyingthe confined space; and It may be necessary to withdraw a confined space from service before it isprepared for entry and that all persons who may be involved with the repair, maintenance oroperation of the confined space are advised.

Positive steps should be taken to achieve the following:

a. Prevention of accidental introduction into the confined space of materials, through piping, ducts,vents, drains, conveyors, service pipes or fire protection equipment.

b. De-energisation and Lock-Out/Tag-Out (LOTO) de-energisation and tag-out or both ofmachinery, mixers, agitators or other equipment containing moving parts in the confined space.

c. Isolation of all other energy sources which may be external to, but still capable of adverselyaffecting the confined space, for example heating and/or refrigeration methods.

C. Methods of Isolation

1) Hazardous Materials

No personnel shall be allowed to enter a confined space until positive means are established toprevent all energy sources from entering the confined space area or causing associated equipmentto operate while work continues .All isolations shall be conducted under the SWAP or PTW andLOTO Procedure. Listed below are three (3) methods of isolation. However, alternative methodsmay be used if equivalent security can be achieved.

a. Removal of a valve, spool piece, an expansion joint in piping leading to, and as close aspossible to, the confined space and blanking or capping the open end of the piping leading tothe confined space. The cap or blank should be identified to indicate its purpose.






b. Insertion of a suitable full-pressure spade (blank) in piping between the flanges nearest to theconfined space. The spade should also be identified.

c. Where neither method above are practicable, isolation by means of closing and locking, orclosing and tagging, or both, of at least two valves in the pipe leading to the confined spaceshall suffice.

2) Before entry is permitted to any confined space which itself can move, or in which agitators, fans orother moving parts which may pose a risk to personnel are present, movement shall be preventedby an approved means or an alternative method offering the equivalent security. Where practicable,equipment or devices with stored energy such as hydraulic, pneumatic, electrical, chemical,mechanical, thermal or other types of energy should be reduced to zero energy.

a. The person entering the confined space or the competent person should place a lock or tag, or

both, on the open circuit breaker or open isolating switch supplying electric power to equipmentwith hazardous moving parts. This will indicate that a person is in the confined space and thatsuch isolation shall not be removed until all persons have left the confined space. When a lockis used, the key shall be kept in the possession of the competent person. Spare keys should notbe accessible except in cases of emergencies.

b. Where a power source cannot be isolated, controlled readily or effectively, a belt of othermechanical linkage shall be disconnected and tagged to indicate that a person is in the confinedspace and that the linkage shall not be reconnected until all persons have left the confinedspace.

c. Where the methods in item a) and b) above are not practicable, moveable components shall be

blocked, and switches, clutches or other controls shall be tagged to indicate that a person is inthe confined space. The blocks and tags should not be removed until the person has left thespace.

d. Where more than one person is in the confined space, the isolating device shall beeither:

1. Locked and tagged, or both, by each person entering the confined space.

2. Locked and tagged, or both, by the Competent Person.

3. Where locking or tagging is undertaken by the Competent Person, each person entering the

confined space shall verify or have it verified to him/her that isolation is effective prior to hisentry.

4. Removal of Isolation: The locks, tags, blanks or other protective systems shall only beremoved be the person who installed them or by the Competent Person, after confirmingthat work has been suspended or completed and all persons have left the confined space.

All SWAP or PTW and Isolation certification shall be closed.






D. Ventilation

1) There are two main types of ventilation techniques, these are:

a. Natural.

b. Mechanical or forced.

2) Either means of ventilation should be employed while confined space entry is taking place toestablish and maintain a safe breathing atmosphere. This ventilation should be continuedthroughout the period of occupancy as a safeguard against unexpected release of contaminants. Itshould be noted that for natural ventilation to be effective, there must be two ventilation points, oneat low level and one at high level, each must be of similar square area in opening. Mechanicalventilation equipment may not be adequate or sufficiently reliable to maintain a safe atmosphere in

the operators breathing zone, particularly during operations likely to generate toxic contaminant.

Where maintenance of a safe breathing atmosphere in a confined space is dependent onmechanical ventilation equipment, for example, a fan, then the equipment should:

a. Be continuously monitored while the confined space is occupied.

b. Have the controls (including any remote power source) clearly identified and tagged to preventagainst unauthorized interference. Exhaust facilities should be arranged to ensure that anycontaminated air removed from the confined space does not present a hazard to persons orequipment. Nor do the emissions from equipment such as petrol or diesel engines enter theconfined space. The use of oxygen above concentrations of 21% shall not be used for

ventilation.

E. Cleaning Prior to Entry

All substances, which are likely to present a hazard to persons inside the confined space, should beremoved as far as possible prior to entry. Potentially dangerous material may be trapped in sludge,scale or other deposits, behind loose linings, in liquid traps, or in instrument fittings, and may bereleased only when for example, it is disturbed or heat is applied. Similarly, such material may lodge in

joints in vessels or in the bends of connecting pipes, or other places where removal is difficult.Procedures and processes to be used to clean the inside of a confined space should be reviewed andauthorized prior to entry. The method to be used will depend upon the material in the confined spaceand the potential hazards that may be created by the cleaning process itself. Contaminants should bedisposed of in a manner that will not constitute a hazard.

The following are some general practices to be observed:

1) Whenever practicable, initial cleaning should be performed from outside the confined space. Suchinitial cleaning should continue until the hazard of atmospheric contaminants has been reduced asfar as reasonably practicable possible.






2) Each person entering the confined space should be provided with suitable protective suits,impervious footwear, a safety helmet with face shield, protective gloves and, where necessary, an

appropriate respiratory protective device.

3) Hydro jetting the following general precautions should be observed when hydro jetting isundertaken in a confined space.

a. Hydro jetting should always be carried out by trained personnel.

b. Warning signs indicating that hydro jetting is in progress should be displayed in conspicuouslocations outside the confined space.

c. The area affected by the hydro jetting should be barricaded while work is in progress.

d. Where there is a possibility of a flammable environment, the nozzle of the hydro jettingequipment should be earthed to decrease the generation of static electricity.

e. Nozzle operators should have direct visual or audible communication with the pump operators.

f. Removal of fluids from the confined space should be continuous during operation.

g. A high pressure/low pressure volume gun should be used to intermittently clean, rather thanoperating continuously, thus allowing adequate replacement of air. All high pressure cleaningequipment should be fitted with actuating devices, which require positive effort, by the operator’shand or foot to keep the supply valve open.

In addition, the following recommendations should be observed:

1. Hoses used for high pressure cleaning should have a bursting pressure of at least twice thatof the operating pressure.

2. Hoses should be tagged to indicate the working pressure and age.

3. Hoses with exposed reinforcing wire should be disposed of immediately.

4. Care should be taken when laying out hoses on the ground to avoid constant pulsationdamage, especially from corners.

4) Steam cleaning the following precautions should be observed:

a. Where there is a possibility of a flammable environment, the pipe or nozzle of the steam hoseshould be bonded to the confined space enclosure to decrease the generation of staticelectricity.

b. Where oxygen is present in the confined space, steam temperatures should be significantlylower than the auto-ignition temperature of previously stored products.






c. The confined space should be allowed to return to an acceptable thermal environment prior toentry.

5) Abras ive Blast ing Cleaning by abrasive blasting should only be undertaken where suitableair supplied respirators are used. Further consideration should also be given to:

a. Illumination and visibility adequate to allow safe working to continue.

b. Protection of the breathing airline to the respirator.

c. Escape equipment.

d. Actuating devices, which require positive effort by the operator to keep blasting apparatus,supply valve open.

6) Chemical Cleaning In addition to creating toxicity hazards, chemicals used in cleaning operationmay also be capable of producing a flammable atmosphere. Accordingly, the safety of theatmosphere should be re-evaluated after cleaning and prior to the commencement of further work.

F. Purging Prior to Entry

Care should be taken in the purging of a confined space to preclude rupture or collapse of theenclosure due to pressure differentials. When flammable contaminants are to be purged, purging andventilation equipment designed for use in hazardous locations should be employed and precautionstaken to eliminate all sources of ignition. Any methods employed in purging should ensure that anycontaminants removed from the confined space are exhausted to a location where they present no

hazard. Where appropriate, the confined space shall be cleared of contaminants by use of a suitablepurging agent. An employer shall ensure that oxygen or gas mixtures are not to be used for purging orventilation. Where supplied-air-breathing apparatus is not used, precautions should be used toestablish and maintain a safe breathing atmosphere.

G. Issue of Permits / SWAP

The permit / SWAP should state the period of its validity and should be replaced whenever itbecomes evident that the duration of work will involve one of the following:

1) A change in the supervisor.

2) A significant break in work continuity.

3) A significant change in atmosphere or work.

The permit should be displayed in a prominent position to facilitate signing and clearance.






H. Standby Persons

It is essential that communication and observation between those in the confined space and thestandby person(s) be constantly maintained. Communication can be achieved, dependent on theconditions existing in the confined space, by a number of means, including voice, radio hand signalsand other appropriate means. Where it is expected that the person entering the confined space and thestandby person may change places then authorization shall be required on the permit to do so. Themaximum and minimum standby persons should also be recorded on the permit. The supervisorensures that no person enters the confined space unless standby person(s) outside the confined spaceare maintained and relieved as required. The supervisor, prior to any person entering the confinedspace, and during any occupancy of the space, shall ensure appropriate signs and protective barriersare erected to prevent entry of people not involved in the work.

A stand-by man shall be assigned the duty of watching the persons working inside the confined space

during the time they are inside.

The duties of the stand-by man are:

1) He shall have no responsibilities other than to continually watch those inside the confined spaceand observe their condition and, also, be alert to any need for rescue or other assistance by thoseinside.

2) He shall be in such a position as to physically observe the condition of every person inside theconfined space.

3) He shall have the means (winching equipment or adequate nearby personnel) to rescue any

personnel from inside the space.

4) He shall have adequate personal protective equipment available so if it should become necessaryto aid those inside the confined space, he can enter the area safely.

I. Safety Equipment

Personal protective equipment should only be used as a last resort when all other control measures inthe hierarchy are either inadequate or impractical. Competent and well-experienced persons onlyshould decide on the appropriate protective equipment to be used in the confined space.

Al l pro tecti ve equipment should fi t the indiv idual who uses i t and the fol lowing points should atleast be considered:

1) Results of the evaluation of the atmosphere including testing.

2) The process to be conducted within the confined space.

3) The contaminants that may be encountered.

4) The extra load placed on workers when wearing personal protective equipment, which can lead toserious health effects.






The following should act as a guide as to the protection to be considered. An employer shallwhere appropriate, provide suitable safety equipment for:

a. Personal protection.

b. Rescue.

c. First Aid.

d. Fire suppression.

The equipment shall be appropriate to the work to be carried out in the confined space and shall bemaintained in a proper working condition. Personal protective equipment and rescue equipmentshall, where appropriate, be selected and fitted to suit the individual (Refer to HSERM / B / B-3 /

PPE).

J. Maintenance of Personal Protective Equipment

It is essential that proper maintenance is an integral part of any personal protective equipment programto ensure that the user receives the required level of protection at all times. Failure to provide theproper cleaning and maintenance can have serious health effects, or possibly result in death.

A proper maintenance program should include procedures for :

1) Regular cleaning and disinfecting of the equipment. Equipment worn by more than one (1) workershould be cleaned and disinfected after each use.

2) Drying the equipment.

3) Inspection for any defects.

4) Identification and repair, or replacement, of any used, consumed, worn or defective componentsand/or equipment.

5) Clean storage of equipment when not in use.

6) Employee’s report damaged defective or lost equipment to a competent person responsible for therepair or replacement.

7) Ensuring supplies of disposable protective equipment are continually available to all users of theequipment.

K. Other Equipment

1) Hoses supplying gas operated equipment used in the confined space should be located, suspendedor otherwise guarded to avoid accident damage.






2) Where a portable ladder is used, particular care should be taken to ensure it is adequatelyconstructed and firmly secured to prevent movement.

3) Atmospheric testing and sampling equipment, oxygen meters, explosi-meter, any special ventilatingequipment etc. should all be regularly maintained to prevent them being the cause of other hazards(i.e. intrinsically safe etc.).

4) All electrical equipment connected to an external supply to be used in a confined space shouldcomply with API 500, D&WO / DOE&CD / SWIM-001 / Section No.46 / EW and D&WO / DOE&CD/ SWIM-001 / Section No.48 / H&PT.

5) Portable electrical equipment should:

a. Be connected, individually or collectively, to earth-free extra low voltage supply from an isolating

transformer with the transformer located outside the confined space.

b. Be protected through a residual current device, with the device being located outside theconfined space.

c. Additionally, the equipment should be fitted with a flexible supply cable, not inferior to heavy-duty type. Where available, it is recommended that all insulated electrical tools be used.

L. Safety Harness

1) Each person entering the confined space shall wear a Confined Space Entry safety harness with anattached life-line, except in those rare cases where a life line would increase risk. Such cases must

be approved by the PIC (person in charge) and the SA Liaisonman.

2) Suitable safety harnesses come in various types and designs for different purposes and great careshould be taken when selecting such equipment. In making such an assessment it is advisable toconsult the supplies. A Confined Space Full Body Safety Harness shall be worn at all times when ina confined space.

There are various reasons for this requi rement:

a. Rescue by a direct vertical or horizontal route is practicable.

b. There is a hazard of falling during ascent or descent.

3) Safety harnesses and lines should not be used as the sole means of entry or exit to and from aconfined space where alternative methods are available.

4) All harnesses should be capable of attachment to a line by means of a “Karabiner” or similardevice.

5) Great care must be taken to visually inspect the harness prior to use. Any signs of fraying, cutting orloose stitching should render the harness out of commission.






6) The supervisor shall ensure that:

a. Openings for entry and exit are of adequate size to permit rescue of all persons who may entera confined space.

b. These openings are not obstructed by fittings or equipment, which could impede rescue, orprovide for suitable alternative means of rescue.

M. Rescue and Rescue Equipment

1) Method: The removal of trapped, injured or unconscious people from confined spaces is extremelydifficult, but invariably involves the use of Rescue line techniques (or Single Line RescueTechniques - SRT). The use of mechanical lifting equipment should be considered and a ConfinedSpace Entry and Work Tripod is on site before entry to the confined space is permitted. Danger is

inherent in these activities. Meticulous attention to detail, knowledge of procedures and highstandards of training will minimize risk. Safety standards are not a substitute for foresight,prudence, common sense and experience in the implication of SRT activities.

2) Rescue methods and equipment to be used must be determined (and documented) beforecommencement of the job.

3) Personnel who are suitably trained in rescue and first aid procedures (Rig Medic) and are to beutilized in the event of any emergency.

4) Entry and exit points to confined spaces must be of adequate size to permit rescue of all personswho may enter a confined space. These openings are not to be obstructed by fittings or equipment

which could impede rescue.

5) Standby persons must be equipped with a suitable means of communication.

N. Equipment Standards

1) Inspection of and Damage to Equipment; the following precautions are to apply for theinspection and replacement of damaged equipment:

a. It is the responsibility of all persons participating to continually check equipment before andduring use.

b. Equipment that has been damaged or becomes unsafe due to age/wear and tear must becondemned for use immediately.

2) Storage of Equipment All SRT equipment is to be stored separately from all other items in a well-aired area away from fuels, chemicals and released for SRT activities only.












A-22

Incident Reportingand

Analysis





A-22 / Incident Reporting and Analysis (IR&A)

1. Purpose

This procedure is aligned with D&WO SMS Element No.9 / Incident Reporting and Analysis. Thisprocedure details the process for timely investigation and reporting of all incidents and near misses.

A. To ensure that personnel who sustain injury or become ill receive the best possible care as soon aspossible.

B. To establish guidelines for investigating incidents and near misses that ensure:

1) Immediate notification.

2) Timely investigation that gather the facts while they are fresh.

3) Fact finding, not fault finding.

4) Focus on prevention (what can we do to prevent recurrence?)

5) Interview of employees.

6) Site visit by investigator to review the equipment, positions of workers, tools involved.

7) Determine the direct cause.

8) Determine the indirect cause(s).

9) Determine the basic (root) cause(s).

10) Develop two (2) or more specific corrective actions to prevent recurrence based on root causes.

11) Track corrective actions to closure.

12) Verify corrective action closure.

C. To provide guidance in the preparation, dissemination and review of incident reports.

2. Scope

A. The scope of this procedure is appli cable to:

1) Saudi Aramco Rigs (SAR).

2) Contractor rigs and Service companies not using an approved incident investigation and reportingprocess.





A-22 / IR&A / Continued

3) This procedure does not apply to company fleet motor vehicle accidents or to injuries or fatalitieswhich result from these accidents.

B. This procedure does not supersede or replace local or plant disaster plans.

C. This procedure does not supersede corporate requirements. Where this procedure conflicts withcorporate requirements, corporate requirements shall apply.

3. Responsibilities

It is the responsibility of the Saudi Aramco (SA) Liaisonman/Foreman to ensure that all incidents involvinginjuries, illnesses, environmental spills, property damage, fire or near miss incidents which occur at the rigsite, the associated rig camp or non-routine rig operations (i.e. rig moves) are reported as soon as

practicable to the SAR Superintendent and Drilling Operational Excellence & Compliance Division(DOE&CD).

Within one hour of being made aware of an incident, the SAR Superintendent is responsible formaking notification to executive and staff functions as per G.I.6.001-Sec. 4.1. (Reference; HSERM /

A / A-22 / IR&A / Appendix No.3 / Preliminary Incident Not if ication Matr ix).

A. Manager

1) Ensure that all Division Units will appropriately report and investigate (as per G.I.6.001) all incidentsin a timely manner.

2) Ensure incidents shall be classified by the affected department to define the levels of notificationinvestigation, and recording activity that are required by SA and the Saudi Arab Government. Threecategories (MAJOR, MODERATE AND MINOR)

are used as per section 3 of G.I.6.001. In doubtfucases the Loss Prevention Department shall provide guidance on the incident category andinvestigation level.

3) Take immediate action when any injury or potential major incident is found to have occurred buwas not reported. Determine the factors that contributed to the non-reporting.

4) Ensure major and moderate incidents, per the classifications stipulated in section 3 of G.I.6.001are properly reported according to the requirements of sections 4 and 5 of G.I.6.001.

5) Follow the requirements stipulated in section 3 of G.I.6.001 when assigning / determiningclassifications of incidents.

6) Appoint the chairman for committees investigating Moderate Incidents in accordance with G.I.6.003

7) Appoint investigation teams as deemed necessary for other incidents.






8) Ensure that the department has in place a system to track and update all safety recommendationsand corrective actions. The status of these recommendations shall be reviewed as charted in “ Safe

Operations Committee” .

9) Communicate and encourage his division heads to communicate the details of incidents andcorrective actions at local level meetings, such as in Safe Operations Committee meetings,Quarterly Safety Inspections, e-mails etc.

10) Communicate details of incidents and associated corrective actions in MIS meetings to share thelessons learned with other departments.

11) Ensure that an investigation is conducted to determine the underlying causes of an incident, recordfactual information relating to the incident and make recommendations aimed at preventing

recurrence. Such analysis is presented and discussed in the Safe Operations Committee meetings.

12) Ensure that the department training policy mandates training for incident reporting responsibilities.

13) Ensure that division and unit heads receive training in incident investigation techniques.

14) Conduct an internal review annually of the department records to verify that incidents are properlyinvestigated.

B. Division heads

1) Per G.I. 6.001, section 4.1, within one hour of being made aware of an incident, the Rig

Superintendent shall notify certain required organizations by telephone, fax, messenger, e-mail oany other mean of communications (see Attachment 1, Preliminary Incident Notification Matrix).

2) Ensure that all required injury data from the incident for Saudi Aramco (SA) or SMP employeeare entered into SAP EH&S per G.I. 6.005.

3) Encourage and support open and honest reporting and investigation of incidents within his facilities.

4) Ensure all Unit Heads are aware of and familiar with the provisions of Drilling and Workove(D&WO) SMS Element No.9 (Incident Reporting and Analysis).

5) Evaluate the Unit heads incident reporting skills by participating in minor incident or near miss

investigations.

6) Take immediate action for any injury or potential major incident that is found to have occurred buwas not reported. Determine the factors that contributed to the non-reporting and provide correctiveaction recommendations that address the cause.

7) Review and approve investigation reports for investigations conducted in his facilities in accordancewith G.I.6.003.






8) Ensure adequate resources are provided to support and maintain the investigation program.

9) Appoint investigation teams for other incidents as deemed necessary for incidents occurring in theidivision.

10) Verify all action items resulting from investigations, engineering reviews, insurance surveyscompliance reviews, near-misses and emergency drills are implemented. Monitor any othernecessary follow-up action until it is completed.

11) Conduct incident tracking analysis for the facilities under his responsibility, analyzing internal trendsto determine frequency and severity.

12) Use incident trends and analysis to identify areas of improvements in safety managementprocesses.

13) Ensure incident information from outside sources and from Loss Prevention Department is analyzedif deemed applicable to his facilities.

14) Include statistical safety analysis in presentations delivered in the Safe Operating Committeemeetings.

C. Liaisonman/Foreman

1) Promote immediate reporting of all near misses by communicating to employees and contractorsthe positive aspects of near miss reporting. This can be accomplished through positivereinforcement at safety meetings.

2) Ensure that all employees and contractors working for SA within D&WO facilities are aware of theiincident reporting responsibilities to the SA person in charge. This will first be communicated duringthe site safety orientation.

3) Report all injuries, spills, unsafe conditions, near-misses and incidents to his Division Head.

4) Take immediate action for any injury or potential major incident that is found to have occurred buwas not reported. Determine the factors that contributed to the non-reporting and submit theinformation to the Division Head who will determine the corrective action that will be applied.

5) Investigate all incidents in their area of responsibility.

6) Upon notification of a near-miss, determine if additional investigation is required and arrange for theinvestigation to be completed in a timely manner.

7) Ensure recommendations from incident investigation are tracked and completed on time.

8) Communicate lessons learned to all employees.

9) In case of major incidents (per G.I.6.001), ensure the fo llowing measures are taken:






a. Area is secured and off limits to personnel except those involved in handling the incident.

1. Secure the immediate area.

2. Preserve evidence.

3. Record the incident scene with photographs.

b. D&WO management shall ensure, through the area Industrial Security manager, that the scenethe incident is secured and that access to the scene is limited to those authorized by him, with tconcurrence of the investigation committee chairman and, when applicable, by appropriate Sa

Arab Government personnel.

c. Prior to the arrival of the investigation team, ensure the incident site is secured to protect

materials or preserve evidence (unless necessary in initial recovery efforts) until released by theDepartment Manager.

d. Identify potential witnesses and have each witness independently write a statement describwhat happened.

e. Provide accommodation, office space and standard office provisions (computer, supplies) foteam members.

10) Provide corrective actions for every unsafe act, condition or near-miss reported in his area ofresponsibility.

11) Conduct regular reviews to verify that corrective actions have been completed.

12) Ensure all corrective action recommendations are Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Reasonableand Timely (SMART).

13) Ensure corrective action recommendations and lessons learned from incidents are communicatedto his employees and contractors.

D. SAMSO and Treating Physicians

SAMSO is responsible for addressing any questions or concerns pertaining to whether an injury to a Semployee is serious enough to warrant no duty or restricted duty as opposed to regular duty, or the duraof the absence authorized. This responsibility will be extended to the offsite treating physicians who trnon- SA personnel for work related injuries that occur on any D&WO rig or facility. For example, if theattending physician specifies in the Medical report that the injured employee is being given a day off (inaddition to the remainder of the day of the injury) then it would be considered a lost workday case (eitheor ODI) irrespective of the fact that in some cases the injured employee returned to work on the days ofgiven to him by the physician.






E. DOE&CD

DOE&CD is responsible for the final classification of all Injury/Illness incidents. In the event of a disputeover the classification of an Injury/Illness, the Drilling General Manager, using the guidance of the“ OSHA Recordkeeping Handbook” published by the U.S. Department of Labor and/or the “ IADCIncident Statistics Program Reporting Guidelines” , will determine the final classification.

4. Incident Report ing Procedure

A. Employee or witness to an incident informs his supervisor.

B. The supervisor notifies the SA Liaisonman/Drilling Foreman (Rig foreman on SAR rig).

C. The Medic provides treatment as required.

D. Liaisonman/Foreman notifies SA Rig Superintendent and if required, arranges for the evacuation ofinjured or ill person. Injured/ill persons shall be accompanied to clinic/hospital by medic, anotheemployee or 3rd party representative, depending on seriousness of the injury or illness.

E. The Liaisonman/Foreman shall notify the SAR rig Superintendent for all Loss Time Incidents (LTI’s) andproperty damage exceeding $99,000 as soon as practicable but in no case more than eight hoursafter he has been advised.

1) For incidents involving SAR rigs, the SAR Foreman will supervise the investigation and submit alrequired documentation to the SAR Superintendent and the Department incident administration

function.

2) For Incidents involving Contractor rig employees or equipment, the SA Liaisonman will ensure thatthe Contractor conducts a thorough investigation as per the contractor Investigation policy andprovide a complete investigation report. This report will be sent to the SAR Rig Superintendent andthe Department incident administration function.

3) For Incidents that occur on a contractor rig involving Service Company employees or equipmentthe Liaisonman/Foreman will ensure that the Service Company conducts a thorough investigationas per the Service Company Investigation policy and provide a complete investigation report. Thisreport will be sent to the SAR Rig Superintendent and the Department incident administrationfunction.

4) Any injury/incident that is found to have occurred but was not reported will be reviewed by DrillingManagement to determine the factors that contributed to the non-reporting.

5) If investigation assistance is needed, the assigned department Safety Advisor will call the rig backto offer advice and to assist with SA protocol. If necessary, a Safety Advisor will be dispatched tothe location.

6) Motor vehicle accidents involving SA vehicles shall be reported as per G.I.6.029.






a. A motor vehicle accident is any occurrence involving a SA motor vehicle that results in deathinjury, or property damage. All motor vehicle accidents, including those cases where the vehicle

was properly parked, where the vehicle is driven by unauthorized non-company personnel, orwhere it is being test driven by a maintenance contractor should be reported to the LossPrevention Department through the SAP EH&S The Loss Prevention Department will determinerecord ability per the guidelines listed in Supplement 6.029-3 and ANSI D15.1.

b. When a motor vehicle accident occurs, the driver must obey the latest Traffic Regulations of theSaudi Arab Government. One current regulation is that vehicles involved in an accident shall notbe moved from the scene of the accident until released by the Police or a SA Industrial Securityrepresentative.

7) Incidents involving mobi le equipment, cranes or man baskets shall be reported as per G.I.7.026.

a. Lifting, elevating and mobile equipment accident reporting shall cover all equipmentcontained in G.I.7.026 - Section 3.0 (referenced standards), with the following as notableexamples:

Bulldozers Skid mounted support equipment

Cranes, all types’ Tractor-scrapers

Rigging Graders

Below the hook lifti ng devices Wheel loaders

Forklift trucks Backhoes

Man baskets Elevating equipment

Aer ial platforms Overhead hoists

b. The Division Head (Superintendent) shall, within one hour of being aware of an incidentnotify the Roads and Heavy Equipment Division area Superintendent and also Loss PreventionDepartment / Loss Prevention Exploration and Development Unit.

c. The Division Head shall electronically create and submit an initial “ crane or heavy equipment”incident report using the SAP EH&S system within 24 hours of the incident.

d. The operator's supervisor shall obtain written statements from the equipment operator andwitnesses.

8) Fire or explosion incidents shall be reported as per G.I.1787.000 and G.I.6.001.

a. The definitions for Fire and Explosion found in Section 2.0 of G.I.1787.000 shall apply.

b. All fires and emergencies involving non-SA facilities that are attended by the Fire ProtectionDepartment are subject to the reporting protocol of G.I.1787.000.

c. The proponent (unit head or higher) of a SA facility involved in a fire or emergency responseshall, within 48 hours of the incident, respond through EH&S-SAP to Part No. 2 of SA form SA-2437, "Report of Fire or Emergency" .






9) Hydrocarbon leaks and oil spills shall be reported as per G.I.2.104 (offshore) and G.I.2.401(onshore).

a. All offshore leaks and/or spills shall be immediately reported regardless of size or potentialimpact. The level of Management notification, Oil Spill Response Team activation and cleanupresponse initiation shall be decided by the respective area Regional Oil Spill ResponseCoordinator in consultation with the Global Oil Spill Response Director (GOSRD), as it maydeem necessary.

Note: Reference HSERM / A / A-22 / IR&A / Appendix No.1 / Reporting Offshore Oil Spills.

b. In general, the person reporting the spill should provide the following information:

1. Name of person reporting and /or observing the spill.

2. Badge number.

3. Contact number.

4. Date and time.

5. Location of spill.

6. Size (length and width), colors (i.e. silver sheen, rainbow, brown, black) and area covered.

7. Source and cause of spill.

8. Weather conditions: wind speed and direction, visibility and sea conditions.

9. Action being taken.

c. All onshore leaks and/or spills shall be reported to Industrial Security through 110.

10) Damage or loss over $5000 to SA property shall be reported as per G.I.6.001.

5. Report ing Forms

For each incident that occurs, as a minimum, the following reports must be completed:

A. SA Liaisonman to report on Morning Report in “Remarks” section, all reportable events.

B. The SA Preliminary (24 hr.) Incident Report Form shall be completed by the SA Liaisonman/Foremanfor all incidents and forwarded to the SAR Superintendent, Department incident administrationfunction and DOE&CD. The SA Preliminary (24 hr.) Incident Report Form will automatically begenerated by data entry in the ORBITS database.






C. For “ Injury Incidents” involving SA employees and SA Supplemental Manpower, the SARLiaisonman/Drilling Foreman shall enter the injury data from the incident into SAP EH&S within 1

working day of the incident. (Refer to G.I. 6.005 Supplement No.2 for codes).

1) SAR Rigs shall use the Incident Investigation Report Form - IIR Form No.001 (Refer to HSERM / A/ A-22 / IR&A / Appendix No.2), for all investigations except Near Miss incidents and attach it tothe preliminary report filed in the ORBITS.

2) All rigs shall use the ORBITS database to report Near Miss incidents.

3) Contractor Rigs shall follow the direction of their Incident Investigation and Reporting process toproduce a final investigation report. This report shall be reviewed by the Liaisonman/Foreman andattached to the preliminary report filed in the ORBITS database.

D. SA Incident Investigation Report Form (Refer to HSERM / A / A-22 / IR&A / Appendix No.2) (for SARrig investigations) or the contractor Investigation form (for contractor and service companyinvestigations) shall be submitted by the SA Liaisonman to the SAR Superintendent and DOE&CDwhen the investigation has been completed.

E. Incident Investigation Report Form (Refer to HSERM / A / A-22 / IR&A / Appendix No.2)

1) All sections of the report form must be completed wherever appropriate.

G. Use the drop down menu.

H. Use the incident matrix (Refer to HSERM / A / A-22 / IR&A / Figure No.1 / Incident Matrix) to

identify the matrix code in the given areas in the Incident Investigation Report Form (Refer toHSERM / A / A-22 / IR&A / Appendix 2). Use the matrix to identify both the matrix code for theactual incident and the potential matrix code. This will assist to ascertain the severity or potentialseverity of the incident.

Note: High Potential Impact Incidents (HI-PO) - All C-1/2/3/4-111 Incidents will be investigatedand a Root-Cause-Analysis (RCA) will be completed by DOE&CD.

4) The completed reports shall be sent via e-mail to the SAR Superintendent for review, signature andcopied to D&WO - DOE&CD. For administration purposes, include in the e-mail subject line thefollowing information, in this sequence; Rig name/number, incident type (FTL, LTI, RDI, MTC, FATor near miss) and date. Example; PA-858, MTC, 21st February 2006.

5) The SAR Superintendent shall ensure the form is completed.

6) The SAR Superintendent shall sign the final report and send the completed form to D&WO -DOE&CD.

F. For offshore rigs the following minimum threshold events require a notification of marine casualty to atleast one of the three flag states; Vanuatu, Panama and/or the United States (Refer to HSERM / A /

A-22 / IR&A / Appendix No.1):






1) Injury to Personnel.

2) Loss of Life.

3) Physical damage to property in excess of $25,000.00 USD.

4) Any incident causing damage to a vital system.

5) Any release into the water of a substance harmful to the environment.

6) Any other damage affecting the seaworthiness or operational capability of the rig.

Other Statutory or Coastal States reports may be required by authorities in the rig’s operationalarea and, if required, shall be completed by the PIC.

6. D&WO ORBITs Tracking System

The DOE&CD-SCU Administrator shall:

A. Review each Minor and Moderate incident based on HSERM / A / A-17 / RMM.

B. Ensure the implementation of the recommendation in each incident are S.M.A.R.T.

C. Ensure each incident is tracked with the individual significant tracking number.

D. Review and distribute progress reports to each DOE&CD / Safety Compliance Unit (SCU) / Lead FieldCompliance Coordinator.

7. Classification of Injury and Illnesses

Classification of work and non-work related personal injuries and illnesses are summarized andbriefly described as follows (Reference; SA G.I.6.005 (Reporting, Investigation and Recording ofInjuries / Occupational Illnesses) and G.I.6.007 (Reporting of Contractor On-Job Injuries /Occupational Illnesses):

A. Total Recordable In jury/Illness Cases (TRC’s)

TRC’s include all recordable injuries/illnesses as defined by OSHA including FAT’s, LTI’s, RDI’s andMTC’s.

B. FAT – On-The-Job Fatality

An On-The-Job injury or occupational illness that results in fatality. A FAT is a recordable incident.








F. Medical Treatment Injury/Illness Case (MTC)

An On-The-Job injury or occupational illness that is more serious than On-The-Job first aid injury (FAI)or occupational illness requiring medical treatment.

Example(s):

Treatment requiring sutures, prescription medicines, vaccines (hepatitis B, rabies), use of tweezers toremove splinters from eye ( rigid means to immobilize part of body).

MTC’s include all cases involving:

1) Given one or more doses of prescription medicine.

2) Given an “over the counter” medicine at prescription strength.

3) Other immunizations that are administered to manage a job related injury or illness such asHepatitis B or rabies vaccine.

4) Using wound closing devices such as sutures, staples, etc.

5) Physical therapy or chiropractic treatment.

6) Using devices with rigid stays or other systems designed to immobilize parts of the body (does notinclude any non-rigid means of support).

7) Removing splinters from the eye with tweezers and other complex means.

G. First Aid Injury Case (FAI)

Any treatment of minor scratches, cuts, burns, splinters and so forth, and any follow-up visit for thepurpose of observation. A FAI is not a recordable incident.

The following are generally considered first aid treatment:

1) Using a non-prescription medication at non-prescription strength (for medications available in bothprescription and non-prescription form, a recommendation by a physician or other licensed healthcare professional to use a non-prescription medication at prescription strength is consideredmedical treatment (for recordkeeping purposes).

2) Administering tetanus immunizations (other immunizations, such as Hepatitis “B” vaccine areconsidered medical treatment).

3) Cleaning, flushing or soaking wounds on the surface of the skin.

4) Using wound coverings such as bandages, Band-Aids TM, gauze pads, etc.; or using butterflybandages or Steri-StripsTM (other wound closing devices such as sutures, staples, etc., areconsidered medical treatment).






5) Using hot or cold therapy.

6) Using any non-rigid means of support, such as elastic bandages, wraps, non-rigid back belts, etc(devices with rigid stays or other systems designed to immobilize parts of the body are consideredmedical treatment).

7) Using temporary immobilization devices while transporting an incident victim (e.g. splints, slingsneck collars, back boards, etc.).

8) Drilling of a fingernail, or toenail to relieve pressure, or draining fluid from a blister; using eyepatches.

9) Removing foreign bodies from the eye using only irrigation or a cotton swab.

10) Removing splinters or foreign material from areas other than the eye by irrigation, tweezers, cottonswabs or other simple means.

11) Using finger guards; using massages (physical therapy or chiropractic treatment are consideredmedical treatment for record keeping purposes).

12) Drinking fluids for relief of heat stress.

H. Near Miss

A near miss is defined as an event which did not result in injury or loss, but which had the potential foinjury or loss if circumstances had been slightly different.

8. Incident Rate Calculations

The Loss Prevention Department published guidelines for the calculation of Loss Time Incident Rate (LT And Total Recordable Incident Rate (TRIR) are summarized and briefly described as follows:

A. Lost Time Incident Rate

[Number of Lost Time Incidents (LTI) including Fatalities (FAT) multiplied by 200,000 and then divided Total Man Hours Worked = Lost Time Incident Rate].

B. Total Recordable Incident Rate (TRIR)

[(MTC+RDI+LTI+FAT) multiplied by 200,000 then divided by Total Man Hours Worked = RecordaIncident Rate].






C. Total Man Hours

This is the total number of hours worked (on tour) by the rig crew (50 personnel, each person works a hour shift, 50 x 12 = 600). Work hours must include all leased labor who are under the direct supervisof the drilling contractor; this includes catering crew. Agency labor performing the duties of regular crmust be included.

Third party labor such as service companies (casing crews, Wire line crews etc.) are considered agency labor and should not be included in the man hours.

9. Recommendations for Handl ing and Treatment of Injuries and Illness

A. Injured personnel shall be accompanied from the rig by a First Aid trained employee to assist w

documentation and to provide care for the injured or ill person.

B. The vehicle used for transport of the injured shall, in addition to contractual requirements:

1) Be of sufficient size and suitable to accommodate a stretcher (securing points for a stretcher) aaccompanying person (seating) entirely within the body of the vehicle or conveyance.

2) Be clean and well maintained, the vehicle must be operational and comply with Saudi Arabian tralaws at all times.

3) Protect the injured and the accompanying person.

4) Be designed and equipped such that verbal communication between the operator of the vehicleconveyance and the injured worker or accompanying person is possible.

5) Be air conditioned.

6) Carry sufficient medical supplies and equipment to facilitate the efficient transportation of the specinjured. (The vehicle will be equipped with the minimum equipment required; the medic may be calon to supply additional equipment, medication as required).

C. When immediate transportation of the injured is necessary, the Liaisonman/Foreman shall utilize most efficient means of transportation.

D. All personnel returning from a doctor shall submit to the PIC a full duty release or RWC release befcommencing any work related activity. A copy of the release shall be submitted to the Departmincident administration function.






10. Incident Investigation

A. Purpose

The purpose of conducting an incident investigation is to determine what happened, why it happenand ensure that recommendations are made and action taken to prevent a recurrence of simincidents. The investigation is “fact” finding not “fault” finding and is not intended to assign blame.

B. Scope

The scope of this procedure is applicable to:

1) Saudi ARAMCO rigs.

2) Drilling Contractors and Service Companies not using an approved Investigation and Analysisprocess

3) Drilling Contractors and Service companies will comply with the overall guidance of this procedurebut will conduct their investigations following the specific directions outlined in their ownInvestigation and Analysis process.

4) This procedure does not replace the investigative requirements outlined in G.I.6.003.

C. Defini tions, Abbreviations and Acronyms (Refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A)

1) Incident

An undesired event which could have (NEAR MISS) or did result in harm to people, damage toproperty or the environment or loss to process.

2) Near Miss

A near miss is defined as an event which did not result in injury or loss, but which had the potentialfor injury or loss if circumstances had been slightly different.

3) Direct Cause

This is the basic or fundamental reason for the incident. It should be described as an action thatresults in an outcome.

Example:

While POOH, the crown cluster was struck by the traveling block and sustained damage.

The “direct cause” was; “ The driller raised the traveling block too far and struck the crown” .






4) Indirect Cause

Conditions that existed prior to the incident that contributed to the direct cause.

Example:

“ The driller raised the traveling block too far and struck the crown” .

The indirect cause(s) were:

a. The Crown-O-Matic was not set correctly

b. The driller did not follow the Crown Saver procedure

c. The supervisor did not check the IADC report to verify that the driller tested the crown saver.

5) Basic Cause (Root Cause)

The most basic cause (or causes) that can reasonably be identified, that management has controlto fix and, when fixed, will prevent (or significantly reduce the likelihood or consequences of) theproblem's recurrence. By examining the indirect causes and determining why they are present,you will arrive at the basic cause(s) of the incident.

Example:

The investigation finds that the Crown-O-Matic was not set correctly (indirect cause) because the

driller is new and does not know about the Crown Saver procedure or how to set the COM thebasic cause is; “ The communication of critical procedures to new hires is Less Than Adequate” .

6) Corrective Action

Specific outputs in the form of recommendations that are derived from an investigation. Correctiveactions shall conform to the criteria of S.M.A.R.T. (Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Reasonableand Timely) Managers are responsible for closure of corrective actions. Managers will implementall applicable corrective actions to ensure similar conditions do not exist within their areas ofresponsibility. The decision not to implement a corrective action must be documented andapproved by the manager.

D. Responsibilities

1) Manager

a. Investigate injuries, spills, and other incidents and promptly provide corrective actions. He mayachieve this by delegating specific responsibilities to his subordinates.

b. Communicate the requirements for incident reporting. This includes encouraging andsupporting an environment for open reporting.






c. Implement all applicable corrective actions to ensure similar conditions do not exist within hisareas of responsibility.

d. Approve in writing, any decision not to implement a corrective action.

e. Communicate details of incidents and corrective actions through SOC and DSLI initiatives.

f. Track the status of all corrective actions until they are completely and effectively closed out.

2) Drilling Superintendent

a. Notify the manager of all incidents.

b. Provide investigative direction and support to his subordinates.

c. Review all recordable incident reports.

d. Review the corrective actions of all recordable incident reports.

e. Direct investigative resources to assist investigations.

3) SAR Rig Foreman

a. Notify the Drilling Superintendent of all incidents.

b. Conduct investigations into all incidents.

c. Review all recordable incident reports.

d. Review the corrective actions of all recordable incident reports.

e. Communicate to the workers, the requirements for incident reporting. This includesencouraging and supporting an environment for open reporting.

4) ARAMCO Liaisonman

a. Ensure that all incidents are reported.

b. Ensure that Drilling Contractors and Service Companies comply with the requirements of thisprocedure.

c. Ensure that Drilling Contractors and Service Companies conduct investigations into all incidentsthat are within their area of responsibility.

5) Department Safety Advisor

a. Assist with incident investigations as requested.






b. Assuming lead investigator role if requested.

c. Providing technical support in determining injury classification, identifying causal factors, rootcauses and corrective actions.

E. General

Incident investigations are characterized by:

1) Immediate notification.

2) Incident scene isolation to protect evidence

3) Timely investigation – begin while the facts are fresh.

4) Fact finding not fault finding.

5) Focus on prevention (what can we do to prevent recurrence?).

6) Interview of employees.

7) Site visit – Review equipment, positions of workers, tools involved.

8) Determination of immediate causes (causal factors).

9) Determination of basic causes (root causes).

10) Two or more specific corrective actions to prevent recurrence based on root causes.

F. Training

1) All employees will be trained in the basic reporting processes for injuries, spills, fires, MVA’s, nearmisses, property damage and other incidents. This training will be incorporated into new hire rigorientations.

2) Managers and supervisors will receive training in investigation techniques and completion ofreports, including corrective action to prevent recurrence.

3) Safety Advisors and staff identified by the manager will receive training in advanced investigationmethods, including root cause analysis. This will prepare them for investigating the less frequent“ Major and Moderate” incidents, as defined in G.I.6.003.

G. Analysis

All incidents will be recorded in the DIH electronic tracking system. The purpose of this system is toallow for analysis of incidents, performance tracking, and trending for loss reduction.






H. Period ic Review

Department managers will perform an annual internal review of their operations to ensure that:

1) All incidents are reported and an open reporting environment is encouraged.

2) All employees are trained in the reporting process.

3) All incidents are reported in a timely manner.

4) All department supervisors and managers are trained in investigation techniques.

5) Key employees are trained in advanced investigation techniques.

6) Investigation reports are thorough and completed promptly.

7) Corrective actions have been properly implemented.

8) Lessons learned are shared.

11. References: Refer to HSERM / A / A-2 / RM

A. ANSI Z16.3-1997 - Recording and Measuring Employee Off-The-Job Injury Experience

B. ANSI D15.1

C. G.I. 6.001 - Notification Requirement for Incidents (Including Fires).

D. G.I. 6.003 - Incident Investigating

E. G.I. 6.005 - Reporting, Investigation and Recording of Injuries/Occupational Illnesses.

F. G.I. 6.029 - Reporting and Recording of Motor Vehicle Accidents.

G. G.I. 7.026 - Crane and Heavy Equipment Incident Reporting Procedures.

H. G.I. 1787.000 – Report of Fire, Emergency or False Alarm.

I. Incident Investigation Report Form - SA D&WO DOE&CD – Electronic Forms - IIR Form No.001








Appendix No.1 / Report ing Of fshore Oi l Spil ls

1. Policy and Objectives

Saudi Aramco (SA) is committed to the prevention of harmful effects of oil pollution to the offshoreenvironment in all areas of its operations. However, SA’s policy in safeguarding the offshore environment isto ensure that all operating procedures, employees training and technical applications are aimed atpreventing and/or minimizing the accidental leak and/or spillage of liquid hydrocarbon substance.

Notwithstanding the above policy, should any leak or spillage occur, General Instruction (G.I.) 2.104 is tobe fully complied with at all times.

G.I.2.104 overrides any other General or Facility instruction and or directive as applied to the reporting,investigating and/or documenting of Oil Leaks and Spills into the marine offshore environment.

Notes

It is important to immediately inform the Chairman of the Oil Spill Committee (OSC) of any oil spill that mayhave an impact on vital Saudi Government or SA Facilities or environmentally sensitive areas. In the caseof simultaneous offshore oil spill with offshore disaster and only limited resources available, the offshoredisaster shall take priority over the oil spill for accessing those resources.

As soon as safely possible following the sighting of an oil spill from any source, the source of the spillshould be secured.

• Refer to G.I. 2.400 "Offshore Oil Spill Contingency Plan" .

• Refer to G.I. 6.001 "Notification Requirements for Incidents (Including Fires)".

• Refer to G.I. 6.003 "Guide For Committees Investigating Major Incidents and EngineeringReviews of Other Incidents" .

2. Purpose

The purpose of this instruction is to outline the procedures for the reporting, investigating and documentingoil leaks and spills which may result in a discharge of oil into the waters of the Arabian Gulf or Red Sea. Inaddition, this instruction defines leaks/spills and identifies who is responsible for preparing writtendocumentation of the incident. The notification of a spill shall generate the spill response activity described

in the Arabian Gulf or Red Sea "Regional Oil Spill Contingency Plans" and G.I. 2.400 "Offshore OilSpill Contingency Plan" .

3. Reasons for Report ing

Al l leaks and spil ls must be reported in order to:

A. Fulfill the Company's obligations with respect to its Environmental Protection Policy.





A-22 / IR&A / Appendix No.1 / Continued

B. Bring potentially dangerous situations to the attention of management.

C. Protect environmentally sensitive areas, and vital SA/Government Facilities.

D. Initiate action to contain, correct and cleanup leaks and spills.

E. Fulfill the Company’s obligations to report spills to the Government of Saudi Arabia.

F. Investigate the cause of a spill and to take the corrective action to prevent reoccurrence of similarincidents.

G. Provide support for claim action and recovery of cleanup costs from third parties causing the spill.

H. Provide information, which can serve as the basis for measuring progress in improving methods and

equipment for the prevention and cleanup of leaks and spills.

I. Obtain the required financial guarantees/letters of undertaking from vessel’s insurer/owner.

J. Request detentions of a vessel in Port until satisfactory financial guarantees are provided.

K. Protect the company from damage to its image and reputation that may result from negative publicitydue to a leak or spill.

4. Report ing Respons ibili ties

A. SA MODU Liaisonman shall notify the SA MODU superintendent immediately of all oil spill incidents.

B. All leaks and/or spills shall be immediately reported regardless of size or potential impact. The level ofManagement notification, Oil Spill Response Team activation and cleanup response initiation shall bedecided by the respective area Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator in consultation with the GlobalOil Spill Response Director (GOSRD), as it may deem necessary.

C. Persons observing a LEAK or SPILL shall Report it by the most rapid means available to the SA MarineTour Coordinators at Ras Tanura or Jeddah on the 24-hour telephones: 03-678-1475/1405 (RasTanura), 02-427-5444/2597 (Jeddah) or 02-425-4530/4528 (Rabigh).

D. In general the persons reporting the spill should provide the following information:Name of person reporting and /or observing the spill.

1) Badge number.

2) Contact number.

3) Date and time.

4) Location of spill.






5) Size (length and width), colours (i.e. silver sheen, rainbow, brown, black) and area covered.

6) Source and cause of spill.

7) Weather conditions:

a. Wind speed and direction

b. Visibility

c. Sea conditions.

8) Action being taken.

E. Operating Facility Superintendent shall:

1) As safe as practical, ensure that the source of the oil spill is secured.

2) Initiate preliminary investigation of source and cause of spills originating from a SA facility incoordination with the Regional oil Spill Response Coordinator.

3) Immediately notify the Loss Prevention Duty Officer/Engineer of the oil spill.

4) Immediately notify the OSPAS Oil Planner/Dispatcher on telephone 03-874-6821/2 or 03-874-3003/4/5 for any spill that may curtail production of Terminal/Bulk Plant Operations.

5) Immediately initiate Response using available Pollution Control Equipment at his facility.

6) Immediately notify Duty Harbor Pilot at King Fahad Industrial Port Control on telephone 396-7188 or396-7177. The Duty Harbour Pilot shall initiate SEAPA's response to combat the spill in accordancewith "SEAPA Oil Spill Contingency Plan" for King Fahad Industrial Port, Yanbu (For Yanbu Only).

7) Immediately notify the Yanbu Gas and Terminal and/or Yanbu Refinery Marine Advisor(s) (forYanbu Only).

5. Investigation procedure

A. All leaks and/or spills shall be investigated. The investigation shall be carried out in a professionalmanner to the point that a report shall be developed indicating the reason for the leak or spill and theactions taken to mitigate any damages as a consequence of the leak or spill. It is of paramountimportance that the investigative report documents any and all failures of procedures, materials and/oromissions of actions of individuals in order to prevent reoccurrence.

B. Leaks or spills less than 50 barrels resulting from SA facilities are to be investigated by representativesof the Proponent Department, the Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator and area Loss Prevention.






C. Leaks or spills in excess of 50 barrels and less than 1,000 barrels shall be investigated by acommittee consisting of at least:

1) Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator (ROSRC).

2) Superintendent/ Tour Superintendent of Facility.

3) Terminal Pilotage Operations Division (if tanker is involved or suspected).

4) Loss Prevention Representative.

5) A member having specialized knowledge of the concerned facility. This is to be assigned by theChairman of the Oil Spill Committee as deemed necessary.

6) Leaks or spills in excess of 1,000 barrels shall be investigated by a committee in accordance withG.I. 6.003. A representative of Global Oil Spill Response must be a member of this committee.

7) Offshore oil spills of unknown origin shall be investigated by the Regional Oil Spill ResponseCoordinator (ROSRC). Assistance may be required from other Departments as deemed necessary.

8) The resultant investigative reports shall form part of the essential documentation procedures asoutlined in HSERM / A / A-22 / IR&A / Appendix No.1 / Section 6.

6. Documentation and Distribution Requirements

A. SA MODU Liaisonman shall enter details of the oil spill incident on the next drilling report under theremarks section.

B. SA MODU Liaisonman shall input the incident into ORBITs within 24 hours of the incident.

C. The Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator (ROSRC) shall prepare SA Form 5046 “ Leak and/orSpill Report-Offshore” for each Offshore Oil Spill Incident.

D. Form A-5046 shall in all cases be initiated within five working days of the date of the incident from theoffice of the ROSRC. It shall carry the Oil Spill Reference Number and immediate details of the leakand/or spill incident as noted on the Oil Spill Initial Report received from the Marine Tour Coordinators.

E. The Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator (ROSRC) will route the form through the Marine PollutionControl Support Unit/ Marine Operations Division for completion of the section titled "CleanupOperation" and for comments and signature when Marine’s resources are used in combating the spill.The form is to be returned to ROSRC for revision.

F. The Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator (ROSRC) shall forward form SA-5046 to the MODUSuperintendent/ Investigating Committee for comments and they should attach their investigative reportrequired under section 6. The MODU Superintendent should review and add his comments to theincidents' report for leaks and spills of unknown source in his area of operation.






G. SA-5046 will then be routed through the Proponent Department Manager for his comments andsignature prior to returning the completed document to the Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator

(ROSRC) office for further processing and final distribution.

H. Copies of form SA-5046 “ Leak and/or Spill Report-Offshore” are to be distributed as follows:

1) Global Oil Spill Response Director.

2) MODU Superintendent.

3) Proponent Department Manager.

4) Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator (ROSRC).

5) Manager, SA Public Relations.

6) Administrator, Risk Management Division.

7) Area Loss Prevention Division.

8) Manager, SA Affairs.

9) Environmental Protection Department.






Appendix No.2 / D&WO Incident Investigat ion Repor t Form











Appendix No.3 / Prel iminary Incident Noti fication Matr ix





A-23

Spudding Inand

Rig / Location Release





A-23 / Spudding In and Rig/Location Release (SI&RLR)

1. A complete Rig/Location Release Checklist for the previous well is required prior to Spudding-in on a newlocation, see HSERM / A / A-23 / SI&RLR / Appendix No.1.

2. Spudding-in shall not commence until a Pre-Spud Inspection is conducted by the Rig Operator andCompany representative, see HSERM / A / A-23 / SI&RLR / Appendix No.2.





A-23 / SI&RLR / Cont inued

Appendix No.1 / Rig/Location Release Checklist

Rig Name/Number: Liaison Man:

Well Name/Number: Date:

No. Inspect /Confi rm YES NO Remark

1 Is cellar/cellar deck cleaned out to its lowest level?

2 Is cellar area clean and free of all debris?

3 Are all bolts installed in casing spools?

4 Are all bolts proper size for flange?

5 Are all valve and flange bolts installed?

6 Are all valve handles installed and secured?

7 Are all valves fully closed?

8 Are all blind flanges installed on annulus valves?

9 Are all TCA / CCA valves clear of cement?

10 Is TCA / CCA pressure reported on the last morning report?

11 Is the top of tubing spool 2” below top of concrete cellar wall or 6” above ground level

for metal cellars? ( Land Gas Ops only)

12 Is the well name and number secured to the tree?

13 Are barriers erected around cellar?

14 Is trash removed and properly disposed from location?

15 No empty/toxic drums or cans left unattended? Note: Buried Toxic items are forbidden!

16 Are rat hole and mouse-hole filled in and location leveled?





A-23 / SI&RLR / Appendix No.1 / Cont inued

Addi tional Of fshore Requirements

No. Inspect /Confi rm YES NO Remarks

1 Is platform properly cleaned?

2 Are all platform handrails in place?

3 If necessary, has the workover Gin Pole been replaced?

4 Has the platform inspection permit been signed?

5 Are all platform drains free flowing and clear of debris?

Liaison Man Signature:









A-23 / SI&RLR / Appendix No.2 / Cont inued

No. Inspect /Confi rm YES NO Remarks

42 Are all ERP requirements implemented on site?

43Do you have the RER map on location?

44 Is your camp outside the RER area?

45 Do you have relief wells locations identified?

46 Are you familiar with (110 call) protocol?

47 Is your well in an H2S risk area?

48 Do all personnel on location have valid H2S certificates?

49 Do you have H2S/gas cascade system checked and calibrated recently prior spud?

50 Are emergency response drills conducted?

51 Do you have third party operations on location (such as PMT)?

52 Do they participate in drills?

53 Are you aware of D&WO SMS elements and G.I.’s?

54 Is your BOP stack OEM approved?

55 Do your key personnel have valid well control certificates?

56 Does your flare gun have valid shells?

57 Are you familiar and capable of reporting incidents and near misses in SAP andORBITS system?

58 Are you aware of your open inspection items?

59 Was the last Safety Alert shared and discussed?

Liaison Man Signature:





A-24

Pre-Tour Checklist / Dril lerHandover





A-24 / Pre-Tour Checklist/Driller Handover (PTC/DH)

A Pre–Tour checklist / Driller Handover form shall be created (See Drillers Checklist HSERM / A / A-24 /PTC/DH / Figure No.1) to ensure basic well control and / or safety devices are present, checked and in the

proper working order. Current operations including any outstanding down-hole conditions should also bediscussed and noted on the form.

1. The checklist items should include but not be limited to the following points:

A. Accumulator unit oil level checked and recorded.

B. Control hoses checked for damage and leaks. Unused hoses plugged.

C. Accumulator, manifold and annular pressure recorded.

D. Type and size of rams posted on main and remote control units.

E. BOP and well head measurements posted on rig floor with correct pipe space out note.

F. Bop stack and choke manifold alignments checked.

G. Remote chokes functioned and left closed.

H. Maximum, Allowable Casing Pressure posted on the choke manifold and the remote choke panel.

I. Rig floor SCBA’s and cascade system units pressure checked.

J. Pit level, flow show indicators / recorders on and functioning properly.

K. Crown Saving Equipment (Both) set and adjusted properly.

L. Drilling recorder – all channels working properly.

M. Fully Open Safety Valve open and counter balance with operating wrench available near driller’sconsole.

N. Is BOP valve available on rig floor functioned and locked open?

O. Safety valves cross over subs available on rig floor for all connections in the hole.

P. Current drilling and/or tripping parameters in use listed.

Q. Current drilling fluid properties posted.

R. List of unusual down-hole conditions observed during previous tour.

2. The complete form (Drillers Check-List) should be signed by both drillers and tool pusher each tour.





A-24 / PTC/DH / Cont inued

Figure No.1

Rig Name/Number: Well Number: Date:

No. Observation Remarks

1 Inspect the Accumulator unit oil level and recorded.

2 Are control hoses free of damage and leaks?

3 Are unused hoses plugged?

4 Record accumulator, manifold and annular pressures.

5 Are type and size of rams posted on main and remote control units?

6 Is the BOP and well head measurements posted on rig floor with correct pipe

space-out noted?

7 Has the BOP stack and choke manifold alignments been checked?

8 Have the Remote chokes been funct ioned and left closed?

9 Is the Maximum, Allowable Casing Pressure posted on the choke manifold?

10 Is the Maximum, Allowable Casing Pressure posted on the remote choke

panel?

11 Have the dril l floor SCBA’s and cascade system unit’ s pressures been

checked?

12 Are pit level, flow show indicators / recorders on and funct ioning properly?

13 Is the Crown Saving Equipment (Both) set and adjusted properly?

14 Drilling recorder – are all channels working properly?

15 Is the Fully Open Safety Valve open and counter balanced with operating

wrench available near driller’s console?

16 Is the IBOP valve available on rig floor functioned and locked open?

17 Are all safety valves cross over subs available on rig floo r for all connections

in the hole?

18 Are current drill ing and /or tripp ing parameters in use listed?







Revision Summary

Rev No. Date Revision Summary

Approvals

Originator

Custodian

Review

Approval

Authority

00 Jan 2013 Original Release RGW RGW OSH & AAR

NOTE: Signed Original(s) are maintained with in D&WO-DOE&CD.



General

Requirements

B



Section B / General RequirementsD&WO HSE Requirements Manual

SA-DWO-HSERM-GR-002 / Created: 01/13 / Last Review: 01/13 / Next Review: 01/17Owner: VP-D&WORevision(s) identif ied by a Vertical Bar in the Right Margin Page 1 of 78

SA-DWO-SRM-GR-002-R0_Section B / General Requirements Date: January 201Document Title: Section B / General Requirements


SectionB

General

Requirements









Table of Contents

Contents Page

B-1 Communications 4

B-2 Cellular Telephone Use on Drill ing Rigs (CT) 6B-3 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 8B-4 Respiratory Protect ion (RP) 12B-5 Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) Safety 20B-6 Housekeeping (HK) 47B-7 Fire Fight ing Equipment and Operations (FFE&O) 50

B-7a Onshore Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations (ON/FFE&O) 52B-7b Offshore Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations (OFF/FFE&O) 60

B-8 Contro l of Static Electricity (CSE) 71

B-9 Flare Gun (FG) 73

Revision Summary 78





B-1

Communications





B-1 / Communications

1. Reliable radio and telephone communications shall be maintained at all times between the rig (onshore /offshore) and operations base. Offshore rigs shall also be able to continuously communicate with other rigshelicopters, and vessels in the vicinity.

2. MODUs shall be equipped with an internal multi-channel (Minimum 4-Channels) Gai-Tronics or D&WOapproved equivalent communications system, supplied for a UPS Power Source, with sufficient stationsand speakers to contact all operational areas of the rig. Acoustic Cabins shall be provided in all high noiseareas.

3. Every MODU shall be equipped with an integrated alarm system capable of providing a minimum of three(3) separate and distinct alarm signals (i.e. Abandon, Combustible Gas / Fire, and H2S) which are audiblethroughout the entire rig. In high noise areas, visual alarm signals (strobe lights) shall be provided inaddition to the audible alarms. The Rig Operator shall ensure that all visual warning signals are readilyvisible in all work areas and unobstructed or hidden by equipment, machinery, or structure.

4. Ensure that all communication equipment is in line with G.I.1852.001.

5. Definit ions, Abbreviations and Acronyms: Refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A.

6. References: Refer to HSERM / A / A-2 / Reference Material.





B-2

Cellular Telephone Useon

Drilling Rigs





B-2 / Cellular Telephone Use (CT) on Dril ling Rigs

1. Cellular telephones are prohibited on all Saudi Aramco (SA) Drilling and Workover (D&WO) rig work sites.Work site is defined as anywhere on the rig location except as specified in HSERM / B / B-2 / CT /paragraph No. 2.A through 2.C below Cellular telephones are not classified as safe to operate in a

potentially flammable atmosphere, in addition to distracting personnel from their jobs at hand. Theytherefore pose an unacceptable safety risk on a drilling or workover rig work site

2. All persons entering a SA D&WO rig work site shall leave their cel lular telephones in one of thefollowing places:

A. In their room at camp or in offshore accommodations.

B. In the Drilling Foreman’s office.

C. With the rig Medic at the rig site Medic’s office or offshore rig infirmary.

3. Service company employees may leave their cellular telephones in their vehicles, provided the vehicles areproperly parked on the edge of the location.

4. Persons expecting a critical call shall make arrangements with either the rig Medic or the SA DrillingForeman to alert them to an incoming call.

Note: It is not SA’s responsibility to field such calls. Depending on the task at hand the Drilling Foreman orMedic may not be able to field calls. Anyone found with a cellular telephone on a SA D&WO rigwork site shall be removed from the site and a letter shall be sent to their employer.

5. SA reserves the right to bar repeat offenders from entering a D&WO rig work site.







B-3

Personal Protective Equipment





B-3 / Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can never prevent an accident. It does, however, serve to minimizethe effects of an accident if an accident does occur. The Rig Operator is responsible to provide and require thewearing of approved personal protective equipment at all times where its use could protect personnel.

1. The Rig Operator shall post warning signs in areas where the use of PPE is required.

2. Protective headgear, boots, eye protection and gloves shall be worn by all personnel working at a drilling orworkover well site.

3. Protective headgear shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI Z89.1.

Note: Metal hard hats are forbidden per SA Construction Safety Manual.

4. Safety Glasses

A. Safety glasses with side protection that meet or exceed ANSI Z87.1-89, or an equivalent standard, aremandatory on all SA locations.

B. Sunglasses are not acceptable as Safety glasses.

C. All contractors shall make available prescription safety glasses to those personnel required to wearprescription eye glasses. Prescription safety glasses shall have approved safety lens with side shieldsinstalled. Aramco employees shall follow G.I.8.002.

D. Additional eye protection shall be required for specialist tasks.

E. Properly fitting goggles, face-shields, or other eye protection equipment appropriate to the work beingdone, shall be worn by all personnel who are handling or exposed to any material capable of causinginjury or irritation to the eyes, or engaged in any work in which there is an eye hazard from flying objectsinjurious light, heat rays, or radiation.

5. Safety steel-toe boots or shoes shall be worn by all personnel when working on or about a drilling orworkover rig as per ANSI Z41.83.

6. The Rig Operator shall provide, and all personnel shall wear, suitable, good condition, protective clothingand equipment including appropriate respiratory protection, when handling acids, caustics, or other harmfulsubstances which are potentially harmful or hazardous to the skin. Any rig employee handling dry mudmaterial shall wear adequate personal protective clothing, including proper eye and face protection.

7. The Rig Operator shall ensure that, when the clothing or skin of any personnel becomes contaminated withany flammable or harmful substance, those exposed shall get in the shower and then remove their clothingand wash the affected part of the body. The clothing shall be decontaminated before re-use.





B-3 / PPE / Continued

8. Rig Operator shall provide hearing protection in areas where the noise levels are above 85 DBA. RigOperator shall post warning signs informing all personnel that hearing protection is required while working inthat area (Refer to SAES-A-105 / Noise Control).

9. Hearing protection equipment, including head phone type hearing protection or soft ear plugs, shall bereadily available to personnel working in high noise level areas.

10. All personal protective equipment shall be kept in a sanitary condition and maintained to performsatisfactorily the function for which it was designed.

11. The Rig Operator shall provide emergency eye wash and or shower stations where necessary to provide

immediate relief to any personnel who may be contaminated with a harmful substance. The eye wash

stations shall be capable of providing a minimum of 15 minutes of fresh, clean water to irrigate eyes that

have been contaminated by some hazardous material. The delivered water temperature at the eyewash an

or shower stations shall range between 15°C and 38°C. The Rig Operator shall maintain these eye wash

stations in good sanitized condition continually ready for use per SAES-B-69, “ Eye Wash Station and

Showers” . Because of the high ambient operating temperatures encountered in Saudi Arabia during the

summer months, temperature control becomes critical, for ALL eyewash stations it is required that a

portable insulated unit such as “ Sells trom 16 Gallon Gravit-Eye ANSI Portable Eyewash Station –

90320” or similar, be installed and used with a suitably buffered solution. These units are to be shaded and

or insulated to minimize temperature variations.

Where hard piped systems are used, temperature control and sanitation are critical. The supplied watershall be clean and suitable for use when applied directly to the eyes and body. When the operatingtemperature of the eye-wash station and shower exceeds the maximum 38°C operating temperature, thewater shall be cooled to within the 15°C - 38°C range. The minimum flow rate of drench showers shall be20 GPM at 30 PSI as per ANSI Z358.

12. The Rig Operator shall post identification signs to mark the location of all emergency equipment such asemergency eye wash stations, breathing air manifolds and fire protection equipment. In addition rig specificsafety equipment plans shall be prepared, up-dated and conspicuously posted.

13. The Rig Operator shall make available to all employee’s and encourage the use of barrier cream to allemployee’s especially where oil based mud materials are being used.

14. Work Clothing

A. The Rig Operator shall ensure that all personnel wear clothing suitable for the existing conditions andthe work being performed, flame resistant coveralls being the preferred garment, particularly foremployees working on electrical systems.





B-3 / PPE / Continued

B. The Rig Operator shall specifically prohibit all personnel from wearing synthetic clothing, shorts or noshirt while on the rig.

C. When and where appropriate, (mixing chemicals, welding, painting, grinding etc.) long sleeve coveralls

shall be provided by the contractor and the wearing of said coveralls shall be enforced.

D. All work clothing, as far as is reasonably practicable, shall be kept clean. Clothing exposed to excessiveamounts of flammable or harmful substances shall be replaced immediately. This is particularlyimportant for fire resistant work coveralls which will lose their fire resistant properties if they are not keptclean and in good repair.

E. Employees shall be supplied with coverall at no cost to the worker.

F. Worker should always check the condition of the coveralls before use. If workers have any concernsabout the serviceability of the coveralls, they should immediately inform their direct supervisor who shalarrange for return of the defective item and arrange for a replacement to be issued.

G. Personnel aboard MODU’s shall be supplied with clothing that will assist in the location of personnelshould they go overboard (fluorescent stripes and or bright colors).

H. No personnel shall expose any part of their body to substances which may be harmful or hazardous tothe skin.

I. Loose fitting clothing shall not be worn.

J. Laundering and changing facilities shall be provided at each rig camp location (Reference: SASC-S-07Camps and Communal Living Facilities).

15. Definitions, Abbreviations and Acronyms: Refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A.


Your Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is your final protection against accidents and injuries.Your special skills and safety attitude is your primary protection against accidents and injuries.

WORK SMART





B-4

Respiratory Protection





B-4 / Respiratory Protection (RP)

1. The Rig Operator shall ensure that all respiratory protection equipment is provided. Thoseemployees required to use this equipment shall be trained in its effective use. This t raining SHALLinclude:

A. The need for respirator protection.

B. An explanation of why a particular type of respirator has been selected.

C. An explanation of the operation, capabilities and limitations of the respirator selected.

D. Fitting of face pieces.

E. Donning (putting on) and doffing (taking off) of respirators.

F. Regulations concerning respirator use.

G. Instructions in emergency procedures.

H. Maintenance, inspection, and storage of respirators.

I. Sealing and functioning of the face piece.

This equipment may be provided by the Contractor or by the Company, depending upon the terms andconditions of the contract.

2. The Rig Operator shall ensure that the required respiratory protection equipment is maintained and used asintended, and that it provides all personnel with adequate protection against all anticipated hazardousatmospheres.

3. Such respiratory protection equipment shall be readily available, maintained in good working order, in asanitary condition, and inspected every 30 days per G.I. 1780.001. Respirator inspection shall include:

A. A check for tightness of connections.

B. The condition of the respiratory inlet covering, head harness, valves, connecting tubes, harnessassemblies, hoses.

C. The proper function of regulators, and alarms.

D. Each rubber or other elastomeric part shall be inspected for pliability and signs of deterioration.

E. Each air cylinder shall be inspected to ensure that it is fully charged and with a current hydro-test date.

F. A record of inspection dates shall be kept for each respirator maintained for Emergency or rescue use.





B-4 / RP / Continued

4. Parts Replacement and Repair

A. Only technicians certified in the proper respirator maintenance and overhaul shall do replacement ofparts and repair.

B. Replacement parts shall be only those designated for the specific respirator.

5. All Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA):

A. Compliant 15-Min and 30-Min SCBA, or.

B. Hose-line work masks, including an emergency escape cylinder.

C. Unless protected by respiratory protection equipment, no personnel shall be allowed to enterany area:

1) Where the oxygen content of the atmosphere is less than 20.9 % by volume, or

2) Where the atmosphere is contaminated or in danger of being contaminated by any airbornesubstance that may be considered to be harmful.

6. On all D&WO rigs operating in known Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) areas or on any rig drilling a wildcat well,there shall be on each rig at least the minimum amount of respiratory protection equipment required in thedrilling/workover contract.

7. Where respiratory protection equipment is or may be required to be worn in areas which are or may becontaminated with substances immediately dangerous to life or health, a clean shaven policy shall beimplemented. Facial hair that interferes with the seal of a face mask will adversely affect the duration ofSCBA.

Note: Refer to HSERM / B / B-4 / RP / Appendix No.1, for further information regarding RespiratoryProtective Equipment.







B-4 / RP / Continued

Appendix No.1

Requirement for minimal acceptable Respiratory Protection Program

1. Each Rig Operator shall develop and put into practice a respiratory protection program that meetsor exceeds the fol lowing cri teria (per G.I. 1780.001):

A. Written standard operating procedures governing the selection and use of respiratory protectiveequipment.

B. Respiratory protective equipment shall be selected on the basis of the hazards to which the worker isexposed. The airborne hazards most likely to be encountered in drilling and Workover operations are:

1) Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) atmospheres that require the use of supplied-airrespiratory protection equipment. This equipment includes the hose-line work masks, including anescape cylinder, and self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA).

The most likely IDLH atmospheres that may be encountered at dri lling and workoverlocations are:

a. Toxic vapors and gases, such as H2S.

b. Atmospheres containing less than 20 % oxygen, by volume.

2) Corrosive or irritating particulate matter for which full-face filter mask protection is required. It isimperative that the correct filters be identified and used.

C. The user shall be instructed and trained by the Rig Operator in the correct use of respiratory protective

equipment and their limitations.

This training shall include:

1) Instructions on the selection of the proper respiratory protection equipment for each potential hazardan employee may encounter.

2) Instructions in the wearing and use of this equipment. This training SHALL include drills in which theequipment is used and worn under simulated emergency conditions. (BOP drills while wearing workmasks, for instance.)

3) Proper cleaning and sanitizing of the equipment after it is worn and used. It is very important eachuser of this equipment understands how important it is to properly clean and sanitize this equipmentafter each wearing, even for equipment that may be permanently assigned to him.

D. Where possible, respiratory protective equipment should be assigned to individual workers for theirexclusive use.

E. Respiratory protective equipment shall be regularly cleaned and disinfected. Those issued for theexclusive use of one worker are to be cleaned after each day’s use or more after if necessary, thoseused by more than one worker are to be thoroughly cleaned is of paramount importance.





B-4 / RP / Appendix No.1 / Continued

F. A comprehensive Cascade BA System and SCBA Registry shall be developed and maintained on everyrig. The minimum required Registry information shall include location, serial number, MAWP, Hydro-tesDate, Next Hydro-test Date, Inspection Date, Next Inspection Date, and SCBA Mask VoiceCommunication Device equipped.

G. A detailed Maintenance / Inspection Registry shall be maintained by the Rig Operator for each SCBA,the Registry shall include; I.D. number of the unit, its location, monthly inspection records, cylinderpressure on inspection, Face Mask Voice Communication Device Operability, Voice CommunicationDevice Battery Installation Date, Voice Communication Device Battery Replacement Date, cleaning andmaintenance of respiratory protective equipment.

(Example: HSERM / B / B-4 / RP / Appendix No.1 / Figure No.1).

Figure 1

H. Respiratory protective equipment shall be inspected during cleaning. Worn or deteriorated parts shall bereplaced; all replaced parts shall be recorded in the SCBA log book. Respiratory protective equipmentfor emergency use, such as self-contained devices, shall be thoroughly inspected by the Rig Operator aleast once a month and after each use. Every rig inspection shall include:

1) A function test.

2) Confirmation of cylinder hydrostatic test date; every 3 years for composite cylinders and every 5years steel cylinders.

3) Condition of cylinder.

4) Condition of all hoses (both low pressure and high pressure).






5) Condition of straps and buckles.

6) Condition of back plate.

7) Condition of cascade hose connection.

8) Integrated Face Mask Voice Communication Device Operability

I. Appropriate surveillance of work area conditions and the degree of employee exposure or stress shallbe maintained. The Rig Operator is responsible for knowing what respiratory exposures may be presenand shall alert all personnel when protective equipment is required. The level of exposure to a givensubstance is determined by continuous area monitoring, personal monitoring and warning devices, orfrom studying the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each substance used on the location, TheRig Operator is responsible for requiring the use of the proper equipment at all times when exposurelimits exceed acceptable limits.

J. There shall be regular inspection and evaluation to determine the continued effectiveness of theprogram. The Rig Operator is responsible for his respirator protection program. In meeting thatresponsibility a Rig Operator shall know that all equipment is in good condition and is ready for usewhen needed. A part of every planned inspection shall be to evaluate the state of the entire respiratoryprotection program of each location visited.

K. Personnel should not be assigned to tasks requiring the use of respiratory protective equipment unless has been determined that they are physically able to work while wearing the equipment.

L. Compressed air used for breathing purposes shall comply with the standards recommended in G.I.1780.001 and HSERM / B / B-4 / RP / Appendix No.1 / Figure No.3.

2. Compressors

The Compressors for Supplying Breathing Air Should Meet the Requirements of G.I.1780.001.

A. Oil Lubricated Breathing air compressors shall be equipped with necessary safety and standby devices As a minimum, an OEM Compressor Continuous Carbon Monoxide Monitoring / Shutdown System andH2S Detection (5ppm) / Shutdown System shall be fitted to each compressor and automatically shutdown the compressor to prevent contamination of stored air.

B. All compressors shall have a minimum ambient operating temperature rating of no less than 50°C.

C. Breathing air compressors shall be strategically positioned so as to minimize the potential entry ofcontaminated air. Specific contaminated air hazard sources include but are not limited to Main Engineand E-Gen Exhaust Stacks, Galley Hood Exhaust Stacks, and Wire Line Unit Exhaust.

D. They shall be equipped with purifying sorbet beds and filters to further assure greater air quality.

E. They shall be equipped with alarms to indicate compressor failure and/or overheating.





B-4 / RP / Appendix 1 / Continued

F. They shall be equipped with OEM shop set and certified RV’s which are included in the rig RV Registryand inspection process.

G. Breathing Air Compressors shall be “ Manually Start” and are specifically prohibited from having any

Automatic Start Features and shall be continuously manned during all periods of operation.

H. Breathing air compressors shall have a detailed maintenance log that records information as shown inHSERM / B / B-4 / RP / Appendix No.1 / Figure No.2.

Figure No.2

I. Each Rig shall maintain an air purity test kit and conduct weekly air purity sampling for CO2, H2O, and

Oil Mist prior to recharging the cascade breathing air cylinders, following the required H2S release drilland after every H2S alarm.

J. Air samples from the breathing air compressor shall be tested, at least once in every three months, bySA Laboratories to ensure the air quality continues to meet the following air purity standards:






3. Air Purit y Standards

Limits have been established for breathing air quality. Air suitable for human respiration shall meet minimumstandards as established by various governing bodies, including the Compressed Gas Association (C.G.A).

HSERM / “ B” / B-4 / RP / Appendix No.1 / Figure No.3 provides the maximum allowable contaminantallowed under the C.G.A. standard.

Figure No.3

Component C.G.A. Standard

Oxygen % by volume 19 - 23%

Carbon Dioxide, <by 0.10% max.

Volume (<500 ppm) Carbon Monoxide <5 ppm

Oil Vapor (< 1 mg/liter @ STP)Water Saturated

Odor None

Particulates and Solids None

The standards cited in HSERM / B / B-4 / RP / Figure No.3 are usually referred to as "Grade D", inreference to the C.G.A. Table No.1. These standards apply to compressed air for use in filling open circuitbreathing systems.

4. How Much Breathing Air?

In reality, each man should be trained and drilled to determine his own duration by using the Self-containedBreathing Apparatus (SCBA) under extremely strenuous working conditions.

Many factors come into play that may greatly reduce the rated duration; therefore, one should not expect toobtain the exact time rating, without taking into consideration the size of the person, physical condition,breathing habits, adequate mask seal, etc.

Decimal System (Cubic Feet) Metric System (Liters)

1 Cubic Foot of Air 28.3 Liters

One - 30 Minute Air Cylinder is Equivalent to 45 Cubic Feet 1,273.5 Liters by Volume

300 Cubic Feet of Air 8,490.0 Liters by Volume

1 Cascade of 6-300 Cubic Foot of Air Cylinders is equivalentto 1,800 Cubic Feet

50,940.0 Liters by Volume

An Air Compressor with a 9.2 Cubic Foot Delivery per Minute 260.3 Liters by Volume





B-5

Hydrogen Sulphide Safety(H2S)





B-5 / Hydrogen Sulphide Safety (H2S)

1. All drilling and workover operations in known or suspect Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) areas shall be conductedaccording to API RP 49, "Recommended Practices for Safe Drill ing of Wells Containing HydrogenSulphide" and with any Company rules. Also, these Rig Operators shall comply with all requirement

listed here, and the requirements of the following Appendices to this Section:

A. HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S / Appendix No.1- SA H2S Contingency Plan. For More Details, see chapter 8,section-C of the Drilli ng Manual.

B. HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S / Appendix No.2 - SA Standard Safety Equipment for H2S Operations on allOnshore D&WO Rigs.

C. HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S / Appendix No.3 - SA Standard Safety Equipment for H2S Operations on allOffshore D&WO Rigs.

2. Unobstructed wind indicating devices, such as wind socks, shall be provided and maintained in goodcondition. They shall be conspicuously located so at least one is readily visible from anywhere on thelocation.

3. Training

The Rig Operator shall ensure all personnel are adequately trained in the basic fundamentals of HydrogenSulphide (H2S) safety and continuously maintain valid H2S safety Train Certificates. No personnel arepermitted to enter any rig / well site location without a valid H2S Safety Training Certificate and completingthe rig safety orientation.

This training shall include all personnel and all personnel on the rig shall be able to demonstrate anunderstanding of the following:

A. Characteristics of H2S and its toxicity.

B. Rig Specific Detection and warning system alarm signals.

C. Emergency procedures consisting of:

1) Location of the designated Safe Briefing Areas / Muster Stations.

2) Donning and operation of SCBA equipment.

3) Evacuation procedures.

4) Rescue procedures.

5) First Aid for victims.

D. Instructions in the inspection, maintenance, and use of assigned respiratory protection equipment.





B-5 / H2S / Continued

E. This training SHALL include drills in all these procedures so all personnel on the location can quicklyand effectively follow each of these instructions when there is an actual, life-threatening emergency.

F. All basic H2S training shall include the actual donning and breathing from each different type of

breathing apparatus in use on that particular rig. Each person shall be able to don and breathe fromthe SCBA within 45 seconds.

G. A training card shall be issued to each person completing the basic H2S training. This card shall remainvalid for two years, following which the person shall retake the basic H2S training.

H. All personnel shall be able to identify the H2S alarm signals.

I. All personnel shall be able to identify the actual wind direction.

J. All personnel shall be able to evacuate to the up-wind safe briefing area (land rigs) utilizing upwind and or cross wind escape routes.

K. All personnel shall be able to muster to safely access their designated muster station (offshore) andenter in to the lifeboat wearing both SCBA and PDF (Personal Floatation Device).

L. In addition to the basic skills listed above, all personnel shall be able to competently perform the tasksspecifically assigned to them in their Rig Specific H2S Emergency Plan and demonstrate competency inunannounced H2S Release Drills.

M. All drilling rig crews shall be able to perform mouth to mouth resuscitation.

N. The SA Foreman / Liaisonman is responsible to verify that H2S training requirements are met. This shalbe done by observing regular H2S drills and testing to verify competence in breathing apparatus use.

Note: Refer to HSERM / B / B-4 / RP / Appendices No.1, 2 and 3 for specific details regarding H2S SafetyEquipment and procedures.








Appendix No.1

SA H2S Contingency Plan

1. The scope of the Aramco H2S Contingency Plan is to cover operations while drilling, testing, and completingoil and gas wells that have a potential H2S hazard as per SAES-B-062.

A. The D&WO Operations Departments shall have the responsibility for executing the plan.

2. The on-site SA Foreman / Liaisonman shall be responsible for carrying out the plan.

3. Drilling Engineering shall develop and coordinate the procedures.

4. Loss Prevention Department and the Drilling Operational Excellence & Compliance Division (DOE&CD) canbe consulted for advice and recommendations on plan actions.

A. Other Organizations shall be advised of the operations by the D&WO Operations Department.

1) Camp Management shall be notified prior to starting operations.

2) Government Relations shall be given a map covering the surrounding area that might be affected inthe event of an emergency.

3) Government Relations may notify any possibly interested Saudi Arabian Government (SAG)

Authorities.

4) Drilling Engineering shall coordinate this notification.

5) The Medical Department shall be notified by the Drilling Operations Department

6) The Fire Department shall be notified by the Drilling Operations Department

7) All installations within the area of Operations shall be noted and the Management of possiblyaffected installations notified.

8) A detailed evacuation plan shall be developed for any residential area that might be remotely

endangered if an emergency condition develops.

Note: Drilling/Workover Engineering shall coordinate the development of this plan with GovernmentRelations as per SA Drilling Manual.

B. Flaring of sour gas wells shall not start at night, flaring initiated during daylight hours can continue afterdark but extreme caution shall be shown because:

1) Wind normally diminishes at sundown.





B-5 / H2S / Appendix No.1 / Continued

2) With little or no wind, it is impossible to disperse any escaped H2S or SO2 from flares.

5. The BOP equipment, the wellhead equipment, the test equipment and the safety equipment shall all

conform to presently developed standards.

A. All preventers and associated equipment (wellhead, choke manifold, lines etc.) shall meet NACE, MR-0175/ISO 151566, API Specif ications 6A for sour service.

B. The heater, test unit and all connections shall meet current NACE Standard MR-01-75 for sour service

C. All flare lines and emergency blow down lines shall be staked or otherwise secured against movement ithe event of a mechanical failure.

D. The heater, if required, shall be of minimum 150 feet from the wellhead and the test separator.

E. Wellhead gas shall not be used for controller gas; bottled nitrogen is preferred over supply air forcontrols.

F. During gas well production tests, two flare pits shall be constructed downwind from the location in thedirection of prevailing wind and at least 90º apart and 1000 feet from the wellhead manifolds or any tesequipment. Minimum flare line size shall be two 3-1/2-in. J-55 lines to each pit.

G. Explosion-proof bug blowers shall be positioned to move air around well and equipment.

6. As part of the H2S contingency plan, Emergency Safety and First Aid Equipment shall be on locationand conveniently located (in addition to cont ractual requirements) in compliance with the following

A. Self-contained breathing apparatus shall be located for emergency work and escape.

B. Cascade systems for work and recharge shall be set up on location.

C. Resuscitators, safety harnesses, safety ropes, first aid kits, splints and litters shall be on location.

D. An H2S monitor with alarm systems and sensor at various locations shall be installed.

E. Personal electronic H2S monitors, explosive meters, spot checks, hand pump type H2S – SO2 detectorsshall be used.

F. Wind socks, warning signs and flags as well as streamers in localized areas shall be in use.

Note: An efficient Head Count system (such as “ T” cards) shall be implemented on all rig locations. Thiswill allow rapid and accurate identification of missing personnel.






7. The Rig Specific H2S Contingency Plan shall Include the Following Information as a Minimum:

A. Since it is common to drill through zones containing H2S, it is normal and not necessarily hazardous tohave small amounts of H2S (as drilled gas) released to the atmosphere as the mud returns come over

the shale shaker.

It is D&WO Operation’s policy to keep atmospheric H2S within a safe level by such methods asthe following:

1) Adding H2S scavenger.

2) Reducing ROP or temporarily discontinuing drilling.

3) Reducing hole size (drilling a pilot hole).

However, the SA Foreman / Liaisonman is responsible to take every practical precaution to maintain a

safe working environment while these remedial actions are being taken to reduce the amount of H2Scirculated to surface. This section outlines D&WO operations when drilling or working through zonesknown or suspected to contain H2S. While drilling these zones, the rig shall conduct operations based othe following classifications of H2S risk.

Note: [H2S], using square brackets, refers to H2S concentration, usually measured in parts per million(ppm).

B. Alert Level H2S Concentration [H2S]

1) Level-0

H2S = 0 ppm, Normal Operations in Potential H2S Zones. This is the base level, in effectimmediately after drilling out casing above the suspected H2S formations.

The following items shall be done even when no H2S has been detected:

a. All equipment and procedures shall be in place as specified in HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S / Appendix No.2.

2) Level-1

0 ppm < H2S < 10 ppm Normal operations, but increased alertness, preparing for next level.Restricted access to affected areas. Acceptable amount of H2S is present Level 1 begins whenever

H2S is detected anywhere on the rig. Typically, this will be at the shale shaker, when safeconcentrations (i.e. less than 10 ppm) of H2S are being released to the atmosphere. Although this isan acceptable H2S concentration, everyone shall be alert to the fact that the H2S concentration couldincrease at any time.

Upon reaching Level 1 conditions, the SA Foreman / Liaisonman shall take the followingactions:






a. All equipment and procedures shall be in place as specified in HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S / Appendix No.2.

b. The area around the shale shaker and the rig cellar shall be declared “ Restricted Areas” .

No one may approach these areas without the following:

1. Ready access to breathing apparatus.

2. Continuous awareness of current H2S concentration (e.g. personal H2S monitor givingcontinues readouts).

3. Continuously observed by a stand-by man who also had immediate access to breathingapparatus (e.g. “ Buddy System” ).

c. Appropriately rated (i.e. “Explosion-Proof”) bug blowers shall be positioned to provide

adequate ventilation to H2S contaminated areas and the rig floor.

d. The Toolpusher or designated “ H2S Representative” shall conduct an initial H2S safety meetingwith each crew. H2S safety shall be discussed at a brief tool-box safety meeting at every shiftchange.

e. The H2S concentration in the mud is checked a minimum of every 24 hours, more often at theSA Foreman / Liaisonman’s discretion.

f. The SA Foreman / Liaisonman shall identify possible courses of action to take should the H2Sconcentration increase to higher levels (e.g. reduce ROP, treat mud with H2S scavenger).

g. The Drilling Foreman/Liaisonman shall take appropriate actions to maintain H2S levels below 10ppm. The objective is to minimize the number of times the H2S alarms sound. If the 10 ppm H2Salarm becomes excessive, it will contribute to complacency and lose its effect as a warning sign

3) Level 2

10 ppm< H2S < 100 ppm anywhere but on the drill floor . SA policy requires breathing apparatusto be worn when working in an atmospheric of H2S concentration higher than 10 ppm. Non-essentiapersonal removed from rig package. Immediate action taken to reduce mud H2S levels. First alarmat 10 ppm, high alarm at 20 ppm. Therefore, every practical precaution shall be taken to eitherreduce atmospheric H2S levels to less than 10 ppm, or to declare “Off-Limits” those areas with anatmospheric H2S concentration higher than 10 ppm. When drilling through H2S bearing zones, it is

not uncommon to have H2S breaking out at the shale shaker as drilled gas. This can be addressedby treating the mud with scavenger, weighting up to increase overbalance and restricting access tothe shaker area. The rate of penetration can be controlled or even halted until corrective measureshave been taken.

Upon reaching Level 2 condi tions, the Drilli ng Foreman /Liaisonman shall take the followingactions:






a. Ensure that all of the previous H2S level precautions are already in place.

b. The rig crew shall respond to the low level (H2S >10 ppm) alarm with their H2S drill (aspreviously trained).

c. The SA Foreman / Liaisonman, assisted by the Senior drilling contractor representative, shallidentify the source of the H2S, and respond accordingly (As stated above, if the H2S release isconfined to the shale shaker area only, this is not as critical a situation as H2S > 10 ppm on thedrill floor).

d. Hand-held H2S monitors shall be used to continuously measure atmospheric H2S concentrations

e. The SA Foreman / Liaisonman shall implement appropriate procedures to reduce atmosphericH2S levels in the affected areas (e.g. treat mud with H2S scavenger, increase overbalance,control ROP, increase ventilation to area, etc.).

f. The H2S concentration in the mud shall be checked every 4 hours or as directed by the SAForeman / Liaisonman.

g. Breathing apparatus shall be worn when entering an area with atmospheric H2S concentrationhigher than 10 ppm. No one shall remain in an area with H2S >10 ppm unless their presence isabsolutely necessary to regain a safe working environment.

h. A strict “ Buddy System” shall be enforced throughout the rig package, and immediatelydownwind of the rig.

i. The rig substructure, shale shaker area, and any other areas with H2S > 10 ppm shall bebarriered off and identified as a restricted area. No one shall enter these areas without specific

SA Foreman / Liaisonman approval.

j. Under no circumstances, can the H2S alarm be shut off.

4) Level 3

10 ppm < H2S < 100 ppm (on the dri ll f loor) Approaching an emergency situation. First alarmat 10 ppm, high alarm at 20 ppm. H2S Emergency H2S > 100 ppm Actions taken to reduce H2Sconcentrations have failed and an emergency situation has been reached. This is not necessarily anuncontrolled release but would include uncontrolled releases.

10 ppm< H2S < 100 ppm on the drill floor Since the drill floor is a critical work area and cannot be

easily evacuated, H2S concentrations higher than 10 ppm are far more critical on the drill floor thanin more remote areas of the rig.

Upon reaching Level 3 conditions, the SA Foreman / Liaisonman shall take the followingactions:

a. All of the previous H2S level precautions are already in place.






b. Upon initial low alarm (H2S > 10 ppm), everyone on the drill floor shall either evacuate or maskup as per established H2S drill.

c. No one shall remain on the drill floor unless their presence is absolutely necessary to regain a

safe working environment.

d. All personnel on the drill floor shall wear an H2S monitor to provide continuous atmospheric H2Sconcentrations.

e. Drilling or workover operations shall stop and unless well conditions dictate against it, the wellshall be immediately circulated bottoms-up.

f. The SA Foreman / Liaisonman shall immediately implement appropriate procedures to reduceH2S concentration in the mud (e.g. treat mud with H2S scavenger, increase overbalance,increase ventilation, etc.).

g. Two men shall be placed at each entrance to the location to turn back non-essential personneland to direct essential personnel to the appropriate safe briefing area. These teams shall beequipped with breathing apparatus and H2S monitors.

h. The SA Foreman / Liaisonman shall discuss longer-term procedures to reduce H2S levels withhis Superintendent and Engineering.

i. Drilling or workover operations shall not recommence until drill floor H2S levels have beenreduced to less than 10 ppm, and adequate action has been taken to maintain safe H2S levelsduring subsequent drilling.

C. H2S Emergency, H2S > 100 ppm

It is difficult to define an H2S emergency on the basis of the atmospheric concentration. For example,when drilling a large hole through a highly porous deep zone containing a relatively high concentration oH2S, the drilled gas breaking out at the shale shaker could easily exceed 100 ppm, although this doesnot necessarily constitute an emergency. An H2S emergency is defined as having lost the capabilityto contro l the amount of H2S being released at the well s ite. Under this condition, the DrillingForeman/Liaisonman shall identify the problem and take immediate corrective action.

The specifi c response wil l depend upon the specific problem. However, at the same time, theDrilling Foreman/Liaisonman shall implement the following precautions and work procedures toprovide an adequate level of safety for the men working on the rig:

1) Immediately implement a strict “ Buddy System”.

No one is to ever do anything alone. Everything isdone in pairs.

2) Communicate to the Superintendent what outside resources the rig needs, or may need in theimmediate future (e.g. gas monitors, gas monitoring teams, increased breathing apparatus re-fillcapacity, mobile radios, walkie-talkie etc.). The Superintendent shall contact the outside resourcesneeded to assist the rig.






3) Establish a Command Post (CP) equipped with the following:

a. Telephone and radio.

b. Continuous contact with the Drilling Superintendent.

c. Flare gun and one box (10 cartridges) of flare gun shells.

d. Fluorescent orange vest to identify the Command Post Commander.

e. Walkie-talkies to communicate with the Safe Briefing Area and work parties throughout the rig.

4) Continuously manned by either a SA Foreman / Liaisonman, or a highly reliable, experienced andcompetent individual, plus at least 2 pairs of runners

5) Man the primary safe briefing area (SBA), equipped as specified in “ Safe Briefing Area Equipmen

List” HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S / Appendix No.2.

6) Establish and mark off a “Hot” zone, where H2S concentration is greater than 10 ppm. This is doneby assigning pairs of individuals, masked up and equipped with a continuous H2S monitor, tomeasure H2S concentrations throughout the location.

7) Maintain at least one 2-man team to continuously check that the “Hot” zone is adequately identifiedWinds can very and change conditions rapidly.

8) Assign an individual to gather all designated emergency vehicles and park them in a safe upwindlocation parked facing their escape route, with the motor off and with the keys left in the ignition.

9) Alert the rig camp of the emergency, and to stand by for further instructions.

10) Organize small work teams of at least 2, but usually not more than 5 men. Assign one man as leadeof every work team.

Under emergency cond itions, it may be difficult for one man to directly supervise more than people, hence the 5 person maximum:

a. All work is assigned to individual teams at the Safe Briefing Area.

b. The Safe Briefing Area commander keeps a written log of all assigned tasks.

c. Each work team is assigned one task and one task only.

d. An “ Estimated Time of Completion” is identified for each assigned task.

e. Each work team reports back to the Safe Briefing Area immediately upon completion of theirassigned task. This allows the Commander to be fully up-to-date on the progress being made.

f. If a work team has not completed their task by their “ Estimated Time of Completion” , theyshall report back to the Safe Briefing Area or send a pair of runners to report in.






g. Each work team shall have an individual to be assigned to check the air supply of all teammembers and to monitor H2S levels using a continuous monitor. This should be his primaryresponsibility: he should not be assigned other duties that could interfere with this vital safetyfunction.

8. Typical H2S Drill Onshore

Low level alarm, visual for 10 ppm or more (amber light). At this time two Safe Briefing Areas have beendesignated with the Primary area near the Aramco Drilling Foreman’s office and the secondary area nearthe entrance to the rig site. At 20 ppm the audible alarm will sound (amber light and horn/siren). Saudi

Aramco (SA) D&WO do not allow personnel to work unprotected in H2S concentrations greater than 10ppm, on visual alarm, personnel shall don SCBA.

A. Driller and one floorman or assistant driller (if there is one) don 30 minute SCBA’s and plug intocascade system. All other personnel don SCBA and proceed directly to the Safe Briefing Area.

B. Driller precedes to flow-check and shut-in the well as per the Aramco Well Control Manual (BOP Drill). Ino flow, circulate until receiving orders from Drilling Foreman/Liaisonman.

C. SA Foreman / Liaisonman and Toolpusher don 30 minute SCBA’s and proceed to the rig floor with atleast one portable H2S monitor. They are to first confirmed the well is properly secured if flow wasdetected, then locate the source of the alarm (shaker area, bell nipple, cellar, etc.). If no flow wasdetected, it will usually be prudent not to shut-in the well and risk stuck DP (shutting in the well canactually concentrate H2S just below the annular or ram). The area of the alarm should then be checkedwith the portable monitor to confirm that it was not a false alarm (do not use personal H2S monitors asthey will normally only read up to a maximum of 100 ppm, use the rigs multi-gas detectors). If the alarmis confirmed, the Drilling Foreman/Liaisonman and Toolpusher shall plan the appropriate action.

Superintendent should be informed at this point and drilling engineer consulted if there is any doubtabout how to proceed.

1) If the well was flowing and had to be shut in, this would become a well kill operation and handledaccording to the Saudi Aramco Well Control Manual (SAWCM). However, Section V., Specialoperations / Well Control of the H2S Contingency Plan should be consulted. The option ofpumping the kick away down the annulus should be considered. If the decision is made to kill thewell conventionally, the listed precautions in this plan should be taken.

2) If the well did not flow, there are several options open to reduce H2S concentrations in theatmosphere that are a result of gas breaking out of the drilling mud. These include reducing drilling

rate or pulling off bottom to circulate the use of H2S scavengers in the mud, increasing overbalance(increasing mud weight) and additional ventilation in the area of the alarm. Stopping circulationcompletely is only a temporary measure and the resulting reduction in ECD can actually worsen thesituation.

D. The person acting as the “ H2S Safety Representative” shall collect any equipment that may notalready be at the “ Safe Briefing Area” and see that it is in place. He shall continuously monitor theatmospheric conditions at the safe briefing area to ensure that the area does not become contaminated






E. The pre-designated person shall proceed to take a head count with the assistance of the medic. He shaassume command of the “ Safe Briefing Area” reporting to the Drilling Foreman/Liaisonman andToolpusher.

F. A pre-designated team of two personnel shall don a 30 minute SCBA and checks all rooms and officesfor anyone who did not hear the alarm. They shall then proceeds to the Safe Briefing Area for the headcount.

G. A further pre-designated team of a minimum of six personnel shall don SCBA (do Not mask-up) andawait further instructions. These personnel shall be used as search and rescue and or rescue back-up.

H. Medic proceeds to Safe Briefing Area with portable resuscitators, first aid kit and any other requiredmedical equipment not already at the “ Safe Briefing Area” . He shall then assist with the head count.

I. If anyone is missing, the “ Safe Briefing Area” commander shall select two, two men teams to mask upon SCBA’s and searches the pre-planned search routes. When a casualty is found; report to the

Toolpusher, using stretchers, recover the casualty and proceed to the safe briefing area with thecasualty. If further casualties are known, dispatch the back-up rescue team to continue search pattern..

J. The remaining rescue team personnel shall stand-by at the safe briefing area to assist as required.

K. The above condition shall continue until an H2S level of less than 10 ppm is confirmed and alarmscease or until the Drilling Foreman announces that all unsafe areas with H2S levels in excess of 10 ppmhave been barricaded (shaker shake and choke area only) and continuous monitoring with portablemonitors is being done.

L. Once the drill has been completed; all personnel shall be stood down, make all personnel aware that thdrill is complete, a post drill critique meeting shall be held and documented, points to address at the

meeting: Did all personnel hear/see the alarm, things that went well, equipment problems.

Note: Drills shall be held as frequently as required to ascertain a proficient standard achievable by allpersonnel at the rig site. Once this has been achieved, drills shall be completed at least once perweek.






Appendix No.2

SA Standard Safety Equipment for H2S Operations on all Onshore D&WO Rigs

1. H2S and Combustible Gas Monitors. (See also SAES-J-505 Combustible Gas and Hydrogen Sulphide in Air Detection Systems). All personnel shall be informed by the Rig Operator of the specific well sitehazards linked to Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) and shall receive specific instruction and demonstratecompetency in the correct use of any personal safety equipment, H2S detectors, and warning systemsassociated with the Rig Operator’s H2S Safety Program Procedures.

A. Integrated Combust ib le Gas and Hydrogen Sul fide (H2S) Detect ion and Alarm System

An integrated Combustible Gas and H2S Detection System with separate and distinct Visual / Audible Alarms shall be installed on all onshore well site locations with known or suspected H2S Hazards. Thisintegrated Combustible Gas and H2S Detection System shall be continuously supplied with both rig

electric power and an emergency battery power back-up source sized for a minimum of sixty (60)minutes of full operation.

1) The sensors for one of the systems shall be located as near as practical to:

a. The top of the bell nipple.

b. The flow line opining to the shale shaker.

c. The Driller’s position and about 18-24 inches above the floor.

d. The cellar, this sensor should be readily moveable so that it can be use around the BOP stack oat the well testing equipment when necessary.

2) Remote H2S Detection Devices shall also be positioned as follows:

a. Two detection device stations shall be positioned on the perimeter of the camp site, on theclosest side to the drilling rig. The sensors shall be place at no more than 24 inches above theterrain ground level or rig substructure level for camps situated within the well site perimeter.

b. One sensor shall be positioned at the camp muster station.

c. One sensor shall be positioned outside the rig military post.

3) The H2S alarm system (amber strobe lights and audible alarm) shall be set for a maximum low levelvisual alarm at 10 ppm and a maximum high level visual and audible alarm at 20 ppm. The alarmsystem shall be designed and strategically positioned so that at least one visual alarm strobe light iclearly visible to all personnel in any work area. The Audible alarms shall be ready heard by allpersonnel in any work area and shall be readily heard inside all rig site living quarters, meetingrooms, shops, and training cabins.






Note: Consideration shall be given to all work areas such as the logging unit and military post, if H2Salarms cannot be clearly heard and seen in these areas, then additional alarms shall beinstalled.

4) Rig Site: One monitor shall be located in the doghouse and the other located in the Supervisor orToolpushers office (24 Hour manned area).

5) There shall be, at a minimum, two spare H2S sensors.

B. Combustib le Gas Detection and Alarm System

All onshore well sites shall have a continuous combustible gas monitor and alarm system composed of minimum of two combustible gas detection devices connected to a low level visual alarm (Red Strobe)and a high level visual and audible alarm.

The minimum of two (2) required combustible gas detection devices shall be located as follows:

1) Rig Combustible Gas Detection Device Locations:

a. The top of the bell nipple

b. The flow line opening to the shale shaker.

2) The combustible gas alarm system (red strobe light and audible alarm) shall be set for a maximumlow level visual alarm at 20% LEL (Methane) and maximum high level visual and audible alarm a50% LEL (Methane).

The alarm system shall be designed and strategically positioned so that at least one visual alarm

strobe light is clearly visible to all personnel in any work area. The Audible alarms shall be readyheard by all personnel in any work area and shall be readily heard inside all rig site living quarters,meeting rooms, shops, and training cabins.

3) At the rig; one monitor shall be located in the doghouse and the other located in the Supervisor orToolpushers office.

4) There shall be a minimum of one spare LEL sensor.

5) Six Personal Portable H2S Monitors, Alarm to be Set at 10 ppm Distributed as Follows:

a. One to the Shakerman.

b. One to the Derrickman.

c. One to the Driller .

d. One to the Aramco Foreman.

e. One to the Rig Manager .






f. One to the Rescue Team Leader .

6) Two portable H2S detectors (hand pump suction type such as Gas-tech) with an adequate supply oflow, medium and high level H2S and SO2 tubes. The range of detection tubes shall be able to

accurately measure from 0ppm-high percentage H2S and SO2.

7) Two portable combustible gas or vapor monitors.

8) Test Kit for checking H2S concentrations in water base and oil base mud (equipment such as aGarrett Gas Train).

Note: All portable gas monitoring equipment shall be calibrated monthly, log books with maintenanceand calibration records shall be maintained for each gas detector. Each gas detector shall belabeled with: date of last calibration and name of person performing calibration.

C. Required Breathing Apparatus

1) All Onshore Well si te Breathing Apparatus shall be equivalent to the SCBA Unit s specif ied inSA G.I.1780 with the minimum design features:

a. Open-circuit positive pressure design.

b. Integrated Face Mask Voice Communication Device (Specified Locations).

c. Minimum 10-Minute Escape Cylinder / Minimum 30-Minute Emergency Operations Cylinder.

d. Integrated OEM Cylinder Quick Fill Connection (Emergency Packs Only 10/15 minute).

e. Cascade BA System Manifold Hose Connection.

f. Equivalent Harness Quality to the SA G.I.-1780 specified units (NFPA-1500 compliant for all fireand rescue team members).

2) Minimum 10-Minute SCBA Escape Units with integrated Cascade BA Manifold Connectionsand Cylinder Quick Fill Connections shall be positioned as follows:

a. Rig floor - six (6).

b. Shale shaker - two (2).

c. Mud mixing area - two (2).

d. Choke manifold - two (2).

e. In derrick for Derrickman (at monkey board) - two (2).

f. Logging unit - four (4).

g. Mud Pits - two (2).






h. Cement unit (when in use) - two (2).

i. All Rig Site Accommodation Cabins.

j. All Rig camp Accommodation Cabins when located within the well site perimeter.

Note: Specialized operations such as well testing may require further SCBA, operations shall beconsidered when planning SCBA requirements. SCBA shall be strategically placed in allpotential H2S hazard areas to ensure all personnel working in these areas can access a SCBAunit within 10 seconds.

3) Minimum 30-Minute SCBA Escape Units with integrated Cascade BA Manifold Connectionsand integrated Face Mask Voice Communication Devices shall be positioned as follows:

a. Toolpushers of fice/quarters - two (2).

b. Company Foreman’s o ffice/quarters - two (2).

c. SCR room - two (2).

d. Rig Floor - three (3).

e. Primary safe briefing area - eight (8).

f. Secondary safe briefing area - eight (8).

Note: 1. Before assignment of a SCBA to any person, he shall demonstrate that he is capable ofdonning it, adjusting the face piece, and turning on the pressure demand air. This

requirement shall be waived for any personnel with valid H2S safety Training Certificatesunless their H2S drill performance or competency observations establish further training isrequired.

2. Persons should not be assigned to tasks requiring the use of respiratory protectiveequipment unless it has been determined that they are physically able to work whilewearing the equipment. Any employee who may, in the course of his employment, berequired to wear respiratory protection equipment shall successfully complete an annualexamination by a competent medical staff. This examination shall include a pulmonaryfunction test.

3. Each work area shall be individually assessed for risk of exposure to H2S. Each work area

with potential exposure to H2S shall have SCBA available, each person in that work areashall be able to reach said SCBA within 10 seconds.

4) At least one fully-charged spare cylinder shall be provided for each 30 minute SCBA at eachdesignated Safe Briefing Area.

5) A cascade storage system of a capacity sufficient to provide breathing air to all working crewmembers for not less than 60 minutes at a consumption rate of 3.5 cubic ft. Per man per minute.






Example: 70 personnel; 70 X 60 X 3.5 = 14700 cu ft. = 49 X 300 cu ft . storage cylinders.

6) One electric powered and one diesel powered breathing air compressor capable of producing aminimum output of 11cfm, to allow filling the cascade storage system cylinders connected in an

integrated high pressure loop in a reasonable amount of time and to maintain them at full.

a. The compressors shall be a permanent installation allowing the immediate recharging of allcascade cylinders connected in the integrated high pressure loop. The rig emergency generatorshall be able to power the compressor in the event of a Rig Primary Electrical Power Failure andthe compressors are specifically prohibited from being fitted with an automatic start feature.

b. All compressors shall have an ambient operating temperature of no less than 50°C and aminimum working pressure of 3600psi.

c. An integrated high pressure loop with appropriate isolation valves shall be installed whichpermits any cascade breathing air cylinder to be filled from the compressor and any breathing ai

manifold to be supplied with any single section of the integrated high pressure loop isolated.High Pressure Distribution Loop Compression Fittings shall be strategically placed to minimizeany potential hazard associated with impact displacement and provided with protective shieldingin any high activity hazard area.

7) Minimum Cascade BA Manifold Locations:

a. There shall be two, four outlet manifolds on the Drill Floor.

b. There shall be one, two outlet manifold at the Derrickman’s Position (Monkey Board).

c. There shall be one, two outlet manifold at the Casing Stabbing Board (Retractable SS Air Line

Reel).

d. There shall ne one, four outlet manifold at the Shale Shakers.

e. There shall be one, four outlet manifold at the Mud Mixing Area.

f. There shall be one, three outlet manifold at the Mud Pumps.

g. There shall be two, three outlet manifolds at the Mud Pits.

h. There shall be one, four outlet manifold at the Cement Unit.

Note: Each breathing air manifold shall be fitted with certified breathing air connection hoses of asuitable length to allow work to be conducted so as to restrict the need to change connectionsfrom one manifold to another (all work hoses shall be restricted to a length no greater than100-ft.). The manifolds shall be located adjacent the defined escape exits to ensure the workhose will always lead to an exit.

No single breathing air hose on the drill floor can be of such a length that it will allow the userto cross the rotary table.






8) Each cascade system shall be pressure tested to +10% of the maximum operating pressure andpurged before commissioning after each rig move.

9) There shall be a quick fill SCBA cylinder recharging connection at the drill floor and mud pit area.

10) Compliant Integrated SCBA Face Mask Voice Communication Devices shall be provided for allSupervisors, Fire and Rescue Team Leaders, and Fire and Rescue Team Members

11) A set of green, yellow and red flags to signal H2S danger status.

12) Each cascade system shall be pressure tested to +10% of the operating pressure and purged beforcommissioning.

13) Compressor Relief Valves shall be OEM RV Shop set at a maximum of 105% of Cascade BACylinder MAWP, but no less than 3780psi and included in the Rig RV Registry and RV InspectionProcess.

14) A separate and distinct minimum 3600psi SCBA Cylinder Recharging Rack shall be provided if theRig Operator wishes to operate the required integrated high pressure loop at less than 3600psi.Recharging SCBA cylinders directly from the BA compressors is specifically prohibited.

15) A competent person shall conduct weekly air purity testing utilizing a compliant air purity test kit forCO2, H2O and Oil Mist prior to recharging the cascade air cylinders.

16) All components of the Integrated Cascade BA System shall have both OEM Certification andtraceability for the applicable MAWP and Breathing Air Service and shall be included in acomprehensive Cascade BA and SCBA Unit Registry.

D. Emergency Safety Equipment

1) Three "Bug Blowers" explosion proof, high volume (40,000 cfm) and moveable.

2) A minimum of three wind socks, two in service, plus streamers to be strategically located so allpersonnel shall know wind direction. One wind sock is to be held as a spare.

3) Flare line ignition system (Alex-500 or equivalent) with backup flare gun and supply of 24 long shelflife cartridges.

4) Two portable oxygen resuscitator units, each with a spare oxygen cylinder or a minimum of two bagvalve mask (BVM – also known as an AMBU bag) with the capability of providing 100% 02.

5) Six 02 non re-breather masks.

6) Two 25 man First Aid Kits, one at rig site and one at camp site.

7) Eyes wash stations/Safety Showers shall be located in the following hazard areas:

a. On the rig floor or in the rig floor doghouse.






b. In the mud mixing area.

c. In the Super Sack Hopper Area

d. In the Shale Shaker Area.

8) Water quality to stringently comply with SAES-B-069: Section 5.1 Requirements and be maintainedbetween 15o and 38°C in accordance with SAES-B-069: Section 5.3.

9) Eye wash and safety shower stations shall be diligently flushed and tested on a weekly basis. Hardpipe systems shall be flushed for a minimum of three (3) minutes in accordance with SAES-B-069:Section 5.1.2.

10) Two safety harnesses with two (2) 250 foot retrieval ropes to be worn by search team for searchand rescue operations under limited visibility.

11) Two basket-type stretchers (Stokes or Navy type litter) with blankets, securing straps and liftingharnesses.

12) Two Quick-Air splint kits.

13) One portable bull horn with extra battery pack.

14) Six small chalk boards with clamps for mounting with an adequate supply of chalk and erasers.Boards can be utilized as visual means of coordinating activities when working under a SCBA.

Note: Dry eraser boards may be substituted for chalk boards).

16) Flashlights - explosion proof with an extra set of batteries and extra lamp for each (number to be atleast one for each two persons in the operation but not less than five).

17) All Supervisors (Toolpushers, Driller, Chief Mechanic, Chief Electrician)) and the EmergencyResponse Team Leaders (Fire and Rescue) shall have portable radios for safe and efficient incidenmanagement and emergency operations activities.

Note: All safety equipment with rubber, plastic or other parts likely to deteriorate shall be stored in adark air conditioned room. Adequate supplies of sanitizing materials shall be available forsanitizing face masks and other body contact equipment.





B-5 / H2S / Continued Appendix No.3

SA Standard Safety Equipment for H2S Operations on all Offshore D&WO Rigs

1. An integrated Combustible Gas and H2S Detection System with separate and distinct Visual / Audible Alarms shall be installed on all MODUs. This integrated Combustible Gas and H2S Detection System shallbe continuously supplied with both rig emergency power and an emergency battery power back-up sourcesized for a minimum of sixty (60) minutes of full operation.

The integrated continuous monitoring system composed of the specified detection devices connected to avisual / audible alarm system installed throughout the MODU. The alarm system stations shall be designedand strategically positioned to ensure at least one visual alarm strobe light is clearly visible to all personnein any work area and in specified locations within the accommodation module. The audible alarms shall bereadily heard by all personnel in any work area and in the accommodation module.

A structured PM and testing program shall be developed and diligently implemented in order to ensure

continuous calibration and operation.

All personnel shall be informed by the Rig Operator of the specific well hazards linked to H2S and shallreceive specific instruction and demonstrate competency in the correct use of any personal safetyequipment, H2S detection devices, and warning systems associated with the H2S Safety ProgramProcedures.

A. All sensors shall have protective housings (rain caps) capable of protecting the sensor from accidentalspray from rig wash down hoses and accidental mud and/or oil splashes.

B. Sensors shall be located as near as practical to:

1) H2S and Combustible Gas sensors at the top of the bell nipple (Bell Nipple Flow Line Outlet is an

acceptable alternative).

2) H2S and Combustible Gas sensors at the flow line opening to the shale shaker.

3) H2S Sensor at Drillers position approximately 18 - 24 inches above the Drill Floor between the rotartable and the Drillers Cabin. Combustible Gas Sensor shall be located above the Draw Works.

4) H2S Sensor at the mud pits (Mud Pit Room Flow Line Opening is an acceptable alternative).Combustible Gas Sensor shall be positioned approximately 18 - 24 inches from the ceiling abovethe flow line opening.

5) H2S Sensor positioned approximately 18 - 24 inches above the floor in the mud pump room.Combustible Gas Sensor shall be positioned approximately (36) inches from the ceiling. (In theCompartment Air Flow Stream)

6) H2S sensors shall be positioned at all air intakes for the living quarters and adjacent the Main DeckEntry / Exit Doors.

7) H2S Sensor positioned approximately 18 - 24 inches above the floor in the Engine Room.Combustible Gas Sensor shall be positioned approximately (36) inches from the ceiling (In theCompartment Air Flow Stream).






8) A spare H2S and Combustible Gas sensor system with 200 feet of cable on 316 L SS portable reeland cabinet shall be mounted aft of the accommodation module and will be used to monitor anypotential BOP / Well Platform Operations Activities H2S Release Sources.

a. There shall be at least four spare H2S sensors.

b. The H2S alarm system (amber strobe lights and audible alarm) shall be set for a maximum lowlevel visual alarm at 10 ppm and a maximum high level visual and audible alarm at 20ppm.

c. The combustible gas alarm system (red strobe light and audible alarm) shall be set for amaximum low level visual alarm at 20% LEL (Methane) and maximum high level visual andaudible alarm at 50% LEL (Methane).

Note: This setting criteria applies to cold work situations only.

d. The alarm system stations shall be designed and strategically positioned to ensure at least one

visual alarm strobe light is clearly visible to all personnel in any work area and in theaccommodation module corridors, galley, conference room, and recreation room. The audiblealarms shall be readily heard by all personnel in any work area and in the accommodationmodule.

e. The two monitors shall be located in the OIM’s office and continuously manned Control Room oRadio Room.

C. Required Breathing Apparatus

All Of fshore MODU Breathing Apparatus shall be equ ivalent to the SCBA Units specified in SAG.I.1780 with the minimum compliant design features:

1) Open-circuit positive pressure design.

2) Integrated Face Mask Voice Communication Device (Specified Locations).

3) Minimum 15-Minute Escape Cylinder / Minimum 30-Minute Emergency Operations Cylinder.

4) Integrated OEM Cylinder Quick Fill Connection (Emergency Packs Only 10/15 minute).

5) Cascade BA System Manifold Hose Connection.

6) Equivalent Harness Design Quality to the SA G.I.1780 specified units (NFPA 1500 compliant for all

fire and rescue team members).

Note: Before assignment of a SCBA to any person, he shall demonstrate that he is capable of donningit, adjusting the face piece, and turning on the pressure demand air. This requirement shall bewaived for any personnel with valid H2S safety Training Certificates unless their H2S drillperformance or competency observations establish further training is required.

Persons should not be assigned to tasks requiring the use of respiratory protective equipmentunless it has been determined that they are physically able to work while wearing the equipment.






Any employee who may, in the course of his employment, be required to wear respiratoryprotection equipment shall be deemed physically fit to do so (refer to HSERM / E / E-11 / MR).

2. The minimum required 30 minute SCBA Units equipped with a cascade manifold connection andintegrated Face Mask Voice Communication Devices shall be provided as fol lows in protectivecases / cabinets:

A. Two SCBA's shall be stored in the Aramco Foreman’s office.

B. Two SCBA's shall be stored in the OIM’s office.

C. Minimum Five SCBA's shall be stored at the starboard safe briefing area for the use of the designatedfirefighting and rescue team members.

D. Minimum Five SCBA's shall be stored at the port safe briefing area for the use of the designated

firefighting and rescue team members.

E. Two SCBA’s in the rig clinic for the medic and his assistant.

F. Minimum Three SCBA’s below decks at the designated muster point(s) for the Mechanic, Motor Man,and Electricians use.

G. One SCBA in the Barge Engineers office.

H. One SCBA in the H2S Safety Supervisors office.

I. Four SCBA’s for the use of the Driller and Assistant driller) on the drill floor.

J. Two SCBA’s in the shale shaker house.

K. Two SCBA’s at the top of the access stairs to the production platform.

L. Two SCBA’s in the pit room.

M. Two SCBA’s in the pump room.

N. Each man with designated potentially remote location emergency response operations assignments onthe MODU Station Bill shall have a 30-Minute with an integrated face mask voice communication devicin his cabin, if his normal work station is outside the accommodation

O. Four spare SCBA’s for use as required.

P. There shall be a minimum of one 15 minute escape unit for each person aboard; these units shabe stored in protective cases in each cabin and allocated one to each bunk. Further hose-linework uni ts with 15 minute escape cylinders shall be stored as follows:

1) Eight work units (three with integrated face mask voice communication devices) on the rig floor ina convenient location.






2) Two work units each with integrated face mask voice communication devices on the stabbingboard.

3) Two work units shall be located in the derrick at the Derrickman’s position , finger board.

4) Two work units shall be stored in the pit room.

5) Two work units shall be stored in the pump room.

6) Two work units shall be stored in the mechanical/electrical workshop.

7) Two work units shall be stored in the warehouse.

8) A minimum of four work units shall be stored on the production platform for personnel working onthe platform and stack.

9) Two work units shall be stored in the shakers.

10) A minimum of four work units shall be stored in the logging unit (there shall be a sufficient numberof work units for all personnel in the unit at any given time).

11) One work unit equipped with a rescue hood at the starboard safe briefing area for the rescue teamuse.

12) One work unit equipped with a rescue hood at the port safe briefing area for the rescue teams use.

13) One work unit at the port crane cab.

14) One work unit at the starboard crane cab.

15) One work unit at the Bow Crane.

16) Nine spare integrated face mask voice communication devices with a supply of spare batteries.

17) Six work units in the control/radio room.

18) Further 15 minute SCBA shall be positioned in any other manned area as operations require

Note: Each work area shall be individually assessed for risk of exposure to H2S. Each work area withpotential exposure to H2S shall have SCBA available, each person in that work area shall be

able to reach said SCBA within 10 seconds.






3. A looped minimum 3600psi high pressure cascade storage system of a capacity sufficient to providebreathing air to all persons aboard for a period adequate to provide reasonable time for Non-essentialpersonnel to muster and evacuate and for essential personnel to work to control the H2S exposure and ifnecessary, to evacuate, shall be installed on each MODU. Additional provision should also be made for the

re-boarding of the MODU. A Consumption rate of 3.5 cubic foot per man per minute is to be used tocalculate the air volume required. The total stored air capacity shall not be less than 21,000 cu ft.(Example: 100 personnel x 60 minutes x 3.5 cu ft. per minute = 21000 cu f t.).

A. The breathing air cascade shall include but not be limi ted to:

1) Three air compressors; one diesel powered, one electrical mains powered and the third, electricalauxiliary powered, each with purification system and minimum capacity of 11 scfm at 3600 psi(minimum total capacity 33 scfm).

2) All oil lubricated compressors shall be fitted with OEM compliant continuous air purity monitoring anshutdown systems, which shall monitor as a minimum; Carbon Monoxide and Hydrogen Sulfide. In

addition, a compliant air purity test kit shall be onboard to continuously support weekly air qualitytesting for CO2, Water, and Oil Mist, prior to recharging cascade BA cylinder racks.

The compressors shall be position on the highest practical point of the accommodation in order tominimize the intake of contaminated air from sources such as the E-Gen, Main Engine, and GalleyHood Exhausts. A structured contaminated air hazard review shall be completed in conjunction withthe compressor location selection.

3) All compressors shall have an ambient operating temperature of no less than 50°C and a minimumrelief valve set pressure of 3780psi and a maximum set pressure of not greater than 105% of the HLoop MAWP. All compressor relief valves shall be annually certified by the OEM or an API ReliefValve Shop and entered into the MODU Relief Valve Registry and RV re-certification process.

4) Stored air shall be distributed via a looped tubing/hose distribution system. High pressure lines shahave as a minimum an outer diameter (OD) of not less than 3/8 inch, isolation valves shall beinstalled so as to allow individual sections of high pressure pipe and individual storage racks to beisolated without resulting in the isolation of the alternative loop path.

High Pressure Distribution Loop Compression Fittings shall be strategically placed to minimize anypotential hazard associated with impact displacement and provided with protective shielding in anyhigh activity hazard area or Muster Station.

Low pressure lines shall have an inner diameter of not less than ⅜ inch; low pressure hoseconnections shall not be fitted with any type of locking device which may hinder the connection

of SCBA which shall supply breathing air to work manifolds.

All components of the Integrated Cascade BA System shall have both OEM Certification andtraceability for the applicable MAWP and Breathing Air Service; and included in a comprehensiveCascade BA and SCBA Unit Registry.

All lifeboat cascade systems shall be equipped with lifeboat OEM certified break away air supply lineconnection installed in accordance with lifeboat OEM specifications and applicable classificationsociety requirements.






5) Breathing air manifolds shall be so designed that they will retain air sufficient to equalize the demanfor breathing air under heavy use; this will require a sufficient reservoir of air to be included

in the manifold design. Work manifolds shall be placed around the rig as necessary to enable

essential personnel to safely and efficiently work to mitigate the H2S Release Incident.

6) There shall be a Quick Fill recharging point for all types of SCBA cylinders in use, available at allsafe briefing areas, drill floor, and hull compartment.

7) High pressure hard lines shall be installed and routed to ensure safety of personnel in case of aconnection failure. Lines shall be protected and secured appropriately in high traffic areas and at allMuster Stations.

B. The Manifolds shall be Positioned as Follows:

1) There shall be four, four outlet manifolds on the drill floor .

2) There shall be one, three outlet manifolds at the Derrickman's position.

3) There shall be two, three outlet manifolds in the pit room.

4) There shall be two, three outlet manifolds in the engine room.

5) There shall be one, two outlet manifolds at the stabbing board. A 316 L SS portable reel shall bemounted at the Stabbing Board for the hose to ensure the hose will not catch or hang up onequipment.

6) There shall be two, three outlet manifolds in the pump room.

7) There shall be one, four outlet manifolds shale shaker house.

8) There shall be one, four outlet manifolds in the mud mixing area.

9) There shall be one, two outlet manifolds at the port crane cab.

10) There shall be one, two outlet manifolds at the starboard crane cab.

11) There shall be one, two outlet manifolds at the bow crane cab.

12) There shall be one, six outlet manifolds in the radio room.

13) There shall be one, four outlet manifolds on the cement unit.

14) There shall be one outlet at the starboard muster station for the total number of personnel whommay be assigned to that muster stations based upon the minimum unobstructed area of 0.35 m2 areper person without including the defined access and escape paths.






15) There shall be one outlet at the port muster station for the total number of personnel whom may beassigned to that muster station based upon the minimum area of 0.35 m2 area per person withoutincluding the defined access and escape paths.

16) There shall be one outlet in the starboard lifeboat for each passenger (maximum allowable).

17) There shall be one outlet in the port lifeboat for each passenger (maximum allowable).

Note: Each breathing air manifold shall be fitted with certified breathing air connection hoses of asuitable length to allow work to be conducted so as to restrict the need to change connectionsfrom one manifold to another (all work hoses shall be restricted to a length no greater than 100-ft .). The manifolds shall be located adjacent the defined escape exits to ensure the work hose wialways lead to an exit.

No single breathing air hose on the drill floor can be of such a length that it will allow the user tocross the rotary table.

4. Portable Gas Monitor ing Equipment

A. 12 personal portable H2S monitors.

B. A Hydrogen Sulphide calibrator suitable for the purpose of calibrating the fixed and/or portablemonitoring system.

C. Continuous H2S mud monitoring system. Garrett Gas Train Sulphide Analysis unit with supply ofaccessory equipment (Dreager tubes) for testing water and oil based mud for H2S levels. A Test Kit shabe used to perform quantitative Sulphide analysis in conjunction with the Gas train system.

D. Four portable H2S - SO2 detectors, (suction type) with H2S and SO2 tubes.

E. Four portable H2S detectors (hand pump suction type such as Gas-tech) with an adequate supply of lowmedium and high level H2S and SO2 tubes. The range of detection tubes shall be able to accuratelymeasure from 0ppm-high percentage H2S and SO2.

5. Addi tional Safety Equipment

A. Six bug blowers, explosion proof, high volume (25,000 cfm or larger) and movable.

B. Unobstructed readily visible wind socks (4 minimum), streamers, and flags to be strategically located aseparate and distinct locations throughout the MODU, so all personnel can immediately determine thewind direction.

C. Flare Boom OEM Remote Flare Line Ignition System.

D. One emergency flare gun with a supply of 20 cartridges with long shelf life shall be stored in a locked-up wooden box in the Company Foreman’s office. All rigs shall have functional and dedicated flare gunon location, prior to commencing and during D&WO Operations as per G.I. 1852.001.






E. Four portable oxygen resuscitators with eight spare oxygen cylinders.

F. Four stretchers of the following type; Spine Board, Stokes Navy, Scoop with blankets and securingstraps that are capable of being carried on the helicopter or transportation serving the rig.

G. Four first aid kits (each 25 man size).

H. Four Quick-Air splint kits or equivalent.

I. Six portable electronic bull horn speakers with six extra battery packs.

J. Six small chalk / white boards with clamps for mounting with an adequate supply of chalk / markers anderasers. Boards can be utilized as visual means of coordinating activities when working under a SCBA.

Note: Dry eraser boards may be substituted for chalk boards.

K. Flashlights - explosion proof with extra set of batteries and extra bulb for each (minimum number shallbe 10 flashlights).

Note: All safety equipment with rubber, plastic or other parts likely to deteriorate, shall be stored in an airconditioned, dark and designated area, near the Supervisor's office. Adequate supplies of sanitizingmaterial shall be available for sanitizing face masks and other body contact equipment.





B-6

Housekeeping





B-6 / Housekeeping (HK)

1. Work areas, stairs and walkways shall not be obstructed by debris or stored materials.

2. All walking and working surfaces shall be kept in good repair and free from oil, mud, and other potentiallyslippery material.

3. The area around the base of all ladders shall be kept clear to provide unhampered access to the ladder.

4. The area around the rotary table shall be kept clear of obstacles; clean, and free of tools, materials and anyaccumulation of oil, water, or circulating fluids.

5. Storage of material shall not create a hazard. Bags, containers, bundles, super sacks, drill pipe, etc., storedin tiers shall be stacked, blocked, and limited in height so they are stable and secure against sliding orcollapse. Pallets shall never be stored more than two high.

6. Storage areas shall be kept free from accumulation of materials that constitute hazards, tripping, fire,explosion, or environmental hazard.

7. Combustible materials, such as oily rags, waste oil and other waste, shall be stored in approved coveredmetal container and disposed of as hazardous waste.

8. The Area around the BOP controls shall be clear of materials to allow unobstructed access.

9. The area around emergency equipment such as fire extinguishers shall be kept clear at all times.

10. Empty sacks and containers, from mixing mud, shall be stacked neatly and disposed of appropriately assoon as mixing is complete. The area around the Mixing Hoppers shall be kept clear at all times.

11. Any and all chemical spills, no matter what chemical or the quantity spilt, shall be cleaned up immediately.Chemical spills shall be cleaned up and disposed of as per the MSDS. If the chemical is classified ashazardous, the chemical shall be disposed of appropriately i.e. hazardous chemical containers (ReferenceG.I.2.400 - Offshore Oil Contingency Plan, G.I.2.401 - Inland Oil Spill Response and SAHWC).

12. Rubbish bins shall be provided around the location. All rubbish bins shall have a cover (Reference: SASC-S-07).

13. Emergency escape routes shall be kept clear at all times.





B-6 / HK / Continued

14. All permanent trip hazards in emergency escape routes shall be marked with black and yellow diagonalstripes. Were practical, remove permanent trip hazards from walkways.







B-7

Fire Fighting Equipment And

Operations





B-7 / Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations (FFE&O)

HSERM / B / B-7 / FFE&O covers the following types of Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations:

1. B-7a / Onshore Rig Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations (ON/FFE&O).

2. B-7b / Offshore Rig Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations (OFF/FFE&O).







B-7 / FFE&O / Continued

B-7a / Onshore Rig Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations

(ON/FFE&O)

1. On every onshore drilling or workover rig, the Rig Operator shall provide and continuously maintain the firedetection and extinguishing system equipment, along with the firefighting equipment specified in thecontract. specified in the Drilling/Workover Contract.

2. The Rig Operator shall develop and implement a structured rig fire detection and extinguishing equipmentmaintenance and inspection program designed to ensure all detection and extinguishing equipment isreadily accessible and continuously operable in their designated locations.

The essential elements of this structured rig firefighting equipment maintenance and inspectionprogram are as follows:

A. Post Rig Move Fire Water System Hydro-test and Flush.

B. Post Rig Move Fire Water System Equipment Function Test.

C. Monthly Fire Water System Equipment Function Tests

3. All firefighting equipment shall be inspected monthly as a minimum. All rig fire detection and extinguishingequipment maintenance, inspection, and testing activities shall be documented in an inspection log.

4. Fire detection and extinguishing equipment shall not be tampered with and shall not be removed for otherthan for firefighting, training, and/or required maintenance servicing. Any fire extinguishers removed fromthe well site for maintenance and/or recharging shall be replaced by spare extinguishers during the periodthey are missing.

5. All fire extinguishers shall be conspicuously signed, appropriately mounted so that the top of theextinguisher is 1m above the ground, and provided with an OEM protective cover or cabinet.

6. Carbon tetrachloride and other toxic vaporizing liquid fire extinguishers are prohibited.

7. Halon-1301 Fixed Extinguishing Systems and Halon-1301 or Halon-2402 Portable Fire Extinguishers areprohibited and shall be removed from service and replaced with a compliant environmentally sensitiveagent.

8. For each rig, the Rig Operator shall prepare a fire control plan and the plan shall be permanently exhibitedon the rig.





B-7 / FFE&O / B-7a / ON/FFE&O / Continued

9. As per Dril ling Manual Chapter-8 Section F 3.4. Each rig (land and offshore) the drilling contractor shalldevelop written site specific Fire Attack Plans for each of the following areas (Refer to HSERM / B / B-7 /FFE&O / B-7a / ON/FFE&O / Appendix No.2 / Figure No.1):

A. Engine compartment or engine skid.

B. SCR room.

C. BOP / Cellar Area

D. Fuel tank storage area(s).

E. Rig site and camp accommodation cabins.

F. Any other area on the rig where a fire may be reasonably thought possible.

10. As a minimum the fire attack plan shall include the fol lowing:

A. Identify the primary and secondary Fire Attack Teams that will fight the fire.

B. Identify the Fire Team composition, as a minimum this will consist of: Fire Team leader and 3 furthermembers. All designated Fire Team Members shall wear NFPA-1500 compliant firefighting PPE and 30minute SCBA.

C. Identify specific firefighting equipment and procedures to fight a fire in that specific area.

D. Identify the maximum allowable response time for the Fire team to assemble and fight the fire.

E. Include procedures such as a “ T” Card system, to facilitate a rapid and accurate head count or othermeans to account for all personnel.

F. Include rescue procedures for rescuing potentially injured personnel from the fire site or vicinity. Thedrilling contractor shall provide adequate training to ensure that all personnel are capable of performingtheir assigned tasks as specified in the fire attack plan.

11. The rig crew shall validate the safe and effective implementation of this plan in routine rig fire trainingexercises and emergency drills.

Note: The drilling contractor shall provide adequate training to ensure that all personnel are capable ofsafely and effectively performing their assigned tasks as specified in the fire attack plans.

12. Fixed fire extinguishing systems for each onshore rigs (including water, carbon dioxide, dry powder, orfoam) shall be kept in good working order, available for immediate use at all times while engaged in drillingoperations or in transit and have conspicuously placed operational instructions for each system. Cylindershave valid hydrostatic test date (every five years).






Note: Discharged cylinders shall not be recharged without a hydrostatic test and remarking if more than 5years have elapsed from the date of the last test. Cylinders continuously in service withoutdischarging may be retained in service for a maximum of 12 years from the date of last hydro-test. Athe end of 12 years of service an in-place discharge test shall be conducted and hydro-test

performed.

13. Manual fire alarm stations shall be conspicuously located.

14. Fire alarms shall be audible in all areas of the rig, high noise areas shall also be furnished with a visualalarm (strobe lights). All fire doors shall remain closed at all times unless fitted with magnetic locks (or asimilar device) which shall automatically release when an alarm is activated.

15. Each rig shall install a fire water system (See HSERM / B / B-7 / FFE&O / B-7a / ON/FFE&O / Appendi

No.2 / Figure No.2) composed of a diesel fire water pump skid taking suction from the drill watertank and supplying a minimum 3 inch fire water dist ributing system connected to a minimum ofthree (3) fire hose reel stations strategically located in the follow ing hazard areas:

A. Drill Floor.

B. Choke Manifold / Cellar Area.

C. Mud Pump / Generator / Diesel Fuel Storage Area.

16. The diesel fire water pump engine shall be designed to operate in a minimum 52o C Ambient

Temperature Environment and have the minimum components designed in accordance withapplicable API Standards:

A. Fire Water Pump and Diesel Engine.

B. Manual Start Controller / Manual Engine Speed Control.

C. Digital Engine Tachometer.

D. Skid Isolation Valves.

17. A manually operated quarter turn pressure control valve routed back to the drill water storage tank shall beprovided on the diesel fire pump skid.

18. Each rig shall have a diesel fire pump operation procedure which clearly defines the minimum requiredEngine RPM and discharge pressure for both drill floor hose reel operations and simultaneous ground levelhose reel operations.






19. The diesel fi re water shall have the follow ing rated conditions designed to provide a minimum 75psat any 1.25 inch fire hose reel station, with two (2) 1.25 inch hoses in operation:

A. Shut-In @ 175psi (Maximum).

B. 250 GPM @ 160psi.

C. 500 GPM @ 140 psi.

20. An Elkhart Model EB25 Uni-body valve shall be installed on the drill water storage tank, at a height of 2-feet above the bottom, in a readily vehicle accessible location, in order to allow a fire truck to take suctionfrom the rig water supply.

21. The 3 inch Rig Fire Water Distribution System (FWDS) shall be composed of 3 inch pipe and 3 inch high

pressure hose with integrated couplings designed for a minimum working pressure of 250psi. Followingeach rig move and prior to spud, the fire water system shall be hydro-tested to 250psi for 20-minutes withno leaks and then thoroughly flushed of any potentially obstructive materials.

The 3 inch FWDS should be flushed prior to pressure testing. This will allow for any contaminants /obstructions to be removed as well as minimize air pockets in the system which could allow for falseindications of system leak by drop in pressure. Flush entire system with hose nozzles removed andpressure to 250 psi with ¼ turn isolation valves at fire hose reel stations in closed position.

22. The minimum required fire hose reel stations shall be designed as follows:

A. ¼ Turn ball isolation valve installed at the hose reel inlet connection.

B. 50-ft. length of 1.25-in. L-84 Goodall rubber fire hose with 1.50-in. brass couplings on the drill floor.

C. 100-ft. length of 1.25-in. L-84 Goodall rubber fire hose with 1.50-in. brass couplings at ground level firehose reel stations.

D. Akron 3019 95 GPM 1.50-in. Brass Pistol Grip Nozzle or approved equal.

Note: 100-ft. 1.50-in. fire hose stations may be substituted for the 100-ft 1.25-in. ground level fire hosereels, provided the 100’ 1.50-in. hose strictly complies with the NFPA-1962 Standard, is rated for aminimum 250psi working pressure, is equipped with brass couplings, and provided with an OEM

Hose Cabinet or protective cover and a gated isolation valve.

23. Each fire hose shall be completely unrolled and inspected by the Rig Operator once each month anddefective parts should be replaced. Fire hoses shall be hydro-tested annually to a minimum pressure of250psi (Refer to G.I. 1781.001-1).

24. The access to any fire hose reel station shall not be blocked.






25. Each fire hydrant shall be equipped with a spanner wrench.

26. Each fire hose shall be properly stored on a rack or reel when not in use.

27. Each fire nozzle shall either be attached to the hose or stored next to the fire hydrant to which the fire hoseis attached.

28. Each hose water nozzle provided shall be of an approved dual purpose type (i.e. spray jet type)incorporating a shutoff.

29. Each fire station shall be properly identified by marking: "FIRE STATION NO.____" next to the station inletters at least 5 centimeters (2 inches) high.

30. Additional information on requirements is available in specific Rig Contracts / Schedule “ G” and HSERM /B / B-7 / FFE&O / B-7a / ON/FFE&O / Appendix No.1 and 2.






Appendix No.1

1. Hand / Portable Fire Extinguishers

The specified CO2 and Dry Chemical Hand / Portable Fire Extinguishers shall be of the specifiedmanufacturers and models and deployed as fol lows:

A. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Extinguisher Specification Requirements

10 lb. Carbon Dioxide Extinguishers shall be either Badger 10V or Kidde Pro 10CD.

B. Minimum Required Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher Design / Placement Table

Required Number Required Size Required Location Extinguishing Agent

2 10 lb. SCR Carbon Dioxide

1 10 lb. Each Camp Kitchen Carbon Dioxide

C. Dry Chemical Extinguisher Specification Requirements

1) 150lb Wheeled Dry Chemical Extinguishers shall be Ansul Red Line.

2) 30lb Dry Chemical Extinguishers shall be Ansul Red Line.

3) 10lb Dry Chemical Extinguishers shall be Ansul Sentry 10.

D. Minimum Required Dry Chemical Extinguisher Design / Placement Table

Required Number Required Size Required Location Dry Chemical Extinguishing Agent

2 150lb HeeledDiesel Fuel

Storage/Generator ToolPushers Office

Purple K. Powder

1 150lb Heeled Rig Camp Foray (ABC) Powder

2 30lb Rig Floor Purple K. Powder

1 30lb Each Mud Tank Purple k. Powder

1 30lb Each Generator Purple K. Powder

1 30lb Accumulator Purple K. Powder

1 30lb Each Mud Pump Purple K. Powder

1 30lb Gasoline Storage Tank Purple K. Powder

1 30lb Diesel Storage Tank Purple K. Powder2 30lb Tool Pushers Office Foray (ABC) Powder

1 30lb Camp Generator Purple K. Powder

1 30lb Utility House Purple K. Powder

1 30lb Warehouse Foray (ABC) Powder

1 30lb SA Material House Foray (ABC) Powder

1 30lb Shale Shakers Foray (ABC) Powder

Cabins 10lb Accommodation Cabins Foray (ABC) Powder






Appendix No.2 / Figure No.1





B-7 / FFE&O / B-7a / ON/FFE&O / Appendix No.2 / Continued

Figure No.2





B-7 / FFE&O / Continued

B-7b / Offshore Rig Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations

(OFF/FFE&O)

1. On every offshore drilling or workover rig, the MODU Operator shall provide and continuously maintain thefire detection and extinguishing equipment, specified in both the applicable Drilling/Workover Contract andClassification Society Standards, available for immediate use at all times, while engaged in drillingoperations or in transit.

2. The MODU Operator shall develop and implement a structured rig fire detection and extinguishingequipment maintenance and inspection program, designed to ensure all firefighting and rescue equipment ireadily accessible and continuously operable in their designated locations. All offshore rig firefighting andextinguishing equipment maintenance, inspection, and testing activities shall be documented in aninspection log.

Essential elements of a compliant fi refighting and rescue equipment maintenance, inspection, andtesting program are as follows:

A. Weekly EFWP System and Fire Water / Foam Monitor System Functional Testing (Monitor can be usedwithout foam) / Strainer cleaning.

B. BOP / Well Platform Water spray and Helideck DIFFS System Function Flow Test.

C. 6-Month Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System Foam Blanket Function Test.

D. Annual Fire Hose Station Function Test.

3. Fire detection, extinguishing, and rescue equipment shall not be tampered with and shall not be removed foother than for firefighting, training, and/or required maintenance servicing. Any fire detection or fireextinguishing equipment removed from the offshore rig for maintenance, refurbishment, and/or rechargingshall be replaced by compatible spare extinguishing equipment during the period they are missing.

4. All firefighting and rescue equipment shall be conspicuously signed and appropriately mounted with OEMbrackets and protective covers specifically designed for reliable service in the rugged offshore operatingenvironment. Fire extinguishers shall be mounted so that the top of the extinguisher is 1m above the groundand shall be provided with an OEM protective cover or cabinet specifically designed for offshore

installations. All fire extinguishers located in the potential helideck “ Rotor Wash” Zone shall be stored inOEM Protective Cabinets.

Fixed Extinguishing System Cylinder Racks (including operating instructions), Piping Manifolds, andassociated Shutdown Interlocks / Switches shall be placed in protective enclosures when located outsidethe hull compartment or similar protected space.

Note: Canvas or cloth covers shall not be used as protective covers for firefighting equipment located in the“ ROTOR WASH ZONE” .





B-7 / FFE&O / B-7b / OFF/FFE&O / Continued

5. Carbon tetrachloride and other toxic vaporizing liquid fire extinguishers are prohibited.

6. Halon-1301 Fixed Extinguishing Systems and Halon-1301 and Halon-2402 Portable Extinguishers are

specifically prohibited. All Halon-1301 Fixed Extinguishing Systems shall be replaced prior to initial Rig Acceptance or at the next 5-Yr Special Survey for existing MODUs.

7. Each offshore rig shall have a dedicated fire water system supplied by a minimum of two (2) electric firewater pumps taking suction from the deep well pump system supply loop. In addition, at least one (1) of thefire water pumps shall be configured to be effectively supplied from the sea chest and drill water tanks. Theelectric fire water pump supplied from the sea chest shall be connected to the rig’s emergency power supplbus. All fire pumps shall be installed in accordance with the relevant requirements of NFPA 20.

Key components of the fire water system shall be as follows:

A. Seawater Suction strainers shall have a maximum mesh opening of 5mm . Suction strainers shall have anickel aluminum bronze or 316 L stainless steel body and 316 L of Monel strainer basket.

B. All fire pump suction line isolation valves shall be gate valves (butterfly valves expressly prohibited).

C. NFPA 20 compliant EFWP discharge manifold configuration (RV Tee, check valve, isolation valve).

D. NFPA 20 complaint calibrated liquid filled suction and discharge pressure gauges

The rig fi re water system design shall be of sufficient capacity to provide the following minimum firehazard area water supply w ith one (1) fire pump in operation and connected to the rig’s emergencypower system:

E. Rig Floating/Under Tow

1) Main Deck – 300 GPM @ 75psi (Minimum Simultaneous Fire Hose Nozzle Pressure).

2) Heli-Deck – 692 GPM @ 75psi/60psi (Minimum Single / Simultaneous Monitor Nozzle Pressure).

F. Jacked – Up

1) Bop Area - 600 GPM @ 75psi (Minimum Simultaneous Monitor Nozzle Pressure).

2) Heli-Deck - 692 GPM @ 75psi/60psi (Minimum Single / Simultaneous Foam Monitor Nozzle

Pressure).

G. Deep Well Pump System shall have an approved automatic pressure control valve specificallydesigned to maintain the defined minimum deep well pump system operating pressure in a helideckcrash scenario. This automatic pressure control system shall be specifically designed for reliableSeawater Service with Nickel Aluminum Bronze or 316L SS Body, 316L or Monel stems, and Buna-Ndiaphragms and seat discs. Refer to the Section-8 below for examples of approved sea water servicepressure relief valves. NFPA 20 complaint calibrated liquid filled pressure gauges shall be installed onthe inlet side of the strainer and the outlet side of the actuation valve.






8. Each Fire Water Pump shall have an approved automatic pressure relief valve specifically designed to limithe Main Deck Fire Water System Operating Pressure to a maximum of 150psi. This automatic pressurecontrol system shall be specifically designed for reliable Seawater Service with Nickel Aluminum Bronze o316L SS Body, 316L or Monel stems, and Buna-N diaphragms and seat discs. Examples of approved

EFWP Pressure Relief Valves are as follows:

A. Bermad Model 430-UF.

B. OCV Model 108.

C. Inbal Series 700D.

9. BOP / Well Platform Fire Fighting Systems

A. BOP / Well Platform Fire Water Monitor System Design Alternative

The BOP / Well Platform Fire Hazard Area shall be protected with either an approved fire water monitorsystem or deluge water spray system. The approved fire water monitor system design shall include two(2) 300 GPM @ 75psi fire water monitors strategically positioned on the port and starboard sides of thestern on the main deck. The fire water supply to these monitors shall be configured to allow them to bepre-aimed and actuated in an unobstructed 90o protective water spray pattern over the BOP / WellPlatform Area, from the rear of the cantilever area.

The BOP Area Fire Water Monitor Station shall be designed for reliable seawater firefightingservice and utilize the following component examples or approved equals:

1) 3-in. Full Port ¼ Turn SS Butterfly Valve.

2) Akron-3526 3-in. Brass Monitor.

3) Akron-4450 Brass 300 GPM @ 100psi Monitor Nozzle.

B. BOP / Well Platform Deluge Water spray System Design Alternative

The BOP / Well Platform Fire Hazard Area may alternatively be protected with a deluge water spraysystem designed in accordance with the applicable sections of API-2030 and NFPA-15. The minimumrequired BOP / Well Platform Deluge Water spray Design Density shall be .50 GPM/ft2 (20.4 lpm/m2)with a minimum water spray nozzle operating pressure of 20psi.

The system shall be manually operated from a minimum of two (2) strategic escape path locations and

the driller’s cabin. The system shall be equipped with an approved sea water service strainer (maximum5mm strainer mesh) located on the inlet side of the deluge system actuation valve, galvanized waterspray system piping downstream of the strainer, and GEM D-3 95o Water spray Nozzles or approvedequals with a minimum 11mm orifice. Spiral water spray nozzles designs are specifically prohibiteddue to poor operational experience with p lugging.

Suction strainers shall have a nickel aluminum bronze or 316 L stainless steel body and 316 L ofmonel strainer basket Spray nozzle connections shall branch from the upper part of the supply headerbetween the ten o'clock and two o'clock position in order to minimize nozzle obstruction.






10. The Rig Fire Hose Stations shall be strategically positioned throughout all operational areas, in accordancewith the applicable Classification Society Standards. All Rig Fire Hose Stations shall have a MinimumNozzle Operating Pressure of 75psi and a Maximum Nozzle Operating Pressure of 125psi.

All Rig Fi re Hose Stations shall be equipped wi th the fol lowing component examples or approvedequals:

A. Elkhart U-25 1.50-in. Brass Angle Valve.

B. Flex line ENX5 100-ft. 1.50-in. hose with 1.50-in. brass couplings and 250psi / 500psi PressureRating.

C. Akron 3019 or Elkhart SFL 1.50-in. 95 GPM Brass Pistol Grip Nozzles.

11. SA CAP-437 Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System

A SA CAP-437 compliant Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System composed of either a Foam Monitor Systemor DIFFS Foam Water spray System with a minimum compliant design for the SA Aviation AW-139 Helicopters having a D-Value=16.66m. Either Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System shall be supplied by acompliant 150-Gallon Foam Bladder Tank Skid utilizing a 3% MIL Spec AFFF Foam Concentrate.

Where helideck foam booster pumps are provided they shall comply with the defined requirements ofsection 7 and 8 of this procedure. In addition these pumps shall be equipped with a compliant by-pass lineconfiguration.

A. Helideck Foam Bladder Tank Skid

The compl iant 150-Gallon Foam Bladder Tank Skid design includes an ASME Code Section-VIIIinternally coal tar coated tank, 316L SS bolts and ¼-Turn ball valves, ASME Code Section-VIIIRelief Valve, Foam Concentrate Level Indicator, Minimum 4” Foam Monitor / DIFFS RatioController, Maximum 2.50” Foam Hose Reel Station Ratio Cont roller, 6” Foam Monitor / DIFFSSupply Manifold, and 3” Foam Hose Reel Station Supply Manifold. Examples of potentiallycompliant Helideck Foam Skid OEMs are as fol lows:

1) Ansul.

2) Buckeye.

3) Skum.

B. Helideck Foam Monitor System

The Helideck Foam Monitor System shall be designed to supply a minimum of 346 GPM @ 75psi FoamMonitor Nozzle Inlet Pressure to each of two (2) simultaneously operating Foam Monitor Stations. TheFoam Monitor Nozzle shall be elevated a maximum of 25cm above the helideck surface and provide anunobstructed 90-Degree Foam Monitor Nozzle Spray Pattern across the entire helideck surface. Aminimum of two (2) Helideck Foam Monitor Stations shall be located on separate and distinct FoamMonitor Platforms no greater than 50” below the helideck surface with direct stairway






access to the helideck surface. A direct stairway access / escape path shall also be provided under thehelideck to each foam monitor station platform.

The Helideck Foam Monitor Stations shall be designed for reliable seawater firefighting service

and utilize the following component examples or approved equals:

1) 3-inch Full Port ¼ Turn SS Butterfly Valves.

2) Akron-3526 3-inch Brass Monitor.

3) Buckeye BFMN-400 Brass 400 GPM @ 100psi Monitor Nozzle.

C. Helideck DIFFS Foam Water spray System

The Helideck DIFFS Foam Water spray System Design Alternative shall be installed in accordance withboth the 2012 CAP-437: Chapter-5: Section-2.10-2.12 and SA Offshore Helideck DIFFS Foam Water

spray System Design Standard. Helideck DIFFS Foam Water spray Activation Switches shall beprovided at the HLO Staging Position located outside the potential helideck crash fragment zone.

D. Helideck Foam Hose Reel Stations

In addition to either the Helideck Foam Monitor System or Helideck DIFFS Foam Water spray System,two (2) Foam Hose Reel Stations shall be provided with a minimum 60 GPM flow of a 3% MIL Spec

AFFF Foam Solution, through a 95 GPM Brass Pistol Grip Nozzle. These Foam Hose Reels shall beplace in OEM Protective Cabinets and located 180o apart at the Foam Monitor Station Platforms orHelideck Access / Escape Stairway Platforms. Each Foam Hose Reel Station shall have directunobstructed stairway access to the helideck surface and positioned so that the hose can be readilydeployed across the helideck surface.

The Helideck Foam Hose Reel Stations shall be designed for reliable seawater firefightingservice and utilize the following component examples or approved equals:

1) ¼-Turn 316L SS Foam Hose Reel Station Isolation Ball Valve.

2) OEM Offshore Material Spec Hose Reels.

3) 1.50” Goodall L-84 Hose with integrated brass couplings.

4) Akron-3012 or Elkhart SFL 95-GPM Brass Pistol Grip Nozzle.

E. Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System EFWP Start Switches

Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System EFWP Start Switches shall be provided at each Foam MonitorStation and / or at the HLO Staging Position located outside the potential helideck crash fragment zone






12. Each offshore drilling or workover rig contractor shall develop and implement a practical Rig Fire AttackPlan, in accordance with the applicable requirements defined in the SA Dri lli ng Manual Chapter-8Section-F 3.4 (September 2010), See Appendix- 1.

A. Engine Compartment.

B. BOP / Well Platform Area.

C. SCR Compartment.

D. Pit Room.

E. Mud Pump Room.

F. Accumulator Unit / Deck.

G. Heli-Deck.

H. Accommodation Module.

I. Rig Floor.

13. As a Minimum the Fire Attack Plan shall include the following:

A. A “ Quick Reference” Hazard Area Sketch with the Critical Sequential Emergency Response Actions(Refer to HSERM / B / B-7 / FFE&O / B-7b / OFF/FFE&O / Appendix No.1), supplemented with adetailed Fire Attack Plan Operations Procedure defining the requirements of HSERM / B / B-7 / FFE&O

/ B-7b / OFF/FFE&O / Section-13 (B-E).

B. Identify the Fire Team composition, as a minimum this shall consist of a Fully Trained Fire Team leadeand four (4) experienced team members. All designated members of the Primary and Secondary / Backup Fire Team shall have NFPA-1500 compliant firefighting PPE and 30 minute SCBA with integratedface mask voice communications devices.

C. Identify specific firefighting / rescue equipment and procedures to safely and effectively conduct basicfirefighting and rescue operations in the defined hazard area.

D. Identify the maximum allowable response time for the Fire Team to assemble and safely initiate therequired firefighting and/or rescue operations.

E. Include procedures for conducting a head count or other means to account for all personnel.Include practical operational procedures for rescuing potentially injured personnel from the defined firehazard area.

Note: The drilling contractor shall provide adequate training to ensure that all personnel are capable ofsafely and effectively performing their assigned tasks as specified in their fire attack plans andvalidated their preparedness through a structured rig emergency exercise and drill program.






14. Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems

SA approved manually actuated fixed fire extinguishing systems with the following specified shutdowninterlocks shall be provided for the Engine Room, MCC Compartments, SCR and VFD Rooms, Paint

Locker, and Galley Hoods. SA approved fixed fire extinguishing system agents include

CO2, FM-200, and NOVEC-1230 for the Engine Room, MCC Compartments, SCR and VFD Rooms, andthe Paint Locker. Galley Hoods may be protected with CO2 or Wet Chemical Extinguishing Agent.

All fixed fire extinguishing system design and installations shall stringently comply with the latest edition ofthe applicable NFPA Standard. The Engine Room, MCC Compartments, and SCR / VFD Room Fixed FireExtinguishing Systems shall remain fully operational in all Dead Ship Loss of Power Scenarios. Water Mistsystems is not an approved equivalent design to the specified fixed fire extinguishing system as describedabove.

Conspicuously placed sequential operational instructions shall be posted at each manual actuation station.

Fixed Extinguishing System Cylinder Racks shall not be located in the hazard areas they protect, with theexception of the Galley Hood Extinguishing Systems.

A. Fixed Fire Extinguishing System Shutdown Interlocks

The following specified shutdown interlocks shall be provided for each designated system. Manuallyoperated fire dampers, located outside the fire hazard zone, are an acceptable design alternative toautomatic damper closure devices.

1) Engine Room

Engine and Diesel Fuel Supply Shutdown, Supply and Exhaust fan shutdown and Supply and

Exhaust damper closure interlocks.

2) MCC Compartments / SCR and VFD Rooms

HVAC Shutdown and Damper closure interlocks.

3) Paint Locker

Supply / Exhaust fan shutdown and Damper closure interlocks.

4) Galley Hoods

Exhaust fan shutdown and damper closure interlocks.

15. An integrated heat, smoke, and manual fire alarm station system shall be provided in accordance withapplicable Classification Society Standards, with detection and alarm devices strategically locatedthroughout the rig. Smoke detection devices shall be provided in all climate controlled living andwork spaces and fixed temperature / rate of rise heat detectors in all equipment and machinery spaces.






16. Fire alarms shall be audible in all areas of the rig, high noise areas shall also be furnished with a visualalarm (strobe lights).

17. All compartment fire doors shall be diligently maintained and remain closed at all times, unless fitted withmagnetic locks (or a similar device) which shall automatically release when an alarm is activated. All maindeck supply / exhaust and vent stacks shall be adequately labeled with the hull compartments / areas theyserve. All main deck hatch covers shall have suitable means of access and closing mechanisms installed aappropriate. When mechanical or closing mechanisms are used they shall be inspected and function testedweekly and entered into the rigs lifting gear registry and preventative maintenance system.

18. All fire hose shall be completely unrolled and function flow tested by the Rig Operator once each month,with any defective parts replaced. Fire hoses shall be hydro-tested annually to 300psi. (Refer to G.I.1781.001).

19. The access to any fire hose station shall not be blocked.

20. Each fire hose station shall be equipped with an appropriate spanner wrench.

21. Each fire hose shall be properly stored on a Fire Equipment OEM designed offshore rack or reel with aprotective cabinet or cover when not in use. All Fire Hose Stations located within the potential helideck“ Rotor Wash” Zone shall be placed in OEM Protective Cabinets

22. Each fire nozzle shall remain continuously attached to the hose at each designated fire hose station.

23. Each fire station on an offshore rig shall be properly identified by marking: "FIRE STATION NO.____" nextto the station in letters at least 5 centimeters (2 inches) high.

24. On each offshore rig, there shall be at all times at least one formally trained helideck crew holding validOPITO or Approved Equivalent Certificates in HLO and Heli-Deck Crash Fire Rescue operations. Theminimum required Heli-deck crew will include at least four personnel; HLO, baggage handler and a two (2) member Heli-Deck Crash Fire Fighting Team.

The required Heli-deck crew shall demonstrate knowledge and competency in the following cr iticaloperational elements:

A. Rig Heli-Deck Fire Attach Plan.

B. Basic Heli-Deck Crash Rescue.

C. Rig Heli-Deck Fire Fighting System.






D. Basic Heli-Deck Fire Fighting.

25. Crash rescue box is to be permanently located in a designated staging area readily accessible to the

heliport. This box is to be highly visible and designated exclusively for crash equipment. The minimumrequired contents shall comply with the SA Aviation Department’s “ Helideck Crash Box Inventory Lis t” (Refer to HSERM / B / B-7 / FFE&O / B-7b / OFF/FFE&OE / Appendix No.2).

26. Portable and Wheeled Fire Extinguishers shall be provided in accordance with the applicable ClassificationSociety Requirements and installed in accordance with the requirements in Section-4.

Helideck Portable & Wheeled Fire Extinguishing Equipment shall comply with the requirements of 2012CAP-437: Chapter-5: Section-4.0. Wheeled Extinguishers are not required for any helideck that is alsoprotected with a SA Compliant Helideck Twin Agent Skid.

The rig shall have the capability to refill / recharge their fire extinguishers or maintain sufficient onboardspare units.






Appendix No.1






Appendix No.2

Fire Fighting and Control Equipment

Helideck Crash Box Equipment Inventory List

1. NFPA-1500 Compliant Fire Fighting PPE 3 Sets

2. Bolt cutter 36-in. 1 each

3. ½” Fire Retardant Rope 1 rol l 50-ft. and 1 rol l 100-ft.

4. Fire Blanket 2 each

5. Hooligan tool , 36-in. 2 each

6. Firemen’s Crowbar, 51-in. 1 each

7. Safety Rescue Kni fe 1 each

8. Grapnel Hook attached to 50-ft braided 3/16”SS cable

1 each

9. Water-Jet Fire Blanket (72-in. x 60-in.) 2 each





B-8

Control of Static Electricity





B-8 / Control of Static Electr icity

1. When transferring flammable liquids or finely divided flammable or explosive materials from one container tanother the containers shall be in firm contact with each other or be continuously electrically bondedthroughout the transfer so as to prevent the accumulation of a static charge.

2. When tanks, mixers, or processing vessels are used for flammable liquids or flammable or explosivecompounds, they shall be electrically bonded and grounded while being filled or emptied.

3. When pneumatic pumps are used to transfer flammable liquids, they shall be grounded.

4. All transfer hoses used to transfer flammable fluids shall be of an antistatic construction.

5. All air hoses, used as part of the rigs breathing air system, shall be of an antistatic construction.







B-9

Flare Gun Procedure





B-9 / Flare Gun Procedure (FG)

1. Purpose

A. Provide the purchase order number(s) for the flare gun and cartridges.

B. Provide step by step instructions for safe storage, care, training, and use of the flare gun.

C. Identify alternate systems for ignition.

D. Flare Gun training form.

2. Scope

The scope of this policy is applicable to Saudi Aramco Rigs (SAR) and all Contractor Rigs in accordancewith SA G.I.-1852.

This procedure does not supersede corporate requirements; it only enhances the choice made for Drillingand Workover (D&WO).

3. Responsibility

It is the responsibility of the Person in Charge (PIC) to ensure that this Flare Gun Procedure (FG) is followeon their rig.

4. Flare Gun and Cartr idge Ordering Information

A. Flare Gun SAP Material Number is: 1000631334.

B. Flare Cartridge SAP Material Number is: 1000631333.

C. 20 cartridges are required as per G.I.1852.01.

Note: One box contains 10 cartridges.

D. The shelf life of the cartridge is 3 years from the Date of Manufacture (DOM). The DOM is stamped onthe cartridge.

5. Flare Gun and Cartridge Storage

The Flare Gun and cartridges shall be locked in a clearly marked wooden box in the Foreman’s office, thelocation of the key shall be known only to the Foreman and the Drilling Contractor PIC.





B-9 / FG / Continued

6. Flare Gun Care and Maintenance

A. Always handle the flare gun as if it were loaded, keep it pointed in a safe direction and the breech isopen.

B. The barrel should be cleaned and oiled on a regular basis:

1) Annually, if not used.

2) After each use.

C. Ensure the firing pin is not seized - the pin shall have free movement.

D. Before loading a cartridge ensure the firing pin is in the retracted position.

7. Flare Gun Usage

A. Main priority is to evacuate all non-essential personnel to the Rig Evacuation Muster Point (REMP)located outside the 100ppm Rupture Exposure Radius (RER) area. The rig foreman shall bring theflare gun, SMART radio and his vehicle to the REMP.

B. If a well site emergency occurs during any drilling or workover operations, the situation shall be reportedby dialing the 110 incident notification system, utilizing the seven digit local area emergency numbersand contact the relevant Drilling Superintendent in D&WO.

C. Voluntary Well Ignition - Should uncont rolled hydrocarbon flow from a well occur without beingaccidentally ignited the decision to ignite shall be based on the following:

1) If uncontrollable flow from a gas well creates a 30ppm H2S concentration at the defined RER ignitethe flow immediately.

2) If uncontrollable flow presents immediate and serious danger to adjacent inhabited areas or facilitiesby creating a minimum 100ppm H2S concentration at the well site parameter, ignite the flowimmediately.

3) Any flow condition other than that described in item A and B above shall be evaluated on a case-bycase basis. The decision to ignite shall be made by the VP / Executive Director D&WO and/orGeneral Manager of Drilling, after evaluating all the facts. If there is no communication with a highelevel of management or time factor becomes critical, the decision to voluntarily ignite can be made

by a D&WO Liaison-man, Well Control Team Site Leader, Superintendent or Manager.

8. Ignit ing the Well

A. Review the PPE requirements in HSERM / B / B-3 / PPE, the additional PPE shall be a Self-ContainedBreathing Apparatus (SCBA) which shall be donned.






B. The flare gun operator shall position himself with the wind to his back, approximately 300 to 400 feet away from the ignition point.

C. Ensure an escape route is available before ignition.

D. Depending on the well situation affects the aiming of the flare gun.

Considerations are as follows:

1) If a column of fluid is rising up, aim the flare gun at the potential vapors escaping at the top of thefluid column.

2) If there is no significant column of fluid aim just above the rotary table.

3) If there is only fluid and gas escaping from the cellar area, then aim at the cellar.

E. The 300 to 400 feet is a starting point, you may need to move closer depending on the power of theflare gun. Increments of 20 feet should be used.

F. Misfire Instructions:

1) Keep the flare gun pointed down range at the same angle, while in this position, re-cock the hammeand pull the trigger again following the same safety precautions.

2) If the gun does not fire, repeat this step at least 4 times, keeping gun pointed down range.

3) If flare gun still does not fire, keep the barrel pointed down range, open the breech and drop thecartridge into a bucket of water and seal it with the lid.

G. Other Ignition Areas:

1) Shale Shaker area - Since Hydrocarbons and gases can reach the shale shaker you shall ensurethis area is ignited.

2) Flare Pits - If your flare lines are open check to ensure this area is also ignited.

3) Follow the same procedure to ignite these areas as mentioned above.

H. Another situation for flare gun usage

In a controlled well control situation where the gut line is opened to flare through the flare lines – and theremote ignition system fails – only then shall the flare gun be used to ignite the flare pit.

9. Alternate System for Ignition.

A. Fire-Fly

1) This is a self-contained unit utilizing a solar panel and battery pack as a source of power.






2) This system can be installed and operational in approximately 1-2 hours with absolutely nodowntime to drilling operations.

3) The Fire-Fly supervisor and the Liaisonman shall complete a walk around and checklist reviewing

the installation.

4) The Liaisonman shall sign for and be responsible for the security of the ignition key.

5) On critical wells, where the drill out or completion period exceeds 30 days, we recommend that a fuinspection of the system be carried out by an authorized Fire-Fly representative.

6) The primary ignition system should be installed such that remote activation can be achieved from asafe location through a triggering device that allows for complete egress of all personnel from thewell site prior to ignition.

B. The secondary system is a flare gun.


11. References (Refer to HSERM / A / A-2 / Reference Material)

A. G.I.No.1850.001 - Onshore Well site Emergency Response Operations Roles and Responsibilities.

B. G.I.No.1851.001 - Offshore Well site Emergency Response Operations Roles and Responsibilities.

C. G.I. No.1852.01 - Rig Site Flare Gun and Communication Equipment.

D. Sour Gas Well Ignit ion System - Fire-Fly Brochure.

E. HSERM / B / B-3 / PPE – Personal Protective Equipment.





Revision Summary

Rev No. Date Revision Summary Approvals

Originator

Custodian

Review

Approval

Authori ty00 Jan 2013 Original Release RGW RGW OSH & AAR

Note: Signed Original(s) are maintained within D&WO-DOE&CD.



CRig Equipment and

Procedure(s) Requirements



Section C / Special Operation(s) RequirementsD&WO HSE Requirements Manual

SA-DWO-HSERM-SOR-003 / Created: 01/13 / Last Review: 01/13 / Next Review: 01/17Owner: VP-D&WORevision(s) identif ied by a Vertical Bar in the Right Margin Page 1 of 32

SA-DWO-HSERM-SOR-003-R0_ Section C / Special Operations Requirements Date: January 2013Document Title: Section C / Special Operations Requirements


SectionC

Special Operation(s)

Requirements









Table of Contents

Contents Page

C-1 Drill Stem Testing 4C-2 Swabbing 6C-3 Well Servicing and Well Stimulation 8C-4 Stripping and Snubbing 11C-5 Flare Pits and Flare Lines 13C-6 Water Well Operations 15C-7 Coil Tubing Safety 18C-8 Rig Move 20

Revision Summary 32





C-1

Drill Stem Testing





C-1 / Drill Stem Testing

1. Initial flowing of formation fluids to surface during a drill stem test shall be restricted to daylight hours only.

2. During drill stem testing or the removal of pipe after a drill stem test, the SA Liaisonman or an equallyqualified person shall remain on the rig and shall exercise continuous supervision over all operations.

3. When oil or gas have been encountered during a drill stem test, the drill stem contents should be replacedwith drilling fluid. Fluid recovered from the mud saver shall flow back to the tanks or to a reserve pit.

4. During drill stem testing, motors and engines not required in the operation shall be shut off. All engineexhausts shall be equipped with water sprays or spark arrestors for spark suppression. The Rig Operatorshall ensure that water on engine exhausts is shut off when engines are not operating.

5. During drill stem testing, no motor vehicle shall be permitted within 22.9 meters (75 feet) of the well bore.

6. Before drill stem testing starts, the person in charge (contractor personnel if employed) shall conduct a pre-task meeting with all rig crew and 3rd party personnel; this may require more than one meeting. Themeeting shall address the following:

A. All safety aspects of the operation.

B. Chain of command.

C. Emergency procedures.

Note: All meetings must be documented; documented meetings shall include the full name of all personnetaking part.

7. During drill stem testing and well stimulation, all piping systems, which will be exposed to either pump orwell pressure, shall be securely staked down or secured in such a manner as to prevent any unduewhipping or flailing of the pipe should a failure occur.







C-2

Swabbing





C-2 / Swabbing

1. Swabbing operations shall not be carried out during the hours of darkness.

2. Auxiliary swabbing units shall be anchored securely during swabbing operations.

3. Where swabbing tanks are not provided with an external means of gauging, any personnel physicallygauging the tanks shall be provided with, and shall wear, approved respiratory protective equipment. Inaddition, they shall be continuously monitored during this procedure by another person.

4. Oil savers shall be equipped with controls which can be readily operated from the rig floor.

5. During swabbing operations, the fluids shall be piped directly to a battery, flare pit, skid tank, or mobiletrailer tank located 45.7 meters (150 feet) or more from the well bore.

6. The air intake and exhaust of the pump engine shall be located 7.6 meters (25 feet) or more from the rigtank when a well is being circulated with hydrocarbon or hydrocarbon based fluid.

7. During loading or unloading, the tank truck exhaust shall be located at a distance of not less than 7.6meters (25 feet) from the rig fuel tank and a minimum of 22.9 meters (75 feet) away from the well bore.

8. Fluids used in or as a result of swabbing operations shall not be piped to a tank truck under anycircumstances.







C-3

Well Servicingand

Well Stimulation





C-3 / Well Servicing and Well Stimulation (WS&WS)

1. A pre-task safety meeting shall be held with all rig crew and contractor personnel before:

A. Rig-up of contractor equipment.

B. After every crew change.

C. If the operation should change.


2. Before drill stem testing starts, the person in charge (contractor personnel if employed) shall conduct a pre-task meeting with all rig crew and 3rd party personnel; this may require more than one meeting. The

meeting shall address the following:

A. All safety aspects of the operation.

B. Chain of command.

C. Emergency procedures.


3. During drill stem testing and well stimulation, all piping systems, which will be exposed to either pump orwell pressure, shall be securely staked down or secured in such a manner as to prevent any unduewhipping or flailing of the pipe should a failure occur.

4. Swivel joints provided with lugs for hammer tightening shall not be used in a well servicing operation unlessthey are manufactured from steel.

5. Hammering or tightening of unions or connections while under pressure shall not be permitted.

6. Any tool or equipment other than normal drilling equipment, which is connected to the top of the drill string,casing, or tubing while it is in the hole, shall be secured against falling by means of a wire rope safety line.

7. All piping, pumps, valves, and fittings used in servicing operations shall be hydraulically pressure-testedprior to the commencement of each well cementing or servicing operation. Subsequent pumping pressureshall not exceed the test pressure.





C-3 / WS&WS / Continued

8. On any well service job involving pressure only the minimum number of people necessary to perform thetask shall be exposed to the equipment under pressure.

9. Before transferring hydrocarbons, all pumps, tanks, and trucks shall be bonded together and electricallygrounded.

10. No vehicle shall be allowed to cross surface flow-lines on a location.

11. Pressurized lines and vessels shall be so barriered as to restrict access, only authorized personnel shall beallowed in the work area.







C-4

Strippingand

Snubbing





C-4 / Stripping and Snubbing

1. An emergency escape system shall be provided for personnel working atop hydraulic snubbing equipment.

2. Prior to starting snubbing operations, the snubbing tower shall be guyed according to the manufacturer'sspecifications to prevent it from collapse or turnover.

3. Flow lines or bleed-off lines shall be located away from areas frequented by personnel and adequatelysecured to prevent whipping or flailing if these lines should burst.

4. Gasoline engines shall not be used on snubbing operations.

5. Diesel engines used for snubbing operations shall be equipped with spark arrestors and located a sufficientdistance away from the wellhead to ensure that any inadvertently released well fluids do not come incontact with the engines.

6. Two-way communications shall be provided between the snubbing operator and the pump operator. Thismay be accomplished by hand signals, voice communication, or other effective means.

7. A safe means of access shall be provided to the tower platforms.

8. Well surface pressure shall be monitored at all times during stripping and snubbing operations.

9. All personnel involved in a stripping operation shall be informed of the maximum working pressure that issafe for the work. The Rig Operator shall provide blow-down lines with remote control valves as needed torelieve pressure from the wellhead equipment if the working pressure exceeds the established limit.







C-5

Flare Pitsand

Flare Lines





C-5 / Flare Pits and Flare Lines

1.

A reliable and safe means of remote ignition shall be provided when hydrocarbon gases are released to the

atmosphere through a flare system.

2. No personnel shall enter a flare pit to light the flare or any waste material therein.

3. When lighting a flare pit, the lighting shall be done from the upwind side.

4. When there is no wind or when the wind direction is uncertain, no attempt shall be made to light the pitunless the man can locate himself in a position known to be free of flammable concentrations of gases orvapors.

5. All sources of ignition in the flare pit and surrounding areas shall be extinguished while any vessel is beingcompletely drained to the flare pit, unless the system is designed and constructed to prevent flashback.

6. All lines connecting any vessel to a flare pit shall be blanked off before any work is performed within thevessel.

7. Two (2) 3-1/2” EUE flare lines, each approximately 400 feet in length, shall be required for onshore oilwells.

8. Four (4) 4-1/2” LTC gas flare lines and one (1) 3-1/2” EUE liquid flare line, each 1000 feet in length,shall be required for onshore gas wells.

9. Elbows and Chicksans on the flare line are susceptible to erosion/washouts and are not acceptable(because of the potential for high fluid velocities). The flare line, as with the choke line, shall be as straightas possible, with targeted or block-tee elbows at turns, as required.

10. An alternate flare pit and flare line shall be rigged-up on deep gas wells. This emergency flare pit shall beused in well kill operations if the main flare pit cannot be utilized due to change in wind direction. Electronic

flare ignition sources shall be positioned in the main flare pit, alternate flare pit, and gas buster flare pit.







C-6

Water Well Operations





C-6 / Water Well Operations

1. Dri lls (Reference: HSERM / A / A-6 / ED)

A. Accumulator, H2S, Pit and Trip drills and frequencies on a water well rig shall be developed andscheduled by the Water Well Supervisor.

B. Accumulator drill should be only when in use.

C. Diverter system should replace the accumulator drill requirement when in use.

D. Well control drills should be set as required weekly based on diverter system this should also reflect inthe monthly scorecard requirements for water well rigs.

2. General requirements (Reference: HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S Safety)

A. Only 1 breathing air compressor shall be required for filling SCBA 30 minute packs.

B. Escape packs and cascade requirement should only be required when the well history indicates apresence of H2S or when a new water well is suspected to have H2S in the formation to be drilled.

C. The rig specific H2S contingency plan should only be required when the well history indicates apresence of H2S or the formation being drilled on a new well is suspected to have H2S.

D. The cascade requirement should only be required when the well history indicates a presence of H2S orthe formation being drilled on a new well is suspected to have H2S.

3. General requirements (Reference: D&WO / DOE&CD / SWIM-001 / Section No.46 / EW)

SCR requirement are not needed as water well operations do not have SCRs.

4. Rig Equipment and Procedures Requirement (Reference: D&WO / DOE&CD / SWIM-001 / SectionNo.3)

A. If the rig floor is too small on a water well rig to accommodate 2 man rider air hoists, they should followthe man basket procedures using certified crane operator trained for tandem lift and man basketcertification.

B. Crown O matic settings may not apply for water well rigs due to small derricks; however I think thesystem is still required.

C. Blow out preventers requirement would not apply as water well rig only use a hydril or diverter system






C-6 / WWO / Continued






C-7

Coil Tubing Safety





C-7 / Coil Tubing Safety

1. The layout of equipment should take into account safe access and egress for personnel. This should beconsidered for both normal operations and emergency situations.

2. Ensure that the crane is capable of lifting all of the equipment within safe working limits prior to equipmentarriving location.

3. Rig Operator supplied lifting slings must comply with the requirements listed in D&WO / DOE&CD / SWIM-001 / Section No.3 / RMH&RE.

4. Once the injector head is connected to the work string and prior to running coil, it must be secured withslings or wire rope at a minimum of three points to ensure stability and resistance to bending moments

caused by reel tension during the operation.

5. Cranes should not be allowed to lift loads across high pressure lines, the tubing or in the vicinity of thetubing reel.

6. Heavy equipment and/or light duty vehicles shall not be allowed to cross over any treatment lines at anytime.

7. Stand-by nitrogen storage units should be kept at a minimum safe distance whenever possible.

8. Non-essential personnel should be restricted from the rig floor and coil tubing equipment areas during rigup, operation and rig down.







C-8

Rig Move





C-8 / Rig Move (RM)

1. Purpose

This procedure illustrates and specifies the sequence, methods, procedures and responsibilities forperforming Rig Moves in all SA on-shore rigs. Rig moves shall be in accordance with SA Policy.

2. Scope

All SAR and Contractor Rigs loading / moving / offloading within Aramco facilities, on SA jobsites outside ofoperating facilities or, off SA property.

3. Definitions

A. Cri tical Li ft

All Lifts conducted near power lines, loads weight more than 40 tons, load exceeding 85% of ratedcrane capacity, tandem lifts, right lifts that require prior Manager approval.

1) Critical crane lifts include, but are not limited to, the following examples andrestrictions/requirements:

2) Any part of a crane whose boom or boom attachment is working within 10 meters (33 feet) of anyhydrocarbon and/or pressurized piping areas. This includes cranes having to suspend a load overvessels, piping, and/or equipment containing hydrocarbons, steam, or other pressurized liquids.

3) Any part of a crane whose boom or boom attachment is working within 10 meters (33 feet) of anypopulated/traffic areas. This includes cranes having to suspend a load over pedestrians, vehicletraffic, occupied construction equipment, and/or occupied buildings.

4) Any crane lift that requires an attachment(s) to the main boom.

5) Any load 40 tons or greater .

6) Any load that exceeds 85% of the crane’s rated load capacity or manufacturer’s specifications forthat specific lift.

7) Any crane lift with explosion/fire/high heat hazards.

8) Any crane working near energized power-l ines. When working less than 1-1/2 ful ly extendedboom lengths from energized power-lines, designated signalman shall ensure the followingminimum distances are maintained:

Line Voltage Absolute Limi t of Approach

a. Up to 50,000 volts 3.0 meters/10 feet.





C-8 / RM / Continued

b. 50,000 to 250,000 volts 6.1 meters/20 feet.

c. Over 250,000 volts 7.6 meters/25 feet.

d. Local work permit procedures shall be followed when work is performed within the above limits(Refer to G.I. 2.100 and G.I. 2.702). Power Operations Department concurrence shall berequired on all Critical Lift Plan forms for cranes whose booms, when calculated at full extensionand with attachments, could be operating within 10 meters (33 feet) or less of energized power-lines.

B. Critical Lift Plan

Document that identifies a specific load and the operating restrictions. Pertinent information includesall weights on hook blocks and attachments.

C. Power-Line

Overhead, non-insulated electrical conductor.

D. Rig Crew

Personnel that are operating the rig. They include; drillers, floormen, roustabout, rig mechanics and rigelectricians.

E. Rig

Drilling and/or Workover rig and all auxiliary components.

F. Rigger

An individual certified by SA to fit lifting apparatus around a load. SA rigger categories are Rigger-I/rigging competent person, Rigger-II and Rigger-III.

G. Signalman

Person who has been assigned the responsibility to warn and stop drivers or crane operators whenhigh clearance equipment or loads may come in contact with power-lines and/or other obstructions toinsure safe movement of the equipment and/or loads.

4. Rig Move Route Approval Procedure

A. Well sites shall initiate the Rig Move Route Survey to the next location for each Onshore Drilling Rigaccording to the latest Approved Drilling Schedule.

The process of approving the rig move chart as shown in the flow chart (Refer HSERM / C / C-8 /RM / Appendix No.2) is as follows:






1) Clearance is OK, and then wellsites shall notify POD (Refer to HSERM / C / C-8 / RM / AppendixNo.1).

2) If clearance is insufficient then:

a. Well sites shall construct diversion or excavate under the cable to give the necessary clearance.

b. If it is not possible to do item 5.A.2).a, Wellsites shall arrange with the responsible Department(POD or SEC) for power to be cut off and the cable lifted or removed for Rig to pass, RigForeman should inform Wellsites about the approximate date and time Rig will reach to theoverhead cable.

c. For any work to be performed or equipment to be moved near or around overhead power lines,notify POD in your area to obtain the required work permit. If the work is to be performed

around SEC transmission lines, POD shall notify SEC to obtain the required work permit.

d. For POD contact personnel and telephone numbers (Refer to HSERM / C / C-8 / RM / Appendix No.1).

B. Passing over pipeline, Wellsites shall check if a new crossing is required or an existing crossing exists.

1) If there is an existing crossing, Wellsites shall coordinate with the proponent to upgrade if neededaccording to the Rig specification.

2) If new crossing is needed then, Wellsites shall coordinate with the Proponent to construct newcrossing.

C. Rig route condition; Wellsites shall determine the condition of Rig Route and if it is satisfactory or not.

1) If the Rig Route has no power line or pipeline to cross and the road condition is satisfactory, thenWellsites shall submit preliminary Rig Route to the Rig Liaisonman.

2) If the Rig Route needs upgrading, Wellsites shall ensure that the necessary up-grade is completedas required.

D. When all of the above items are complete, Rig Liaisonman shall coordinate a joint meeting withWellsites, POD and Transportation, 7 days prior to Rig Move.

E. Wellsi tes representative shall lead the group through the proposed Rig Route and:

1) Any concerns or issues shall be rectified by the responsible party. Re-visits shall be required toensure all issues have been rectified.

2) If the route is acceptable, then all involved groups shall sign the pre-Rig Move checklist form asper G.I. 2.702 and obtain a copy of the Rig Route survey sheet and map.






5. Rig Move Route Planning

Rig move routes shall be planned to avoid crossing any Saudi Government highways or railways. If it isnecessary to cross a Saudi government highway or railway, only the authorized crossing point is to beused. SATD responsible for obtaining the proper Move permits from Coast Guard, Local Traffic Police andRoyal Commission in Jubail or any other Government Agencies.

6. SATD Rig Move Equipment Requirement

SATD is responsible to provide the follow ing equipment:

A. Required Trucks, Escort Vehicles and Maintenance Road Service Truck. All vehicles shall be in good operating conditions.

B. Lifting Equipment shall include sling wires, chains, shackles and bundles; all shall be checked andcertified in accordance with G.I. 7.029.

C. Cranes with sufficient capacity for each Rig. SATD shall coordinate with R&HED for crane deliveriesthat have a valid crane inspection sticker and all trailers needed to deliver the cranes.

7. SATD Personnel Responsibil ities

SATD shall provide the required manpower to move Aramco owned land rigs. It will also coordinate withR&HED to provide crane operators.

A. Rig Move Supervisor

He shall be responsible to supervise the following activit ies include but not lim ited to:

1) Give instructions to all personnel performing the Rig Move.

2) Oversee the entire rig move operations and coordination with the Rig Liaisonman.

3) Loading/moving/off-loading the critical lifts, such as Rig sub-base and mast will be under the closesupervision of the Rig Move Supervisor and Rig Liaisonman (no delegation is acceptable) andshall be conducted as per the Load-out List.

4) Ensure that a “Lift Plan” is prepared and approved as per G.I. 7.028 for each critical lift. Thisoperation must be under the close supervision of both the Rig Move supervisor and RigLiaisonman.

5) Ensure all wide loads are moved in a convoy with a lead escort vehicle and a follow escort vehicle.Escort vehicles to be equipped with rotary beacon lights.






6) Ensure that rig move convoy avoids rush hours (0600 – 0800 hrs. and 1500 – 1700 hrs.) on allgovernment highways and primary SA road network.

7) Conduct and document safety meeting at the beginning of each day of the rig move with all SATDdrivers, Rig Liaisonman, Contractor drivers, SATD mechanics and the Convoy Leader to discussall safety aspects and lessons learned from previous rig moves also to emphasize the safetyduring the rig move.

8) Ensure all rig move equipment (winch trucks, trailers, prime movers, loader forklifts and cranes)and their operators are in good working order, certified and meet SA Asset Integrity Standards.

Note: All operators of Heavy Equipment-machinery-trucks and trailers shall report any defects, whichcan adversely affect the safety of personnel or the rig move operations, to the Rig MoveSupervisor immediately.

B. Convoy Leader

He shall be responsible to perform the following activities include but not limited to:

1) Ensure safe driving at all Rig Move stages through close supervision of drivers.

2) Enforce high truck utilization and distribute work evenly among drivers.

3) Escort the loaded truck/trailer in-group between old and new location following the Load-out List.

4) Ensure that traffic is allowed to get around wide loads whenever possible by pulling off to the side

of the road at the specific points identified in the Rig Move Route map.

5) Ensure that none of the drivers leave the old location without his permission.

6) Contact the road services mechanic for any truck/trailer break down.

7) Assist the Rig Move Supervisor as needed.

8) All vehic les; trucks and/or equipment that are NOT within road legal lim its shall adhere to theapproved Rig Route (No deviations from approved Rig Routes are allowed).

All vehic les; trucks and/or equipment that are with in the road legal limits can utilize any

road/route.

9) Whenever possible, two convoy leaders should be present during rig moves.






C. Crane Operators

They shall be responsible to perform the following activities include but not limited to:

1) Make sure that all the crane outriggers are fully extended per crane manufacturer operatingmanual and supported by mats.

2) Pick and carry lift must be according to G.I. 7.028.

3) Follow the direction of the rigger in charge to make sure that the position of the signalman is in asafe clear view.

4) Conduct daily pre-user inspections of his crane and document said inspections on the SA9466 checklist. Report any mechanical or electrical crane defects to the nearest R&HED maintenance

facility.

5) Shall full comply with G.I. 7.028 and G.I.7.029.

D. Drivers’ Activit ies


1) Shall hook/load the Rig components on their trucks/trailers in a safe manner and as directed by theConvoy Leader and Rig Move Supervisor.

2) Shall ensure that loaded components are secured using chains/bundles/guard posts before

traveling regardless of the distance.

3) Shall follow the designated route as instructed by the Rig Move Supervisor and Convoy Leaderand never proceed with a load from the old location without their permission.

E. Riggers’ Activities


1) Play the role of signalman for the crane operator to perform crane lift.

2) Ensure that the components are safely distributed on trailers and assist the drivers to secure the

loads.

3) Shall apply good lifting practices, ensure tag lines are used on each load, and exhibit extremecaution when loading and off-loading trucks.

4) Make sure that all the lifting equipment is inspected and certified.






F. Road Service Mechanics


1) Repair any truck/trailer break down.

2) Accompany trucks/trailers convoy between old and new locations.

3) Check/inspect the trucks/trailers before loading to reduce the number of breakdown trucks.

8. SA Rig Personnel Responsibil ities

A. Rig Liaisonman Responsibi li ties

1) The Rig Liaisonman shall obtain the Rig Move preliminary Route map along with the route surveysheet from Wellsites Division (2 weeks prior to drilling Rig Move and no less than 4 days prior toworkover rig move). The map shall show:

a. Designated Rig Move Route.

b. Road conditions.

c. Road obstacles, i.e. Power lines, pipelines, highway and any other obstacles.

2) The Rig Liaisonman, Wellsites engineer, Rig Move supervisor, convoy leader and POD

representative shall check, verify and approve the Rig Move Route for safe passage (by drivingthe prescribed route) and observe and document any potential hazard(s).

3) Once the Rig Move has been surveyed and approved, Rig Liaisonman, Rig Move supervisor and,Convoy leader shall hold a Pre-Rig Move Meeting. This meeting will include but not limited to:

a. Sequence of loading as per the Load-Out List.

b. Additional equipment needed for the move (example. Lifting equipment and theircorresponding lift plans).

c. Lessons learned from the last Rig Move.

d. Any special inspections (i.e. derrick) or repairs to be completed before moving.

e. Any first time employees or limited experience people need to be identified and assigned tasksappropriate to their experience and ability.

4) No Moves are allowed in foggy, rainy and dusty weather where visibility is less than 100 m. It isthe Rig Liaisonman’s responsibility to ensure that there is adequate visibility for the move.






5) Night time Moves shall be avoided as much as possible and limited to road legal loads only.Loading and moving oversize loads are not allowed at night time. The Rig Liaisonman has the

authority and responsibility to shut down any night move when in his opinion conditions make itunsafe to continue.

6) Rig Liaisonman and Rig Move Supervisor ensure that all overhead cables are to be approachedwith caution. Rig move has to stop then proceed slowly under the cable to avoid any excessivemovement of the rig suspension.

7) Affected facilities should be notified of the Rig Move. In congested areas (Qatif, Safaniyah, Jubailcauseway etc.) the Rig Liaisonman should inform them about the rig move.

8) The Rig Liaisonman responsibility during Rig move includes but not limited to:

a. Supervise moving derrick and sub-base off wellhead and clearing location.

b. Ensure Form “Oversized Equipment Pre-Move checkl ists” G.I. 2.702 is completed andsupervise over size loads at critical crossing.

c. Monitor the Rig Move to ensure it is proceeding safely as planned.

9) During the Move, a meeting shall be held at the start of everyday between the Rig Liaisonman andRig Move supervisor. The day’s agenda shall be decided (what loads to move on to which trucksbased on the specific Rig Move plan).

10) For crossing railways Rig Foreman shall make sure that one signal man with the proper

communication device (walkie-talkie) positions himself in such a way to alert the convoy if the trainis coming before proceeding to cross the railroad.

11) It is the responsibility of the Rig Foreman to finally determine if the Rig can pass safely underoverhead cables as outlined in the table:

LINE VOLTAGE ABSOLUTE LIMIT OF APPROACH

2.4, 4.16, 13.8 1.22 meters (4 feet)

34.5 1.53 meters (5 feet)

69 1.7 meters (5 feet 7 inches)



380 3.65 meters (12 feet)

12) Moving any miscellaneous loads prior to Rig release shall be limited to road legal loads only withprior approval from Rig Liaisonman.

13) Supervise spotting, connecting, raising sub-base, rigging up mast and other critical loads.






14) SAR Liaisonman is to supply enough long range walkie talkie radios to help coordinate a safe andefficient Rig Move between the old and new location. These radios shall remain under the

custody of the Rig Liaisonman.

B. SAR Rig Safety Man

It is the responsibility of the SAR Rig Safety Man to ensure the rig move is in accordance with SA HSEPolicies and procedures.

9. Contractor Rig Safety Man Responsib ili ties

It is the responsibility of the Contractor Rig Safety Man to ensure the rig move is in accordance with SAHSE Policies and procedures.



A. G.I. 2.702 - Moving Drilling Rigs, High Clearance Equipment/Loads, or Operating Cranes Under orNear Power-Lines.

B. G.I. 7.028 - Crane Lifts: Types and Procedures.

C. G.I. 7.029 - Inspection, Use and Maintenance of Below-the-hook Lifting Equipment for Cranes.








Appendix No.2





Revision Summary

Rev No. Date Revis ion Summary

Approvals

OriginatorCustodian

Review Approval Authority

00 Jan 2013 Original release RGW RGW OSH & AAR




DOffshore

Requirements



Section D / Offshore RequirementsD&WO HSE Requirements Manual

SA-DWO-HSERM-OR-004 / Created: 01/13 / Last Review: 01/13 / Next Review: 01/17Owner: VP-D&WORevision(s) identif ied by a Vertical Bar in the Right Margin Page 1 of 28

SA-DWO-HSERM-OR-004-R0_ Section D / Offshore Requirements Date: January 2013Document Title: Section D / Offshore Requirements


SectionD

Offshore

Requirements









Table of Contents

Contents Page

D-1 Over Water Operations 4D-2 Life Saving Equipment MODU’s 7D-3 Heliports and Helicopter Operations 15D-4 Personnel Transfer between Boats and MODU’s 22D-5 Rig/MODU Orientation 25

Revision Summary 28





D-1

Over Water Operations





D-1 / Over Water Operations (OWO)

1. Working over water will be controlled using the Saudi Aramco Rig (SAR) Safe Work Authorizationprocedure (SWAP) or contractor Permit to Work (PTW) System (Refer to HSERM / A / A-12 / SWAP). TheSaudi Aramco Liaisonman will counter sign all over water SWAP or PTW.

2. When work is performed over water, the Rig Operator shall instruct all personnel in the proper water entryand survival procedures to be used.

3. While working over water an emergency means of escape from platforms shall be provided.

4. U.S.C.G. or U.K.D.O.T. approved life preservers and buoyant work vests (personal flotation devices(PFD's)) shall be readily available on an offshore rig or platform.

5. Oil-soaked or otherwise damaged personal flotation devices (PFD's) shall be removed from service anddestroyed.

6. Approved PFD's shall be worn:

A. When being transported by personnel basket between an offshore drilling rig or platform and a crewboat.

B. When performing work over water or from a work basket that is suspended over water.

C. When moving either a blowout preventer or a diverter stack on or off the wellhead where thesuspended work platform on which personnel are working is over open water.

D. When being lowered to the water in a davit-launched life raft, life boat, survival craft, rescue craft, orinspection boat.

E. When being transported by helicopter over water.

7. Employees wearing PFD's shall keep them snugly fitted and securely fastened.

8. Decks of all rig platforms shall be kept clean of oil, grease, debris, and free of all excess equipment thatposes a tripping or fire hazard.

9. Equipment to be transported to or from offshore water locations shall be securely tied down once the cargohas been loaded on a vessel.





E-1 / OWO / Continued

10. It shall be the responsibility of the person skippering a vessel to determine when it is safe or unsafe to tieup or jack up on a well site.

11. Fire drills, abandon rig drills, Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) drills, and man overboard drills shall be held by theRig Operator as per HSERM / A / A-6 / ED. The Rig Operator shall brief all newly arriving personnel on allemergency procedures.

12. Working over water during adverse weather conditions shall be suspended when rescue operations, ifnecessary cannot be conducted safely i.e. Support Vessel unable to provide rescue support or the rigcannot safely launch the Fast Rescue Craft.

13. Sufficient work area illumination shall be provided in the over water work and sea areas.

14. Man-Overboard rescue plan shall be part of the over-the-side-work JSA.







D-2

Life Saving EquipmentMODUs





D-2 / Life Saving Equipment (LSE) MODU’s

1. There shall always be enough personal flotation devices (PFD's) aboard to provide 125% coverage ofpersons on board at any time.

2. The PFD's shall be maintained in good condition, U.S.C.G. or U.K.D.O.T. approved, and labeled with thename of the rig.

3. Spare PFD's shall be stored in marked containers throughout the rig.

4. Each cabin shall be equipped with the proper number of PFD's stored on top of the lockers.

5. PFD's shall be equipped with compliant (within the manufacturers’ expiration dates) salt water activated

lights, whistles and reflector tape.

6. Each offshore rig shall be equipped with at least ten (10) life buoys rings maintained in satisfactorycondition, and mounted so that they are easily removable from their brackets.

7. At least one ring life buoy on each side of the offshore rig (total of two) shall have attached to the ring abuoyant life line that is at least 1-1/2 times the distance from the deck of stowage to the waterline at lowtide and maximum air gap of 27.4 meters (90 feet), whichever is greater. The end of the line must not besecured to the rig.

Note: These life buoys may not have any other attachment, the throwing line must be attached directly tothe buoy, and the throwing line must be stored so as to unravel without knotting when used.

8. Not less than one half of the total number of lifebuoys shall be provided with lifebuoy self-igniting lights, notless than two of these shall also be provided with lifebuoy self-activating smoke signals and be capable ofquick release. Lifebuoys with lights and those with lights and smoke signals shall be equally distributed onboth sides of the MODU and shall not be the lifebuoys provided with lifelines.

9. All ring life buoys shall be in their proper location, and each shall be marked with the rig name and port ofregistry.

10. Escape ladders with OEM protective covers shall be provided and maintained either side of the MODU onthe main deck. Escape ladders shall be attached to the MODU on no less than two (2) certified anchorpoints each with a minimum SWL of 1000kg or the manufacturer SWL of the ladder. Appropriate accessplatforms shall be provided for each escape ladder.





D-2 / LSE / Continued

11. There shall be sufficient Inflatable life rafts for the total number of persons allowed aboard. Inflatable liferafts and their containers shall be intact and not damaged; rubber seals shall be free of breakage ordamage, and the container bands intact.

12. Operating instructions shall be posted at each life raft.

13. Annual certification by an authorized third party and servicing inspections shall be required for all life raftsand containers.

14. All life raft containers shall be kept clean and free of oil and gas, and shall be clearly marked with "inflatablelife raft", date of next servicing, and capacity.

15. Access to each raft shall be free of obstructions that would interfere with launching.

16. The cradle for each raft shall be of proper size and the release mechanism kept free of rust and corrosion.

17. Inflatable life raft containers shall be stored with the top straight up so the drain holes on the bottom areproperly positioned for drainage of any moisture.

18. Temporary lashing bands used in transporting the inflatable life raft containers shall be removed before

stowage on the rig.

19. The Rig Operator shall ensure that the length of the painter line for each manually launched inflatable liferaft is greater than the distance from the deck of stowage to the waterline at low tide and maximum air gap.The Rig Operator shall ensure all life rafts are stowed within the manufacturer’s maximum certified storageheight.

20. The exit point for the painter line shall be pointed aft of the rig when possible to protect it from the on-coming water during towing.

21. The painter line for each inflatable life raft which is not davit-launched shall have its external end secured toa strong point on the platform.

22. Each life raft station shall be clearly marked to conform to the Station Bill.






23. Emergency escape routes leading to the lifeboat and life raft stations shall be conspicuously marked.Pathways shall be painted throughout the MODU, maintained and kept clear at all times. A standardescape route / pathway will have a minimum width of 600mm (24 inches) in accordance with the applicableSOLAS Regulations.

24. Station Bills shall be kept current and posted in conspicuous locations throughout the MODU. All MODUStation Bills shall define the Emergency Response Actions to be taken in the following specific incidentscenarios:

A. Rig Abandonment.

B. Combustible Gas Release.

C. Fire.

D. H2S Release.

E. MODU Rescue Boat Operations

Note: Each MODU shall develop a compliant Station Bill which is aligned with the required Fire AttackPlans, H2S Contingency Plan, and Safety Briefing. The Station Bill shall specifically define therequired emergency response actions to be taken upon the activation of any low level visual gasrelease alarm. Crucial MODU Emergency Response Assignments such as the closure of Main DeckFire Dampers and Hatches, Activation of Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems, along with thecomposition of the Fire Fighting and Rescue Teams shall also be clearly defined.

25. The launching equipment for davit-launched inflatable life rafts must include:

A. A means to hold it securely while personnel enter the life raft.

B. A means to rapidly retrieve the falls if the station has more than one life raft.

C. The capability of being operated from either the life raft or from the rig.

D. Winch controls located where the operator can observe the life raft launching.

E. A system whereby a loaded life raft does not have to be lifted before it is lowered.

26. Not more than two davit-launched life rafts may be launched from the same launching equipment.

Note: All personnel aboard will receive sufficient training as to allow them to efficiently and safely load andlaunch a davit launched life raft.

27. Survival craft and life rafts shall be manufactured to a recognized international standard.






28. The access route and launching platform from which survival craft are to be launched shall be kept clear ofany obstruction that interferes with the immediate launching of the craft.

29. An embarkation ladder extending, in a single length, from the deck to the waterline in the lightest seagoingcondition under unfavorable conditions of trim of up to 10 and a list of up to 20 either way shall be providedat each embarkation station or at every two adjacent embarkation stations for survival craft launched downthe side of the MODU. However, the operator may permit such ladders to be replaced by approved devicesto afford access to the survival craft when waterborne, provided that there shall be at least oneembarkation ladder on each side of the ship. Other means of embarkation enabling descent to the water ina controlled manner may be permitted for the life rafts.

30. Emergency and dead ship lighting shall be provided at each embarkation ladder, life raft, life boat, rescueboat and designated muster stations. Emergency and dead ship lighting shall also be provided foroverboard launching zones and shall be maintained in good working order.

31. Each survival craft shall be marked with the number of the craft, name of the rig, port of registry, and thenumber of persons allowed in the craft. This marking shall be with letters at least 7.6 centimeters (3inches) high and in a color that contrasts to the background color of the craft (international orange).30.Davit release mechanisms are to be clearly labeled in a manner to prevent premature release.

32. Davit release mechanisms are to be clearly labeled in a manner to prevent premature release.

33. The watertight doors of all survival craft shall seal properly in order to maintain watertight integrity.

34. Spare life preservers shall be stored in a storage box outside both lifeboats.

35. A compass shall be mounted in the craft where it will be readily visible to the operator. It shall bemaintained in good working order.

36. The gear shift and throttle control shall always be kept in the neutral position until made ready for startingthe engines.

37. The salt water inlet valve and fuel shut-off valve shall always be in the open position.

38. The fuel tank shall be kept full. Lifeboat and rescue boat diesel fuel shall be changed out quarterly and alog maintained.






39. All survival craft shall be checked weekly and recorded in a log book by a qualified mechanic to ensurethat:

A. Compressed air tanks are full.

B. Drain plug is in place.

C. Battery and battery connections are in good condition.

D. Belts and hoses are in good condition.

E. Transmission fluid, hydraulic fluid, and oil levels are in the full range of the dipstick.

40. Emergency lifeboat drills shall be conducted in accordance with HSERM / A / A-6 / ED.

41. All survival craft engines shall be started weekly and run for no longer than five minutes (or until the enginebecomes warm) if the craft is not placed in the water.

42. All emergency supplies required in the survival craft shall be visually inspected weekly to ensure that theyare still safely stored in the craft.

43. Emergency food rations and drinking water in each survival craft shall be replaced prior to their expirationdate. They shall be replaced sooner if the vacuum seal of the container is lost. Signal flares shall be

replaced prior to their expiration date.

44. The complete launching system for all survival craft shall be visually inspected weekly by a qualifiedmechanic to ensure that the hand stop, wire rope, U-clamps, motor and motor starter, supports, sheavesand blocks, falls, release pins, and limit switches are in good order.

45. When any survival craft is launched in the water during boat drills, the sprinkler system shall be checked toensure that it works properly.

46. A survival craft operator and alternate operator shall be assigned to each craft. Both shall be trained in theoperation of the survival craft. As a minimum, one of the assigned operators will be capable of completingrunning repairs on the survival craft.in accordance with HSERM / A / A-5 / C&T.

47. One Transponder (McMurdo Marine Model RT9-3 or equivalent) shall be available at each lifeboat.

48. Each offshore rig will be inspected by representatives of Saudi Aramco organizations as required.






49. Class Society 5 year load test certificates are to be obtained for all lifeboat on-load release mechanismswinches and davits, this information will be entered into the MODU lifting equipment registry.

50. Lifeboats shall have a compliant cascade system installed complete with manifolds to ensure sufficient airis available under demand for the total capacity the lifeboat is certified to carry. Cascade plug in pointsshall be available for the maximum allowable capacity of the lifeboat. Air will be supplied from the MODUcascade system via a breakaway airline connection.

51. Each lifeboat shall have certified anchor points used for connecting safety slings during lifeboat inspectionsand maintenance rated the lifeboats OEM’s certified minimum SWL.

52. Lifeboat and life raft on-load release mechanisms shall be certified by an OEM authorized third party

service provider, on-load release mechanisms will be inspected annually, load tested every 5 years.

53. All designated muster stations shall have a minimum of 0.35 m2 (square meters) per person ofunobstructed assembly area. The calculation of the required assembly area shall exclude any obstructions,defined access / escape paths, lifejacket containers or doorway openings.

54. Muster areas shall have clearly marked assembly indications on the deck for each person assigned to themuster station.

55. Cascade breathing manifolds shall be suitably positioned in order to minimize the potential for anyobstructions of access / escape paths.

56. Designated muster areas shall be arranged appropriately to allow for a clear access path to the lifeboatsembarkation area without obstructing the movement of assembled personnel.

57. Muster Area personnel assignments shall be defined based upon calculated space available.

58. Each rig shall have a designated Zodiac or equivalent rescue boat equipped with a forty (40) horse power

diesel engine and four (4) point certified lifting system. The certified lifting frame shall have an OEM 200% proof load test and a minimum 5:1 safety factor and shall obtain a Saudi Aramco blue inspection sticker.The rescue boat shall comply with all applicable SOLAS Regulations. All designated members of therescue boat crew shall have specific training and operations experience with the rescue boat.








Note: All MODUs shall develop and implement an OEM Compliant LSE maintenance and inspection processto ensure all LSEs are diligently maintained and readily operable.





D-3

Heliportsand

Helicopter Operations





D-3 / Heliports and Helicopter Operations (H&HO)

1. The Rig Operator shall ensure that a fully equipped fire equipment storage box is available at the heliportfor firefighting and rescue. The contents of this box are listed in, but not limited to, Saudi Aramco AviationDepartment’s “ Helideck Crash Box Inventory List” (Refer to HSERM / B / B-7 / FFE&O / B-7b /

OFF/FFE&O / Appendix No.2).

2. All MODU Helidecks shall stringently comply with the Saudi Aramco CAP-437 Requirements defined inboth HSERM / B / B-7 / FFE&O / B-7b / OFF/FFE&O / Appendix No.2 and HSERM / D / D-3 / H&HO. Anychanges and / or modifications to the MODU Helidecks or Helideck Operations Procedures shall bereviewed and approved by the Saudi Aramco Aviation Helicopter Safety Pilot. All newly contracted andrefurbished MODUs shall submit Obstacle Free Sector Sketch developed in accordance with CAP-437chapter 3 section 6 to the Saudi Aramco Aviation Helicopter Safety Pilot for review and approval.

SA CAP-437 MODU Helideck Design and Operations Compliance shall be formally verified in a Periodic(6-Month) OECD Emergency Operations Preparedness Assessment Process.

3. Unless the heliport is a continuous extension of a rig deck with unrestricted entry and exit to it, there shallbe at least two exit routes from the heliport. One exit may be designated for emergency use only. Allhelideck exits shall include compliant stairways along with the specified helideck operations warning signs.

4. Each access to the heliport area shall be marked with warning signs in Arabic and English saying "Bewareof the Tail Rotor" .

5. Each MODU will have a passenger waiting area; the passenger waiting area will be so positioned as to be

out of the helicopter / helideck crash fragment area. This area shall have a passenger briefing sign, a cleardeck policy sign, and a scale for weighing passengers. All passengers will assemble in the helicopterwaiting area at least 30 minute before the helicopter arrival; passenger will not leave this area to proceedto the helideck until instructed to do so by the MODU HLO.

6. Each shift must have a designated HLO (Helicopter Landing Officer), to meet landing aircraft. The HLO willhave a current OPITO approved HLO certificate. The HLO shall wear a brightly colored vest with theletters “ HLO” clearly printed on the front and rear of the vest. His duties include the following:

A. Inform the crane operator to cease operations.

Note: Cranes shall be cradled if possible before Helicopter landings and takeoffs. If unable to cradlethe boom, the crane operator shall stand next to the crane cab in full view of the pilot.

B. Supervise fire and crash team.

C. Inform the fire and crash rescue team on helicopter operations.

D. Check the helideck for loose objects.





D-3 / H&HO / Continued

E. Obtain the exact weight of passengers, baggage, and cargo and log this information on the passengermanifest for the pilot.

F. Do not load any cargo until directed by the pilot.

G. Direct loading and off-loading of cargo.

H. Supervise the loading and unloading of passenger baggage.

I. Supervise passengers entering and exiting the aircraft.

J. Assure life vests and seat belts are correctly worn.

K. Any fluid/oil leakage found on the helideck after the helicopter has taken off, must be immediatelyreported to the pilot.

L. Passengers are to follow the instructions of the Pilot and the HLO at all times.

M. No smoking is allowed with any aspect of helicopter flights or helideck operations.

7. The HLO shall ensure the following procedures are adhered to during helicopter operations. Otherrequirements may be imposed depending upon operation. Prior to Helicopter Arrivals or Departures:

A. The helicopter landing area is to be clear of obstructions, debris, or loose articles.

B. Safety nets, if provided around the landing area, are to be properly secured and in good condition.

C. The standby vessel, if provided, will be informed that helicopter operations are going to take place.

D. The firefighting equipment for the helicopter landing area is to be manned, unless remote monitors areinstalled. If remote monitors are installed, the remote operation point must be manned.

E. Access to the helideck must be restricted.

F. Approaches/departures to/from helideck shall be observed and Helicopter pilots notified of anyabnormalities or deviation noted from safe operations.

8. Helideck Operations

A. Helicopter on the Helideck

Passengers shall remain seated with lifejackets on and wait to disembark until told to do so by the pilot,HLO.






1) Passengers shall, exit the helicopter directly away from the side of the helicopter and then exit theheliport, or as directed, being mindful to keep clear of the tail rotor and the main rotors at the frontof the helicopter.

2) The helideck crew will unload baggage under the supervision of the HLO.

B. Helicopter Departures

1) The pilot shall be given a copy of the manifest with accurate weights, for outgoingpassengers/cargo from HLO.

2) Passengers, baggage and cargo shall be loaded per the directions of the pilot and HLO.

3) Passengers shall follow the directions of the pilot and HLO and be mindful to keep clear of the tailrotor and the main rotors at the front of the helicopter.

4) Passengers shall wear lifejackets and ear protection, with seat belts fastened.

5) The HLO shall check the closure of doors and the security of hatches.

6) The HLO shall check for fuel and oil leaks.

7) The HLO shall clear the Helideck prior to take off.

8) The HLO shall give the all clear signal to pilot before take-off.

9. Helicopter Refueling

Refueling operations shall follow these guidelines and also conform to regulations. It is of vital importanceto supply the correct grade of uncontaminated fuel to the helicopters and to maintain communicationsbetween the pilot and refueling crew during the operation.

A. The pilot, HLO shall direct the refueling and ensure the fuel in the storage tank is properly settled.

B. All passengers should normally be disembarked and clear of the helideck unless the pilot has approvedotherwise.

C. When the pilot is ready, the quantity of fuel required has been determined and the correct grade of fuel

has been verified, run out the delivery hose on the helideck to the aircraft refueling point. Take a fuelsample from the nozzle end or from the water separator drain point and carry out a water detectioncheck. The pilot should witness the test or be shown the sample and give his approval before refueling.

D. Next attach the main grounding lead to the helicopter grounding point.






E. When pressure refueling

Connect the hose pressure coupling to the aircraft and remain adjacent to the fueling point. When thepilot indicates refueling should begin, start the pump. If any problems arise, the person assigned tooperate the pump shall shut it off immediately. When delivery is completed, stop the pump; disconnectthe hose pressure fitting from the helicopter and close the filler cap.

F. When Refueling by Gravity rather than by Pump

1) First connect the bonding lead from the hose nozzle to the receptacle on the helicopter, open thetank filler cap and insert the nozzle. Begin delivery when the pilot indicates to do so. Uponcompletion of the delivery, remove the nozzle, replace the filler cap and disconnect the bondinglead.

2) Finally, take a fuel sample and conduct another water detection test. Remove the delivery hose

from the helideck and stow, conduct a final check that the filler cap is secure, disconnect thegrounding lead from the helicopter and ensure that all equipment is clear of the helideck. Recordthe fuel quantity dispensed.

10. Green LED lighting shall be installed on the outer perimeter of the helicopter landing surface at intervalsnot exceeding three (3) meters behind the trench drain. Four (4) helicopter xenon landing surface floodlights are to be installed and shall be so arranged as not to impair the Pilot’s vision during night operations.The lights are to be strategically positioned to ensure they do not obstruct the helideck fire monitor nozzle90 degree spray pattern. All lighting shall have a minimum OEM ambient operating temperature of 50degrees Celsius. The upper portion of the light guard should be no greater than six inches above thehelideck.

11. If the highest points on the rig exceed the elevation of the helideck by more than fifty feet, an Omni-directional red light shall be fitted at that point including a bow LED leg illumination flood light. In addition,helideck operations status lights shall be provided in accordance with CAP-437 chapter 4 section 3.6.

12. An UPS power supply shall power the perimeter and obstruction lighting and lighting along heliport accessand egress routes as well as the illuminated windsock.

13. A rotating or flashing red strobe shall be installed on the crane gantry of any crane boom which is able to

reach the helideck. The red strobe shall be illuminated whenever the crane engine / motor are operating.Crane operators must be knowledgeable about proper procedures to use around helicopters.

14. The helideck safety net shall extend 1.5 meters (5 feet) in the horizontal plane and be arranged so that theoutboard edge does not exceed the level of the landing surface and angled so that it has an upward andoutward slope of approximately 10 degrees. The required helideck perimeter trench drain system shall notbe routed under the perimeter safety netting.






15. Each heliport shall have a minimum of four recessed tie-down points arranged to secure one helicopter inthe middle of the deck.

16. Each heliport shall be constructed with a helideck perimeter trench drain system sized to accommodate aminimum combined flow rate of the actual firefighting system plus the helicopter fuel spill without anyaccumulation on the helideck surface. All drain openings shall be covered with secured perforated coversto eliminate trip hazards. Heliport drains shall be able to effectively drain all fluids from the heliport. Heliportdrain systems shall be required to pass a five (5) minute drain test with two monitors flowing in a 90 degreespray pattern at the actual flow rate.

17. Each heliport shall have a windsock that is easily visible to the pilot. It must be illuminated for nightoperations and not constitute an obstacle to helicopter operations.

18. The heliport markings shall be in stringent compliance with the Saudi Aramco Aviation CAP 437 paintguide.

19. Obstruction markings are as follows:

A. Any obstruction four feet or higher is a main rotor obstruction and must have a solid red arc one thirdthe rotor diameter of the largest helicopter expected to land there.

B. Any obstruction six inches or higher is a tail rotor obstruction and must be marked with a three foot solidred rectangular border.

C. Any obstruction on the deck less than six inches high is a skid hazard and must be marked with aneight inch red circular band.

20. The rig must be equipped with a VHF radio capable of reaching 138.25 and 138.20 to allow for directcommunications with the helicopter.

21. Helideck Closure Procedure:

A. A red omnidirectional strobe Visual Status Warning light shall be installed at close proximity to the

helideck to serve as a visual aid to Helicopter Pilots that the helideck is closed.

B. The Visual Status Warning Light shall be interlocked into the MODU’s Emergency Alarm System andmaintained in good working order.

C. The Visual Warning Light shall also be capable of manual activation by the HLO or Control Room at theHLO’s direction.






D. Existing MODU’s utilizing the combination of a helideck “traffic cone” and rig alarm system strobe lightsis a compliant equivalent to the SA CAP-437 specified status warning light.

22. SA Aviation Helideck Operations Shutdown Procedure:

A. Any flagrant failure to stringently comply with the defined SA CAP-437 Helideck design and operationsrequirements will be immediately reported to the SA Aviation Helicopter Safety Pilot for formal reviewand Helideck Closure consideration as deemed appropriate.

1) Failure to continuously maintain a certified HLO and or two man helideck crash team onboard at altimes.

2) Severely impaired / inoperative helideck foam firefighting system.

3) Severely impaired / inoperative helideck CAP-437 lighting system.

4) A non-compliant Helideck CFR Procedure

B. A periodic (6 month) SA D&WO MODU Helideck CFR Operations Preparedness Assessment shall becompleted and forwarded to the SA Aviation Helideck Safety Pilot for formal review.







D-4

Personnel Transfer betweenBoats and MODUs





D-4 / Personnel Transfer between Boats (PT) and MODU’s

1. Personnel transfers will be controlled by the use of an adequate risk assessment and the contractorsPermit to Work (PTW) system.

2. An offshore crane operator shall not be required or permitted to transfer personnel by personnel basket ifthe wind force is above 20mph unless it is an emergency, then the following restrictions will apply; nopersonnel transfers will take place if the wind speed is 30 knots or more, or if the wave height is above 1.8meters (6 feet).

3. Personnel shall be transferred by basket to or from a rig only when visibility is good.

4. The lifting and lowering of personnel in a personnel basket shall be over open water whenever reasonablypracticable.

5. A safety line shall be used on each personnel basket. The crane hook shall be equipped with a safetylatch.

6. Each personnel basket used for transferring personnel by crane between an offshore rig and crewboat shall:

A. Have current lifting gear certification.

B. Be in good condition.

C. Provided with an adequate number of approved life preservers or buoyant work vests.

D. It shall be stored and covered when not being used.

7. The Crane Operator must hold an approved Saudi Aramco License or home country License indicating thathe has been tested and passed, to handle man baskets.

8. The offshore crane operator shall not be required or permitted to transfer more than four persons bypersonnel basket each crane trip.

9. When employees are transported by personnel basket, they shall wear approved life preservers or buoyantwork vests. They shall stand on the outer rim of the basket facing inward.

10. Only light hand luggage shall be permitted inside the personnel basket when the basket is occupied bypersonnel.





D-4 / PT / Continued

11. Rig supplies shall not be transported by personnel basket at any time.

12. Personnel transfers at night will only take place in an emergency and with the prior knowledge of the Aramco Rig Superintendent or where sufficient illumination of the safe lift zone is provided.







D-5

Rig / MODU Orientation





D-5 / Rig/MODU Orientation (RO)

1. Work Site Orientation is applicable to all personnel visiting /working at the rig site.

2. The rig orientation shall be conducted when personnel arrive at the work site.

3. General instructions pertaining to living quarters, emergency exits, emergency signals, location of first aidstations, etc., shall be explained prior to commencing work.

4. Information shall include, but not limited to:

A. Fire and Emergency Station Assignments and Escape Routes.

B. All personnel will receive rig evacuation training.

C. All personnel will know their Lifeboat Stations and Assignments.

D. All personnel will be able to identify emergency signals and state his assignments.

E. Room Assignment - Including bunk card review.

F. Review of any rig specific safety policies.

G. Confirm all personnel have viewed contractor Hazard Observation Program.

H. Orientation/Indoctrination Check List (See Employee Orientation Checklist) will be completed for all

personnel and a copy of said will be retained at the rig location.

I. All personnel will be issued with Rig Safety Handbook (if applicable).

J. All personnel will receive rig specific H2S training as per HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S Safety.

K. All personnel will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the general safety rules HSERM / A / A-3/ GSR.

L. All personnel will be able to explain reason for pre-tour safety meetings.

M. All personnel will be able to demonstrate their understanding of their responsibilities toward safeworking practices.

N. All personnel will be able to demonstrate their understanding of when a Permit to Work is required.

O. All personnel will be able to demonstrate their understanding of when a Risk Assessment is required.

P. Use of cellular phones





D-5 / RO / Continued

5. The Person in Charge or designated person shall conduct a tour of the rig with all new personnelexplaining emergency procedures and evacuation routes.

6. The Person in Charge shall oversee their enrollment in to the contractor Short Service Employee programas per HSERM / A / A-8 / SSE.

7. All personnel will complete the rig orientation as a minimum once per year.

8. 3rd party, service contractors will repeat the rig orientation if absent from the rig location for greater than 3months.

9. Any contractor or client personnel absent from the rig for greater than 3 months will be required to repeatthe rig orientation.

10. Personnel who cannot produce verification of having completed H2S training within the past 2 years will berequired to undertake a complete H2S orientation as per HSERM / B / B-5 / H2S Safety ,

if the drillingcontractor cannot facilitate said training, training will be provided by a 3rd party at the cost of the personsemployer.

11. No personnel are allowed on rig locations without H2S training.







Revision Summary

Rev No. Date Revision Summary Approvals

Originator

Custodian

Review

Approval

Authority00 Jan 2013 Orig inal Release RGW RGW OSH & AAR




EEnvironment and

Occupational HealthRequirements



HSERM / E / Environment and Occupational HealthD&WO HSE Requirements Manual

SA-DWO-HSERM-ENV-005 / Created: 01/13 / Last Review: 01/13 / Next Review: 01/17Owner: VP-D&WORevision(s) identif ied by a Vertical Bar in the Right Margin Page 1 of 95

SA-DWO-HSERM-ENV-005-R0_ Section E / E&OH Date: January 2013Document Title: Section E / E&OH


HSERM

E

Environmentand

Occupational Health

Conflicts and Deviations

Any conf li cts betw een these requi rements and o ther app li cable Saudi Aramco Engi neer ing Standards and Procedures (SAESs and SAEPs),specific Corporate General Instru ctions (GIs), Saudi Aramco Sanitary Code (SASC), Materials System Specifications (SAMSSs), StandardDrawings (SASDs), or industry standards, codes, forms, most recent government or Saudi government-ratified region al or internationalstandards or regulations, requires compliance with the most stringent requirement. Any specific queries regarding conflicts should bedirected to the Drilling Operational Excellence& Compliance Division - Environmental and Occupation al Health Unit.









Table of Contents

Contents Page

E-1 Waste Management 4E-2 Air Emissions Control 16E-3 Water Supply Protect ion 22E-4 Effluent Discharges Management 31E-5 Noise Contro l 34E-6 Hazardous Materials Management 45E-7 Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM) Management 53E-8 Refrigerant Management 56E-9 Food Service Hygiene 64E-10 Camp Sanitation 74E-11 Medical Requirements 81E-12 Spill Prevention, Preparedness and Response 83

Revision Summary 95





E-1

Waste Management





E-1 / Waste Management (WM)1. Purpose

The Drilling and Workover Waste Handling Procedure defines the steps to be followed to properly processwaste, reusable materials, and recyclable materials returning from the rigs and all other Drilling and

Workover (D&WO) fixed and mobile facilities, to reduce hazardous and non-hazardous waste volumes, andto promote re-use and recycling.

2. Scope

This procedure is applicable to all current and new D&WO operations (Saudi Aramco/Contractors), and anydrilling related/supporting activities commencing at both offshore and onshore facilities.

3. Abbreviations

A. AOBM - Alternative oil based drilling mud (e.g., using Safra base oil).

B. CRI - Cuttings re-injection.

C. D&WO - Drilling and Workover

D. D&WOSD - Drilling and Workover Services Department

E. DOE&CD - Drilling Operational Excellence and Compliance Division

F. DR&EMD - Drilling Rig and Equipment Maintenance Division

G. DRSD - Drilling Rig Support Division

H. DRSS - Drilling Rig Supply System

I. DW&F - Drilling waste and fluids

J. EH&S - Environment, Health and Safety

K. EMS - Environmental Management System

L. EPD - Environmental Protection Department

M. GER - General Environmental Regulations

N. HDPE - High density poly-ethylene

O. IBC - Intermediate bulk container

P. MEPA - Meteorology and Environmental Protection Administration

Q. NORM - Naturally occurring radioactive material





E-1 / WM / Continued

R. OBM - Oil based drilling mud

S. PME - Presidency of Meteorology and Environment

T. SA - Saudi Aramco

U. SAHWC - Saudi Aramco Hazardous Waste Code

V. SAR - Saudi Aramco Rigs

W. SWAT - Special Well Action Team unit, Shedgum

X. WMF - Waste Management Facility

Y. WS/ES - Wastewater separator / evaporation site

Z. WSD - Well-Sites Division

AA. WWMD - Water Well Maintenance Division

4. Responsibilities

A. Proponent Manager

Responsible for the implementation of this procedure in its entirety.

B. Superintendent

Responsible for the implementation of this procedure in its entirety and to develop and implement anaudit program that will accurately record and identify the level of implementation of this procedure.

C. D&WO Liaisonman / Foremen

1) Ensure waste is segregated properly onsite and that it is handled in compliance with SA Standardsand Government Regulations.

2) Ensure trash is properly segregated as per this procedure, and sent directly to landfill (from onshorerigs).

3) Ensure any recyclable or reusable materials are sent to Shedgum or Tanajib Tool house for furtherprocessing.

4) Track all backhauled materials and hazardous waste from the rig using online SAP manifesttransaction, or SAP Environment, Health, and Safety (EH&S) Hazardous Waste Manifest System.

5) Ensure an effort is made to reuse materials from damaged bags and containers at the rig site.






6) Ensure drilling contractor is in compliance with “Schedule D: Safety Health and EnvironmentalRequirements” of its working contract.

D. Drilling Rig Contractor

1) Follow their contractual obligations as set out in Schedule D of their working contract.

2) Maintain records of waste manifests as per SA Hazardous Waste Code (SAHWC) and PME GER.

E. All rigs and D&WO fixed and mobile facilit ies

1) Handle waste, reusable material, and recyclable material as set out in this procedure to maximizeefficiency and minimize generated waste volumes.

2) Track all materials and hazardous waste using online Form 112, Form 112-H, or SAP EH&SHazardous Waste Manifest System.

F. EPD

1) Communicate any changes or updates to the Government or Corporate waste managementregulations to Drilling Operational Excellence & Compliance Division (DOE&CD) / EnvironmentalCoordinators.

2) Communicate any changes made to status of available environmental contractors and operatingwaste management facilities (WMF) to the DOE&CD / Environmental Coordinators, so that alternatearrangements can be made for waste disposal.

G. DOE&CD and D&WO Departmental Environmental Coordinators

1) Monitor D&WO facility compliance with these procedures.

2) Coordinate with EPD to resolve any compliance issues.

3) Implement improvements to this procedure as required.

5. D&WO Waste Storage Requirements

When waste has been adequately identified and characterized, it needs to be segregated and storedproperly. The SA Hazardous Waste Code (SAHWC) outlines all requirements for storage, handling,

transportation, and tracking of hazardous waste. Storage in containers requires leak control or secondarycontainment. Hazardous waste may be stored at a rig location for a maximum of 90 days, and will besegregated and stored appropriately as per the SAHWC. A record of accumulated hazardous waste shall berecorded and maintained at the rig. Containers that hold hazardous waste must be inspected weekly. Tanksmust be visually inspected for leaks on a daily basis. Written records for all inspections will be maintained atthe rig location for the length of the contract. All chemical containers should have proper labeling as per theHAZCOM program.






6. D&WO Waste Handli ng Procedures

The various types of wastes that return from the rigs and those that are used in D&WO fixed and mobilefacilities, including all classes of waste, reusable and recyclable materials, must be handled as set out in thisdocument. The goal is to reduce hazardous and non-hazardous waste volumes, promote recycling, andreduce the transport costs and WMF disposal fees.

A. Rig Contractor Generated Waste

Schedule D of a typical SA contract contractually binds rig contractors to follow a Waste ManagementPlan for the proper handling, treatment, and storage of their wastes generated on SA sites. Transportand WMF contractors used by rig contractors are not required to be EPD-approved, unlesscontractually specified.

D&WO is not responsible for tracking rig contractor generated waste. EPD states that “Wastes that arederived solely from materials purchased by contractors, and solely used in contractor equipment, areconsidered contractor waste and, if hazardous, should be manifested in accordance with PME GERand SA requirements. They need not be manifested in the SAP EH&S Hazardous Waste ManifestSystem.” Hard copies of transfer documents (for waste materials transport) and hazardous wastemanifests (for hazardous waste disposal) must be available for review at the point of generation (eitherthe rig or contractor base facility).

1) Onshore Rig Contractors

Onshore rig contractors must segregate their waste from SA waste on the rigs and handle as perSchedule D of their working contract. SHEDGUM WILL NOT ACCEPT ANY RIG CONTRACTORWASTE.

2) Offshore Rig Contractors

Offshore rig contractors must segregate their own waste from SA waste on the rigs, in their ownskips, to be transferred to contractor-specific, designated areas at Tanajib Pier. Once onshore, thecontractor waste will be handled as per Schedule D of their working contract.

B. SA Generated Wastes and Materials

All chemicals and supplies purchased and provided to the Contractor Rigs and SAR by SA are includedin this category.

1) Onshore Rigs (refer to HSERM / E-1 / WM / Appendix No.1 / Figure No.1 / Onshore Rig Waste

Handling)

a. Shedgum Tool-house will receive and process the follow ing hazardous wastes andmaterials as indicated:

1. Plastic and steel containers (drums/barrels) and intermediate bulk containers (IBC’s) thathave chemical contamination (*) will be sent to DPC-280 using online Form 112-H (see SACU 22.03 Processing and Handling of Hazardous Material);






2. Excess drilling mud and non-containerized chemicals (e.g. spilled chemicals) will be sent toan EPD approved WMF using SAP EH&S Hazardous Waste Manifest System;

3. SAR used engine oil and used batteries will be sent to DPC-280 using online Form 112-H;

4. Expired and unusable chemicals in IBC’s, drums, barrels, and super-sacks will be sent toDPC-280 using online Form 112-H;

5. Reusable or repairable super-sack bags (BENTONITE and BARITE ONLY) will be sent backto the chemical supplier for reuse; and

6. Excess and reusable chemicals (i.e. damaged packaging) will be repackaged and reused atShedgum Tool-house.

b. Shedgum Tool-house will receive and process the follow ing non-hazardous wastes andmaterials as indicated:

1. EMPTY (*) chemical plastic and steel containers (drums/barrels) will be sent to DPC-531using online Form 112.

2. EMPTY (*) chemical IBC’s will be sent to DPC-531 using online Form 112.

3. SA casing protectors and damaged pipes will be sent to DPC-165 using online Form 112.

4. Cut off pipe and scrap metal will be sent to DPC-531 using online Form 112.

5. Undamaged wood pallets will be reused in Shedgum.

c. Shedgum Tool-house does NOT accept the fol lowing wastes (this waste should be sent toa landfill or WMF directly from the drilling rigs):

1. EMPTY White Super-sack bags.

2. Damaged wood pallets.

3. SAR used air filters and EMPTY used oil filters.

4. Any SAR trash.

5. EMPTY small chemical cans and bottles.

d. Onshore SA Dril ling Waste and Fluids (DW&F):

1. To promote evaporation, OBM fluids are sprayed on the sides of skid roads during operationsor after rig move during site cleanup.

2. If a regional wastewater separator/evaporation site (WS/ES) is available, OBM fluids will betransferred there to minimize disposal volumes.






3. Mix empty drain pit materials in-place with clean sand/marl (50%) for stability.

4. Oily hazardous waste sludge from the wastewater separators sent to an EPD approvedWMF.

5. Completion fluids are disposed at EPD approved WMF via request to DRSD Dispatcher.

Note: Present SA DW&F disposal practices are covered under Onshore Well-site Drilling WasteManagement procedure.

2) Offshore Rigs (refer to HSERM / E-1 / WM / Appendix No.1 / Figure No.2 / Offshore Rig WasteHandling)

a. Tanajib Tool-house wil l receive and process the following hazardous wastes andmaterials as indicated:

1. Plastic and steel containers (drums/barrels) and IBC’s that have chemical contamination(*) will be sent to DPC-280 using online Form 112-H.

2. Expired and unusable chemicals in IBC’s, drums, barrels, and super-sacks will be sent toDPC-280 using online Form 112-H.

3. SAR used engine oil and used batteries will be sent to DPC-280 using online Form 112-H.

4. Excess and reusable chemicals (i.e. damaged packaging) will be repackaged and reused inTanajib or transferred to Shedgum.

b. Tanajib Tool-house wil l receive and process the following non-hazardous wastes and

materials as indicated:

1. EMPTY(*) chemical plastic and steel containers (drums/barrels), chemical IBC’s, SA scrapmetal and cut off pipes will be sent to DPC-321 using online Form 112.

2. Damaged pipes and thread casing protectors will be sent to DPC-165 using online Form 112.

3. All SAR trash and SA EMPTY chemical super-sack bags (i.e. white bags) will be disposed ofat the nearest landfill area (e.g., Safaniya Landfill).

c. Offshore SA DW&F are processed as ind icated:

1. Sensi tive Areas:

A. Skip and ship the CRI well DW&F to Tanajib for processing.

B. DW&F from platform wells are injected into CRI wells (i.e. zero discharge).

C. DW&F from low-toxicity AOBMs, as per SAES-A-103, are transferred to Manifa WS/ES,as needed, to minimize volumes.






2. Non-sensit ive areas:

Discharge non-toxic, AOBM (i.e. using Safra base oil) cuttings near sea floor.

C. D&WO Fixed and Mobile Facil ity Generated Waste and Materials

All waste chemicals, lubricants, solvents, and materials generated by D&WO fixed and mobile facilitiesare included in this category. Hazardous wastes should be segregated from non-hazardous wastes.Mixing different types of hazardous wastes in one container (holding tank or pit) is prohibited.

1) Hazardous wastes and materials wil l be handled as indicated (refer to HSERM / E-1 / WM / Appendix No.1 / Figure No.3 / D&WO Fixed and Mobile Facil ity Waste Handl ing):

a. Plastic and steel containers (drums/barrels) and intermediate bulk containers (IBC’s) that havechemical contamination (*) will be sent to DPC-280 using online Form 112-H (see SA CU 22.03Processing and Handling of Hazardous Material).

b. Excess, used, expired and damaged lubricants (e.g. Oil, Grease) have to be collectedindividually in a properly sealed container and sent to DPC-280 using online Form 112-H.

c. Excess, used, expired and damaged batteries will be sent to DPC-280 using online Form 112-H.

d. Excess, expired, and damaged chemicals (e.g. paint, raw chemicals) in IBC’s, drums, barrels,and bags will be sent to DPC-280 using online Form 112-H.

e. Industrial drainage holding tanks, chemical drainage pits, and used sandblasting waste will besent to an EPD approved WMF using online SAP EH&S Hazardous Waste Manifest System.

2) Non-Hazardous wastes and materials wil l be handled as Indicated (refer to HSERM / E-1 / WM/ Appendix No.1 / Figure No.3 / D&WO Fixed and Mobi le Facility Waste Handl ing):

a. EMPTY (*) chemical plastic and steel containers (drums/barrels/IBCs) will be sent to DPC-531using online Form 112.

b. Dhahran DRSD shops generated empty(*) chemical plastic and steel containers(drums/barrels/IBCs), cut off pipe, and scrap metal will be sent to DPC-321 using online Form112.

c. Thread casing protectors will be sent to DPC-165 using online Form 112.

d. Cut off pipe and scrap metal from DR&EMD, WWMD, and WSD will be sent to DPC-531 usingonline Form 112.

e. WWMD damaged pipe, tubes, shafts, airlines, submersible motors and pumps will be sent toDPC-321 using online Form 112 (items should be scanned for NORMs and sent to DPC-280 ifaffected using online Form 112-H).

f. All trash (e.g. garbage, damaged wood pallets, EMPTY used oil filters, air filters, EMPTY smallchemical cans and bottles) will be disposed at the nearest landfill area.






Note: Empty drums and containers are defined in the SA Hazardous Waste Code section 4.3.1 asfollows: a container is empty if less than 2.5 cm (1-inch) or 3% by weight remains in a containerthat is < 110 gallons, or if less than 0.3% by weight of the total capacity remains in a containerthat is >110 gallons. If it contains more chemical it is considered contaminated.

7. References (refer to HSERM / A / A-2 / RM)

A. SA Standards

1) CU 22.03: Supply Chain Management Manual: Processing and Handling of Hazardous Material.

2) INT-5: Environmental Protection Policy.

3) Interim Procedure: Onshore Well-sites Drilling Waste Management.

4) G.I. 150.100: Hazardous Materials Communication (HAZCOM) Program.

5) D&WO DRSD Procedure for Receiving Returned Excess Chemicals.

6) SAES-A-102: Ambient Air Quality and Source Emission Standard.

7) SAES-A-103: Discharges to the Marine Environment.

8) SAES-A-104: Wastewater Treatment, Reuse, and Disposal.

9) SAES-S-07: Solid Waste Landfill Standard.

10) SASC-S-03: Saudi Aramco Sanitary Code, Solid Waste Management.

11) SASC-S-07: Saudi Aramco Sanitary Code, Camps and Communal Living Facilities.

12) Saudi Aramco Hazardous Waste Code (SAHWC).

B. Government Regulations and Standards

1) Document No. 1409-01, Environmental Protection Standards, Meteorology and EnvironmentalProtection Administration (MEPA), presently Presidency of Meteorology and Environment (PME).

2) General Environmental Regulations (GER) and Rules for Implementation in the Kingdom of Saudi

Arabia, PME, 2004.

3) Royal Commission Environmental Regulations, Volume 1, Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu,2004.




WO-HSERM-ENV-005 / Created: 01/13 / Last Review: 01/13 / Next Review: 01/17VP-D&WO

on(s) identif ied by a Vertical Bar in the Right Margin Page 13 of 95

SERM / E-1 / WM / Appendix No.1 / Figure No.1

















E-2

Air Emissions Control





E-2 / Air Emissions Control (AEC)

1. Purpose

The Drilling and Workover Air Emissions Control Procedure defines the minimum requirements to be

implemented in order to control the air emissions at D&WO operations including design and operatingrequirements, flare minimization, and periodical monitoring of Greenhouse Gas emission data whereapplicable and provides the minimum guidelines to be followed to generate, implement and manage thestandalone procedures.

2. Scope


3. Definitions, Abbreviations and Acronyms (Refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A)

A. Air Pol lutants - A substance in the air that can cause harm to humans and the environment. They canbe in the form of solid particles, liquid droplets, or gases. In addition, they may be natural or man-made.

B. Air Pollution - The introduction of chemicals, particulate matter, or biological materials that cause harmor discomfort to humans or other living organisms, or cause damage to the atmosphere.3.

C. Carbon Diox ide - Nontoxic and innocuous. Increasing concentrations in the upper atmosphere couldimplicate in global warming.

D. Carbon Monoxide - Colorless, odorless and non-irritating that can cause death at low concentrationsProduced when organic materials such as fuels are incompletely burned from vehicles engine and

stationary fuel combustion.

E. GHG - A greenhouse gas (GHG) is a gas in the atmosphere that absorbs and emits radiation within thethermal infrared range. This process is the fundamental cause of the greenhouse effect. The primarygreenhouse gases in the Earth's atmosphere are water vapors, carbon dioxide, methane, nitrous oxideand ozone.

F. Hydrocarbons - Large group of volatile organic compounds.

G. Nitrogen Oxides - Highly reactive gases from oxidation of the nitrogen in the air during combustion.

H. Sulfur Dioxide - Colorless corrosive gas, respiratory irritant and poison. Reacts with ozone, water

vapors and other materials to form sulfuric acid.

I. Particulates - Dust, ash, soot, smoke and droplets of pollutants either emitted to the air or formed in theatmosphere. Characterized as 0.005 to 100 micrometer in size.

J. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) - Organic chemicals that have a high vapor pressure at ordinaryroom-temperature conditions. Their high vapor pressure results from a low boiling point, which causeslarge numbers of molecules to evaporate or sublimate from the liquid or solid form of the compound andenter the surrounding air

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chemical

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Atmospheric_particulate_matter

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Biomolecule

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Earth%27s_atmosphere

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Absorption_(electromagnetic_radiation)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emission_(electromagnetic_radiation)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thermal_infrared


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Greenhouse_effect


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Water_vapour

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Carbon_dioxide

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Methane

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nitrous_oxide

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ozone

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Organic_chemicals


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vapor_pressure

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Room_temperature

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Evaporation

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sublimation_(phase_transition)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sublimation_(phase_transition)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Evaporation

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Room_temperature

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vapor_pressure


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ozone

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nitrous_oxide

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Methane


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Water_vapour


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Greenhouse_effect


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emission_(electromagnetic_radiation)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Absorption_(electromagnetic_radiation)


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Biomolecule

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Atmospheric_particulate_matter

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chemical





E-2 / AEC / Continued

4. Air Pollutants

Air pollutants are classified as primary pollutants which are directly released into air in a harmful form osecondary pollutants which are modified into a hazardous form after they enter atmosphere due to chemicareactions or which are formed in the atmosphere.

Types and sources of air pol lutants are summarized in the following table:

Activi ties/Sources Air Pol lu tants

Planned or unplanned flaring operation

• Carbon Dioxide

• SOx, NOx

• PM Particulate Matter

• Smoke

• Hydrocarbons

Engines’ (generator and vehicles) fuel combustion

• SOx, NOx

• Hydrocarbons

• PM Particulate Matter

• Smoke

• VOC

A. Pump s, valves, f langes, seals, bulk l oading/bunkering and other operati onallocations not vented through controlled openings.

B. Spills.

C. Welding activities.

Volatile Organic Compounds

Landfill • Hydrocarbons

• Carbon Monoxide

5. Responsibilities

A. Proponent Departments

1) Comply with this procedure and the applicable Saudi Aramco air emission requirements (G.I.s,procedures and standards).

2) Adopt piloting and implementing applicable technology such as 3 or 4 phase separator with highefficiency burner.

3) Ensure that all of the periodic GHG data are sent to E&OHU in a timely manner.

4) Ensure periodic preventive maintenance programs are in place and implemented in order to preventfrom any environmental release or spill.

5) Ensure all current and new D&WO operations, and any drilling related/supporting activitiescommencing at both offshore and onshore facilities shall be designed not to discharge any toxicsubstances or hazardous matters in such quantities or durations as to be harmful to the health andwelfare of humans, animals, or plants.






B. Environmental Protection Department

1) Generate and ensure up-to-date applicable Saudi Aramco requirements (codes) and providetechnical advice in order to assist Proponent Department(s) to ensure that activities are carried outprudently and effectively.

2) Inspect D&WO facilities according to the requirements and carry out the CEHA, OHHA, EPA andRPA inspections

3) Report non-compliances to the proponent department(s) along with the necessary recommendations

6. Requirements

A. Flar ing Requirements

The amount of flaring and burning of associated gas from D&WO sites is a source of carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions. By proper design and/or controls, air pollutants generated from flaring can beminimized and controlled.

Air quality and source emission control recommendations from the Environmental Impact Assessment(EIA), technical and environmental evaluation, shall be implemented for any project proposal. Engineerfrom Proponent Departments and Facilities Planning department shall be involved in the initial scopedevelopment, determination of smokeless capacity and selection of a flare system. Flare system shall besupplied from an approved Saudi Aramco flare manufacturer, which meets the design requirements(system, mechanical and structural).

BACT shall be used for new facilities and BART shall be used for existing facilities undergoing

modifi cation to control air pollutant emissions as part of each well program, such as:

1) 3 or 4 phase separators.

and/or

2) High efficiency burner.

Whenever practicable, feasible and applicable, this source specific BACT and BART information can be

found at the USEPA database through its website at www.epa.gov/ttn.

The preventive maintenance and repair of the flare systems, including replacement in-kind, shall be in

accordance with the manufacturing Maintenance and Operation Manual.

B. Fuel Combustion Requirements

Engines’ fuels supply mechanical and electrical power to D&WO operations. There are also drivenengine trucks being used at D&WO facilities such forklifts, tankers, heavy duty application trucks, etc.Most of the pollutants are emitted through the exhaust. However, some organic compounds escape fromthe crankcase as a result of blow by and from the fuel tank and carburetor because of evaporation.Nearly all of the organic compounds enter the atmosphere from the exhaust.



http://www.epa.gov/ttn










Control measures are primarily directed at limiting NOx and CO emissions since they are the primarypollutants from these engines.

Emissions from engines can be reduced and/or controlled by the examples mentioned in thefollowing table:

Control Measures Examples

Al ternat ives Fuels (LowerNOx and PM)

• Low sulfur fuels

• Zero sulf ur fuels such Natural Gas

• Water emulsions

Al ternat ive EngineeringControls

• Engines filters

• PM Trap

Maintenance Program Adequate preventive maintenance program and plan fo r both powergenerators and vehicles/trucks

Monitor ing Program Smoke inspections

C. Monitoring Requirements

All D&WO operations departments are responsible for tracking GHG emissions data and reporting thesedata to DOE&CD/E&OHU for compilation on a quarterly basis.

GHG emissions data are collected as:

1) Any planned and unplanned flaring operations.

2) Engines’ Fuel combustion.

This information is uploaded by the Upstream Continuing Excellence (UCE) and EnvironmentalProtection Department (EPD) to their GHG Database System. This system will assist in GHG emissiontrends analyses and evaluating the effectiveness of Saudi Aramco strategies for the control of theseemissions.







The following matrix shows the summary of D&WO E&OH air emission control related references from theapplicable SA requirements, and related external origin documents:

Appl icable SA Requirements External Orig in Documents

A. SAES-A-102 Ambient Air Quality and SourceEmissions Standards.

B. SAEP-340 Air Dispersion Modeling andEmission Inventory.

C. SAEP-400 Guidelines for Facility FlaringMinimization Plan.

D. SAEP-400 Appendix 10 Real Time FlareMonitoring System Design Document.

USEPA.





E-3

Water Supply Protection





E-3 / Water Supply Protection (WSP)

1. Purpose

The Drilling and Workover Water Supply Protection Procedure defines the minimum mandatory

requirements for the control of the supply of water throughout Drilling and Workover operations and facilitiesand outlines the steps to be followed to safeguard the water supplies and ensure that water is adequatelyprotected from any means of contamination.

2. Scope


3. Definit ions, Abbreviations and Acronyms (refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A)

A. Bott led Drinking Water - All water, which is sealed in bottles, packages or other containers andoffered for sale for human consumption.

B. Chemically Treated - Any water that has been chemically treated. The treatment may range fromsimple addition of chlorine to kill bacteria to multiple chemical applications to render it non-corrosiveand/or non-scaling or to remove certain physical or chemical pollutants.

C. Chlor ine Residual - The amount of chlorine in all forms (total) or hypochlorous acid HOCl (free)remaining in treated water to ensure disinfection for a certain period of time.

D. Coliform Group Bacteria

1) A group of bacteria predominantly inhabiting the intestines of man or animal, but also occasionallyfound elsewhere. It includes all aerobic and facultative anaerobic, Gram negative, non-spore formingbacilli that ferment lactose with production of gas.

2) A group of organisms, which include Escherichia coli.

E. Contamination, Water - The direct or indirect introduction into water of microorganisms, chemicals,wastes or wastewater

F. Disin fect - To kill infectious microorganisms by physical or chemical means. Some bacterial sporeforming organisms may survive the process, but all other microorganisms are reduced to insignificant

levels or eliminated completely.

G. Drink ing Water (Sweet Water) - Water that has no objectionable tastes or odors and meets all waterquality requirements as defined in this procedure.

H. Filter - A device made of porous material, through which a fluid is passed, to separate from it matterheld in suspension.

I. Hypochlori te - in its sodium salt form, the active bleaching ingredient in liquid chlorine bleach.





E-3 / WSP / Continued

J. Liquid Chlorine Bleach - A solution of sodium hypochlorite, a highly active oxidizing agent. Liquidchlorine bleach is also called household bleach and is commonly distributed as an approximately fivepercent solution of sodium hypochlorite.

K. mg/L - Milligrams per liter, which is the metric equivalent of parts per million (ppm).

L. Microorganisms - Generally any living microscopic things (too small for the naked eye). This includesbacteria, yeasts, simple fungi, algae, etc. Some of these produce disease in man, animals and plants.

M. MODU - Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit.

N. Potable Drinking Water - Water at the consumer tap that is wholesome and which meets thechemical, physical and microbiological section as outlined in SASC-S-01.

O. QAQC - Quality Assurance/ Quality Control.

P. Raw Water - In Saudi Aramco terminology, raw water means water that has not undergone treatment.This water normally contains less than 5,000 mg/l TDS and is used extensively in Saudi Arabia fordomestic purposes.

Q. Residual Chlorine -The free chlorine, which remains in solution after the demand has been satisfied.

R. TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) -Total solids dissolved in water. TDS is expressed in mg/L. Frequentlyexpressed as parts per million (ppm).

S. Utili ty Water -Water containing, normally less than 5000mg/L TDS, used in process facilities (asopposed to raw water used in domestic facilities).

T. Water Hardness -Soluble metal salts, principally those of calcium and magnesium, sometimesincluding iron and manganese that, when present in water in significant levels, can create scalingproblems.

U. Water Supply System -Includes the waterworks and auxiliaries for collection, treatment, storage anddistribution of the water from the sources of supply to the free-flowing outlet of the consumer.

4. Responsibilities

A. Environmental Protection Department (EPD)

1) Generate and ensure up-to-date applicable Saudi Aramco requirements (codes) and providetechnical advice in order to assist Proponent Department(s) to ensure that activities are carried outprudently and effectively








4) Approve all new water suppliers provided that they adhere to rules and regulations set by EPD

5) Recommend appropriate engineering and administrative control measures to ensure that water

supply is protected

B. Proponent Department(s)

1) Comply with this procedure and all applicable Saudi Aramco requirements and codes.

2) Coordinate and ensure that contractors are adhering to the requirements stipulated in thisprocedure.

3) Conduct regular inspections to ensure the compliance of contractors and provide recommendationsas necessary.

4) Conduct all required sampling and testing as stipulated in this procedure and maintain all results andrecords onsite.

C. Contractor(s)

1) Generate and maintain a stand-alone procedure which is in compliance with the requirements in thisprocedure.

2) Provide a safe water supply in order to maintain work environments that minimize hazards ofcontaminated water supply.

3) Identify and evaluate the risks and hazards associated with the supply of contaminated water.

4) Appoint EPD approved contractors to ensure a safe water supply.

5) Conduct all required sampling and testing as stipulated in this procedure and maintain all results andrecords onsite.

6) Perform all necessary sampling and testing on SA Rigs to ensure a safe water supply and maintainall documents and records onsite.

7) Provide training or awareness sessions regarding the hazards and risks of a vulnerable water supply

D. Saudi Aramco Approved Contractors

1) Maintain a continuous safe supply for all rig and camp sites.

2) Perform additional monitoring of water quality supplied on rig and camp sites.

3) Ensure that water quality meets or exceeds the requirements outlined in this procedure andstandards referenced in Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards.

4) Provide training or awareness sessions regarding the hazards and risks of a vulnerable watersupply.






5. Requirements

A. Disin fection Requirements:

1) Potable water systems and water wells shall be disinfected by chlorination (with sufficient amounts ofchlorine either in the form of gas, solution, granules or tablets) or by other means or methods ofequal efficiency according to Best Available Technology in the killing or removal of organismscapable of causing infection.

2) Potable water systems and water wells shall be constructed, repaired and painted in accordance toSaudi Aramco Standards.

3) Potable water systems shall be enclosed from the filling inlet to the discharge outlet to preventcontamination of the enclosed water.

4) All water storage tanks shall be provided with a sample tap and designed with openings that permitvisual inspection of the tank and provide access for cleaning and disinfection.

5) Both the low concentration method and the high concentration method can be used for thedisinfection of water storage tanks based on the applicability on site.

B. Testing Requirements:

1) Potable Water System Microbiolog ical Testing - Bacteriological Testing

a. Samples shall be collected after final flushing of potable water/before the potable water is placedin service during the disinfection of the potable water system.

b. If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological results, the disinfection shallbe repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.

c. Records shall be maintained and located onsite.

d. Bacteriological Testing parameters, requirements and frequency are shown in Table No.1 below.






Table No.1: Potable Water System Microbiological Testing - Bacteriological Testing

No. Parameters Requirements Frequency

1. Maximum contaminant level (MCL) of

total coliforms – General

Heterotroph ic Plat Count (HPC)

<500CFU/mlMonthly

2.

Maximum contaminant level (MCL) of

total coliforms – Test using mul tiple

tube fermentation technique

Free from turbid culture in the absence

of gas productionMonthly

3.

Maximum contaminant level (MCL) of

total coliforms – Test using membrane

filter technique

Free from confl uent growth/colony

(exceeds 200 on 47-mm diameter

membrane filter used as detector)

Monthly

4. Maximum contaminant level (MCL) of

total coliforms – Using P-A test

Free from a turbi d culture in the

absence of an acid reaction (an acid

indicated when the medium changes to

a yellow color)

Monthly

2) Potable Water System Physical and Chemical Water Quality Testing

a. Water shall not contain impurities in concentrations, which may be hazardous to the health of theconsumers.

b. Record shall be maintained and located onsite.

c. Physical and Chemical Water Quality testing parameters, requirements and frequency are shownin Table No.2 below.

Table No.2: Potable Water System Physical and Chemical Water Quality Testing

No. Parameters Requirements Frequency

1. Total Dissolved Solid (TDS) <5000 mg/l Daily

2.Residual Chlorine

0.5ppm/mg/L –

3.0ppm/mg/LDaily

3. pH Level 6.5 – 8.5 Daily







. Drink ing and Potable Water Requirements:

1) Potable Water

Water Data Sheet

Type Potable Water

General

Requirements

1. Shall comply with bacteriological requirements and be chlorinated suffic iently.

2. Physical and chemical quality of th e water must be inherently fr ee from acute health hazards, but need not comply wi th the st ringent chemical qu

parameters required to protect the most sensitive individual fro m chronic health risks associated with lifetime consumption of drinking water.

3. Shall be obtained, conveyed, treated, stored and dist ributed in a clos ed system that is protected from contamination and every reasonable effort

be made to prevent pollution.

4. Contractors are recommended to use the SA approved sup pliers (List can be provid ed by E&OHU upon request).

5. If it is not feasible to use the SA approved supplier due to short age of bulk water suppliers, contractors shall perform their own sampling and testi

order to ensure that the potable water is safe for consumption as per EPD requirements.

6. Contractors shall request all the documentation from the potable water supplier that confirms t hat the water is safe and protected from contamina

including applicable licenses, credentials, laboratory analytical data, QAQC controls and water making pr ocess description.

7. Records of t reatment and testing shall be maintained and retained on site.

Usage Location SourceTreatment

RequirementTesting Requirements

Testing

FrequencyTesting Responsibili

bluti on,

athing,

rushing teeth,

ashing raw

ood, eyewashtations, hand

ashing,

aundry, ware-

ashing,

omestic/utility

urposes,

peration

Potable water system

Potable Water Well

Bulk supplied by SA

approved supplier (An

updated list of

approved suppliers can

be provided by E&OHUupon request)

Disinfection of

potable water system

– Chlorin ation

Physical and chemical

parameters as stipulated

in Table 2

Daily Saudi Aramco /Contractors

Seawater - Water maker Saudi Aramco /Contractors

Bunkered from vessel Saudi Aramco/Contractors

Maximum contaminant

level (MCL) of total

coliforms as stipulated

in Table 1

Monthly Saudi Aramco/Contractors

Water Wells







2) Drink ing Water

Water Data Sheet

Type Drinking Water

General

Requirements

1. Drinking water shall b e supplied by Saudi Aramco approved supp liers.

2. Drinking water shall not be supplied from a potable water system (Potable water cannot be used for drinking and c ooking pur poses/any ingestion

purposes).3. Bottled water shall remain in its origi nal container throughout it s usage at the facilities. It shall not be transferred into a potable water system and/

any system/tank/container.

4. If bulk drink ing water is to be transferred to a different tank the receiving tank, connecting pipes and distribut ion system shall all be suffi ciently

disinfected to ensure s afe water supply and prevent contamination.

5. Shall have no objectionable tastes or odors and shall meet all water quality requirements identified in this pr ocedure.

6. Shall cont ain less than 500 mg/l TDS.

7. Shall be obtained from a safe source which is prot ected by all means from contamination.

8. Contractors shall request from the SA approved drinking water supplier all of the necessary documents to ensure that the provided drinking water

safe for human co nsumption in cluding applicable licenses, credentials, laboratory analytical data, QAQC controls, and water making process

description.

9. Contractors shall retain copies o f the pro vided documentation at applicable locations.

Usage Locati on SourceTreatment

RequirementTesting Requirements

Testing

Frequency

Treatment & Testing

Responsibility

inking (directlym bottle or

ater fountain)

e Makingooking, anyrpose involving

gestion

Original containers in

bottles or bulk at site

Bottled/Bulk supplied by

SA approved supplier.

(An updated list ofapproved suppliers can

be provided by E&OHU

upon request)

Any treatmen t that

gives a compliance

result to Table 9parameters of SASC-

S-01 (e.g.

sedimentation-

coagulation- filtration)

Manufacturer Manufacturer Manufacturer







The following matrix shows the summary of D&WO E&OH drinking and potable water supply protectiondocuments, related references from applicable SA requirements:

D&WO E&OH Documents Appl icable SA Requirements

A. D&WO E&OH Stand AloneProcedure: D&WO E&OH Drinkingand Potable Water Supply ProtectionProcedure.

B. CEPI: Comprehensive Environmental

Health Assessment (CEHA) Checklist.

A. SAES-S-40 SA Water Systems.

B. G.I.0151.006 Implementing the SA SanitaryCode.

C. SASC-S-01 Water Section of SA Sanitary Code.





E-4

Effluent DischargesManagement





E-4 / Effluent Discharges Management (EDM)

1. Safe collection, treatment/holding and reuse/discharge of all forms of wastewater, from D&WO sitesboth of fshore and onshore, are necessary for the protection o f public health and the environment. Inorder to accomplish that, such wastewaters shall be collected, treated, reused or disposed so that:

A. They will not give rise to public health hazards.

B. They will not pollute or contaminate any water body including groundwater and aquifers.

2. The purpose of effluent discharge management is to:

A. Cover the restriction/prohibition of discharging pollutants into a land and/or a water body.

B. Provide standard method/operation/technology of collection and treatment.

C. Provide standard discharge parameters governed by applicable legal and other requirements.

D. Provide design requirements of treatment/holding unit and its operation and maintenance.

E. Provide sampling, testing and monitoring requirements.

F. Serve as a guide to contractors to generate, implement, maintain, and manage their own standaloneeffluent discharges management procedures.





E-4 / EDM / Cont inued

3. The following matrix shows the summary of D&WO E&OH effluent discharge documents, relatedreferences from the applicable SA requirements, and related external or igin documents:

D&WO E&OH Documents Appl icable SA Requirements External OriginDocuments

A. D&WO E&OH Stand AloneProcedure: D&WO E&OHEffluent Discharge Procedure.

B. CEPI: EnvironmentalPerformance Assessment(EPA) Checklist.

A. SAES-A-104 Wastewater Treatment, Reuseand Disposal.

B. SAES-A-400 Industrial Drainage Systems.

C. SAES-A-403 Offshore Platform DrainageSystem.

D. SAES-103 Discharges to the MarineEnvironment.

E. SAES-S-010 Sanitary Sewers.

F. SAES-S-020 Oily Water Drainage Systems.

G. SAES-S-030 Storm Water DrainageSystems.

H. SAEP-327 Disposal of Wastewater fromCleaning/ Flushing/ DewateringPipelines/ Vessels.

I. G.I. 0151.006 Implementing the SA SanitaryCode.

J. SASC-S-02 Sanitary Wastewater andSewerage Systems Section of SA SanitaryCode.

K. General Environmental Regulations (GER)and Rules for Implementation in the Kingdomof Saudi Arabia, Presidency of Meteorologyand Environment (PME), 2004.

L. Royal Commission EnvironmentalRegulations, Volume 1 Royal Commission forJubail and Yanbu (RCJY), 2004.

M. Meteorology and Environmental Protection Administration.

Contractors’ Stand AloneEffluent DischargeProcedure.





E-5

Noise Control





E-5 / Noise Control (NC)1. Purpose

The Drilling and Workover Noise Control Procedure defines the minimum mandatory requirements for themanagement of noise such as identification of noise hazard, noise exposure monitoring and/or noise

exposure reduction/controls throughout Drilling and Workover Operations. The procedure also outlines theminimum controls to be implemented to prevent hearing loss and protect the environment.

2. Scope



A. Ambient Noise: A measure of intensity, duration and character of sounds from all sources that affect

a given location.

B. Action Level: Equivalent continuous sound level of 85 dB (A). Exposures at or above this levelrequire the carry out of the following to reduce harmful effects of noise on hearing:

1) An employee must be enrolled in the Company Hearing Conservation Program (HCP) andprovided audiometric testing by PMSD.

2) Representative noise exposure monitoring is required by EPD.

3) Hearing protectors and hearing conservation training shall be provided to and worn by theemployee.

C. Annual Audiogram: The subsequent audiogram performed after the baseline audiogram.

D. Audiogram: A chart, graph or table resulting from an audiometric test showing the employee's hearingthreshold levels as a function of frequency.

E. Audiologist: A professional, specializing in the study and rehabilitation of hearing.

F. Baseline Audiogram: Audiogram against which future audiograms are compared.

G. Community Noise: A measure of the overall noise which is associated with outdoor sound levels inthe community.

H. Continuous Noise: Noise which has negligibly small fluctuations of sound levels within the period ofobservation.

I. dB: Decibel, a unit of measurement of un-weighted sound levels using a reference level of 20 micro-Pascal.

J. dB (A): Decibel - A - weighted, a unit of measurement of sound level corrected to the A - weightedscale using a reference level of 20 micro-Pascal.





E-5 / NC / Continued

K. Employee: A person employed in a factory by the occupier or by any person who contracts with theoccupier to carry out the whole or any part of any work undertaken by the occupier in the course ofand for the purpose of the occupier's trade or business.

L. Employee Exposure: Exposure to noise measured with a noise measuring equipment at a positionwhich most closely approximates with the noise levels at the head position of the employee duringnormal operation.

M. Engineering Control: The reduction of the noise level reaching the ear-drums of an employee bylessening the amount of noise transmitted to the employee's ear-drums or the amount of noise levelproduced, but does not include a reduction obtained by the use of a hearing protective device.

Examples are:

1) Substitution of manufacturing equipment or processes.

2) Isolation brought about by barriers, enclosures, and the like.

Or

3) Modification of the equipment, including the addition of materials such as absorbers and dampingmaterials.

N. Feasible: Technical feasibility is the existence of technical know-how as to materials and methodsavailable or adaptable to specific circumstances which can be applied to control noise with areasonable possibility that employee exposure to occupational noise will be reduced.

O. Hearing Impairment: The arithmetic average of the permanent hearing threshold level of anemployee at 500, 1000, 2000 and 3000 Hz which is shifted by 25 dB or more compared to thestandard audiometric reference level.

P. Hearing Conservation Program (HCP)

An effective HCP includes, as a minimum:

1) Noise exposure monitoring

2) Audiometric testing and analysis

3) Provision and effective use of hearing protective device

4) Training on the effects of noise, the care and use of hearing protective device, etc.

5) Recordkeeping. Saudi Aramco's HCP is administered by the Preventive Medicine ServicesDivision/SAMSO, the Loss Prevention Department, and the Environmental ComplianceDivision/Environmental Protective equipment Department.






Q. Hearing Protective Device Level: The amount, in dB, by which the threshold of audibility for an eardiffers from the standard audiometric reference level.

R. Hz: Hertz, a unit of measurement of frequency, numerically equal to cycles per second.

S. Impulse Noise: A noise of short duration (typically less than one second), especially of high intensity,abrupt onset and rapid decay, and often rapidly changing spectral composition. Impulse noises arecharacteristically associated with such sources as explosions, impacts, firearm discharges, sonicbooms, and many industrial processes.

T. Intermit tent Noise: A sound level which suddenly drops to the ambient level several times during theperiod of observation and the time during which the level remains at a constant value different fromthat of the ambient level being of the order of one second or more.

U. Noise: A sound which is unwanted, either because of its effect on humans, its effect on fatigue ormalfunction of physical equipment, or its interference with the perception or detection of other sounds

V. Noise Exposure: Cumulative acoustic stimulation which reaches the ear of a person over a specifiedperiod of time such as a work shift, a day, a working life, or a lifetime.

W. Noise Hazard: An acoustic stimulation of the ear which is likely to produce noise induced permanenthearing loss in some of the exposed population.

X. Occupational Noise: Noise arising from the scope of employment.

Y. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): The maximum legal noise exposure, established by SASO. Thecurrent PEL is 90 dB(A) over an eight-hour period.

Z. SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.

AA. Time Weighted Average (TWA): That sound level, which if constant over an 8-hour exposure period,would result in the same noise dose as is measured.

4. Responsibilities

A. Proponent Departments

1) To comply with the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

2) To coordinate and enforce the operations commencing at both Saudi Aramco and Contractors’facilities to comply with the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

3) To ensure hazards and risks of noise are identified, evaluated and feasibly, practicably andreasonably reduced/controlled in accordance/in line with the requirements stipulated in thisprocedure.






B. Contractors


2) To coordinate and enforce the operations commencing at their (Contractors’) facilities to complywith the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

3) To ensure hazards and risks of noise are identified, evaluated and reasonably and feasiblyreduced/controlled in accordance/in line with the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

C. Environmental Protection Department (EPD)



3) Report non-compliances to the proponent department(s) along with the necessaryrecommendations

D. D&WO And Contractors’ Facil ities Most Authorized/Senior Person


2) To provide and maintain a workplace environment that minimize and/or control the noiseexposure by:

a. Continually identifying and evaluating noise hazards and risks.

b. Requesting appropriate party to conduct noise exposure monitoring and audiometric testingprogram (wherever necessary).

c. Continually implementing appropriate controls in accordance with this procedure and/or asper recommendations.

d. Continually providing adequate Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) wherever necessary andenforcing the use of HPD.

e. Continually providing adequate communication pertaining to the noise hazards to theemployees such as tool box talk, exposure monitoring result, audiometric testing results, etc

E. D&WO and Contractors’ Employees

1) Shall wear approved HPD correctly in noise hazard areas or when performing tasks which requirethe use of HPD.

2) Shall maintain HPD in sanitary condition and proper working order.






3) To report noise hazards and HPD problems to their supervisor.

4) Shall not use personal stereo headsets in lieu of hearing protective device devices

5. Source of Noise at D&WO And Contractors’ Facili ties

Sources of noise are such as:

A. Engines and Compressors.

B. Pressure Relief Valves and Pressure Reduction Stations.

C. Pumps and Drivers.

D. Generators.

E. A/C Units.

F. Construction Equipment.

G. Pipe Bends.

H. Centrifugal Fans.

I. Mixing equipment.

J. Vehicle/Vessel

6. Source of Noise at D&WO And Contractors’ Facili ties

Duration of Exposure (Hours) Sound Pressure Level, dB (A)

16 85

12 87

10 88

8 90

6 92

4 95

3 97

2 100

1.5 102

1 105

0.5 110

0.25 or less 115






7. Flow Chart showing how noise is managed at the workplace (Refer to Appendix No.1 for Flow Chartdetails)

Whenever/Wherever Noise Hazard(s) are

identified at the work lace

Facilities to notify proponent

de artment/contractors and E&OHU

Conduct either baseline, periodic, or

additional noise monitoring

Are exposures

≥85dBA TWA?

YES

NOContinue to maintain safe

work place

Conduct monitoring.

Are controls

adequate/exposure

<85dBA TWA?

YES

Determine and implement adequate controls to

reduce and/control the noise and provide employees

with HPD

NO

Conduct Audiometric Testing Program and itsrecommendations/restrictions






8. References (Refer to HSERM / A / A-2 / RM)

The following table shows D&WO E&OH noise exposure management related references from theapplicable SA requirements, and related external origin documents:


A. SAES-A-105 Noise Control.

B. SAEP-371 Hearing Conservation Program.

Royal Commission EnvironmentalRegulations-2010 RCER-2010 Volume 1,Regulations and Standards







Appendix No.1 / Flow Chart Detai ls

1. Noise monitoring (As requi red in Section 6.1 of SAEP-371)

For D&WO Facilities

A. Notify proponent department and E&OHU.

B. Proponent and E&OHU to request EPD to conduct eitherbaseline, periodic or additional noise monitoring.

C. EPD to conduct baseline, periodic or additional noise monitoringto determine if any employee may be exposed to noise level at orabove the action level.

D. Whenever there has been an operation, process, equipment,controls or personnel change in the workplace, the additionalmonitoring shall be conducted.

E. Sound level meter shall conform to ANSI S1.4 and be calibratedaccording to manufacturer’s instruction in order to ensuremeasurement accuracy.

F. Noise level at or above the action level risk shall bereduced/controlled wherever feasible, practicable and reasonable.

For Contractors’ Facilities

A. Notify contractor’s management, proponent department and

E&OHU.

B. Contractor to conduct baseline, periodic or additional noisemonitoring to determine if any employee may be exposed to nlevel at or above the action level in accordance to requirementstipulated in this procedure.

C. Whenever there has been an operation, process, equipment,controls or personnel change in the workplace, the additionalmonitoring shall be conducted.

D. Sound level meter shall conform to ANSI S1.4 and be calibrateaccording to manufacturer’s instruction in order to ensuremeasurement accuracy.

E. Noise level at or above the action level risk shall be

reduced/controlled wherever feasible, practicable and reasona






E-5 / NC / Appendi x No.1 / Continued

2. If noise level ≥85dBA TWA, determine and implement adequate controls to reduce and/control the noise and provide employees wi th Control Measures Options based on feasibility, practicalit y and reasonability (As required i n the Section 5.0 SAES-A-105 and Section 6.1, 6.36.4 of SAEP-371 and/or m onitorin g report recommendation)

Control

Measures

Description

Isolation Separating the hazard from other persons at the workplace like installing acoustic barrier/fence

Screening

Pre-Qualification pro gram for new facility/equipment

Environmental screening and scoping (ESS) statement and EIA for equipment generated and other noise level shall be considered in the design phase of all projects involvingfacilities/equipment.

For D&WO Facilities

A.Facilities shall notify the proponent department and E&OHU;

B.For new/modified facilities/major modifications, proponent department shall contact EPD to request for a noise level testing during the commissioning process, prior to approval

Mechanical Completion Certificate (MCC). If the noise level of any area within the facilities is likely to reach/exceed 85dB(A), a “Key Drawing” noise contour diagram showin

minimum, noise isopleths of 85, 90, 95 and 100 dB(A), shall be submitted to EPD;

C.Prior to purchase of any new piece of equipment, integrated unit or replacement of pre-existing that will generate noise in excess of 85dB(A) at a distance of one meter, the P

Manager shall submit a completed “Form 7305-EBF” to EPD. EPD may visit the equipment manufacturer to verify conformance; and

D.For existing facilities and equipment, proponent department shall request EPD to conduct a baseline/annual or additional monitoring.

For Contractors’ Facilities

A.They shall notify the proponent department/E&OHU and their management and ensure contractor implement appropriate steps to determine the noise exposure level and imple

appropriate actions in order to reduce/control the noise exposure level;

B.Tool Pusher shall notify his management;

C.For existing facilities and equipment, contractor’s management shall then appoint a 3rd party hygiene technician to conduct a baseline/annual or additional noise monitoring; and

D.Prior to purchase of any new piece of equipment, integrated unit or replacement of pre-existing that will generate noise in excess of 85dB(A) at a distance of one meter, the P

Manager shall submit a completed “Form 7305-EBF” to EPD. EPD may visit the equipment manufacturer to verify conformance.

Engineering

Controls

May include modification to toll /equipment/system/machinery/facility like:

A.installing attenuator/silencer at the noise source; or

B.Closed or partially closed spaces containing equipment that reaches/exceeds 85dB(A) shall be designed and with adequate construction materials selected to minimize the effectsechoes and reverberation

Admin is trat ive

Controls

A.Periodical noise hazard, risk, control training program;

B.Communication of exposure monitoring and audiometric testing result with inclusion of the effects of noise, purpose/usage/maintenance of HPD, purpose of audiometric testing, an

failure to comply will result in disciplinary action;

C.Tool box talk program;

D.Periodical workplace inspection

Provision of

HPD

A.Hearing protective devices shall be replaced as necessary;

B.Employees shall be required to correctly use and be trained on the use and care of hearing protective devices provided to them;

C.The supervisor is directly respons ible for the enforcement and shall ensure that hearing protective devices are correctly worn b y:

1) any employee who is exposed to noise levels which reaches/exceeds action level;

2) any employee who has not yet had a baseline audiogram established within the first 6 months of employment; and/or

3) Any employee who has experienced a standard threshold shift.






E-5 / NC / Appendi x No.1 / Continued

3. If nois e level still at ≥85dBA TWA, Aud iom etri c Test ing sh all b e conducted reasonabili ty (As requi red in t he Sect ion 6.2 of SAEP-371 and/ormonitoring report recommendation)

Stage Description

1 A. At this stage, both D&WO and Contractor’s facilities shall compile a list of “ at risk” group based on the exposure monitoring report; andB. For D&WO facilities, the list shall be provided to Preventive Medicine Services Division. For Contractors’ facilities, the list shall be provided to an approp

audiometric testing company

2

A. For D&WO facilities, Audiometric Testing is carried out by the PMSD Medicine. Contractors are required to implement similar tests performed by an approp

audiometric testing company;

B. Within 6 months of an employee's first exposure to noise levels which reaches/exceeds action level, a valid baseline audiogram must be performed;

C. The audiometric testing shall be preceded by at least 12 hours without exposure to high levels of noise. Hearing protective devices shall not be used as a substitu

the requirement that baseline audiograms be preceded by 12 hours without exposure to workplace noise;

D. The audiometric test shall be performed once every 2 years or as deemed necessary by occupational medicine physician on any employee exposed to noise le

which reaches/exceeds action level;

E. Each employee's periodic audiogram shall be compared to that employee's baseline audiogram to determine if the audiogram shows a change in hearing thres

which cannot be accounted for by natural aging; NOTE: A Permanent Threshold Shift (PTS) is a permanent and verified change in hearing threshold relative

baseline audiogram of an average of 10 dB or more at 2000, 3000, and 4000 Hz in either ear.

F. If the audiometric test results show any variation from normal, Medical Designated Facility (MDF) must refer to Occupational Medicine within 30 days. MDF tests

be repeated by Occupational Medicine. If Occupational Medicine carries out the tests, repeats will be arranged as recommended by Occupational medicine physic

G. The occupational medicine physician shall review all problematic audiograms and shall determine whether there is a need for further evaluation;

H. If a comparison of the annual audiogram to the baseline audiogram indicates a standard threshold shift, the employee shall be informed of this fact in writing, with

days of the determination. Occupational Medicine shall provide directives concerning alternative working conditions that the hearing impaired employee can wo

without substantial risk of further permanent hearing loss;

I. The functional operation of the audiometer shall be checked before each day's use by testing a person with known, stable hearing thresholds, or with an ele

acoustic „ear‟. Deviations of 10 decibels or greater require an acoustic calibration; J. Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically at least annually pursuant to ANSI S3.6 Specification for Audiometers;

K. An exhaustive calibration shall be performed at least every two years.

3 A. Both D&WO and Contractor shall communicate the result to their employees and shall establish work restrictions program necessary to avoid further hearing lossB. Warning signs shall be posted at entrances to or on the periphery of all well-defined work areas in which workers may be exposed at or above the action level.

warning signs shall clearly indicate that the area is a noise hazard area and that hearing protection devices shall be worn.





E-6

Hazardous MaterialsManagement





E-6 / Hazardous Materials Management (HMM)

1. Purpose

The Drilling and Workover Hazardous Materials Management Procedure defines the minimum controls to be

followed to minimize the risk of adverse health impacts as well as impact to the environment resulting fromexposure or release of hazardous materials in Drilling and Workover Operations. The procedure alsooutlines the minimum requirements pertaining to the management of hazardous materials from purchasing,packaging, labeling, storage, inventory, handling, transportation, documentation, information, and riskassessment.

2. Scope



A. Biohazard - A biological agent or condition that constitutes a hazard to humans or the environment. Thescope of HAZCOM program excludes biohazards and radiation.

B. Chemical Hazard Bulletin (CHB) - An internal ARAMCO company document (available in both English& Arabic) developed by Saudi Aramco Environmental Protection Department (EPD) to provide astandardized one-page summary of a material's hazard ratings that will specify health hazards, fire &reactivity, handling, storage & disposal and first aid information for use in the handling of hazardousmaterials.

C. Chemical Risk Assessment (CRA) - A comprehensive assessment of the handling and use of

hazardous materials. The CRA covers identification of hazardous materials, risk characterizationstorage conditions, compatibility, methods of transfer & handling, control measures and use of personaprotective equipment.

D. Container - A container is anything that holds hazardous chemical except pipes and piping systems.

E. Hazardous Material (HM) - Any purchased or Saudi Aramco produced material or chemical which iscapable of posing unreasonable risk to health, safety, or the environment if improperly managed(purchased, issued, labeled, transported, stored, handled or disposed).

F. HAZCOM – Hazardous Materials Communication.

G. HAZCOM Label - Unlike manufacturer and transportation labels, HAZCOM labels are developed onlyfor materials used and produced in Saudi Aramco, and provide basic hazard information taken from theCHB. The labels are placed on containers where this additional warning information is required.

H. Health Hazard - Any material or chemical which possess health effect for which there is scientificevidence based on at least one scientific study that acute or chronic health effects may occur in exposedemployees.





E-6 / HMM / Continued

I. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) – An up-to-date hand-out or information sheet containing relevantinformation pertaining to the hazardous material/chemical or preparation which is vital for establishingarrangements in the safe management of the material/chemical or preparation at work.

J. Physical Hazard – Any material or chemical which possesses physiochemical properties (explosiveoxidizing, flammable and/or reactive).

K. Program Audit - Following the full implementation of the HAZCOM Program at a facility, EPD wilperform a "Program Audit" to verify that all HAZCOM elements are in place and meet requirements.

4. Responsibilities


1) Generate and ensure up-to-date applicable Saudi Aramco requirements (codes) and provide

technical advice in order to assist Proponent Department(s) to ensure that activities are carried outprudently and effectively.



B. Proponent Departments

1) Comply with the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

2) Coordinate and enforce the operations commencing at both D&WO and Contractors’ facilities to

comply with the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

3) Ensure hazards and risks of Hazardous Materials (HM) are identified and evaluated.

4) Ensure hazards associated with HMs and risks are feasibly, practicably and reasonably

reduced/controlled in accordance/in line with the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

5) Provide and maintain a workplace environment that minimize and/or control the hazardous

materials exposure by continually identifying hazards of HM, requesting appropriate party toconduct Chemical Risk Assessment (CRM) (wherever necessary), continually implementing

appropriate controls in accordance with this procedure and/or as per recommendations, continually

providing adequate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) wherever necessary and enforcing the

use of PPE, and continually providing adequate communication pertaining to the hazards

associated with HMs to the employees such as tool box talk, exposure monitoring result,

audiometric testing results, etc.






6) Shall ensure that employees wear adequate PPE provided by the company correctly during

handling HM or when performing tasks which require the use of PPE.

7) Shall maintain PPE in sanitary condition and proper working order.

8) Report hazards associated with HMs and PPE problems.

C. Contractors

1) Comply with the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

2) Coordinate and enforce the operations commencing at their (Contractors’) facilities to comply with

the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

3) Ensure hazards and risks of HM are identified, evaluated and feasibly, practicably and reasonably

reduced/controlled in accordance/in line with the requirements stipulated in this procedure.

4) Provide and maintain a workplace environment that minimizes and/or controls the hazardous

materials exposure by continually identifying hazards of HM, requesting appropriate party to

conduct Chemical Risk Assessment (CRM) (wherever necessary), continually implementing

appropriate controls in accordance with this procedure and/or as per recommendations, continually

providing adequate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) wherever necessary and enforcing the

use of PPE, and continually providing adequate communication pertaining to the hazards

associated with HMs to the employees such as tool box talk, exposure monitoring result,

audiometric testing results, etc.

5) Shall wear adequate PPE provided by the company correctly during handling HM or when

performing tasks which require the use of PPE.

6) Shall maintain PPE in sanitary condition and proper working order.

7) To report hazards associated with HMs and PPE problems to their supervisor.






5. Diagram showing how HM is managed at the workplace (Detailed explanation in Appendix No.1)

Chemical Risk Assessment

(CRA)Isolation

Isolating thehazard/

hazardouswork

practicesfrom the

work place

Substitution

Replacingthe hazard

or hazardouswork

practiceswith a lesshazardous

one

EngineeringControls

Workplacemodification

orintroduction

of devicethat may

reduce theexposure of

HM toemployees

AdministrativeControls:Change in

workpractice/proce-

dure thatreduce risk

AdequateStorage

Inventorysystem

Signage, CHB& MSDS

AdequatePackaging &

LabelingHazardousMaterials

Procedure

AdequateTransportation

Training & Awareness

PPE

AdequatePPE to besupplied,

maintainedand enforced







Appendix No.1 / Diagram Detai ls

1. Chemical Risk Assessment (CRA) (for both D&WOs and contractors’)

A. All HM (both D&WOs and contractors’) shall be inventoried and kept up-to-date and submitted to EPD on annual basis.B. The inventory shall contain the stock number, quantity stored, quantity used, and location for all HM used.C. HM inventory shall be updated annually and/or when new HM are introduced at the workplace.D. For any new HM introduced without any MSDS/CHB, Risk Classification is required upon request to EPD

E. Individual(s) with appropriate qualification and experience shall be nominated by Proponent as recommended by EPD to participate in the CRA andassist the CRA team in conducting field activities.

2. Controls invol ve firstly assessing whether a HM or process can be eliminated. Where this is not practicable, consideration shoul d be given toeach of the other controls (such as isolation, engineering control, safe work practices or use of personal protective equipment) in turn, until acontrol or co mbination of con trols are identified which can achieve the required reduction in exposure.

Controls Description

Isolation Separating the hazard from a person at the workplace such as locating diesel tank away from mixing area

Substitution Replacing the hazard or hazardous work practices with a less hazardous one such as replacing hazardous drilling chemicals with

environmental friendly type of chemical

Engineering

Controls

Modification to tool/equipment/system/machinery/facility or introduction to a new device which may reduce exposure/contact of HM to

employees.

Adm inist rat ive

Controls

MSDS

MSDS from manufacturer or distributor is a mandatory provision whenever HM is planned to be and purchased. MSDS is an importan

document for the development of CHB & HAZCOM label, commencement of CRA/other assessment (whenever necessary)

storing/handling/disposing of HM, as a reference during spill, etc.

Dual Language CHBColor printed CHB shall be posted or MSDS (if CHBs are not available) on a bulletin board in the areas where particular HM are stored and/o

used. CHBs shall be printed directly from the EPD CHB/Label site.

Color Printed Label

HM label from manufacturer or distributor shall be available and provided upon purchasing and delivery. HAZCOM label shall be affixed a

each HMs’ containers and can be found at the EPD CHB/Label site.

Signage

Warning signs shall be posted at a conspicuous place of the area to warn persons entering the area of the hazardsInformation, Instruction and TrainingPersonnel shall be provided with such information, instruction and training as may be necessary to enable them to know the risk to healthcreated by such exposure to chemicals (including results of monitoring of exposure at the work place) and the precautions which should betaken. Classroom training shall be provided once every 3 years.






E-6 / HMM / Appendix No.1 / Diagram Details / Continued

Controls Description

Adminis trativ eControls

Storage

HMs shall be stored in designated area(s) and segregated as per requirements stated in the MSDS. HMs storage shall be construc

equipped with necessary controls in accordance to the requirements in the MSDS.

Container

HMs containers and the containers’ materials shall be so designed, constructed and with condition that its contents cannot escape unless t

is a requirement for safety devices to be fitted into the container. Remove any damaged containers or potential to be damaged containers

Handling

Handling of HM shall be in accordance to the requirements stipulated in the MSDS.

Transfer, Loading and UnloadingThe risks associated with the transfer, loading and unloading of chemicals include leakage or defective containers, deteriorated hopipeline, inadequate training or improper equipment, all of which may result in personal injury or incidents. Ensure the following:1. Availability, safe use and condition of transport equipment;

2. Employee awareness of spill containment; and

3. Employee awareness of site secondary container and where to obtain containers.Tank InspectionIf tanks are used for storage, all personnel should be aware of the use and condition of storage tanks. Tanks are subject to weathedamage and corrosion. Any of these can lead to leakage, which can pose hazards to both human health and the environment. Leak deteinspection for storage tanks shall be in place.

Aud it /Insp ection

HM Management program audit shall be conducted by the proponent on a periodic basis, not less than annually, and correct any deficienthat are noted.

Provision of HPD Although elimination of HM or use of engineering controls to minimize exposure are the preferred methods for assuring personnel safety

health, designated PPE may also be an important part of a personnel’s job training and responsibility. Personnel shall be trained in the pruse of PPE according to the classifications of HM handled such as face-shields, respirators etc.







The following table shows the summary of D&WO E&OH Hazardous Materials documents, relatedreferences from the applicable SA requirements, and related external origin documents:


A. D&WO E&OH Stand Alone Procedure: D&WOE&OH Hazardous

Materials Procedure.

B. CEPI: EnvironmentalPerformance Assessment(EPA) Checklist.

A. SAES-A-205 Oilfield Chemicals.

B. SAES-A-111 Borrow pit requirements.

C. GI 1310.000 Transportation of Dangerous Goods onboard SA Aircraft.

D. GI 150.100 HAZCOM Program.

E. GI 150.001 Asbestos Management.

F. GI 2.717 Procedures and Guidelines of Handling PCBs.

G. CU 22.03 Processing and Handling of Hazardous Materials.

H. CU 22.01 Processing and Handling Gas and Gas Cylinders.





E-7

Naturally OccurringRadioactive Materials(NORM) Management





E-7 / Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM) Management

(NORM)

1. Radioactive contamination is defined as contamination of any material, surface or environment, or of any

person (including both external skin contamination and internal contamination, irrespective of method ofintake), by any Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM). Any naturally occurring primordialradioactive nuclides and their radioactive decay products, which have been enhanced above their naturallevel due to industrial operations, are classified as NORM.

NORM originates in subsurface oil and gas formations and is typically transported to the surface throughflowing fluids from the reservoir. The potential exists for buildup of scaling and sludge on various pieces ofequipment, which may contain radium as well as other uranium, radon or thorium daughter products.

2. The purpose of NORM management is to:

A. Ensure that controls are in place to prevent and/or minimize the risk of adverse effects to theemployees, public environment due to exposure to radioactive materials (including radioactive waste)used in D&WO’s operations.

B. Establish the minimum requirements for management of NORM waste and equipment to protectworkers, general public and the environment.

C. Ensure compliance to the requirements/regulations pertaining to the purchasing, storage, inventory,handling, transportation, documentation, information, packaging, labeling, risk assessment, and controlmeasures.

D. Serve as a guide to contractors to generate, implement, maintain and manage their own standalone

NORM procedures wherever applicable.

3. Elements of radioactive management are:

A. Qualification of NORM surveyors.

B. NORM surveys.

C. Storage of NORM waste.

D. Disposal of NORM waste.

E. Workers’ protection.

F. Contamination control.

G. Classification.

H. Purchasing requirements.







E-8

Refrigerant Management





E-8 / Refrigerant Management (RM)

1. Purpose

The Drilling and Workover Refrigerant Management Procedure outlines the minimum guidelines to be

followed to adequately address the environmental concern pertaining to chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) andhydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) in Drilling and Workover Operations, and specifies the minimumrequirements for the management of ozone-depleting substances (PDSs), in order to identify, monitor andcontrol areas that utilize ODS or have a negative impact on the environment.

2. Scope



A. Appl iance - Any device which contains and uses a class I or class II substance as a refrigerant,including any air conditioner, refrigerator, chiller, or freezer.

B. Class I and Class II Ozone-Depleting Substances (ODSs) - ODSs are divided into two classes (I andII) based on their ozone-depleting potential. Class I ODSs, the class of compounds more destructive tothe ozone layer and Class II ODSs the class of compounds less destructive to the ozone layer.

C. CFC - Chlorofluorocarbons

D. Disposal – The process leading to and including: The discharge, deposit, dumping or placing of any

discarded appliance into or on any land or water; the disassembly of any appliance for discharge,deposit, dumping or placing of its discarded component parts into or on any land or water; or thedisassembly of any appliance for reuse of its component parts.

E. Major maintenance, service, or repair - Any maintenance, service, or repair involving the removal ofany or all of the following appliance components: compressor, condenser, evaporator, or auxiliary heatexchanger coil.

F. Motor vehicle air conditioner (MVAC) - Any appliance that is a motor vehicle air conditioner i.e.mechanical vapor compression refrigeration equipment used to cool the driver’s or passenger’scompartment of any motor vehicle. (This definition is not intended to encompass the hermetically sealedrefrigeration systems used on motor vehicles for refrigerated cargo and the air conditioning systems on

passenger buses using HCFC–22 refrigerant).

G. MVAC-like appliance - Mechanical vapor compression, open-drive compressor appliances used to coolthe occupant’s compartment of a non-road motor vehicle. This includes the air-conditioning equipmentfound on agricultural or construction vehicles.





E-8 / RM / Continued

H. Opening an appliance - Any service, maintenance, repair, or disposal of an appliance that wouldrelease refrigerant from the appliance to the atmosphere unless the refrigerant was recovered previouslyfrom the appliance. Connecting and disconnecting hoses and gauges to and from the appliance tomeasure pressures within the appliance and to add refrigerant to or recover refrigerant from theappliance shall not be considered ‘‘opening.’’

I. Ozone-Depleting Substances (ODSs) - A class of commonly used organic halogenated compoundsthat are a major contributor to the rapidly accelerating destruction of the Earth’s protective stratosphericozone layer. These compounds are divided into two main groups, halons and chlorofluorocarbons(CFCs).

J. Refrigerant - Any substance consisting in part or whole of a class I or class II ozone depletingsubstance that is used for heat transfer purposes and provides a cooling effect, or any substance usedas a substitute for such a class I or class II substance by any user in a given end-use, except for thefollowing substitutes in the following end-uses: (1) Ammonia in commercial or industrial processrefrigeration or in absorption units; (2) Hydrocarbons in industrial process refrigeration (processing ofhydrocarbons); (3) Chlorine in industrial process refrigeration (processing of chlorine and chlorinecompounds); (4) Carbon dioxide in any application; (5) Nitrogen in any application; or (6) Water in anyapplication.

K. Self -contained recovery equipment - Refrigerant recovery or recycling equipment that is capable ofremoving the refrigerant from an appliance without the assistance of components contained in theappliance.

L. Small appliance - Any of the following products that are fully manufactured, charged, and hermeticallysealed in a factory with five (5) pounds or less of refrigerant: refrigerators and freezers designed forhome use, room air conditioners (including window air conditioners and packaged terminal airconditioners), packaged terminal heat pumps, dehumidifiers, under-the-counter ice makers, vendingmachines, and drinking water coolers.

M. Substitute - Any chemical or product, whether existing or new, that is used by any person as an UnitedStates Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) approved replacement for a class I or II ozone-depletingsubstance in a given refrigeration or air-conditioning end-use.

N. Technician - Any person who performs maintenance, service, or repair that could be reasonablyexpected to release refrigerants from appliances into the atmosphere. Technician also means anyperson who performs disposal of appliances, except for small appliances, MVACs, and MVAC-likeappliances that could be reasonably expected to release refrigerants from the appliances into theatmosphere. Performing maintenance, service, repair, or disposal could be reasonably expected torelease refrigerants only if the activity is reasonably expected to violate the integrity of the refrigerant

circuit. Activities reasonably expected to violate the integrity of the refrigerant circuit include activitiessuch as attaching and detaching hoses and gauges to and from the appliance to add or removerefrigerant or to measure pressure and adding refrigerant to and removing refrigerant from theappliance.

Activities such as painting the appliance, rewiring an external electrical circuit, replacing insulation on alength of pipe, or tightening nuts and bolts on the appliance are not reasonably expected to violate theintegrity of the refrigerant circuit.






4. Responsibilities



2) Inspect D&WO facilities according to the requirements and carry out the CEHA, OHHA, EPA andRPA inspections.


B. Proponent Department

1) Maintains ODS containing equipment inventory within the organizations control.

2) Ensures that DOE&CD refrigerant management procedure is adhered to.

3) Ensures that contractors under their control conduct the appropriate familiarization training forworking with CFC/HCFC and refrigerant recovery/recycling techniques.

4) Ensures the required PPE is worn while completing any CFC/HCFC work.

5) Ensures that personnel under their control obtain and maintain the appropriate certification forworking with CFC/HCFC.

6) Ensures that service technicians are certified through an approved training course and thattechnician certification levels are appropriate to the needs of the work area.

C. Contractor and Subcontractor

1) Will comply with EPD & D&WO policies regarding ODS air emissions.

2) Ensures that service technicians are certified through an approved training course and thattechnician certification levels are appropriate to the needs of the work area.

3) Ensures that service technicians conduct recycling, recovery and reuse operations correctly, inaccordance with their level of training and pursuant to the manufacturer instructions for the

recycling and recovery of equipment.

4) Establishes written work instructions for each piece of recycling/recovery equipment.

5) Establishes and maintains an ODS Compliance Program Manual that contains an ODS, servicetechnician certifications, and ODS inventory form.

6) Maintains ODS containing equipment inventory within the operations control.






7) Ensures that D&WO policy is adhered to.

8) Ensures that personnel under their control obtain and maintain the appropriate certification forworking with CFC/HCFC.

9) Ensures the required PPE is worn while completing any CFC/HCFC work.

D. Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Service Technicians

1) Ensures that certifications are current and that the level of work completed is within the boundariesof the certification.

2) Inspects equipment before each use.

3) Responsible for ensuring that equipment is functioning properly each time it is used.

4) Completes required records for all activities involving ODS.

5) Follows procedures to eliminate refrigerant contamination and mixing.

6) Use the required PPE prior any work.

7) Report any malfunction or deficiency in the PPE provided.

5. Requirements

A. Class I and Class II Ozone Depleting Substances

The following class I and II ozone depleting substances are covered by this procedure

CLASS I

CFC-11 CFC-114 CFC-502

CLASS II

HCFC-22

B. DOE&CD ODS Refrigerant Venting Prohibi tion

In accordance with G.I. 425.000 and this procedure venting of refrigerants is prohibited. “Do notintentionally release any Class I or Class II ODS refrigerant in the course of maintaining, servicing,repairing, or disposing of appliances, industrial-process refrigeration units, air conditioning units, ormotor vehicle air conditioners.” This procedure outlines necessary steps to be taken to preventunauthorized release of ODS refrigerants.






C. Refrigerant Recovery/Recycl ing

1) Use of recovery/recycling equipment is mandatory during the servicing or maintenance of all D&WO

HVAC/refrigeration equipment using CFC or HCFC refrigerant.

2) All recovery operations must use commercially available equipment and the equipment must beoperated in accordance with the manufacturer specifications.

3) Portable leak detectors shall be made available to all groups that are responsible for the operationor maintenance of HVAC/refrigeration equipment.

4) Leak detectors shall be calibrated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.

5) Whenever refrigerant leakage in any HVAC/refrigeration system is suspected, the system shall bethoroughly inspected for leaks and sealed as per HVAC/refrigeration system manufacturer.

6) All refrigerant shall be recovered before discarding refrigerant containing equipment.

7) Whenever possible, recovery/recycling equipment shall be used to decontaminate recoveredrefrigerant to a reusable level.

8) Recovered refrigerant shall only be stored in containers designated and labeled for that purpose.

9) Recovered refrigerant that cannot be recycled to a reusable quality shall be stored in containersdesignated and properly labeled for that purpose.

10) Disposal or reclamation of refrigerant shall only be performed by vendors approved by government

11) Refrigerant disposal manifests shall be prepared by the proponent or contract service provider andkept on file onsite in the contractor’s ODS Compliance Program Manual.

D. Technician Certifi cation/Training

All personnel (D&WO Contractors, Sub Contractors, etc.) that repair, maintain service, or dispose of anyappliance that could reasonably be expected to have the potential to release refrigerants to the ambientair, must be a certified technician prior to conducting such work. Further, prior to repairing, maintaining,disposing, or servicing motor vehicle air conditioners, all personnel shall be a certified technician.

1) For the purpose of the ODS management program, a technician is someone who:

a. Attaches and detaches hoses and/or gauges to an appliance for the purpose of measuringinternal pressure of the appliance.

b. Adds or removes refrigerant from an appliance.

c. Conducts any other activity that may compromise the integrity of the small appliance and MVAC-like appliances.

d. Operates refrigerant recovery equipment.






2) A list of trained technicians will be kept by each operation in the ODS Management Program Manual

The inventory of certified technicians identifies what type of certification each technicianholds:

a. Type I - for servicing small appliances.

b. Type II - for servicing or disposing of high-pressure or very high-pressure appliances, exceptsmall appliances and MVACs.

c. Type III - for servicing or disposing of low-pressure appliances.

d. Universal - for servicing all types of equipment.

For Aramco Employee, All certified technicians must have taken and passed an approved courseadministered by the Saudi Aramco Training and Career Development Organization, or equivalent, whichwill provide familiarization with the refrigerant recovery/recycling techniques that are necessary for theimplementation of this Procedure.

F. Record Keeping

1) Required Documentation an ODS manual must be kept at each D&WO facility that utilizes ODS torecharge or refill systems. This manual will be maintained at the maintenance shop where theseactivities are performed and updated as required. Documentation that is outdated will be removedfrom the manuals and kept on file for a minimum of five years. Items listed below as part of the ODSmanual will be subject to inspection. ODS manuals will contain equipment information to includemanufacturer data and a current list of equipment.

a) A copy of the service technicians training certification.

b) Documentation of in-house training for each employee.

c) Copies of the work area.

d) Refrigerant inventory.

e) Refrigerant usage log.

f) Records of maintenance.

g) Waste refrigerant manifests.







The following matrix shows the summary of D&WO E&OH refrigerant documents, related references from

the applicable SA requirements, and related external origin documents:

D&WO E&OH Documents Appl icable SA Requi rements

A. D&WO E&OH Stand AloneProcedure: D&WO E&OHRefrigerant Procedure.

B. CEPI: Environmental Performance Assessment (EPA) Checklist.

A. GI 425.000 Management Of CFC and HCFCRefrigerants.





E-9

Food Service Hygiene





E-9 / Food Service Hygiene (FSH)

1. Purpose

The Drilling and Workover Food Service Hygiene Procedure defines the minimum health and hygiene

requirements to ensure the safety of food materials during preparation, packaging, storage, handling andserving in Drilling and Workover operations. The procedure also outlines the minimum steps to be followedto ensure compliance in terms of facility and equipment sections, temperature control and handling practicesto prevent the threat of foodborne illness.

2. Scope



A. Adul terate: To make impure by the addition of a foreign, inferior, or harmful substance.

B. Bactericidal Soap: A soap containing a chemical, which kills bacteria.

C. Contamination: The introduction (into food or water) of unwanted, undesirable materials includingmicroorganisms, chemicals or foreign bodies.

D. Comminuted: Reduced in size by methods including chopping, flaking, grinding, or mincing.It includes fish or meat products that are reduced in size and restructured or reformulated such asformed roast beef, ground beef or a mixture of 2 or more types of meat that have been reduced in sizeand combined, such as sausages.

E. Cook Chill: System of food preparation in which food is prepared in advance to be reheated severaldays later. Strict control of chilled storage temperature is needed if the food is to remain safe.

F. Cook Freeze: System of food preparation in which food is prepared in advance and then deep frozen. Ifproperly packaged the food may be kept for several months with no loss of quality.

G. Defrost System: Refrigeration system for a freezer consisting of a blower evaporator coil, heating unitand controls. Electric type employs heating elements; hot gas type uses heat exchanger to remove frostfrom the coil and allow condensate to flow to the drain pan under the coil.

H. Detergent: Technically, any cleansing agent. In popular usage, washing and cleaning agents with acomposition other than soap that clean by much the same mechanisms as soap. A cleaning agent, assoap; any of numerous synthetic water soluble or liquid organic preparations that are chemicallydifferent from soaps, but are able to emulsify oils, hold dirt in suspension, and act as wetting agents.

I. Disinfectant: A chemical or physical agent that kills pathogenic microorganisms (see 'disinfect' above).





E-9 / FSH / Continued

J. Food-contact surface: A surface of equipment or a utensil, with which food normally comes intocontact; or a surface of equipment or a utensil from which food may drain, drip, or splash into a food, oronto a surface normally in contact with food.

K. Food Service Establishment: Any place where food is prepared and intended for individual portionservice and includes the sites at which individual portions are provided. The term includes any suchplace regardless of whether consumption is on or off the premises and regardless of whether there is acharge for the food. The term also includes delicatessen-type operations that prepare sandwichesintended for individual portion service. The term does not include private homes where food is preparedor served for individual family consumption, retail food stores, the location of food vending machines andsupply vehicles.

L. Insect-Proof Screens: Fine mesh screens of gauge no less than 6 per linear centimeter (16 per linearinch) fitted to windows and occasionally other openings to prevent the entry of flying insects such as fliesinto the building.

M. Packaged: Bottled, canned, cartooned, securely bagged, or securely wrapped, whether packaged in afood establishment or in a food processing plant.

N. Personal Hygiene: Those protective measures, primarily within the responsibility of the individual,which promote health and limit the spread of infectious diseases transmitted through food, water, air, orby direct contact. These protective measures include: keeping the body clean by sufficiently frequentsoap and water baths; wearing clean clothes and good grooming; washing hands in soap and waterimmediately after voiding bowels or bladder, after contact with any potential contamination, and alwaysbefore eating.

O. Pest: Any unwanted animal that can or does enter a food premises and may live in the premises or thefood, e.g. rats, mice, insects, and birds.

P. Poisonous or Toxic Materials: Substances that are not intended for ingestion. Included in 4categories:1) Cleaners and sanitizers, which include cleaning and sanitizing agents and agents such ascaustics, acids, drying agents, polishes, and other chemicals; 2) Pesticides, which include substancessuch as insecticides and rodenticides; 3) Substances necessary for the operation and maintenance ofthe establishment such as nonfood grade lubricants and personal care items that may be deleterious tohealth; and 4) Substances that are not necessary for the operation and maintenance of theestablishment and are on the premises for retail sale, such as petroleum products and paints.

Q. Potentiall y Hazardous Food or Ingredient: Signifies any food, which consists of, in whole or part, milkor milk products, eggs, meat, poultry, fish, shellfish, or other ingredient, including synthetic ingredientscapable of supporting rapid and progressive growth of infectious or toxigenic organisms.

R. Probe: Part of the temperature measuring equipment that is affected (heated or cooled) by thetemperature of the surroundings. This then produces an electrical signal, which is converted by thethermometer into a numerical figure for the temperature of the surroundings.






S. Sanitizer: An agent, usually chemical, that reduces the number of bacterial contaminants to safe levelsas determined by public health requirements. The term sanitizing generally refers to inanimate objects(particularly food related utensils, equipment, and surfaces) and implies providing a satisfactorycondition of cleanliness in addition to a safe bacterial level. Thus, detergent sanitizers combine cleaningand sanitizing. The same kinds of compounds that provide disinfecting action in cleansers and hardsurface cleaners also contribute sanitizing capability.

T. Temperature Measuring Device: A thermometer, thermocouple, thermistor, or other device thatindicates the temperature of food, air, or water.

4. Responsibilities

A. Environmental Protection Department




4) To report non-compliance to the Proponent Department(s) including:

a. The proposed recommendation.

Or

b. Send a “Warning Notice” to supplier, or in the case of water and ice manufacturers,recommend through Purchasing Department to send a “Warning Notice” to the offendingcompany.

Or

c. Issuance of a “ Suspension Notice” , or in case of water and ice manufacturers, recommendproponent organization or Purchasing Department to send a “ Suspension Notice” to theoffending company.

B. Proponent Department(s)

1) To comply with this procedure and the applicable Saudi Aramco catering management requirements(Codes).

2) To coordinate and ensure contractor(s) are adhering to the requirements stipulated in the procedure.






C. Contractor(s)

1) To comply with this procedure and the applicable Saudi Aramco catering management requirements(Codes).

2) To appoint a Saudi Aramco approved Catering Company and to ensure the contract is renewedperiodically.

3) To ensure the competency and medical fitness (in accordance to the HACCP requirements) ofcatering crew are in place and up-to-date.

4) To ensure an effective HACCP program is developed and continually implemented by a Saudi Aramco approved Catering Company.

5) To ensure a proper pest control program is in place and continuous monitoring of are conducted.

6) To establish, continually implement and comply with its catering management stand-aloneprocedure.

7) To ensure the food quality assurance and personnel hygiene are continually in place.

D. Catering Crew

1) Be aware and comply of the stipulated catering management requirements.

2) Maintain a high level of personal cleanliness and hygiene standards.

E. Saudi Aramco Approved Catering Company

1) Conduct periodic (at least weekly) “ in-plant” sanitation inspections.

2) Maintain records of the inspections and recommended actions.

3) Follow up on action items and ensure closure.

4) Cooperate with Saudi Aramco EPD during inspections and ensure that deficiencies reported shall becorrected in a timely manner.

5) Ensure employees are following the appropriate dress code and maintain high levels of cleanlinessand personal hygiene.

6) Ensure the effectiveness of the sanitary and hygiene procedure.

7) Ensure personnel carry valid identification card and valid medical examination certificate.

8) Ensure that an effective HACCP plan is developed and implemented in place according to Saudi Aramco requirements.






9) Supervise and enforce employees to wear appropriate uniforms and maintain a high degree ofpersonal cleanliness and provide necessary clean uniforms and equipment necessary to maintain ahigh level of service.

10) Post “ No Smoking” signs and other signs to demonstrate hazards and recommend actions tomitigate them.

5. Requirements

Requirements and regulations pertaining to food establishments in D&WO sites are available in

SASC-S-04 Food Establishment Section of Saudi Aramco Sanitary Code. Refer to HSERM / E / E-

9 / FSH / Appendix No.1 / Overview of Major Requirements.


The following table shows the summary of D&WO E&OH catering management related references from theapplicable SA requirements, and related external origin documents:


CEPI: Comprehensive Environmental Health Assessment (CEHA) Checklist.

A. G.I. 0151.006 Implementing the SA Sanitary Code.

B. SASC-S-04 Food Establishment Section of SASanitary Code.

C. SASC-S-09 Marine Vessels Section of SA SanitaryCode.







Appendix No.1 / Overview of Major Requirements

Parameter Requirements

A. General Requ irements Refer to Section 3 of SASC-S-04 and they shall be continually implemented and complied

B. PersonnelRequirements

Saudi Aramco approved Catering Company/catering c rews shall:

1) Possess dedicated catering ID.2) Undergo physical health examination and obtain medical examination certificate from an approved KSA licen

health care provider.3) Be restricted to work if he is found to be diagnosed with foodborne or communicable disease.4) Develop, implement and document an on-going on-the-job food sanitation training program.5) Maintain a high degree of personal cleanliness and shall conform to good hygienic practices, whenever hand

preparing or serving food.6) Shall be provided with, and be required to wear, neat, clean, light colored uniforms that are changed at least d

All of the applicable requirements stipulated in the Section 4 of SASC-S-04 shall be continually implemented complied

C. Poisonous or ToxicMaterials Management

The purpose of this section is to define the required control measures to be implemented in managpoisonous/toxic materials related to food establishment. Controls measures are such as:

1) Provision of designated poisonous/toxic materials related to food establishment.2) Adequate separation and storing.3) Adequate packaging, labeling and MSDS.4) Adequate handling.5) Prohibition of handling and storing of non-designated material such as personnel medication and first aid items

All of the applicable requirements stipulated in the Section 5 of SASC-S-04 shall be continually implemented complied.






E-9 / FSH / Appendix No.1 / Continued


D. Pest Contro l Program

The purpose of this section is to define the required control measures to be implemented in managing pest control program. Controls measures are such as:

1) Commencement of periodical pest survey, pest control spraying by an authorized and trained personnel.2) Proper design requirements in order to prevent entrance and harborage of pest.

3) The use of approved pesticides.4) Prohibition of applying pesticides in a place they could potentially contaminate packaging, equipment

utensils.5) Provision of trapping, bait stations and electrocution devices.


E. Control of Operationby Means of Hazard

Assessment andCritical Control Point(HACCP) ProgramRequirements

1) ‘Food Safety Risk Assessment’ shall be carried out by developing an appropriate and effective HACCP (Haz Analysis Critical Control Point) plan

2) The seven HACCP principles shall be followed.


F. Floors Floors where perishable and non-perishable ingredients are stored and handled shall be adequately and sa

designed and maintained in accordance to Section 9 of SASC-S-04.G. Walls, Ceilings and

AppurtenancesWalls, Ceilings and non-supporting partitions, including appurtenances of rooms where perishable ingredients stored, and food are prepared, cooked, chilled, frozen, stored or served, equipment and utensils are washed stored shall be adequately, safely designed and maintained in accordance to Section 10 of SASC-S-04.

H. Doors and Windows All openings shall be safely designed and designed in such way to avoid accumulation of dirt, prevent the entrancinsects, rodents and other vermin and in accordance to Section 11 of SASC-S-04.

I. Illumination andVentilation

Lights shall be safely designed to contain broken glass from exploding electric light bulbs and area leveillumination shall be in accordance to Section 12 of SASC-S-04.

J. Ventilation Ventilation shall be provided to remove gases, odors steam, excessive heat, grease, vapors and smoke from the festablishment area and shall be installed in accordance to Section 13 of SASC-S-04.








K. Plumbing and CrossConnection Control

Plumbing and cross connection control shall be designed to prevent contamination and shall be clean, operative and maintain accordance to Section 14 of SASC-S-04.

L. Food StorageFacili ties non-refrigerated storageand refrigeratedfacilities/process

Storage facilities shall be adequately installed with suitable space, shelving, durable materials, smooth, impervious, cleanaand operated with adequate temperature. Storage facilities shall be complying with the requirements stipulated in the Sec20.1 and 21.1 of SASC-S-04.

Preferred goods handling shall include proper arrangement, rotation system, regular examination and proper design, labecontainers that can prevent contamination and shall be complying with the requirements stipulated in the Section 20.2 and 2of SASC-S-04.

M. Garbage and Refuse Provision of garbage and refuse facilities, containers and disposal management shall be complying with the requiremstipulated in the Section 22 of SASC-S-04.

N. Cleaning andPreventativeMaintenance

The purpose of this sectio n is to define the required cont rol measures to be implemented in the cleaning and prevenmaintenance management such as:

1) An appointment of personnel for the cleanliness and his responsibilities.2) Establishment of a cleaning and preventive maintenance.3) Maintenance of tools.4) Provision of janitor’s closer.

All of the applicable requirements stipulated in the Section 23 and 24 of SASC-S-04 shall be continually implemented complied.

O. Equipment andUtensils

The purpose of this section is to define the required control measures to be implemented in managing and maintainof food establishment equip ment and utensils. Control measures are such as:

1) New (materials and design) and replacement of equipment/utensils/machines requirements2) Adjustment of components as per manufacturer operation and maintenance manual3) Designed of machines which provide minimal operator assistance4) Color coded management5) Adequate location/storage arrangement6) Maintenance, cleaning and sanitization management

All of the applicable requirements stipulated in the Section 25 and 27 of SASC-S-04 shall be continually implemented complied.








P. Transportation ofFood

The purpose of this section is to define the required control measures to be implemented in transportation of food. Control measures are such as:

1) Protection of food during transportation.2) Adequate protection against deterioration, spoilage or lowering of quality.3) Vehicles management.






E-10

Camp Sanitation





E-10 / Camp Sanitation (CS)

1. Purpose

The Drilling and Workover Camp Sanitation Procedure defines the minimum health and hygienerequirements to ensure the safety of personnel and prevent the occurrence of accidents, deaths andoccupational illnesses in D&WO operations as a result of applying unhygienic practices and maintaininginsanitary D&WO camps.

2. Scope



A. Campsi te: Any specific area within an organized campground or other recreation area which is used forovernight stays by an individual, family, group or other similar entity.

B. CEHA: Comprehensive Environmental Health Assessment.

C. Domestic Wastewater: Wastewater derived principally from dwellings, business buildings, institutions,and the like. It may or may not contain groundwater, surface water, or storm water.

D. EPA: Environmental Performance Assessment.

E. EPD: Environmental Protection Department.

F. D&WO: Drilling and Workover.

G. Habitable Room: A room occupied by one or more persons for living eating, sleeping or workingpurposes. It does not include bathrooms, toilet facilities, laundries, storage areas, corridors and othersuch spaces.

H. OHHA: Occupational Health Hazards Assessment.

I. RPA: Radiation Protection Assessment.

4. Responsibilities








E-10 / CS / Continued


B. Proponent Department

1) Ensures that all applicable entities including contract service providers comply with this procedure.

2) Inspect all communal living facilities for which they are responsible as often as is necessary toensure compliance with the Saudi Aramco Sanitary Code.



5) Cooperate with Saudi Aramco EPD during inspections and ensure that deficiencies reported arecorrected in a timely manner.


7) Post “ No Smoking” signs and other signs to demonstrate hazards and recommended actions tomitigate them.

C. Contractor(s) and Subcontractors

1) Comply with this procedure and the applicable Saudi Aramco requirements and codes.

2) Ensure that camps and accommodations have been constructed in accordance with approved plans

and specifications that comply with Saudi Aramco Sanitary code requirements.

3) Establish and continually implement a camp and communal living facilities management stand-aloneprocedure.

4) Conduct periodic sanitation inspections to ensure that accommodations are maintained in a cleanand orderly manner.



7) Cooperate with Saudi Aramco EPD during inspections and ensure that deficiencies reported arecorrected in a timely manner.


9) Post “ No Smoking” signs and other signs to demonstrate hazards and recommended actions tomitigate them.







5. Requirements

Requirements and regulations pertaining to D&WO camps and living facilities are available in SASC-S-07 “ Camps and Communal Living Fa

Section of Saudi Aramco Sanitary Code. The following is an overview of the major requirements. However, the procedure for implementation a

requirements are found in SASC-S-07.


A. GeneralRequirements

1) All dormitories, habitable rooms, toilets, shower rooms, hand washing facilities and service buildings are maintained in aclean condition, a person, or persons shall be appointed to ensure that proper cleaning is being carried out.

2) A checklist and system for monitoring the efficiency of the cleaning schedule should also be developed and used.3) All areas shall be kept free of nuisance and safety hazards.

Refer to a list of complete requirements in Section 2 of SASC-S-04

B. ConstructionRequirements

The purpose of this section is to define the minimum construction requirements for floors, walls and ceilings, doors, windows andscreening, ventilation and air conditioning and illumination. Further details on the minimum requirements are available in Section3 of SASC-S-04

Floors 1) The floors of kitchens, laundry rooms, shower rooms, toilet rooms, utility rooms and handwashing facilities shall have smooth, hard, easily cleanable surfaces that are non - slip, andimpervious to water, detergents and disinfectants

2) Utility service lines and pipes shall not be unnecessarily exposed on floors.

Walls and Ceilings 1) Walls and ceilings shall be constructed of durable materials and shall have light colored,smooth, easily cleanable surfaces.

2) The walls in toilet and shower rooms shall be impervious to water, detergents anddisinfectants.

Doors, Windows andScreening

1) All outer doors and screen doors shall be tight-fitting and self-closing.2) Doors, windows and appurtenances thereto, shall be designed and constructed to avoid

accumulation of dirt and shall be finished such that they are smooth, nonabsorbent andeasily cleanable.

3) Doors, windows, as well as appurtenances thereto, shall be kept clean and maintained ingood repair.

Ventilation and AirConditioning

1) The temperature in all habitable rooms and other rooms in which personnel live and workshall be controlled by mechanical means and maintained at a level conducive to thehealthful performance of the activity conducted in the area.

2) All shower rooms, toilet rooms, laundry rooms and similar areas shall be well ventilatedand free of excessive condensation.

Illumination Light shall be evenly distributed and of sufficient intensity to avoid discoloration, shadows andstrong glare.








C. Dormitories This section defines the minimum requirements pertaining to dormitories stipulated by Section 7 of SASC-S-07:

1) All outside premises, floors, hallways, carpets on floors, walls, ceilings and appurtenances shall be maintained in a sanitarycondition at all times.

2) Hallways, entrances to fire escapes and stairways must be kept free of obstructions.3) Floor space in sleeping rooms shall be allocated at a rate of not less than 4.6 square meters (50 square feet) per occupant,

preferably 6.5 square meters (70 square feet) per occupant.4) A bed, mattress, mattress pad and pillow shall be provided for each occupant. All bedding and linen shall be clean, sanitary

and in good repair.5) At least one table, chair and reading lamp shall be provided for each sleeping room.6) All curtains, carpeting, furniture and other furnishings shall be clean, sanitary and in good repair.7) A storage closet or cabinet shall be provided for storing the clothing and other personal items of each occupant.8) A refuse container shall be provided for each habitable room.

D. Toilet Rooms,Shower Rooms andHand washingFacilities

The main purpose of this section i s to subscrib e the minimum requirements relating to toilets, shower rooms and handwashing facilities. Elaborated requirements are available in Sections 8, 9, 10, and 11 in SASC-S-07:

1) Toilets, urinals, showers, hand washbasins and utility sinks shall be designed to be easily cleanable. They shall be cleanedat least once daily, shall be kept free of objectionable odors and shall be maintained in good repair.

2) Shower rooms, toilet rooms, laundry rooms, hand washing facilities and other such service areas shall be separated fromfood preparation and sleeping rooms by a self-closing, tight-fitting door.

3) All facilities shall be well ventilated4) Toilet rooms shall be completely enclosed to ensure that an individual’s need for privacy does not interfere with his

commitment to personal hygiene.5) If residents are provided with personal supplies of hand washing cleanser and their own towels, then these need not be

provided adjacent to hand washing facilities.

E. Laundry Rooms 1) All laundry equipment shall be installed, operated and maintained according to the manufacturer's instructions. Sortingtables, storage racks and other surfaces that contact linen shall be made of substantial material having a smooth,nonabsorbent, easily cleanable finish.

2) All equipment and facilities shall be kept clean and in good repair.Refer to Section 12 of SASC-S-07 for the minimum requirements relating to design and operation requirements of laundry roomsin facilities.







F. Garbage and Refuse

Provision of garbage and refuse facilities, containers and disposal management shall comply with requirementsstipulated in Section 13 of SASC-S-04:

1) Facilities shall be provided for cleaning garbage/refuse containers, lugger boxes and compactor systems after they areemptied.

2) Refuse equipment and containers shall be provided with tight- fitting lids, doors or covers.3) The lids, doors or covers of outside refuse equipment and containers shall be kept in the closed position when not in

immediate use.4) Refuse containers that are being actively used in the facility need not be covered. Refuse containers shall be covered whennot being actively used. Filled refuse containers shall be covered and removed from the facility to the refuse storage facility.

5) Refuse containers shall be provided where refuse is generated. There shall be a sufficient number of approved containers tohold all the garbage and refuse produced and to accommodate the total amount accumulated in the refuse holding facilitybetween disposal periods.

6) Periodically, each container shall be thoroughly washed with hot water and detergent on the inside and outside in a way thatdoes not contaminate water, food or the environment.

7) Refuse shall be disposed of often enough to prevent the development of odors and the attraction of insects and rodents, butnot less than twice per week.

8) All refuse shall be disposed of in a municipal or approved sanitary landfill. Open dumps and burn-pits are prohibited.

G. Insect and RodentControl

The purpose of this section is to define the required control measures to be implemented in managing a pest controlprogram for D&WO facilities:

1) The communal living facility shall be designed, constructed, equipped, maintained and operated to prevent the entry andharborage of insects, rodents, animals, birds and other vermin, as well as environmental contaminants, such as smoke anddust.

2) All buildings, structures and associated facilities shall be insect- and rodent-proofed, freed of vermin before occupancy andshall be maintained in an insect and rodent free condition.

3) No contractor, employee, operator or occupant shall place, leave, dump or permit to accumulate any garbage or trash in anybuilding, or on any premises or open lot, in a manner that will afford food and harborage for insects and rodents.

4) The pest control program shall encompass all areas outside and inside the communal living facility. Areas along fences,around buildings, under stored materials, in and around refuse facilities, as well as floors, walls and ceilings in buildings, shallbe inspected frequently to detect the presence of insects, rodents and other vermin.

5) Pesticides shall be dispensed and handled by authorized, properly trained personnel. Restricted-use pesticides shall beapplied by a qualified pest control operator.

6) Pesticides shall not be applied in areas where food handling, ware washing or other such operations are in progress or in away that contaminates food equipment, utensils or other food contact surfaces.

7) Fly electrocution devices, if used, shall be designed to have "escape-resistant" trays. They shall be installed so that deadinsects are prevented from falling on food and food contact surfaces. Trays shall be emptied into an outside refuse containerat least once each day.







The following table shows the summary of D&WO E&OH camp and communal living facilities hygiene

documents, related references from the applicable SA requirements, and related external origin documents.


A. CEPI: Comprehensive EnvironmentalHealth Assessment (CEHA) Checklist.

B. CEPI: Environmental Performance Assessment (EPA) Checklist.

A. G.I. 0151.006 Implementing the SA Sanitary Code.

B. SASC-S-07 Camps and Communal Living FacilitiesSection of SA Sanitary Code.





E-11

Medical Requirements





E-11 / Medical Requirements (MR)

D&WO remote sites are required to have emergency clinics capable of responding to any medical emergenciesthat arise. Remote clinics are required to meet the Minimum Medical Standard Requirements (MMSR) asregulated by the SA Medical Services Organization (SAMSO), including medic qualifications and ambulance

requirements.

1. The purpose of medical management is to:

A. Set requirements for medical facilities/equipment/manpower and allowable medication.

B. Ensure the best available medical and first aid services are delivered to all patients at the work site.

C. Serve as a reference to assist organizations in setting up, evaluating and monitoring the standards ofpatients’ health care and services.

D. Serve as a guide to contractors to comply with the requirements.

2. Elements of medical management are:

A. Building requirements.

B. Disaster response preparedness.

C. Staff qualifications and Education requirements.

D. Equipment requirements.

E. Medicine and drug requirements.

F. Safety, environmental health and infection control requirements.

G. Ambulance services.

3. The fol lowing matrix shows the summary of D&WO E&OH medical documents, related referencesfrom the applicable SA requirements, and related external origin documents:

D&WO E&OH Documents Appl icable SA Requi rements

A. D&WO E&OH Stand AloneProcedure: D&WO E&OH MinimumMedical Standard RequirementsProcedure.

B. CEPI: Comprehensive EnvironmentalHealth Assessment (CEHA) Checklist.

A. G.I. 150.110 Periodic Occupational Physical ExaminationProgram.

B. MMSR Manual.

C.4x4 ambulance specifications and modifying requirements





E-12

Spill Prevention,Preparedness and Response





E-12 / Spil l Prevention, Preparedness and Response (SPP&R)

1. Purpose

The Drilling and Workover Spill Prevention, Preparedness and Response Procedure defines the minimum

steps to be followed to prevent the occurrence of a spill and to ensure the optimum response and mitigationplans in case of the occurrence of a spill in Drilling and Workover operations. The procedure also outlinesthe corrective actions to be carried out to prevent the recurrence of spill events.

2. Scope


3. Definitions, Abbreviations and Acronyms (Refer to HSERM / A / A-1 / DA&A)

A. BACT – Best Available Control Technology.

B. BART – Best Available Retrofit Technology.

C. FIC – Facility Incident Commander.

D. ECC – Emergency Command Centre.

E. G.I. – General instruction.

F. GOSRD – Global Oil Spill Response Director.

G. LOTO – Lock-Out/Tag-Out

H. MSDS – Material Safety data Sheet.

I. PTW – Permit to Work.

J. ROSRC – Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinator.

K. SRTL – Spill Response Team Leader.

L. SRT – Spill Response Team.

4. Potential Spill Sources

Spill can occur f rom individual or variable cause(s) such as:

A. Connection/line failure during bunkering;

B. Blowout;





E-12 / SPP&R / Continued

C. Failure/Damage of a chemical containers/storage tank during handling/storage;

D. Leaking from equipment/machinery/engine/vessel;

E. Overflow during mud/drilling fluid preparation; or

F. Collision event

5. Responsibilities


1) Generate and ensure up-to-date applicable Saudi Aramco requirements (codes) and provide technicaladvice in order to assist Proponent Department(s) to ensure that activities are carried out prudently andeffectively.

2) Inspect D&WO facilities according to the requirements and carry out the CEHA, OHHA, EPA and RPAinspections


B. Proponent Departments and Contractors

Comply with this procedure and the applicable Saudi Aramco spill prevention, preparedness and

response requirements (G.I.s, procedures and standards).

C. Responsibili ties During Spill

Each designated personnel responsibility during the event of spill is detailed in Section 8.0 of thisprocedure.

6. Spill Prevention Program

Spill can be prevented by implementing practice(s) such as:

A. Best Available Control Technology (BACT) application for a new facilities and Best Available RetrofitTechnology (BART) application for existing facilities undergoing modification.

B. Well control program implementation.

C. Equipment integrity and maintenance program implementation.

D. Adherence to Hazardous materials management procedure.

E. Adherence to the requirements of Permit To Work (PTW) Isolation, testing and reinstatement/LockedOut Tagged Out (LOTO).;

F. Engineering controls.






G. Using spill prevention equipment (for example spill control pallet, or secondary containment).

H. Adherence to the offshore marine operation requirements in order to prevent spills from collisionbunkering and chemical transfer operations.

7. Classification of Spills

Type Spill Size (Bbl) Description Clean-Up Party

Small Offshore <50

Onshore <1000

A. Minimal adverse environmental impact.

B. Onsite clean-up required. In most cases, spillswill be recovered, oil are allowed to be dispersednaturally depending on the location, time andweather condition.

Facility’s response.Under Regional SpillResponse Coordinator

jurisdiction if spill overboarinto the sea.

Medium

Offshore50-5000

Onshore1000-10000

. Substantial and short term environmental impact.

B. External assistance required to do clean-up/chemical dispersion/actual and forecastedspills tracking/monitoring to determine their path.

Under Regional SpillResponse Coordinator

jurisdiction.

Major

Offshore >5000

Onshore >10000

. Severe and/or long term environmental impact.

B. External assistance required to do clean-up/chemical dispersion/actual and forecasted

spills tracking/monitoring to determine their path.

Under Regional SpillResponse Coordinator

jurisdiction.

8. Spill Response Strategy Offshore and Onshore refer to Appendix No.1

9. Spill Preparedness

A. Dri ll

This spill preparedness and response shall be tested at regular intervals. The main objectives of

conduct ing regular tests are to:

1) Familiarise all personnel with their roles, responsibilities and the use of kit/equipment.

2) Practice and improve on the spill response management and tactical skills/ techniques.

3) Identify any potential operational/logistical problems that may arise during an actual spill.






The FIC is ultimately responsible for the implementation of spill response preparedness through drills.Drills associated with testing of the Spill Response are summarized in Table 6.1 below.

Table 6.1 / Planned Spill Response Drills

No. Type of Exercise Frequency of Testing

1.

Facility spill response Drill

A. Tests the roles, responsibilities and competency of the SpillResponse Team.

B. Deployment/use of spill kit/equipment.

6-Monthly

2.

Notification Drill

A. Tests the procedures to alert and call-out t he response team.

B. Conducted by telephone or other means of communication asstipu lated in the response plan.

As and when necessary

3.

Integration of Facili ty spill response drill and Disaster Drill

A. Interactive discussions of a simulated scenario with members ofthe response team.

B. Does not involve mobilisation of personnel or equipment.

C. Focuses on the roles and actions of individuals, interactionsbetween various parties, development of information andresponse strategies.

Bi-Annually

After the completion of each drill, a post mortem will be conducted to review the effectiveness andperformance of the overall response management and to identify any weaknesses, areas ofimprovement or changes in contact details or roles/ responsibilities.






B. Spill Kit/Equipment

Each facility shall have an adequate spill kit/equipment.

Example of the facility spi ll k it/equipment is provided in Table 6.2 below:

Table 6.2 / Facility spill response equipment

No. Items Description

At Faci li ties

1 Non-sparking hand scoops

2 Non-sparking hand shovels

3 Non-sparking hand buckets

4 Containers suitable for holding recovered waste

5 Emulsifiers for deck cleaning

6 PPE for spi ll clean-up

7 Absorbents

8 Saw Dust

On Standby Vessel

1 Non-sparking hand scoops

2 Non-sparking hand shovels

3 Non-sparking hand buckets

4 Containers suitable for holding recovered waste

5 Emulsifiers for deck cleaning

6 PPE for spi ll clean-up

7 Absorbents

8 Dispersant

Both D&WO and contractors are ultimately responsible for the implementation of the preventivemaintenance program encompassing inspection and spill response kit/equipment operational andavailability in accordance to their manufacturing maintenance and operation manual. This kit/equipment shall be stored, maintained by qualified personnel all the time.

C. Competency and Training

Both D&WO and contractors are ultimately responsible to ensure there are a sufficient number of

properly trained personnel to respond to all spill scenarios. As training is an essential component of

preparedness, spill response members shall be trained in spill response (as advised by Marine and/orEPD). This is to ensure that all the designated response personnel are able to respond to a spill in a

quick and competent manner. Training may be provided in-house or by external recognised

organisations.






10. References (Refer to HSERM / A / A-2 / RM)

The following table shows the D&WO E&OH spill prevention, preparedness and response relatedreferences from the applicable SA requirements, and related external origin documents:


A. D&WO ERP Template.

B. Well Control Manual – Volume I and II.

C. G.I.1851.001 Offshore Well site Emergency ResponseOperations Roles and Responsibilities.

D. G.I.1850.001 Onshore Well site Emergency ResponseOperations Roles and Responsibilities.

E. G.I. 2.401 Inland oil Spill Response.

F. G.I. 2.400 Offshore oil spill Contingency Plan.

G. G.I. 2.104 Offshore Oil Spill Reporting.

H. Marine Department Global Oil Spill Contingency Plan.

Contractors’ Stand Alone spill prevention,preparedness and response procedure






12 / SPP&R / Continued

Appendix No.1 / Spi ll Response Strategy / Offshore and Onshore

Spill Response Strategy (Offshore and Onshore)

tep Situation Actions to be taken Responsibi lity Who To Cont

1. Discover Spill at

site

A. Assess the incident (type of spill/approximate size/possible hazards).

B. Alert personnel in vicinity.

C. Contact Facility Control Room to notify Facility Incident Commander (FIC).

Person who

discovers spill

Facility Incident

Commander (FICphone/walkie-ta

2. Upon ReceivingCall

A. Mobilize the Spill Response Team Leader (SRTL) to the spill location to assess theincident.

B. Gather the details of the spill from the SRTL, assess the situation and declareappropriate initial action if necessary.

C. Instruct actions if necessary and practicable to stop the spill.

FICSpill Response TLeader (SRTL) vwalkie-talkie

3.

Aft er receiv ingmobilization alertfrom the IncidentCommander (IC)

A. Proceed to the incident location immediately.

B. Report the details of the spill to the FIC.SRT FIC via walkie-ta

4.

ReportingProcedure whenIncidentCommander (IC)Declares SmallSpill

A. Refer Section 5.1 and 5.2 of G.I. 2.104 for offshore spill.

B. Refer Section 5.1 and 5.2 of G.I. 2.104 for offshore spill.

C. Command and alert Spill Response Team Leader to mobilize the Spill ResponseTeam to clean-up the spill.

D. Provide updates to Proponent Manager as frequently as possible.

E. Instruct additional actions (including vessel operation) if necessary and practicable.

FIC

Refer Section 5.5.2 of G.I. 2.10offshore spill.

Refer Section 5.5.2 of G.I. 2.10offshore spill






12 / SPP&R / Appendix No.1 / Spill Response Strategy / Offshore and Onshore / Continued



5. Clean-UpProcedure

A. Gather Spill Response Team and ensure they are equipped with appropriate PPE.

B. Ensure up-to-date Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) are available for references.

C. Ensure appropriate spill kit/equipment with adequate quantity.

D. Direct actions for isolation or shutdown of power/pipeline/system/equipment ifnecessary to secure the source if necessary.

E. Direct actions to seal off the area and lead Spill Response Team in clean-upoperations.

F. Initiate clean-up operation as required in the MSDS.

G. Update the situation to FIC.

SRTL FIC via walkie-ta









6.

ReportingProcedure whenIC Declares

Medium or MajorSpill from the

jur isd ict ion ofRegional SpillResponseCoordinator

A. Refer Section 5.1 and 5.2 of G.I. 2.104 for offshore spill.

B. Refer Section 5.1 and 5.2 of G.I. 2.104 for offshore spill.

C. Specific support required. Activation of D&WO Emergency Command Centre (ECC)required.

D. Provide updates as frequently as possible via emergency channel.

E. Instruct additional actions if necessary and practicable.

F. Follow ups on requested support.

FIC

Refer Section 5.5.2 of G.I. 2.10

offshore spill.

Refer Section 5.15.2 of G.I. 2.104 foffshore spill

A. Gather D&WO ECC members, information and establish chronological event report.

B. Stand-by on any support or technical expertise required.

C. Support the Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinators and Global Oil Spill ResponseDirector if needed/wherever necessary.

D&WO ECC Appropriate RespGroup via phone emergency chann

7.During Medium orMajor Spill or ifspill overboardinto t he sea

The Regional Oil Spill Response Coordinators and Global Oil Spill Response Director will take over and be responsibcommanding/commencing response for a medium, major or spill response beyond the facility’s capabilities. The response manage

will be commenced as per the applicable Saudi Aramco G.I.s, procedures and/or Marine Department Global Oil Spill Contingency P









8.Spill responseand clean-upoperationsterminated

A. Call for termination of the spill response and clean-up operations, when the situationallows.

B. Stand down and demobilize Spill Response Team.

C. Coordinate Site Restoration activities:

1) Conduct inventory check on spill response kit/equipment2) Ensure all kit/equipment is replaced, cleaned, planned for service or repaired

when necessary3) Ensure all kit/equipment are promptly returned to storage

FIC via walkie-talkie SRTL

A. Commence site restoration activities as instructed by the FIC.

B. Ensure wastes resulting from the spill are properly disposed in accordance to theD&WO waste management procedure.

C. Ensure re-usable PPE is properly cleaned/decontaminated and placed back at theirstorage.

SRTL via walkie-talkie

FIC

DOE&CD shall coordinate medium/major spill incident investigation as per the applicable D&WO incident investigation procedure/Generate corrective actions, report and follow up on the closure of Corrective actions. Incident investigation may involve techexpertise from the operations, marine, EPD, LPD or local authority where necessary.







9. Post Spill

A. Initiate preliminary incident investigation and generate incident report for a small spillas per the applicable Saudi Aramco incident investigation procedure/G.I.s.

B. Involve in the incident investigation for a medium or major spill.

C. Implement corrective actions where necessary.

FIC Not Applicable

DOE&CD shall coordinate medium/major spill incident investigation as per the applicable D&WO incident investigation procedure/Generate corrective actions, report and follow up on the closure of Corrective actions. Incident investigation may involve techexpertise from the operations, marine, EPD, LPD or local authority where necessary.